SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Microprocessor Control System (TK 53080-2-OD) PDF

THERMO KING
SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp

Microprocessor Control System
TK 53080-2-OD (01/07)
DIAGNOSTIC MANUAL
PART 1 – (Sections 1-5)
Used on: SPECTRUM SB
Controller Software Revision C000
HMI Control Panel Software Revision 6510, 6610 or 6710
Copyright © 2007 Thermo King Corp. - Minneapolis, MN, USA

Printed in USA
Revision History – SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Diagnostic Manual
Full Release TK 53080-2-OD (01/07) Controller C000, HMI 6510/6610/6710
This manual is published for informational purposes only and the information so provided should not be
considered as all-inclusive or covering all contingencies. If further information is required Thermo King
Corporation should be consulted.
Sale of product shown in this manual is subject to Thermo King's terms and conditions including, but
not limited to, the THERMO KING LIMITED EXPRESS WARRANTY. Such terms and conditions are
available upon request. Thermo King's warranty will not apply to any equipment which has been "so
repaired or altered outside the manufacturer’s plants as, in the manufacturer’s judgment, to affect its
stability".
No warranties, express or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose or

merchantability, or warranties arising from course of dealing or usage of trade, are made regarding
the information, recommendations and descriptions contained herein. Manufacturer is not
responsible and will not be held liable in contract or in tort (including negligence) for any special,
indirect or consequential damages, including injury or damage caused to vehicles, contents or
persons, by reason of the installation of any Thermo King product or its mechanical failure.
SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Software Features
This manual contains information, data, procedures, and processes covered by the
following SR-2 software revisions:

and
HMI Control Panel Software Revision 6510 or 6610 or 6710
Earlier versions of software are similar but may not include or support all features as
shown in this manual.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Because not everyone is familiar with microprocessor based control systems, please take a few
minutes to read this page. It explains the content and structure of this manual. This will make it
easier for you to find the information you need.
x Section 1 - Safety information

This section contains the safety information for the SR-2 SPECTRUM control system. Read this material
carefully before working on the unit.
x Section 2 - Hardware Description

This section describes the SR-2 SPECTRUM control system hardware. It identifies and locates controllers,
relays, LED’s, fuses and other components and provides connector maps for all connectors.
x Section 3 - Software Description

This section discusses the operation of the SR-2 SPECTRUM control system software and programmable
features. Each menu and feature is discussed individually to illustrate how they are used.
x Section 4 - Operation
This section explains how to operate the SR-2 SPECTRUM control system. This information is referenced by
material in Section 5 Diagnostics.
x Section 5 - Diagnostics
This section explains how to diagnose units equipped with the SR-2 SPECTRUM control system. It includes
both Alarm Code Diagnostics and Other Symptom Diagnostics. This section will reference material in Section
4 Operation and Section 6 Service Procedures.
x Section 6 - Service Procedures

This section includes Service Procedures to assist the technician when servicing units equipped with the SR-
2 SPECTRUM control system. These procedures are referenced by the diagnostic routines in Section 5
Diagnostics.
x Section 7 - Service Information

This section offers Service Information on the basic component parts of the SR-2 SPECTRUM control
system. It includes a software revision history and a list of applicable bulletins.
x Section 8 – Refrigeration Service Information, Service Procedures and

Evaporator Diagrams
This section includes Refrigeration Service Procedures to assist the technician when servicing SR-2
SPECTRUM Multi-Temperature units.
x Section 9 – Schematics and Wiring Diagrams

This section includes the SR-2 SPECTRUM control system electrical schematics and unit wiring diagrams.
Control System Notes
The following procedures must be followed when working on units equipped with
microprocessor based control systems.
x Never use testers consisting of a battery and a light bulb to test circuits on any
microprocessor based equipment.
x The unit must be turned off before connecting or disconnecting the battery.
x Any time a graded sensor is replaced it must be calibrated as shown in Service

Procedure A15A Temperature Sensor Grade Calibration.
x Any time the Base Controller is replaced, these Service Procedures must be used:
A02A Recording Existing Programmable Feature Settings
A03A Replacement of the Base Controller or Interface Board
A04A Programmable Feature Setup
x Any time the Interface Board is replaced, Service Procedure A03A Replacement of the
Base Controller or Interface Board must be followed.
x Any time welding is to be done on the unit or vehicle Service Procedure A26A Welding
on Units Equipped with Microprocessors must be followed.
Section 1 – SR-2 SPECTRUM Safety Information
TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 1
General Practices .....................................................................................................................................................3

Auto Start/Stop .........................................................................................................................................................3
Refrigerant.................................................................................................................................................................4
Refrigerant First Aid .............................................................................................................................................4
Refrigeration Oil........................................................................................................................................................4
Refrigeration Oil First Aid ....................................................................................................................................4
Electrical Considerations ........................................................................................................................................5
Controller Service .................................................................................................................................................5
Welding ..................................................................................................................................................................5
Electrical Hazards.....................................................................................................................................................5
High Voltage ..........................................................................................................................................................5
High Voltage First Aid ..........................................................................................................................................5
Low Voltage...........................................................................................................................................................6
1-1
09 January 2007
1-2
09 January 2007
10. Use caution when working with refrigerant in a

GENERAL PRACTICES
closed or confined area with a limited air supply
1. Always wear goggles or safety glasses.
such as a trailer, truck, container or hold of a
Refrigerant and battery acid can permanently
ship. Refrigerant tends to displace air and can
damage the eyes.
cause oxygen depletion. This might result in
unconsciousness or death due to suffocation.
2. Never close the compressor discharge service
valve with the unit running. Never operate the
unit with the discharge service valve closed. AUTO START/STOP
CAUTION:
3. Keep hands, clothing and tools clear of fans and The unit can start and run automatically,
belts when the unit is running. and at any time, when the unit is turned
"on”. Units start automatically in both Cycle
4. Be sure gauge manifold hoses are in good
Sentry mode and Continuous mode. Be
condition. Never let them come in contact with
sure to turn the unit Microprocessor On/Off
belts, fans, pulleys or hot surfaces.
switch "off" before opening doors,
5. Never apply heat to a sealed refrigeration inspecting or working on any part of the
system or container. unit.
6. Refrigerants in the presence of an open flame SR-2 units have options that allow for
produce toxic gases. These gases are severe remote starting from a fully off state. Be
respiratory irritants capable of causing death. sure to turn the unit Microprocessor On/Off
switch "off" before opening doors,
7. Be sure all mounting bolts are the correct length
inspecting or working on any part of the
for the application and are securely tightened.
unit.
8. Use extreme caution when drilling holes in the

unit. Holes may weaken structural components. Some SR-2 electronic components are
Holes drilled into wiring can cause fire or connected directly to unswitched battery
explosion. Holes drilled into the refrigeration power. Always disconnect the unit starting
system will release refrigerant. battery before servicing the unit. All
connections and circuits labeled with a “2”
9. Use caution when working around exposed coil
prefix are directly connected to battery
fins. These fins can cause painful lacerations.
power.
1-3
09 January 2007
REFRIGERANT
At Thermo King we recognize the need to preserve Refrigerant First Aid
the environment and limit the potential harm to the
1. Warm the frozen area by immersing it in luke-
ozone layer that can result from allowing refrigerant
warm (not hot) water or by covering the area
to escape into the atmosphere.
with warm blankets.
We strictly adhere to a policy that promotes the

2. Obtain medical assistance as soon as possible.
recovery and limits the loss of refrigerant into the
atmosphere.
3. If refrigerant contacts the eyes, flush them with
water immediately and obtain medical assist-
When working on transport refrigeration systems, a
ance as soon as possible.
recovery process that prevents or minimizes
refrigerant loss to the atmosphere is required by law.
In addition, service personnel must be aware of the
appropriate European Union, national, federal, state REFRIGERATION OIL
and/or local regulations governing the use of Avoid contact with the eyes. Avoid prolonged
refrigerants and certification of technicians. contact with the skin or clothing. To prevent skin
irritation wash hands thoroughly after handling
When refrigerants are exposed to the atmosphere in refrigeration oil.
liquid form, they evaporate rapidly, freezing anything
they contact. If they contact the skin severe frostbite
can result. In the event of frostbite, the objectives of Refrigeration Oil First Aid
first aid are to protect the frozen area from additional In case of eye contact, flush immediately with water
injury and to warm it rapidly. for at least 15 minutes. Obtain medical assistance
as soon as possible.
1-4
09 January 2007
ELECTRICAL
2. Use tools with insulated handles that are in good
CONSIDERATIONS condition. Never hold metal tools in your hand if
exposed high voltage conductors are within
Controller Service reach.
Precautions must be taken to prevent electrostatic

3. Treat all wires as high voltage wires.
discharge when servicing the controller and related
components. A potential difference less than that
4. Never work alone on high voltage circuits.
required to create a small spark between a finger
Another person should be nearby in case of
and a doorknob can cause severe damage to solid
accident.
state components. Refer to the material in this
manual and the Electrostatic Discharge Training
Guide (TK 40282) for additional information.
High Voltage First Aid
Immediate action must be taken after a person has
Welding received an electrical shock. Medical attention
should be summoned as soon as possible.
Precautions must be taken before welding on the
unit. Refer to Service Procedure A26A in Section 6
The source of electricity must be immediately
of this manual for additional information.
removed, either by shutting down the power or
removing the victim from the source. If the victim
must be removed from a live circuit, pull the victim
ELECTRICAL HAZARDS off with a non-conductive material. Use the victim's
clothing, a rope, wood or your belt. After separating
High Voltage the victim from the power source, immediately check
Model 50 units with optional Electric Standby utilize for pulse and respiration. If a pulse is not present,
460, 380 or 230 volt, 3 phase AC power any time the start CPR (Cardio-Pulmonary Resuscitation)
unit is operating in Electric mode. This voltage immediately. If a pulse is present, respiration may
potential is also present any time the unit is be restored by mouth to mouth resuscitation. Obtain
connected to standby power. Extreme care must be emergency medical assistance as soon as possible.
used when working on the unit, as these voltages
are capable of causing serious injury or death.
1. When working on high voltage circuits, do not

make any rapid movements. Unplanned
movements can cause contact with high voltage.
1-5
09 January 2007
Low Voltage
Control circuits are typically 12 volts dc. This
voltage potential is not considered dangerous, but
the large amount of current available can cause
severe burns if shorted to ground.
Do not wear jewelry, watches or rings when working

on the unit. Severe burns can occur if these items
contact an electrical circuit.
Some SR-2 electronic components are connected

directly to unswitched battery power. Always
disconnect the unit starting battery before servicing
the unit. All connections and circuits labeled with a
“2” prefix are directly connected to battery power.
1-6
09 January 2007
Section 2 – SR-2 SPECTRUM Hardware Description
SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Block Diagram – 1 of 2 .................................................................................................. 5

SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Block Diagram – 2 of 2 .................................................................................................. 6
General Description ................................................................................................................................................ 7
Control System ........................................................................................................................................................ 7
Base Controller Software Identification................................................................................................................ 8
Multi-Temp Applications ..................................................................................................................................... 8
Control Components............................................................................................................................................... 9
SB Series Controls .................................................................................................................................................. 9
SLX Series Controls .............................................................................................................................................. 10
Base controller On/Off Switch ............................................................................................................................. 10
SB Series Units .................................................................................................................................................. 10
SLX Series Units ................................................................................................................................................ 10
Overcurrent Protection ......................................................................................................................................... 11
SR-2 HMI Control Panel ........................................................................................................................................ 12
HMI Control Panel Hardware Versions ............................................................................................................ 12
Real Time Clock ................................................................................................................................................. 12
Clock Power.................................................................................................................................................... 13
CargoWatch Datalogger .................................................................................................................................... 13
Programmable Settings..................................................................................................................................... 13
Fuse F10.............................................................................................................................................................. 13
Display Heater .................................................................................................................................................... 13
SR2 HMI Control Panel Connector Maps......................................................................................................... 14
HMI Control Panel Connector – arranged by use ....................................................................................... 14
SR-2 base Controller ............................................................................................................................................. 16
Base Controller Operation ................................................................................................................................ 16
Base Controller Hardware Versions ................................................................................................................ 16
Real Time Clock ................................................................................................................................................. 16
Programmable Features.................................................................................................................................... 16
SR2 Base controller Connector Maps ............................................................................................................. 17
J1 – 64 Pin Base controller/Interface Board Connector............................................................................. 17
J2 - 64 Pin Base controller/Interface Board Connector.............................................................................. 17
J3 - Base controller Sensor – arranged by use........................................................................................... 17
SR-2 Interface Board ............................................................................................................................................. 19
Interface Board Hardware Versions................................................................................................................. 20
Interface Board Fuse Size & Function ............................................................................................................. 20
Interface Board Relay Functions...................................................................................................................... 21
Power Side Logic ............................................................................................................................................... 21
Interface Board LED Functions ........................................................................................................................ 22
Smart FET Outputs ............................................................................................................................................ 23
Interface Board Jumpers................................................................................................................................... 24
Interface Board Jumpers................................................................................................................................... 24
J27.................................................................................................................................................................... 24
J101 Cold Start Jumper ................................................................................................................................. 24
J102.................................................................................................................................................................. 24
J103.................................................................................................................................................................. 24
Interface Board Connector Locations and Connector Maps ........................................................................ 25
Interface Board Connector Locations ............................................................................................................. 26
Interface Board Connector Usage.................................................................................................................... 27
2-1
02 February 2007
Interface Board Connector Usage.................................................................................................................... 27

J7 – 36 pin Interface Board to Main Harness Connector– arranged by pin number............................... 28
J6 - Electric Connector – arranged by pin number..................................................................................... 29
J8 - Remote Light Connector – arranged by pin number........................................................................... 29
J12 – Expansion Module CAN Bus Communication and Power Connector – arranged by pin number
.......................................................................................................................................................................... 29
Mini Mate-N-Lok Harness Connectors – shown from pin side of harness connector............................ 29
J13 – Remote Controller Power Control Connector – arranged by pin number ..................................... 30
J14 - HMI CAN Bus Communication and Power Connector– arranged by pin number ......................... 30
J9 – SERVICE WATCH RS-232 Serial Download Connector – arranged by pin number ........................ 31
J10 – Remote Controller Serial Connector – arranged by pin number .................................................... 31
J4 - Power Switch Connector – arranged by pin number .......................................................................... 32
J15 - Engine Connector – arranged by pin number.................................................................................... 32
Screw Terminal Power Connections............................................................................................................ 32
Complete SR2 Base Controller/interface board ................................................................................................. 33
Multi-Temp Expansion Module............................................................................................................................. 34
Expansion Module LED Functions................................................................................................................... 36
LED Functions ................................................................................................................................................ 36
Expansion Module Connector Maps................................................................................................................ 37
J1 35 pin Expansion Module Harness Connector– arranged by pin number .......................................... 37
J2 Expansion Module CAN Harness Connector – arranged by pin number............................................ 38
J 13 Expansion Module Fan Harness Connector – arranged by pin number .......................................... 39
Expansion Module Fan Harness Connectors – shown from pin side of harness connector ................ 39
Expansion Module Connections ...................................................................................................................... 39
Unit Sensors........................................................................................................................................................... 40
Air Temperature Sensors...................................................................................................................................... 40
Graded and Un-graded Air Temperature Sensors.......................................................................................... 40
Return Air Sensors ............................................................................................................................................ 40
Discharge Air Sensors ...................................................................................................................................... 40
Coil Temperature Sensor .................................................................................................................................. 41
Ambient Temperature Sensor .......................................................................................................................... 41
Spare Temperature Sensors ............................................................................................................................. 41
CargoWatch Sensors ............................................................................................................................................ 42
Unit Refrigeration Control Components ............................................................................................................. 43
Condenser Inlet Solenoid (CIS) ........................................................................................................................ 43
Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid (RTPS)....................................................................................................... 43
Purge Valve (PV) ................................................................................................................................................ 43
High Pressure Cutout (HPCO) .......................................................................................................................... 43
High Pressure Control Switch (HPCS) ............................................................................................................ 43
Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)............................................................................................................ 44
Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT) ................................................................................................................ 44
Damper Solenoid (DS) ....................................................................................................................................... 44
Damper Motor (DM)............................................................................................................................................ 44
Zone Refrigeration Control Components............................................................................................................ 45
Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) ............................................................................................................................... 45
Hot Gas Solenoid (HGS).................................................................................................................................... 45
Suction Line Solenoid (SLS)............................................................................................................................. 45
Engine Control Components................................................................................................................................ 46
Coolant Temperature Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 46
Coolant Level Sensor (CLS).............................................................................................................................. 46
2-2
02 February 2007
Magnetic Reed Switch ................................................................................................................................... 46

Oil Pressure Switch (LOPS).............................................................................................................................. 46
Oil Level Switch (OLS)....................................................................................................................................... 46
Flywheel Sensor (FW)........................................................................................................................................ 46
Intake Air Heater ................................................................................................................................................ 46
Starter Motor (SM).............................................................................................................................................. 47
Fuel Solenoid (FSH, FSP).................................................................................................................................. 47
High Speed Solenoid (HS)................................................................................................................................. 47
Alternator Frequency......................................................................................................................................... 47
Communication Ports ........................................................................................................................................... 48
CargoWatch Port................................................................................................................................................ 48
ServiceWatch Port ............................................................................................................................................. 48
Printer Port ......................................................................................................................................................... 48
Optional Electric Standby..................................................................................................................................... 49
Model 50 Features.............................................................................................................................................. 49
High Voltage Components ................................................................................................................................ 50
Heater Contactor HC.......................................................................................................................................... 50
Phase Detect Module......................................................................................................................................... 50
2-3
02 February 2007
2-4
02 February 2007
SPECTRUM MULTI-TEMP BLOCK DIAGRAM – 1 OF 2

SR2
HMI CONTROL PANEL
CargoWatch HMI Software Not all devices
CONNECTOR Supervisor Software shown here are
Keypad used on all
Display
Cargo Watch Logger
applications
PRINTER CONNECTOR Setpoint Buzzer
CAN
CONTROL DEVICES SR2 SENSORS

Intake Heater/Glow Plugs BASE CONTROLLER Zone 1 Return Air Temp
High Speed Solenoid Base Controller Software Zone 1 Discharge Air Temp
Fuel Solenoid Pull-In Inputs Zone 1 Evap Coil Temp
Fuel Solenoid Hold Outputs Ambient Air Temp
Starter Solenoid Service Watch Logger Engine Coolant Temp
Starter Engine Flywheel Sensor
Alternator Suction Press Transducer
Damper Solenoid SR2
Discharge Press Transducer
Damper Gear Motor/Heater INTERFACE BOARD Spare Sensor 1
Zone 1 Liquid Line Solenoid Fuses Spare Sensor 2
Condenser Inlet Solenoid F2 Unit Enable Switch Spare Sensor 3
Purge Valve F3 Fuel Pull-In and Starter Sol Fuel Level Sensor
Receiver Tank Pressure Sol F5 Intake Heater/Glow Plugs
F6 High Speed and Damper
F7 CAN Bus
uP ON/OFF SWITCH F8 CAN J12 SWITCHES
F9 CAN J14 Coolant Level Switch
F10 HMI Bypass Oil Level Switch
F11 Zone 1 Liquid Line Sol Low Oil Pressure Switch
ServiceWatch F12 CAN J13 High Pressure Cutout Switch
CONNECTOR F13 Remote Lights/Options High Pressure Switch
F15 On/Off Relay Zone 1 Door Switch
F20 Alternator Sense Fuel Level Switch
REMOTE LIGHT F25 HPCO
OPTION
Cold Start Jumper
ELECTRIC STANDBY
Board Mount Relays OPTION
REMOTE CONTROL RS
Phase Select Module
OPTION 232 LED Indicators Motor Contactor "A"
Motor Contactor "B"
CAN Preheat Buzzer Overload Relay
R:COM OPTION Electric Motor
Smart FETs Heater Contactor
Electric Heater
iBOX OPTION
CAN TO SR-2 MULTI-TEMP

SATELLITE MODEM EXPANSION MODULE
OPTION 05 December 2006 ON NEXT PAGE
2-5
02 February 2007
SPECTRUM MULTI-TEMP BLOCK DIAGRAM – 2 OF 2
ZONE 1
CONTROL DEVICES Not all devices
Hot Gas Solenoid shown here are
Suction Line Solenoid used on all
applications
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
REMOTE REMOTE
EVAPORATOR(S) EVAPORATOR(S)
SR2
MULTI-TEMP
EXPANSION MODULE
ZONE 2 LED Indicators
ZONE 3
SENSORS Smart FETs SENSORS
Return Air Temp Sensor Return Air Temp Sensor
Discharge Air Temp Sensor Discharge Air Temp Sensor
Evap Coil Temp Sensor Evap Coil Temp Sensor
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
SWITCHES SWITCHES
Door Switch Door Switch
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
CONTROL DEVICES CONTROL DEVICES
Fan Motor(s) 1 Fan Motor(s) 1
Fan Motor Speed Control Fan Motor Speed Control
Hot Gas Solenoid(s) Hot Gas Solenoid(s)
Liquid Line Solenoid(s) Liquid Line Solenoid(s)
Suction Line Solenoid(s) Suction Line Solenoid(s)
Drain Tube Heater(s) Drain Tube Heater(s)
Damper Solenoid (DE Only)
CAN TO SR-2 INTERFACE

BOARD ON PREVIOUS
05 December 2006
PAGE
2-6
02 February 2007
CAUTION
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Dangerous three phase AC power is present
The SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp controller is a
whenever the unit is operating in Electric mode
self-contained temperature control unit designed for
and whenever the unit is connected to external
trailer applications. Model 30 units are powered by
standby power. Voltages of this magnitude can
a diesel engine and Model 50 units are powered by
be lethal. Exercise extreme caution when
either the diesel engine or an external electric
working on the unit.
standby power source powering an electric motor.
The host unit mounts on the nose of the trailer. Heat
and defrost is by means of hot gas. Optional Zone 1 CONTROL SYSTEM
electric heat is available on Model 50 units (does not The SR-2 SPECTRUM Control System consists of
include DE units). the following main components:
x Base Controller On/Off Switch
The host unit is the main refrigeration unit. It also x HMI (Human Machine Interface) Control Panel
provides the evaporator coil, control solenoids, and x Base Controller
evaporator blower to serve Zone 1. The host unit x Interface Board
includes the engine, compressor, condenser coil,
x Unit Sensors and Transducers
control box, condenser blower and host unit sensors
x Refrigeration Control Components
and solenoid valves. It also includes the Zone 1
x Engine Control Components
evaporator coil, Zone 1 evaporator blower, Zone 1
x Communication Ports
temperature sensors and Zone 1 defrost damper.
x Multi-Temp Expansion Module
x Optional Electric Standby
If the unit is a DE unit, the host unit also includes the
Zone 2 evaporator coil, Zone 2 evaporator blower,
Zone 2 temperature sensors and Zone 2 defrost
damper.
If the unit is not a DE unit, Zone 2 (and Zone 3, if

present) are served by remote evaporators. The
remote evaporator assembly includes 12 VDC
electric fans, (2 fans on S-2 models and 3 fans on S-
3 models), the evaporator coil, three solenoid
valves, three temperature sensors, drain tube
heaters and a mounting enclosure. Two
evaporators can be connected in parallel in a remote
zone.
2-7
02 February 2007
IMPORTANT: When replacing a base controller,

BASE CONTROLLER
always verify software version to be sure the
SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION controller has not been flash loaded with a
different software version.
SR-2/C base controllers are physically the same for
both single temperature and multi-temperature
applications. However, the software for a single Multi-Temp Applications
temperature application is different than software for Factory Base Controllers loaded with Multi-Temp
a multi-temperature application. Base Controller Software C0xx will have yellow base
controller labels with black lettering. See Section 7
Single Temp Base Controller Software = B0xx for Service Parts numbers.
Multi-Temp Base Controller Software = C0xx
The base controller label color will identify which

version of software was factory installed in that
controller.
J1
ASS'Y P/N: 1E19308G01

S.P. P/N: 45-2013
S/N:XXXXXXXXXXX
REV. B000
C
J2
ASS'Y P/N: 1E19311G01

S.P. P/N: 45-2015
S/N:XXXXXXXXXXX
REV. B000 A ND
J3
2-8
02 February 2007
CONTROL COMPONENTS SB SERIES CONTROLS

The heart of the control system is the micro-
processor based controller. The interface board is The control panel shown below is used on
mounted on the base controller and is connected to SPECTRUM SR-2 SB units.
it by means of connectors J1 and J2. When
connected, the base controller and interface board
1 2
form a one-piece base controller/interface board,
(C/IB) assembly. The base controller/interface
CARGO WATCH SERVICE WATCH
3
board controls most host unit functions.
For multi-temp applications an expansion module, THERMO KING

(EM), is connected to the SR-2 base CONTINUOUS
2
35.8
TEMP F
controller/interface board via a controller area ON
-8. SET
-10 35 POINT
network (CAN) communication connection. The OFF

ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
expansion module provides the inputs and outputs

necessary to control the remote zone evaporators.
The expansion module is a “smart slave” device.
The “smart slave” designation indicates that the SmartReefer2
expansion module supports inputs and outputs and
contains a microprocessor and software. The EM
will only execute system control instructions from the
1 CargoWatch Download Port
SR-2 base controller. The expansion module must
2 ServiceWatch Download Port
be connected to the controller/interface board. It is
3 HMI Control Panel
not capable of stand-alone operation.
System conditions are displayed and operator

instructions are sent using the HMI Control Panel.
2-9
02 February 2007
SLX SERIES CONTROLS BASE CONTROLLER ON/OFF

SWITCH
The control panel shown below is used on
The Base Controller On/Off switch applies 12 volts
SPECTRUM SR-2 SLX units.
DC control power to the unit interface board at J4.
Main power to the controls is supplied by 15 amp
4
fuse F2.
1 IMPORTANT
THERMO KING
CONTINUOUS
The Base Controller On/Off switch disconnects
2
ON
-8.2 35.8
TEMP F
SET
power to the controller and most controller
-10 35 POINT
3 OFF
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU outputs. It does not disconnect HMI supply
power. The HMI is directly connected to the unit
starting battery.
SmartReefer2
IMPORTANT
Always turn the unit Base Controller On/Off
1 CargoWatch Download Port switch "off" before inspecting or working on any
2 Base Controller On/Off Switch part of the unit.
3 CargoWatch Printer Port
4 HMI Control Panel SB Series Units
The Base Controller On/Off switch is located on the
side of the control box. It can be reached by
opening the engine compartment doors.
MICRO-
PROCESSOR
ON
OFF
SLX Series Units

The Base Controller On/Off Switch is located on the
control panel between the data ports as shown
above.
2-10
02 February 2007
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
Overcurrent protection is provided by a fusible link
located in the positive battery cable. A 15 amp main
power fuse F2 is located in the “2A/2AB” circuit.
Outputs are protected by either a fuse or smart FET

(Field Effect Transistor). Fuses are located on the
interface board. Smart FETs halt current flow if an
overcurrent condition exists and resume normal
operation when current flow is within limits. Smart
FETs are not field repairable.
A polyswitch provides overcurrent protection for the

On/Off relay. The polyswitch will reset automatically
and is not field repairable.
2-11
02 February 2007
SR-2 HMI CONTROL PANEL

The display screen is used by the base controller to
The HMI (Human Machine Interface) Control Panel
provide visual prompts and information to the
consists of an LCD graphics display screen and
operator, such as operating mode, setpoint
eight touch sensitive keys. The four keys on the
temperatures, gauges, hourmeter readings and
sides of the display screen are used to turn the unit
operating conditions of the diesel engine or electric
on and off, initiate a manual defrost cycle, and select
motor. The HMI also contains the Cargo Watch Data
the desired operating mode. These keys are
Logger. The HMI and base controller communicate
designated “Hard” keys as their function is always
via a CAN (Controller Area Network) connection.
the same. The function of the four keys located
below the display screen change as required by the
Information can be displayed in 22 possible
current menu. These are known as software
languages. A single version of software can display
controlled keys or ‘soft keys’. The current function of
a maximum of 11 languages. For this reason, there
the key is controlled by software and displayed
are a total of 3 HMI software versions. Other than
directly above the key. The same HMI Control
languages support these versions are identical.
Panel is used on single temperature and multi-
If the HMI Control Panel is disconnected from the
temperature applications.
unit while the unit is running, the unit will shut down.
When the HMI Control Panel is reconnected the unit
The HMI contains a microprocessor and dedicated
will not restart until the On key is pressed.
software. The HMI is a message center and does
not directly control the unit operation. It
See Section 4 for complete HMI control panel
communicates to the controller via a controller area
operating details.
network (CAN) connection. The HMI displays
system operating data and sends operating requests
HMI Control Panel Hardware Versions
to the controller.
Multi-Temp applications require the use of an
HMI-2 Control Panel equipped with 6510 or later
software. See Section 7 of this manual for
THERMO KING
details and identification.
CONTINUOUS
-8.2 35.8
ON
TEMP F
SET
OFF
-10 35 POINT
Real Time Clock
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
The real time clock is located in the HMI Control

Panel. The time is supplied to the controller each
time the unit is turned on.
SmartReefer2
HMI Control Panel
2-12
02 February 2007
Clock Power unit is turned on. If the HMI Control Panel is

The HMI control panel features a capacitor to
changed, the current programmable feature settings
provide backup power to the real time clock. This
will be supplied to the replacement HMI Control
capacitor is capable of maintaining the clock for
Panel when the unit is turned on.
approximately two weeks with no power connected
to the unit. The capacitor is recharged any time the
Fuse F10
HMI control panel is installed in the unit and a
When interface board fuse F10 is installed in the
properly functioning starting battery is connected.
upper position, the On/Off keys on the HMI turn the
If the unit staring battery is disconnected for an
unit on and off. When fuse F10 is installed in the
extended period the clock setting should be checked
lower position the unit will start and run without the
when the unit is returned to service. If the HMI
HMI control panel. Do not operate the unit with the
Control Panel is changed the clock setting should
F10 fuse installed in the lower position unless
also be verified.
absolutely necessary. This feature is for emergency
bypass operation only.
CargoWatch Datalogger
The HMI control panel contains the CargoWatch
Display Heater
data logger. The CargoWatch data logger is a fully
The HMI control panel is equipped with a display
independent temperature logger. Up to six
heater. This heater is needed to make the display
temperature sensors and 3 digital inputs can be
visible in cold ambient temperatures.
connected to the datalogger. The CargoWatch
datalogger records unit setpoint, unit operating
The HMI has its own internal temperature sensor for
condition, and shutdown alarms.
the display heater. The heater is energized when
the unit is turned on and the ambient temperature is
SB Units: CargoWatch sensors are not included
below 29.4°F (-2°C). The heater turns off when the
with the unit.
temperature sensed by the internal sensor rises
above 37.4°F (+3°C). The heater draws from 1.4 to
SLX Units: Two cargo sensors are included with
1.7 amps when energized.
the unit. One is factory mounted in the return air
section. One is shipped loose and is intended for
The colder the ambient temperature the longer it will
mounting in the discharge air chute or unit discharge
take for the heater to make the display visible on a
air outlet.
cold startup. It may take 10-15 seconds for the
display to appear with very cold temperatures.
Programmable Settings
All controller programmable settings are held in non-
volatile memory in the base controller. The settings
are supplied to the HMI Control Panel each time the
2-13
02 February 2007
SR2 HMI Control Panel Connector Maps

HMI Control Panel Connector – arranged by use
Pin # Wire # Description
22 CANH - RED1 HMI Control Panel CAN bus
10 CANL-BLK HMI Control Panel CAN bus
06 8FP - BLK3 8XP power
12 BLK2-2 2P power
34 ON - RED2 HMI Control Panel On
33 OFF HMI-2 Control Panel Off
35 CH - RED3 HMI Control Panel chassis ground
23 DRAIN-WHT HMI Control Panel drain
21 RXD1 CargoWatch RS-232 communication port receive
32 TXD1 CargoWatch RS-232 communication port transmit
19 COM1 CargoWatch common
09 DPD1 CargoWatch Data Pack Detect Input
07 DPD3 CargoWatch Data Pack Detect Input
20 RXD2 CargoWatch Printer RS-232 communication port receive
31 TXD2 CargoWatch Printer RS-232 communication port transmit
29 D14 Printer port print initiate digital input.
30 TXD3 CargoWatch RS-232 communication port #3 receive
18 RXD3 CargoWatch RS-232 communication port #3 transmit
04 S1P CargoWatch sensor 1 positive
16 S1N CargoWatch sensor 1 negative
2-14
02 February 2007
HMI Control Panel J1 Connector – shown from pin side
12 1
23 13
35 24
2-15
02 February 2007
SR-2 BASE CONTROLLER Base Controller Operation

The base controller is the heart of the control
The SR-2 base controller is located on the rear
system. It consists of a base controller, software,
panel of the control enclosure. Two multi-pin
memory, inputs and outputs. The software provides
interface board connectors (J1 and J2) are located
the required operating and control functions and
on the front of the base controller. The J1 and J2
supports the Service Watch Data Logger.
connectors pass information and signals from the
controller to the interface board. A 35 pin sensor
Inputs are used to supply power and system
connector (J3) is located at the lower left of the base
information to the base controller. The base
controller. The J3 connector is used for sensor
controller uses the outputs to control the operation of
inputs. The J3 connector mates to the refrigeration
the unit components. The base controller has no
unit’s electrical harness.
user serviceable components.
Base Controller Hardware Versions

1
Multi-Temp applications require the use of an
SR-2/C Base Controller equipped with C0xx
J1
software. See Section 7 of this manual for
details and identification.
ASS'Y P/N: 1E19308G01

S.P. P/N: 45-2013
S/N:XXXXXXXXXXX
2 Real Time Clock

REV. B000
C
The real time clock is located in the HMI Control

J2
Panel. The time is supplied to the base controller
3 each time the unit is turned on. If the controller is
changed the clock setting will be automatically
ASS'Y P/N: 1E19311G01
S.P. P/N: 45-2015
S/N:XXXXXXXXXXX
REV. B000 A ND
J3 supplied to the base controller when the unit is
turned on.
SR2 Base Controller

Programmable Features
The J1 and J2 connectors mate the
base controller and interface board into a The settings of all programmable features are held
single Controller Interface Board assembly in non-volatile memory in the base controller. The
1 J1 Connector settings are supplied to the HMI Control Panel each
2 J2 Connector time the unit is turned on. If the controller is
3 J3 Sensor Connector – 35 Pin changed, all programmable features must be

reprogrammed.
2-16
02 February 2007
SR2 Base controller Connector Maps

J1 – 64 Pin Base controller/Interface Board Connector
Not serviceable
J2 - 64 Pin Base controller/Interface Board Connector

Not serviceable
J3 - Base controller Sensor – arranged by use

1 RTP Zone 1 return air temperature sensor positive (blue sensor wire)
2 RTN Zone 1 return air temperature sensor negative (brown sensor wire)
24 DTP Zone 1 discharge air temperature sensor positive (blue sensor wire)
13 DTN Zone 1 discharge air temperature sensor negative (brown sensor wire)
25 CTP Zone 1 coil temperature sensor positive (blue sensor wire)
14 CTN Zone 1 coil temperature sensor negative (brown sensor wire)
3 ATP Ambient temperature sensor positive (blue sensor wire)
4 ATN Ambient temperature sensor negative (brown sensor wire)
27 ST1P Spare 1 temperature sensor positive (blue sensor wire)
16 ST1N Spare 1 temperature sensor negative (brown sensor wire)
21 ST2P Spare 2 air temperature sensor positive (blue sensor wire)
32 ST2N Spare 2 air temperature sensor negative (brown sensor wire)
22 ST3P Spare 3 air temperature sensor positive (blue sensor wire)
33 ST3N Spare 3 air temperature sensor negative (brown sensor wire)
26 WTP Water temperature sensor positive (blue sensor wire)
15 WTN Water temperature sensor negative (brown sensor wire)
9 DPI Signal from discharge pressure transducer (white wire) (DPT)
10 SPI Signal from suction pressure transducer (white wire) (SPT)
12 8F Power for Optional Fuel Level Sensor
23 FUEL, FLL Optional fuel level sensor
35 FUEL N Optional fuel level sensor
2-17
02 February 2007
J3 Sensor Harness Connector – shown from pin side
12 1
23 13
35 24
2-18
02 February 2007
On SR-2 multi-temp applications the receiver tank

SR-2 INTERFACE BOARD
pressure solenoid (RTPS), purge valve (PV),
The interface board provides the interface between
condenser inlet solenoid (CIS) and liquid line
the controller and the host unit components such as
solenoid for Zone 1 (LLS1) are also controlled
solenoids valves, and motor contactors. It also
directly from the SR-2 Interface Board. All other
provides overcurrent and short circuit protection for
Zone 1 functions as well as the remote evaporators
the controls and components.
are controlled by the Multi-Temp Expansion module.
The controller controls the operation of the unit J4 F2

LED7 CAN 3 CAN 2 CAN 1
J14 J13 J12
through the control relays and Smart FETs on the F13
REMOTE LIGHT
15A
K5 J8
2A
ON/OFF
interface board and expansion module. The relays K4
SWITCH
F10
F9 F12 F8 2A
3A 5A 5A
control power to the high amperage loads. The
10A
LED4 F7 LED23 K9
J27 J6
ELECTRIC
LED26
K3
RS232-1 RS232-2
Smart FETs control power to the lower amperage J9 J10
15A
F6
LED5
LED6
J102 J103 F11
loads. Each relay is individually fuse protected. The J15
J101 K1 F4
10A
29 7D F15
Smart FETs are self-protecting A LED next to each
GM1
8
DF
F12
relay or Smart FET is illuminated when the relay or GM2 8S
LED21
K8
LED25 LED17
FET is energized by the base controller. With relays 8D 8DP
LED24 1 LED18
LED22
LED19
the LED lights only when the relay coil is energized K6 K7
LED20
and the relay contacts have transferred to the J23

CH
energized position. J24 F3
40A
2 LED8
LED9
2 LED10
LED11
The interface board is electrically connected directly LED3
F20 2A F25
60A
onto the base controller and is secured with
7.5A
LED30
F5
LED27
J25 2A H
mounting hardware. The controller to interface K2
3 LED29
LED28
J26
J3
board electrical connections are made through the
1
J1 and J2 connectors, The main components on the

J7
interface board are the control relays, fuses, status

LEDs to indicate relay or output states, preheat
buzzer, jumpers, current shunt, smart FETs, and the
SR2 Interface Board
wiring harness connectors. The only user
serviceable components on the interface board are
1 J1 Connector (to base controller J1)
the fuses and jumpers.
2 J2 Connector (to base controller J2)
3 J7 36 Pin Harness Connector
On all SR-2 applications the engine functions,
defrost damper and refrigeration functions are
controlled directly from the SR-2 Interface Board.
2-19
02 February 2007
Interface Board Hardware Versions

Multi-Temp applications require the use of an Note 2 - The F5 preheat fuse is a “slow blow” type.
Service Part # 45-2148 Interface Board. See It is designed for use with the Yanmar engine air
Section 7 of this manual for details and preheater. Always replace the fuse with the TK
identification. specified fuse. The fuse is not included with Service

Parts controllers.
Interface Board Fuse Size & Function

Fuse F10 There are three in-line fuse clips that
Fuse Size Function
allow for two configurations of the F10 fuse. The
F2 15A Power to On/Off Switch
upper position is the normal position. When fuse
F3 40A Fuel Sol Pull-In/Starter Circuit
F10 is installed in the upper position, control power
F4 None No fuse - all Bosch and TK
is routed to the K9 On/Off Relay contacts. The
2A alternators
On/Off keys on the HMI control panel energize and
2A fuse - all Prestolite alternators
de-energize the K9 On/Off Relay. When the K9
(NOTE 1)
On/Off Relay is energized power is supplied through
F5 60A Preheat Circuit (NOTE 2)
the normally open K9 contacts to turn the controller
F6 15A Damper and High Speed Circuits
on.
F7 2A 8XP Circuit – Controller On
Feedback to HMI
When fuse F10 is installed in the lower position
F8 5A 2A power to CAN Connector J12
power bypasses the K9 On/Off relay contacts and
F9 5A 2A power to CAN Connector J14 the unit will start and run without the HMI control
F10 10A 8X Power - install in upper position panel. Do not operate the unit with the F10 fuse
F11 10A Zone 1 LLS installed in the lower position unless absolutely
F12 5A 2A power to CAN Connector J13 necessary.
F13 2A 8FC Circuit (Remote Status IMPORTANT
Light/Optional Power) If fuse F10 is installed in the lower position the
F15 P/S On/Off Relay unit will start and run. The HMI Control Panel On
F20 2A Alternator Sense and Off keys will function. The Off key will turn
F22 Not Used the unit off if Fuse F10 is in the lower position,
F23 Not Used but the controller will remain powered up.
F25 7.5 HPCO Circuit
F15 The device identified as F15 is a poly switch.
NOTE 1 - The F4 must be in place for Prestolite This overcurrent device resets automatically and is
style alternators to charge. It must be removed for not replaceable.
Bosch style alternators. Service Parts interface
boards are shipped without the F4 fuse.
2-20
02 February 2007
Interface Board Relay Functions Power Side Logic

Important: Do not attempt to remove the relays The outputs listed below supply battery voltage to
from the interface board. energize the device rather than completing the path
Relay Function to ground. These outputs are protected by a Smart
K1 Run Relay FET.
K2 Preheat Relay
K3 High Speed Relay Output Function
K4 Damper Relay HG / LV2 Hot Gas Solenoid
K5 Diesel/Electric Relay LV1 Loader Valve 1
K6 Fuel Solenoid Pull-In Relay EXC Alternator Excite
K7 Starter Relay WV Water Valve
K8 Zone-1 Liquid Line Solenoid Relay LQI Liquid Injection Valve
K9 On/Off Relay LLS Liquid Line Solenoid

CIS Condenser Inlet Solenoid
RTPS Receiver Tank Press Sol
PV Purge Valve
IMPORTANT: All other outputs energize the

associated device by completing the path to chassis
ground. When diagnosing output circuits be sure to
consider if the output is supplying battery voltage or
chassis ground.
2-21
02 February 2007
Interface Board LED Functions

The LED is illuminated when the associated circuit NOTE 1 The Status LED flashes once per second
output is energized. To identify LEDs see page 2- when the base controller is powered and operating
26. normally. The Status LED flashes several times per
LED # Function second during a flash load. The Status LED is on

without flashing during reboot and when the base
LED3 K2 Preheat Circuit
controller is under test. The Status LED flashes
LED4 K4 Damper Circuit
twice within 1 second followed by 1 second off if a
LED5 K3 High Speed Circuit
CAN communication error is present.
LED6 K1 Run Relay Circuit
LED7 K5 Diesel/Electric Relay
NOTE 2 The ETV LEDs may be illuminated even
LED 8 Condenser Inlet Solenoid Circuit
though the ETV outputs are not used on multi-temp
LED 9 Receiver Tank Pressure Sol Circuit
applications.
LED10 Hot Gas Bypass Valve Circuit / Loader
Valve 2 (not used)
LED11 Purge Valve Solenoid Circuit
LED17 Loader Valve 1 (not used)
LED18 Alternator Excite
LED19 Liquid Injection Valve Circuit (not used)
LED20 Water Valve (not used)
LED21 Status – (NOTE 1)
LED22 K8 Zone 1 Liquid Line Solenoid
LED23 K9 On/Off Circuit
LED24 K6 Fuel Solenoid Pull-In Circuit
LED25 K7 Starter Circuit
LED26 Future Use
LED27 ETV – (NOTE 2)
2-22
02 February 2007
Smart FET Outputs

A Smart FET is a self protecting output device used
for the functions shown in the table below. If an
overcurrent condition occurs, the Smart FET will turn
off until the overcurrent condition no longer exists. It
will then resume normal operation. A fuse is not
required.
Output Function
EVA, EVB, EVC, EVD ETV Outputs
HG / LV2 Hot Gas Sol or
Loader Valve 2
ALPC Alarm Light
ALM Alarm Light
LV1 Loader Valve 1
EXC Alternator Excite
WV Water Valve
LQI Liquid Injection Valve
LLS Liquid Line Solenoid
GM1, GM2 Damper Gear Motor
(NOTE 1)
CIS Condenser Inlet Solenoid

RTPS Receiver Tank Press Sol
PV Purge Valve
NOTE 1- Gear motor circuitry not present on all

relay boards.
2-23
02 February 2007
Interface Board Jumpers J27

This jumper is the CAN bus terminator. It should be
Four sets of jumper pins are located on the interface
left in the position shown.
board. Each set consists of a jumper and three pins.
A graphic next to each set of pins shows the usual
J101 Cold Start Jumper
jumper placement. For normal operation, the jumper Jumper J101 performs a base controller cold start to
must be installed as shown by these graphics. To reset the base controller to default settings. To
change the setting, remove the jumper and place it perform a cold start, turn the unit off and place the
as shown on the next page. Base Controller Power Switch in the off position.
This switch is located on the side of the control box
Jumper Functions (SB units) or on the front control panel (SLX units),
Jumper Function Move the J101 pin jumper from the center and top
J27 Not Used pins to the cold start position on the center and
J101 Cold Start Jumper bottom pins. Place the Base controller Power
J102 Not Used Switch in the on position and turn the unit on by
J103 Not Used pressing the HMI Control Panel On key. A cold start
has been performed and all sensor grades and unit
programmable settings have been returned to the
default setting. Alarm Code 74 will be set to indicate
that the controller has been reset.
F9 F12 F8
3A 3A 3A
After the cold start has been performed, reverse the
J27
RS232-1 RS232-2 process and place the J101 jumper back in the
J9 J10
normal position on the center and top pins. Failure
J103 to do so will result in a cold start every time the unit

J102
J101 is turned on. See Service Procedure A07A
Performing a Cold Start for additional details.
J102
J101 Cold Start jumper Not Used
Shown in the normal position
J103
Not Used
2-24
02 February 2007
Interface Board Connector Locations and Connector Maps

Not serviceable
Not serviceable
2-25
02 February 2007
Interface Board Connector Locations
3 2 1 8
J4 F2
4
J14 J13 J12
F13
REMOTE LIGHT
15A
K5 J8
5
2A
ON/OFF
SWITCH
F10
K4 F9 F12 F8 2A
3A 5A 5A
10A
LED4 F7 LED23 K9
J27 J6
ELECTRIC
LED26
K3
RS232-1 RS232-2
J9 J10
15A
F6
LED5
LED6
J102 J103 F11
J101 K1 F4
J15
10A
29 7D F15
GM2 GM1
8
DF
F12
LED21
8S
LED25
6 7 K8
LED17
9 8D 8DP
LED24 LED18
LED22 13
LED19
LED20
K6 K7
J23
40A LED8 CH
J24 F3 LED9
2 LED10
LED11
11 LED3
F20 2A F25
60A
7.5A
LED30
F5
LED27
J25 2A H
K2
10 LED29
LED28
J26
J3
12 1
14
J7
2-26
02 February 2007
Interface Board Connector Usage

See the following pages for individual connector maps.
Number Connector Circuit

1 J12 CAN connection to Expansion Module
2 J13 CAN connection to optional Remote Control Panel
3 J14 CAN connection to HMI Control Panel
4 J8 Connections to Remote Indicator Light
5 J6 Connections to optional Electric Standby
6 J9 RS-232 Serial connection to ServiceWatch connector
7 J10 RS-232 Serial connection to optional Remote Control Panel
8 J4 Connections to Base Controller On/Off Switch
9 J15 Connections to unit engine (and defrost gear motor – if equipped)
10 J7 Connections to unit Main Harness
11 J24 “2” circuit to fuse link
12 J25 “2A” circuit to alternator
13 J27 “CH” chassis ground to unit ground plate
14 J26 “H” circuit to air intake heater
2-27
02 February 2007
J7 – 36 pin Interface Board to Main Harness Connector– arranged by pin number

1 LLS Power to energize Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS)
2 2 Power to the alternator sense circuit.
3 CIS Power to energize Condenser Inlet Solenoid (CIS)
4 RTPS Power to energize Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid (RTPS)
6 PV Power to energize Purge Valve (PV)
13 SPP Power to suction pressure transducer (red wire) (SPT)
14 DPP Power to discharge pressure transducer (red wire) (DPT)
15 CLP Power to coolant level sensor (red wire) (CLS)
16 CLS Signal from coolant level sensor (white wire) (CLS)
17 PHPCO To high pressure cutout switch (HPCO)
18 HPCO To high pressure cutout switch (HPCO)
19 HPCS To high pressure cut-in switch (HPCS)
20 DSP Power to the optional door switch (red wire) (DS)
21 DS Signal from the optional door switch (white wire) (DS)
25 SPN Ground to suction pressure transducer (black wire) (SPT)
26 DPN Ground to discharge pressure transducer (black wire) (DPT)
28 20B To engine low oil pressure switch (LOPS)
29 OLS To engine low oil level switch (OLS)
33 EXC Power to the alternator excite circuit
34 W To the alternator “W” circuit
35 FS1 To flywheel sensor (FW)
36 FS2 To flywheel sensor (FW)
J7 Interface Board Harness Connector – shown from pin side
12 1
13
24
36 25
2-28
02 February 2007
J6 - Electric Connector – arranged by pin number

1 7E To 7EA terminal on phase select module (PSM)
2 EOL To normally closed contact pin 95 on overload relay (OLR)
3 8 To 8 terminal on phase select module (PSM)
4 CHHV To chassis ground
5 ER To ER terminal on phase select module (PSM)
6 26E Power to heater contactor (HC)
J8 - Remote Light Connector – arranged by pin number

1 ALM To white wire on remote light option
2 8FC To red wire on remote light option
3 ALPC To black wire on remote light option
4 8FC Option Power
J12 – Expansion Module CAN Bus Communication and Power Connector – arranged by pin number
Pin Wire Description
Number Number
1 CANL-BLU To expansion module J2 pin 1
2 CANH-GRE To expansion module J2 pin 2
3 SHLD To expansion module J2 pin 3
4 ON - RED To expansion module J2 pin 4
5 2A - BLK To expansion module J2 pin 5
6 8XP-YEL To expansion module J2 pin 6
7 Not Used
8 CH - ORA Chassis ground to expansion module J2 pin 8
Mini Mate-N-Lok Harness Connectors – shown from pin side of harness connector
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
3 4 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
4 Pin Connectors 6 Pin Connectors 8 Pin Connectors
2-29
02 February 2007
J13 – Remote Controller Power Control Connector – arranged by pin number

Number Number
1 CANL Not Used
2 CANH Not Used
3 SHLD Not Used
4 ON - ORN To Remote Controller Panel Pin 4
5 2A -BLU To Remote Controller Panel Pin 1
6 8XP Not Used
7 None Not Used
8 DRAIN/CH/GRE Chassis ground to Remote Controller Panel Pin 2
J14 - HMI CAN Bus Communication and Power Connector– arranged by pin number
Number Number
1 CANL - BLK1 To HMI Control Panel pin 1

2 CANH - RED1 To HMI Control Panel pin 22
3 DRAIN-WHT To HMI Control Panel pin 23
4 ON - RED2 To HMI Control Panel pin 34
5 2A - BLK2 To HMI Control Panel pin 12
6 8XP - BLK3 To HMI Control Panel pin 6
7 OFF Not Used
8 CH - RED3 Chassis ground to HMI Control Panel pin 25
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
3 4 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
2-30
02 February 2007
J9 – SERVICE WATCH RS-232 Serial Download Connector – arranged by pin number

1 RXD-RED1 To J52 controller download connector pin A
2 TXD-BLK2 To J52 controller download connector pin B
3 COM-BLK1 To J52 controller download connector pin C
4 DPD-RED2 To J52 controller download connector pin E
J10 – Remote Controller Serial Connector – arranged by pin number

1 RXD - BLK To Remote Controller Panel Pin 7
2 TXD - RED To Remote Controller Panel Pin 8
3 None Not Used
4 REM - ON - BRN To Remote Controller Panel Pin 6
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
3 4 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
2-31
02 February 2007
J4 - Power Switch Connector – arranged by pin number

1 2AB 2AB Power
2 8 8 Power
J15 - Engine Connector – arranged by pin number

1 8DP Power to energize fuel solenoid pull-in coil (white wire) (FSP)
2 8S Power to energize starter solenoid (SS)
3 8DF Not Used on Trailer Applications
4 7D Power to energize high speed solenoid (HS)
5 8D Power to energize fuel solenoid hold coil (red wire) (FSH)
6 GM2 SL gear-motor applications. Only on SLX Interface Board
7 GM1 SL gear-motor applications. Only on SLX Interface Board
8 29 Power to energize damper solenoid (DS)
Screw Terminal Power Connections

Terminal Wire Description
Number Number
2 RED “2” circuit to fuse link
2A 2A “2A” circuit to alternator
H H “CH” chassis ground to unit ground plate
CH CHP “H” circuit to air intake heater
2-32
02 February 2007
COMPLETE SR2 BASE CONTROLLER/INTERFACE BOARD

J4 F2
J14 J13 J12
F13
REMOTE LIGHT
15A
K5 J8
2A
ON/OFF
SWITCH
F10
K4 F9 F12 F8 2A
3A 5A 5A
10A
LED4 F7 LED23 K9
J27 J6
ELECTRIC
LED26
K3
RS232-1 RS232-2
J9 J10
15A
F6
LED5
LED6
J102 J103 F11
J101 K1 F4
J15
10A
29 7D F15
J1
GM2 GM1
8
DF
F12
LED21
8S
K8
LED25 LED17
8D 8DP
LED24 LED18
LED22
LED19
LED20
K6 K7
ASS'Y P/N: 1E19308G01 REV. B000
S.P. P/N: 45-2013
C
S/N:XXXXXXXXXXX
J23
40A LED8 CH
J24 F3 LED9
2 LED10
LED11
LED3
J2
F20 2A F25
60A
7.5A
LED30
F5
LED27
J25 2A H LED29
K2
LED28
J26
J3
1
ASS'Y P/N: 1E19311G01
S.P. P/N: 45-2015
S/N:XXXXXXXXXXX
REV. B000 A ND
J3
J7
2-33
02 February 2007
MULTI-TEMP EXPANSION
1
MODULE
The expansion module is a hardware module that
allows for operation of up to three temperature
controlled zones. The module provides the interface
5
between the base controller and the zone 1, zone 2
and zone 3 multi-temperature components such as
4
sensors, solenoids, valves, and fan motors. It also
provides overcurrent and short circuit protection for
the associated circuits. The EM features 100% solid
2
state outputs All outputs are SmartFet outputs.
All engine functions and some of the host unit valves

are controlled by the base controller. This includes
Top View
the receiver tank pressure solenoid (RTPS), purge
valve (PV) and condenser inlet solenoid (CIS). In 2 3 4 5
addition the liquid line solenoid for Zone 1 (LLS1) is
controlled directly from the base controller, and the 1 12
13 23 4 3 2 1
Zone 1 return air temperature sensor, Zone 1 8 7 6 5
24 35
discharge air temperature sensor, and Zone 1

1 2 3 4 5 6
evaporator coil temperature sensor are input directly
to the base controller. All other Zone 1 devices and
all remote evaporators are controlled by the SR-2
Expansion module. End View
SR-2 Expansion Module
1 Expansion Module Status LED’s

2 J1 35 Pin Expansion Module Connector
3 J13 6 Pin Evaporator Fan Connector
4 2A Power Connection Studs (qty 2)
5 J2 8 Pin CAN Connection to the
Interface Board J12 CAN connector
2-34
02 February 2007
Load power is supplied to the expansion module by

the alternator via the two 2A terminal studs.
Expansion module controller power is supplied via
the 8 pin J2 CAN connector. The expansion module
also communicates with the base controller via this
CAN bus connection. All remote zone input and
solenoid output functions, (except the Zone 1 LLSV),
are connected via the expansion module J1 35 pin
connector harness. The expansion module J13 fan
connector has 6 remote evaporator fan motor
outputs for powering up to 12 remote fan motors.
Each output is capable of operating two fans. The
Expansion Module has three outputs for controlling
evaporator fan speed in up to 3 zones. Each output
will control the fan speed for all motors in a zone.
See the connector maps on the following pages for
additional detail.
There are no user replaceable components on the

Multi-Temp Expansion module. To check expansion
module operation see Service Procedure A01D in
Section 6.
2-35
02 February 2007
Expansion Module LED Functions

Output LEDs are provided to indicate outputs that LED Functions
are energized. These LED indicators are located in LED # Function

the corner of the expansion module body. They are LED 1 Fan Output # 1 / Zone-2 Damper
defined by the table below. The LED is illuminated Solenoid.
when the associated circuit output is energized. LED 2 Fan Output # 3
LED 3 Fan Output # 5
1 2 3 LED 7 Zone 1 Drain Tube Heater Output
(NOTE 1)
LED 9 Zone 3 Drain Tube Heater Output
LED 10 Zone 1 Hot Gas Solenoid Output
7 8 9
10 11 12 LED 12 Zone 3 Hot Gas Solenoid Output

LED 13 Zone 1 Suction Line Solenoid Output
13 14 15 LED 15 Zone 3 Suction Line Solenoid Output
LED 16 Status – Flashes once per second
16 17 18
when the base controller is powered
and operating normally.
Flashes several time per second when

flash loading. Is on without flashing
Green Status LED
(All other LEDs are red) during reboot and when under test.
Flashes twice within one second
followed by one second off if a CAN
communication error is present.
LED 17 Zone 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Output
NOTE 1 – The Zone 1 drain tube heater output is
not used on trailer units.
2-36
02 February 2007
Expansion Module Connector Maps

J1 35 pin Expansion Module Harness Connector– arranged by pin number
1 DH3 Zone 3 Drain Tube Heater Output
2 CH Chassis Ground
4 Unused
5 LLS2 Zone 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Output
6 LLS3 Zone 3 Liquid Line Solenoid Output
7 HGS1 Zone 1 Hot Gas Solenoid Output
10 SLS1 Zone 1 Suction Line Solenoid Output
13 2AF1 2A Circuit Output #1 Polyswitch Fused
14 2AF2 2A Circuit Output #2 Polyswitch Fused
15 DTN2 Zone 2 Discharge Air Temperature Sensor (-) Input
16 RTN2 Zone 2 Return Air Temperature Sensor (-) Input
17 CTN2 Zone 2 Evaporator Coil Temperature Sensor (-)Input
18 DTN3 Zone 3 Discharge Air Temperature Sensor (-)Input
19 RTN3 Zone 3 Return Air Temperature Sensor (-)Input
20 CTN3 Zone 3 Evaporator Coil Temperature Sensor (-)Input
21 SC1 Zone 1 Fan Speed Control Output
25 Unused
~ continued next page ~
2-37
02 February 2007
J1 35 pin Expansion Module Harness Connector– arranged by pin number - continued
26 DTP2 Zone 2 Discharge Air Temperature Sensor (+)Input

27 RTP2 Zone 2 Return Air Temperature Sensor (+)Input
28 CTP2 Zone 2 Evaporator Coil Temperature Sensor (+)Input
29 DTP3 Zone 3 Discharge Air Temperature Sensor (+)Input
30 RTP3 Zone 3 Return Air Temperature Sensor (+)Input
31 CTP3 Zone 3 Evaporator Coil Temperature Sensor (+)Input
32 DSP2 Zone 2 Door Switch Power Output
33 DS2 Zone 2 Door Switch Input
34 DSP3 Zone 3 Door Switch Power Output
35 DS3 Zone 3 Door Switch Input
J1 Expansion Module Harness Connector – shown from pin side
12 1
23 13
35 24
J2 Expansion Module CAN Harness Connector – arranged by pin number

Number Number
1 CANL-BLU To Interface Board CAN Connector J12
2 CANH-GRE To Interface Board CAN Connector J12
3 SHLD To Interface Board CAN Connector J12
4 ON-RED To Interface Board CAN Connector J12
5 2A-BLK To Interface Board CAN Connector J12
6 8XP-YEL To Interface Board CAN Connector J12
7 Unused
8 CH-ORA To Interface Board CAN Connector J12
2-38
02 February 2007
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
J 13 Expansion Module Fan Harness Connector – arranged by pin number

Number Number
1 FM21 Zone 2 Fan Motor Output #1 (Zone 2 damper solenoid on DE units)
2 FM22 Zone 2 Fan Motor Output #2
Expansion Module Fan Harness Connectors – shown from pin side of harness connector
6 5 4 3 2 1
Expansion Module Connections
1 12
13 23 J1 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5
J2
24 35
1 2 3 4 5 6
J13
2-39
02 February 2007
Un-graded sensors are used to measure the

UNIT SENSORS
evaporator coil temperature and ambient
The sensors monitor air temperatures at various
temperature, since these temperatures are not as
points in the system, as well as the engine oil
critical as the return and discharge air temperatures.
pressure, engine oil level, engine coolant level,
The host unit and each remote zone use both return
engine coolant temperature, engine speed,
air and discharge air sensors.
alternator frequency and fuel level. Host unit
sensors are connected to the base controller via the
Do not replace a graded sensor with an un-graded
J3 Sensor Connector. Remote evaporator
sensor.
temperature sensors are connected to the
expansion module J1 connector.
Return Air Sensors
This sensor monitors the temperature of the air
AIR TEMPERATURE returning to the evaporator coil of the host unit or
remote evaporator. The sensor is located in the
SENSORS
return air flow. The host unit sensor is connected
Graded and Un-graded Air Temperature directly to the base controller connector J3. The
Sensors remote evaporator sensors are connected via the
Single return and discharge air temperature sensors expansion module connector J1. This sensor is a
are used in all zones including the host zone. The graded sensor and must be replaced with graded
Return Air and Discharge Air sensors are graded sensor. The base controller must be calibrated to
sensors. Sensor grading allows maximum accuracy the respective grade of the installed sensor in order
without the need for ice water calibration. The to operate properly.
sensor grade (from 1L through 9H) is stamped on
the sensor and must be entered into the base Discharge Air Sensors
controller when a sensor is changed, in order to This sensor monitors the temperature of the air
properly calibrate the sensor for accurate leaving the evaporator coil or the host unit or remote
temperature readings. If the grade is not changed evaporator. The sensor is located in the evaporator
from the factory setting of 5H, then Alarm Code 92 discharge air path. The host unit sensor is
Sensor Grades Not Set will occur. Always update connected directly to the base controller via
the sensor grade nameplate when graded sensors connector J3. The remote evaporator sensors are
are changed. The nameplate is mounted on the connected via the expansion module connector J1.
side of the control box. These sensors are graded sensors and must be
replaced with graded sensors. The base controller
must be calibrated to the respective grade of the
installed sensor, in order to operate properly.
2-40
02 February 2007
Coil Temperature Sensor

This sensor monitors the temperature of the
evaporator coil. The sensor is located on the
evaporator coil header plate. The host unit sensor is
connected directly to the base controller via
connector J3. The remote evaporator sensors are
connected to the Expansion Module connector J1.
This is an un-graded sensor. It is connected via the
CTP and CTN wires.
Ambient Temperature Sensor

This sensor monitors the ambient air temperature.
The sensor is located in the host unit adjacent to the
condenser coil and is connected directly to the base
controller via connector J3. This is an un-graded
sensor. It is connected to the base controller via the
ATP and ATN wires.
Spare Temperature Sensors

These three optional sensors monitor temperatures
as selected by the customer. These graded sensors
are installed as requested by the customer. They
are connected to the base controller at J3 via the
STxP and STxN wires, where ‘x’ is the sensor
number.
Graded Sensor
Un-graded Sensor
with Yellow Shrink Tube Marker
2-41
02 February 2007
CARGOWATCH SENSORS
The CargoWatch Data Logger is internal to the HMI
Control Panel. This Data Logger conforms to
European standard EN12830. The Data Logger
supports up to 6 temperature sensors and 3 digital
inputs.
The sensors used for the CargoWatch Data Logger

are thermistor-type sensors that differ from the
sensors used for unit control. The CargoWatch
sensors are connected directly to the HMI Control
Panel.
IMPORTANT
The CargoWatch sensors ARE NOT inter-
changeable with the unit temperature sensors.
These thermistor sensors change resistance as the

temperature changes. Resistance values can be
measured using a high quality ohmmeter and
compared to a table to directly determine the
temperature. Note that these resistance values only
apply to CargoWatch sensors.
CargoWatch Sensor
No Shrink Tubing
For testing and replacement of the CargoWatch

Sensors see Service Procedure D04A Checking
CargoWatch Sensors.
2-42
02 February 2007
UNIT REFRIGERATION Purge Valve (PV)

The purge valve is energized (open) during heat and
CONTROL COMPONENTS defrost mode. This is a normally closed valve. The
The refrigeration system controls are used to control purge valve is controlled by an output on the base
the operation of the refrigeration system as required controller and interface board.
by the base controller. The base controller
determines these requirements by considering the The following components are also located in the
setpoint, the software, the setting of programmable host unit.
features and the information supplied by the
sensors. For additional information see Section 8 of High Pressure Cutout (HPCO)
this manual. The high pressure cutout is located on the discharge
manifold of the four cylinder compressors. This
These three valves are located in the condenser switch monitors the discharge pressure at the
section of the host unit. compressor. The switch is closed with normal
pressures and opens with excessive pressures. The
Condenser Inlet Solenoid (CIS) switch will open and close at pressures determined
This valve controls the flow of refrigerant to the by the refrigerant used in the unit. It opens on high
condenser. This solenoid is typically energized discharge pressure to shut the unit down to prevent
(closed) when any compartment is operating in heat damage.
or defrost mode. This is a normally open valve. The
condenser inlet solenoid is controlled by an output High Pressure Control Switch (HPCS)
on the base controller and interface board. The High Pressure Control Switch is a pressure
switch that opens at 312 psig and re-closes at 200
Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid (RTPS) psig. This switch is used to control the Purge Valve
This valve pressurizes the receiver tank to insure and Receiver Tank Pressure Switch if the discharge
adequate refrigerant flow into the heating circuits pressure transducer fails.
during heat and defrost mode operation. This is a
normally closed valve. The receiver tank pressure
solenoid is controlled by an output on the base
controller and interface board.
2-43
02 February 2007
Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) The Zone 1 damper solenoid is energized and
This transducer supplies the discharge pressure at interface board LED 4 is lit when the base controller
the compressor to the base controller. This energizes the K4 Damper Relay. The K4 Damper
information is used by the base controller and Relay normally open contacts supply power via the
software to determine the unit operating conditions. 29 wire to the damper solenoid. The circuit is
protected by the 15 amp fuse F6.
Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)

. On DE units, the Zone 2 damper solenoid is
This transducer supplies the suction pressure at the
powered by the Expansion Module FM21 fan output,
compressor to the base controller. This information
Expansion Module LED 01 will light when this output
is used by the base controller and software to
is turned on.
determine the unit operating conditions. It should be
noted that the suction pressure transducer is located
upstream of the compressor throttling valve. As a
Damper Motor (DM)
result, the suction pressure displayed is suction line SLX model units use defrost damper gear motors to
pressure. This pressure may be higher than the open and close the host unit defrost damper door.
compressor suction pressure. The interface board for units with damper solenoids
is different than the one used with defrost damper
motors. See the information in Section 7 - Hardware
Damper Solenoid (DS)
Features and Interchange for Service Parts
Two methods are used to open and close the host
numbers.
unit defrost damper doors. Damper solenoids are
used on SB model units. Damper gear motor
actuators are used on SLX units. The DE model
units have damper solenoids in both Zone 1 and
Zone 2.
The interface board for units with damper solenoids

is different than the one used with defrost gear
motor actuators. See the information in Section 7 -
Hardware Features and Interchange for Service
Parts numbers.
The damper solenoid is controlled by an output on

the base controller and interface board.
2-44
02 February 2007
ZONE REFRIGERATION Hot Gas Solenoid (HGS)

This valve is energized (open) any time heating or
CONTROL COMPONENTS defrosting is required in the zone. This is a normally
The following solenoid valves are required for each closed valve.
zone. The Zone 1 valves (and Zone 2 valves if a DE
unit) are located in the host unit. The Zone 2 valves All hot gas solenoid valve outputs are located in the
(and Zone 3 valves if present) are located in the Expansion Module.
remote evaporator(s) for each zone.
Suction Line Solenoid (SLS)
Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) All zones are capable of reverse cycle heating
This valve is energized (open) any time cooling, operation. Reverse cycle heating means that the
heating or defrosting is required in its zone. The evaporator coil in the zone in heat mode is used as
valve is de-energized when the zone is in null to the condenser coil during heat operation as long as
stop refrigerant flow in that zone. This is normally at least one other zone is operating in cool mode.
closed valve.
The suction line solenoid is energized (closed) when
The Zone 1 liquid line solenoid is controlled by an its compartment is operating in heat mode as long
output on the base controller and interface board. as at least one other zone is operating in cool mode.
The Zone 2 and Zone 3 liquid line solenoid outputs This is a normally open valve.
are located in the expansion module.
All suction line solenoid valve outputs are located in
the Expansion Module.
2-45
02 February 2007
ENGINE CONTROL
Oil Level Switch (OLS)
COMPONENTS The normally open oil level switch monitors the oil
These components are used by the base controller level in the diesel engine. It is located above the oil
to sense conditions and control operation of the pan on the door side of the engine. It supplies
diesel engine (or electric motor, if present). information on the oil level to the base controller via
the J3 connector OLS wire. The switch is closed
Coolant Temperature Sensor when the oil level is low.
This sensor monitors the temperature of the coolant

in the diesel engine. It is located on the diesel Flywheel Sensor (FW)
engine thermostat housing and is connected to the This sensor monitors the RPM of the diesel engine.
base controller via the J3 connector WTP and WTN The flywheel sensor is located on the door side of
wires. the engine just under the starter. It supplies engine
speed information to the base controller connector
Coolant Level Sensor (CLS) J3 via the FS1 and FS2 wires.
This sensor monitors the engine coolant level. It is

located on the radiator expansion tank. A magnetic Intake Air Heater
reed switch is used on all SR-2 MT units. The intake air heater is located at the inlet to the
Magnetic Reed Switch intake manifold of the diesel engine. The intake air
The magnetic reed switch consists of a press-in
heater is energized and interface board LED 3 is lit
miniature reed switch and a captive magnetic float
when the base controller energizes the K2 Preheat
inside the radiator expansion tank. If the coolant
Relay. The interface board K2 Preheat Relay
level is low for a specified period of time a low
normally open contacts supply power via the H wire
coolant condition is assumed to exist. The switch is
to the intake air heater to preheat the engine before
connected to the base controller connector J7 via
starting. The circuit is protected by the 60 amp fuse
the CLS and CLP wire. The switch is closed with
F5.
adequate coolant level and open with low coolant
level.
Note: The preheat relay contacts are connected
directly to the unit starting battery via the “2” circuit.
Oil Pressure Switch (LOPS)
The normally closed low oil pressure switch
monitors the oil pressure of the diesel engine. It is
located on the access door side of the engine. It is
connected to the base controller via J3 connector
20B and CH wires. The switch is open when the oil
pressure is adequate.
2-46
02 February 2007
Starter Motor (SM) Fuel Solenoid Pull-in Relay normally open contacts
The starter motor is located on the access door side supply power via the 8DP wire to the fuel solenoid
of the engine. The starter motor is energized and pull-in coil to positively open the fuel solenoid. The
interface board LED 25 is lit when the base circuit is protected by the 40 amp fuse F3.
controller energizes the K7 Starter Relay. The

interface board K7 Starter Relay normally open NOTE: The fuel solenoid pull in relay contacts are
contacts supply power via the 8S wire to the starter connected directly to the unit starting battery via the
solenoid to crank the engine. The circuit is “2” circuit.

High Speed Solenoid (HS)
NOTE: The starter relay contacts are connected The high speed (throttle) solenoid is located behind
directly to the unit starting battery via the “2” circuit. the fuel injection pump. The high speed solenoid is
energized and interface board LED 5 is lit when the
Fuel Solenoid (FSH, FSP) base controller energizes the interface board K3
The fuel solenoid is located at the rear of the injector High Speed Relay. The interface board K3 High
pump and is used to start and stop the flow of fuel to Speed Relay contacts supply power to the 7D wire
the diesel engine during diesel mode operation. The to the high speed solenoid to enable high speed
fuel solenoid features two coils, a pull-in coil and a operation. The circuit is protected by the 15 amp
hold coil. The pull-in coil transfers the fuel solenoid fuse F6.
to the open position. The hold coil maintains the fuel

solenoid in the open position. Alternator Frequency
Alternator frequency is monitored by the micro-
The hold coil is energized in Diesel Mode when the processor via the “W” wire. The alternator frequency
base controller energizes the interface board K1 is used for diagnostic and backup control purposes
Run Relay. Interface board LED 6 is lit when the on model 30 units. It is used as the speed sensor
Run Relay is energized and the contacts have on model 50 units when operating in diesel or
transferred. The K1 Run Relay normally open electric standby modes.
contacts supply power from the 8 wire thru the
normally closed Diesel/Electric relay to the 8D wire
to energize the fuel solenoid hold coil. The circuit is
The pull-in coil is momentarily energized and

interface board LED 24 is momentarily lit in Diesel
Mode when the base controller energizes the K6
Fuel Solenoid Pull-in Relay for 2 seconds. The K6
2-47
02 February 2007
COMMUNICATION PORTS
The SR-2 features three externally accessible
communication ports.
CargoWatch Port
The CargoWatch port is used to download the
CargoWatch data logger and to flash load software
to the HMI Control Panel. It is located on the control
panel next to the ServiceWatch port. This is a serial
RS-232 communication port.
ServiceWatch Port
The ServiceWatch port is used to download the
ServiceWatch data logger and to flash load software
to the base controller. It is located on the control
panel next to the CargoWatch port on SB units. The
connector is located inside the control box on SLX
units. This is a serial RS-232 communication port.
Printer Port
This port is used to print trip records from the
CargoWatch data logger. It is located inside the
control box on SB units. The connector is located
on control box door on SLX units. This is a serial
RS-232 communication port.
2-48
02 February 2007
OPTIONAL ELECTRIC x Automatic Overload Reset - The overload

relay resets automatically after the motor cools.
STANDBY When the overload trips, it interrupts power to
(Model 50 units only) the motor contactor coil.
The Electric Standby option allows the unit to be

operated on either the diesel engine or external x Electric Heat – Both hot gas and electric heat is
electric power. The units are supplied to operate on utilized on model 50 units. The electric heaters
three phase power. are also used during defrost. Electric heat and
defrost are only used in Zone 1 (host
CAUTION evaporator). Electric heat is not available on DE
High voltage AC power is present whenever the units. Electric heat is optional on SLX units.
unit is operating in Electric mode and whenever
the unit is connected to external standby power. x Automatic Phase Correction - The control
Voltages of this magnitude can be lethal. system features two motor contactors. Only one
Exercise extreme caution when working on the of the contactors is energized by the phase
unit. detection module to insure correct motor
rotation, regardless of phase rotation on the
Model 50 Features incoming power. The motor contactors are also

mechanically interlocked.
The following features are standard equipment on
units equipped with Electric Standby.
x Low Voltage Detection – The phase detection
modulation will not allow the unit to run if the
x Automatic Diesel/Electric Selection – The unit
supply voltage is too low.
can be programmed to automatically switch to
electric operation when a power cord is
x Single Phase Protection – The phase
connected and the standby power is switched
detection modulation will not allow the unit to run
“on”. The unit can also be programmed to
if it detects a single phase condition.
automatically switch back to diesel power if the
standby power is switched off or fails. The HMI
control panel will prompt for electric or diesel
switchover if the respective autoswitch feature is
not enabled.
Note: The unit will automatically switch to Cycle

Sentry when the unit is manually switched or
autoswitched to electric mode.
2-49
02 February 2007
High Voltage Components Phase Detect Module

The high voltage enclosure or tray contains the The phase detect module is designed to monitor 3
motor contactors, overload relay, heater contactor phase voltages from 160 volts AC through 510 volts
and phase select module used to operate the drive AC. The phase detect module detects missing
motor on units equipped with Electric Standby. The phases, automatically corrects phase rotation, and
contactors are controlled by +12 volt dc control provides low voltage protection. See Section 6 for
signals from the interface board. SB units have a operation and diagnostics.
separate control box located on the compressor side
of the unit for these high voltage components. SLX
units utilize a high voltage tray located inside the unit Brown
THERMO KING
control box. L1
9131C98G06
Blue
L2 0202
L3
Black
Diesel/Electric Relay K5
The Diesel/Electric Relay K5 is present on all units.
This relay is located on the interface board. If the
Electric Standby option is not present or if the unit is Phase Detect Module
running in Diesel Mode then control power is routed

through the Diesel/Electric Relay normally closed
contacts.
The Diesel/Electric Relay is energized and interface

board LED 7 is lit when the base controller requests
Electric Mode operation. The K5 Diesel/Electric
Relay normally open contacts supply power to the
7E circuit to enable Electric Mode operation.
Heater Contactor HC
The heater contactor is used to supply standby
power to the electric heaters during heat and defrost
mode electric operation. The heater contactor is
energized and interface board LED 5 is lit when the
base controller energizes the interface board K3
High Speed Relay during electric mode operation.
The K3 High Speed Relay supplies chassis ground
via the 26E wire to the heater contactor.
2-50
02 February 2007
6T3 4T2 2T1
2T1 4T2 6T3 14NC

96 NC 95 98 NO 97
T3 T2 T1 T3 T2 T1
1L1 3L2 5L3 13NO

2T1 4T2 6T3 14NC
L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1
1L1 3L2 5L3 13NO
5L3 3L2 1L1

PSM
HC
OVL HC MCB MCA
L3
L1
L2
THERMO KING
9131C98G06 OVL PSM
0202
98 NO 97
2T1
1L1
L3
0202
L2
4T2
3L2
L1
9131C98G06
THERMO KING
96 NC 95
6T3
5L3
T3 T2 T1 T3 T2 T1 SLX Unit Electric Standby Components
L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1
These components are located in the unit control

box.
MCA MCB
SB Unit Electric Standby Components
These components are located in separate control

box on the compressor side of the unit.
2-51
02 February 2007
2-52
02 February 2007
Section 3 – SR-2 SPECTRUM Software Description
SR-2 Software Features
This manual considers Base Controller Software Revision C000, HMI Control Panel
Software Revision 6510/6610 or 6710 and Supervisor Software Revision 120.
Earlier versions of software are similar but may not include or support all features as
shown in this manual.
TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 3

Software Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 5
HMI Menu Structure................................................................................................................................................. 6
Menu Overview Flowchart ...................................................................................................................................... 7
Operator Features ................................................................................................................................................... 9
Standard Display.................................................................................................................................................. 9
TemperatureWatch® ............................................................................................................................................. 9
Operator and Main Menu Flowchart .................................................................................................................... 10
Main Menu .............................................................................................................................................................. 11
Main Menu Features .......................................................................................................................................... 11
Language ........................................................................................................................................................ 11
Alarms ............................................................................................................................................................. 11
Gauges ............................................................................................................................................................ 11
Sensors ........................................................................................................................................................... 11
Datalogger....................................................................................................................................................... 11
Hourmeters ..................................................................................................................................................... 11
Mode ................................................................................................................................................................ 12
Pretrip .............................................................................................................................................................. 12
Electric Standby (Model 50 units only) ........................................................................................................ 12
Diesel Mode (Model 50 units only) ............................................................................................................... 12
Adjust Brightness .......................................................................................................................................... 12
Time ................................................................................................................................................................. 12
Main Menu Flowchart ............................................................................................................................................ 13
Maintenance Menu Features ................................................................................................................................ 15
Accessing the Maintenance Menu ................................................................................................................... 15
Maintenance Menu Features............................................................................................................................. 15
Hourmeters ..................................................................................................................................................... 15
Gauges ............................................................................................................................................................ 15
Sensors ........................................................................................................................................................... 15
Alarms ............................................................................................................................................................. 15
Service Test Mode.......................................................................................................................................... 16
Interface Board Test....................................................................................................................................... 16
Display Self Test............................................................................................................................................. 16
Evacuation Test.............................................................................................................................................. 16
Software Revision .......................................................................................................................................... 16
Set Time and Date .......................................................................................................................................... 16
3-1
02 February 2007
Maintenance Menu Flowchart .............................................................................................................................. 17

Guarded Access Menu Features.......................................................................................................................... 19
Security Code Protection .............................................................................................................................. 19
Accessing the Guarded Access Menu............................................................................................................. 19
Bypassing the Security Code........................................................................................................................ 19
Leaving the Guarded Access Menu ................................................................................................................. 19
Guarded Access Menu Flowchart........................................................................................................................ 20
Programmable Features Menu ......................................................................................................................... 22
Temperature Units.......................................................................................................................................... 22
Pressure Units ................................................................................................................................................ 22
Restart Unit After Shutdown ......................................................................................................................... 23
Setpoint High Limit (for the indicated Zone) ............................................................................................... 23
Setpoint Low Limit (for the indicated zone) ................................................................................................ 24
Fresh Frozen Range....................................................................................................................................... 24
Door Open Forces .......................................................................................................................................... 25
Door Open Timeout........................................................................................................................................ 25
Sleep Mode After Pretrip ............................................................................................................................... 25
Rail Option ...................................................................................................................................................... 26
Rail Alternate .................................................................................................................................................. 26
Limited Alarm Resets..................................................................................................................................... 26
Remote Device................................................................................................................................................ 27
HMI Control Panel COM 1 Default Baud Rate.............................................................................................. 27
Number of Limited Setpoints ........................................................................................................................ 28
Limited Setpoint # 1 ....................................................................................................................................... 29
Demand Defrost on Temp Rises................................................................................................................... 30
Extended ServiceWatch Logging ................................................................................................................. 30
Main Menu Configuration Menu ....................................................................................................................... 31
Add Keypad Lockout to Mode Menu ............................................................................................................ 31
Add Sleep to Mode Menu............................................................................................................................... 31
Show Single Zone Control on Mode Menu .................................................................................................. 32
Alarm Display Menu........................................................................................................................................... 33
Hourmeter Setup Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 34
Programmable Hourmeter Sub-menu .......................................................................................................... 34
Total Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours ............................................................................................................ 34
Controller Power On Hours........................................................................................................................... 35
Pretrip Reminder Hours................................................................................................................................. 36
Engine Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours......................................................................................................... 36
Electric Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours........................................................................................................ 37
Viewable Hourmeter Setup Sub-menu......................................................................................................... 39
Total Hours ..................................................................................................................................................... 39
Total Run Time Hours (If Model 50).............................................................................................................. 39
Engine Hours .................................................................................................................................................. 40
Electric Run Hours (If Model 50)................................................................................................................... 40
Zone 1 Run Time Hours ................................................................................................................................. 40
3-2
02 February 2007

Controller Power On Hours........................................................................................................................... 41
Pretrip Reminder Hours................................................................................................................................. 42
Sensor Calibration Menu................................................................................................................................... 44
Zone 1 Return Air Sensor Grade .................................................................................................................. 44
Zone 1 Discharge Air Sensor Grade............................................................................................................. 45
Zone 2 Return Air Sensor Grade .................................................................................................................. 45
Spare 1 Sensor Grade.................................................................................................................................... 47
Cycle Sentry Setup Menu.................................................................................................................................. 49
Cycle Sentry Amps Level .............................................................................................................................. 49
Battery Sentry Voltage Level......................................................................................................................... 49
Defrost Setup Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 50
Defrost Interval In Range with Fresh Setpoint ............................................................................................ 50
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Fresh Setpoint ..................................................................................... 50
Defrost Interval In Range with Frozen Setpoint .......................................................................................... 50
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Frozen Setpoint ................................................................................... 50
Maximum Defrost Duration ........................................................................................................................... 51
Language Setup Menu....................................................................................................................................... 52
Software Revision Language Support ......................................................................................................... 52
Enable Language............................................................................................................................................ 52
Access Code Setup Menu ................................................................................................................................. 53
Enter Access Code......................................................................................................................................... 53
OptiSet Menu ...................................................................................................................................................... 54
OptiSet Reset ..................................................................................................................................................... 54
Programming OptiSet Features........................................................................................................................ 54
OptiSet Feature Flowchart ................................................................................................................................ 55
OptiSet Global Features .................................................................................................................................... 56
Temperature Units (for all zones) ................................................................................................................. 56
Setpoint High Limit (for the indicated Zone) ............................................................................................... 56
Setpoint Low Limit (for the indicated zone) ................................................................................................ 57
Number of Limited Setpoints (for all zones) ............................................................................................... 57
Limited Setpoint # 1 (for all zones)............................................................................................................... 58
Fresh Frozen Range (for all zones) .............................................................................................................. 59
OptiSet Range Limits and Range ..................................................................................................................... 60
Selection ............................................................................................................................................................. 60
Range Limits (for all zones) .......................................................................................................................... 61
OptiSet Range (for all zones) ........................................................................................................................ 61
Range Mode Settings ........................................................................................................................................ 62
Cycle Sentry Mode (for selected range)....................................................................................................... 62
3-3
02 February 2007
Continuous Mode (for selected range) ........................................................................................................ 63

Cycle Sentry Mode OptiSet Features ............................................................................................................... 64
Cycle Sentry Null Restart Temperature (for selected range)..................................................................... 64
Cycle Sentry Door Open Forces (for selected range) ................................................................................ 64
Cycle Sentry Door Open Timeout (for selected range) .............................................................................. 65
Cycle Sentry Run Fans in Null (for selected range) ................................................................................... 65
Continuous Mode OptiSet Features - .............................................................................................................. 66
Continuous Door Open Forces (for selected range) .................................................................................. 66
Continuous Door Open Timeout (for selected range) ................................................................................ 67
Continuous Run Fans in Null (for selected range) ..................................................................................... 67
Sensor Configuration Menu – CargoWatch Datalogger ................................................................................ 68
Sensor Programming..................................................................................................................................... 68
Logging Interval ............................................................................................................................................. 68
Log Sensor (for CargoWatch sensor 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6) ............................................................................... 68
Independent Sensor Name (for CargoWatch sensor 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6) ..................................................... 69
Out of Range Checking (for CargoWatch sensor 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6) ........................................................... 70
Low .................................................................................................................................................................. 70
High.................................................................................................................................................................. 70
Italian Option .................................................................................................................................................. 71
Sensor Averaging........................................................................................................................................... 71
Digital Input Programming ............................................................................................................................ 72
Digital In for CargoWatch digital input 1, 2, 3 or 4...................................................................................... 72
Door Open Logging........................................................................................................................................ 72
Digital Input Name for CargoWatch digital input 1, 2, 3 or 4 ..................................................................... 73
Unit Configuration Setup Menu........................................................................................................................ 74
Unit Configuration Setup Menu........................................................................................................................ 74
Engine Type Is ................................................................................................................................................ 74
Compressor Type Is....................................................................................................................................... 74
Dual Evaporator Configuration..................................................................................................................... 74
How Many Zones in This Unit ....................................................................................................................... 74
Zone 2 Evap Fans Configuration .................................................................................................................. 75
Zone 3 Evap Fans Configuration .................................................................................................................. 75
Electric Standby Equipped?.......................................................................................................................... 75
Electric Heat Option ....................................................................................................................................... 75
Diesel to Electric Auto Switch Enabled? ..................................................................................................... 76
Electric to Diesel Auto Switch Enabled? ..................................................................................................... 76
Unit Model ....................................................................................................................................................... 76
Defrost Motor Equipped? .............................................................................................................................. 76
Fuel Sensor Type ........................................................................................................................................... 77
Rear Remote Control ..................................................................................................................................... 77
Rear Remote Control Action ......................................................................................................................... 77
Pretrip/Sleep Switch Options........................................................................................................................ 78
3-4
02 February 2007
SOFTWARE OPERATION
The Expansion Module software is used for control
of the zone evaporator’s operational functions. The
Software is a very complex set of instructions used
Expansion Module software is part of the Base
by the Base Controller, HMI Control Panel and
Controller software and is not shown as a separate
Expansion Module to control the refrigeration system
software revision.
and interface with the operator. The Base
Controller, HMI Control Panel and Expansion
The Supervisor software (12x) is also part of the
Module microprocessors examine the conditions of
Base Controller software. The Supervisor software
all the inputs and compare them to the instructions
revision is shown when checking software revisions.
contained in the software. The outputs are then
See Section 4 for details.
energized as specified by the software instructions.
The HMI Control Panel software (65xx, 66xx or

There is no way to determine from the schematic
67xx) controls the display screens and operator
what conditions will cause the unit to operate in a
interface.
particular mode. This decision is made by the
software after examining all the input conditions and
The software is flash loaded using a PC computer.
setpoint. However, operating mode can usually be
See Service Procedure A46A and A46B for details.
deduced from the existing conditions. As an
example, if a 35°F (2°C) setpoint is selected and the
To check software revision of the Base Controller or
box temperature, as indicated by the return air
HMI Control Panel refer to Section 4 of this manual.
sensor is 60°F (16°C), the affected zone should
operate in Cool mode when turned on.
For software revision details see Section 7 of this
manual.
The SR-2 system utilizes several different software
sets.
The Base Controller software (C0xx) is used for all

operational functions.
3-5
02 February 2007
HMI MENU STRUCTURE

x The Main Menu is made up of informational and
operational items intended for the driver or unit
The basic HMI Control Panel menu structure
operator. The Main Menu is directly accessible
consists of the Standard Display, the
from the Standard Display using the MENU soft
TemperatureWatch® Display and three menus. See
key. This soft key is at the bottom right of the
the following material for a general description of
display.
each menu and feature.
x The Maintenance Menu is made up of

See Section 4 for complete operating
informational, operational, control, and
instructions.
diagnostic items used to help the service
technician maintain and diagnose the unit. The
x The Standard Display shows the zone return
Maintenance Menu is indirectly accessible from
air temperature(s) and setpoint(s). The setpoint
the Main Menu.
for each zone can be changed and Zone 2 and
Zone 3 can be turned on and off using the soft
x The Guarded Access Menu is made up of
key located below each zone display. If a zone
programmable settings that configure the unit,
is turned off the display will show OFF instead of
set sensor grades, enable options, and allow the
the setpoint for that zone. The Main Menu is
customer to tailor unit operation to his particular
accessed using the Menu soft key.
requirements. The CargoWatch data logger is
configured from this menu. The Guarded
x The TemperatureWatch Display shows the
Access Menu is indirectly accessible from the
return air temperature and setpoint using large
Maintenance Menu.
numbers that allow unit conditions to be
checked from a distance. If a zone is turned off
the display will show OFF instead of the setpoint
for that zone. If there are no alarms other than
Log Alarms present then the TemperatureWatch
Display will appear 2½ minutes after the last key
is pressed. The standard display is accessed by
pressing any soft key.
3-6
02 February 2007
MENU OVERVIEW FLOWCHART
Not all menu features Temp Watch

may appear Display
Press Any
2.5 Minute Soft Key
Time-out
Zone 1 Soft Key
Zone 1 Setpoint Change
Zone 2 On/Off and Zone 2 Soft Key

Setpoint Change 1, 2 or 3 Zone
Standard
Zone 3 On/Off and Zone 3 Soft Key Display
Setpoint Change
Main Menu Soft Key

Menu
Language (If enabled)
Alarms
Gauges
Sensors
Datalogger Guarded Access Menu
Hourmeters (Not Available if Running)
Mode
Pretrip
Diesel Mode | Electric Standby Security Code (If required)
Adjust Brightness Programmable Features
Time Main Menu Configuration
Alarms
Controlled Access Hourmeter Setup
Sensor Calibration
Maintenance
Cycle Sentry Setup
Menu Defrost Setup
Hourmeters Language Setup
Gauges Access Code Setup
Sensors OptiSet
Alarms (CargoWatch) Sensor Configuration
Service Test Unit Configuration
Interface Board Test
Display Self Test
Evacuation Test
Software Revision Not all menu features
Set Time and Date may appear
Controlled Access SR-2 M/T Rev 6510 08 December 2006
3-7
02 February 2007
3-8
02 February 2007
Limited Setpoints The Limited Setpoint feature

OPERATOR FEATURES
limits the number of setpoints available from one to
The Thermo King SR-2 M/T control system features
four. Up to four desired setpoints are programmed
many special operator functions. These functions
from the Guarded Access Menu. As an example, if
are available from the Standard Display. A brief
only three setpoints are programmed (such as -
explanation of each menu is included here.
10°F, 35°F and 50°F) then pressing the Up or Down
keys when selecting a setpoint will scroll between
For complete details see Section 4 of this
these three setpoints only. The setpoints available
manual.
are the same for all zones.
Standard Display
TemperatureWatch®
The Standard Display is the default display that
The TemperatureWatch Display shows the zone
appears if no other display function is selected. The
return air temperature and setpoint for each installed
Standard Display shows the zone return air
zone using large numbers that allow unit conditions
temperature and setpoint for up to 3 zones. The
to be checked from a distance. If there are no
Standard Display soft keys provide direct operator
alarms other than Log Alarms present then the
access to turn Zone 2 and Zone 3 on and off, to
TemperatureWatch display appears 2½ minutes
change the setpoint for each zone and to select the
after the last key is pressed and will remain until any
Main Menu.
soft key is pressed. To return to the Standard
Display press any soft key.
Turning Zones On and Off Zone 2 and Zone 3
can be turned on and off from the Standard Display
The TemperatureWatch display will not appear if any
using the soft key under each zone display. Zone 1
Check, Prevent or Shutdown alarms are present or if
is always turned on when the HMI ON hard key is
the CargoWatch -15°C Alarm is active. If the
pressed. All zones are turned off when the HMI
TemperatureWatch display is active and any of
OFF hard key is pressed.
these alarm conditions occur the display will return
to the Standard Display. If a shutdown alarm is
The On/Off state of Zone 2 and Zone 3 (if present) is
present the display will flash. This provides a quick
saved when the unit is turned off. If Zone 2 or Zone
method to check for units that may have an alarm
3 were turned on when the unit the unit was turned
set.
off, then they will still be on when the unit is turned
back on.
Setpoint Change The setpoint menu for each

zone can be directly accessed from the Standard
Display using the soft key under each zone display.
3-9
02 February 2007
OPERATOR AND MAIN MENU FLOWCHART

may appear Display
Press Any
2.5 Minute Soft Key
Time-out
Zone 1 Soft Key

Standard
Setpoint Change
Main Menu Soft Key

Menu
Alarms
Gauges
Sensors
Datalogger
Hourmeters
Mode
Pretrip
Diesel Mode | Electric Standby
Adjust Brightness Not all menu features
Time may appear
See following pages for SR-2 M/T Rev 6510 08 December 2006
complete Main Menu Flowchart
3-10
02 February 2007
MAIN MENU
Gauges
The Gauges menu allows the operator to display
Main Menu Features operating information such as coolant level and
The Main menu allows the operator to check other temperature, engine RPM, battery amps, battery
unit conditions, change operating modes and volts, and suction and discharge pressure. The I/O
perform other operator functions. The Main menu is selection under Gauges indicates the named
accessed from the Standard Display by means of outputs as either On or Off.
the Menu soft key. The following menus are NOTE: This menu contains the same
available. information as the Maintenance Menu - Gauge
menu.
Language
If more than one language is enabled, this menu Sensors
item allows the operator to select a language from a The Sensors menu allows the operator to display the
list of up to 11 languages at one time. All reading of all unit temperature sensors as well as
subsequent displays are shown in the selected the calculated temperature differential.
language. Three different language packages with a NOTE: This menu contains the same
total of 24 languages are available. English is the information as the Maintenance Menu - Sensors
default language and is provided in each of the menu.
packages.
Datalogger
Alarms
This menu allows the operator to set a Start of Trip
The Alarms display allows the operator to display
marker or print the contents of the CargoWatch data
any existing alarms. The operator can also clear
logger.
most alarms from this menu
Hourmeters
NOTE: Some alarms are clearable in Guarded
The Hourmeters menu allows the operator to view
Access only. Alarms with this feature will not the unit hourmeters that have the view feature
provide a soft key “Clear” function. See Section enabled in the Guarded Access menu. If the view
4 for additional details feature for a particular hourmeter is not enabled then
that hourmeter cannot be viewed.
A simplified list of Alarm Codes is presented in
Section 4 of this manual. A list of Alarm Codes NOTE: All active hourmeters are available for
including diagnostic procedures for each code is viewing in the Maintenance Menu.
presented in Section 5 of this manual.
3-11
02 February 2007
Mode Diesel Mode (Model 50 units only)

The Mode menu allows the operator to change the If a unit equipped with electric standby is running in
unit operating modes if allowed. Not all modes may electric mode and the Electric to Diesel Auto-switch
appear depending on the settings selected from the feature is set NO, this feature allows the operator to
Guarded Access menu. manually select diesel mode operation. This feature
x Turn Off Cycle Sentry Mode/Turn On Cycle does not appear if the unit does not have the
Sentry Mode (If Cycle Sentry is Off unit runs in optional Electric Standby or if the Electric to Diesel
Continuous) Auto-switch feature is set YES.
x Allow Single Zone Control or Multi Zone Control
to be selected. Adjust Brightness
x Allow Keypad Lockout to be selected. This menu allows the operator to adjust the HMI
x Start Sleep Mode. control panel display backlight intensity as required

by local conditions.
Pretrip
A Pretrip Test is used to confirm unit operation. This Time
menu allows a Pretrip Test to be initiated by the This menu allows the operator to view the unit time
operator. If the test is started with the engine or and date. The time and date cannot be changed
motor off a full test including the non-running amp from this menu.
checks and the running performance tests are

performed. If the test is started with the engine or
motor running only the running tests are performed.
Test results are reported as PASS, CHECK or FAIL.
Electric Standby (Model 50 units only)

If the Electric Standby option is present and the
Diesel to Electric Auto-switch feature is set NO, this
feature allows the operator to manually select
electric mode operation. This feature does not
appear if the unit does not have the optional Electric
Standby or if the Diesel to Electric Auto-switch
feature is set YES.
3-12
02 February 2007
MAIN MENU FLOWCHART

Main Menu Main Menu
1 of 3 2 of 3
LANGUAGE SENSORS
Select from enabled languages Zone 1 Return Air Temperature
ALARMS Zone 1 Discharge Air Temperature
Display all alarms Zone 1 Temperature Differential
Clear most alarms Zone 1 Evaporator Coil Temperature
GAUGES Zone 2 Return Air Temperature
Coolant Temperature Zone 2 Discharge Air Temperature
Coolant Level Zone 2 Temperature Differential
Amps Zone 2 Evaporator Coil Temperature
Battery Voltage Zone 3 Return Air Temperature
Engine RPM Zone 3 Discharge Air Temperature
Fuel Level Sensor Zone 3 Temperature Differential
Discharge Pressure Zone 3 Evaporator Coil Temperature
Suction Pressure Ambient Air Temperature
I/O (InputOutput State) Spare 1 Temperature
High Speed Relay Spare 2 Temperature
Run Relay Spare 3 Temperature
Defrost Damper CargoWatch Datalogger Sensor 1 Temperature
Oil Pressure CargoWatch Datalogger Sensor 2 Temperature
Oil Level CargoWatch Datalogger Sensor 3 Temperature
Run Relay Feedback CargoWatch Datalogger Sensor 4 Temperature
Fuel Pressure CargoWatch Datalogger Sensor 5 Temperature
Alternator Frequency CargoWatch Datalogger Sensor 6 Temperature
Diesel/Electric Relay Board Temperature Sensor
Electric Ready Input DATALOGGER (CargoWatch)
Electric Overload Start of Trip
Variable Speed Fan Current Pos Z2 Print | View
Variable Speed Fan Desired Position Z2 HOURMETERS (View Enabled Hourmeters Only)
Variable Speed Fan Current Pos Z3 Total Hours
Variable Speed Fan Desired Position Z3 Total Run Time Hours
Condenser Inlet Solenoid Engine Hours
Receiver Tank Inlet Pressure Solenoid Electric Run Hours
Purge Valve Zone 1 Run Time Hours
Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 1 Zone 2 Run Time Hours
Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 3 Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours
Hot Gas Solenoid Zone 1 Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours
Hot Gas Solenoid Zone 2 Controller Power On Hours
Hot Gas Solenoid Zone 3 Pretrip Reminder Hours
Suction Line Solenoid Zone 1 Engine Run Time Reminder #1 Hours
Suction Line Solenoid Zone 3 Electric Run Time Reminder #1 Hours
Electric Run Time Reminder #2 Hours
Not all menu features

may appear
SR-2 M/T Rev 6510 Bld 41 29 November 2006
3-13
02 February 2007
Main Menu Flowchart (Continued)

Main Menu
3 of 3
MODE
Turn On | Off Cycle Sentry
Single Zone Control
Keypad Lockout
Start Sleep Mode
Program a Wakeup Time
Enter Day to Wake Up
Enter Hour to Wake Up
Enter Minutes to Wake Up
PRETRIP
Full Pretrip if Not Running
Running Pretrip if Running
DIESEL MODE | ELECTRIC STBY (Model 50 Only)
ADJUST BRIGHTNESS
Off - Low - Medium - High
TIME (View Only)
Hour/Minute/Day/Date/Month/Year

may appear
SR-2 M/T Rev 6510 11 December 2006
3-14
02 February 2007
Gauges
MAINTENANCE MENU
The Gauges menu allows the technician to display
FEATURES operating information such as coolant level and
The Thermo King SR2 control system features many temperature, engine RPM, battery amps, battery
special technician functions. These functions are volts, and suction and discharge pressure. The I/O
available from the Maintenance Menus. A brief selection under Gauges indicates the named
explanation of each menu is included here. outputs as either On or Off. Some Gauges can also
be viewed from the Service Test Mode and Interface
For complete details see Section 4 of this Board Test Mode displays.
manual. NOTE: This menu contains the same

information as the Main Menu - Gauge menu.
Accessing the Maintenance Menu

Sensors
The Maintenance Menu is accessible from the Main
The Sensors menu allows the technician to display
Menu. From the Standard Display press the MENU
the reading of all unit temperature sensors as well
key. The controller will display the Main Menu.
as the calculated temperature differential.
From the first Main Menu display (either Alarms or
NOTE: This menu contains the same
Language) press and hold both the EXIT key and
information as the Main Menu - Sensors menu.
the key with no label above it for 5 seconds. After 5
seconds the HMI will display the Maintenance Menu.
Alarms
The Alarms display allows the technician to display
Maintenance Menu Features
any existing alarms. The technician can also clear
A brief explanation of each menu is shown here.
most alarms from this menu
For complete operating details see Section 4.
NOTE: Some alarms are clearable in Guarded

Hourmeters
Access only. Alarms with this feature will not
This menu allows the technician to view all the
provide a soft key “Clear” function. See Section
active unit hourmeters, even if the Main Menu view
4 for additional details
has been turned off. The Maintenance Menu
Hourmeter Display also allows the technician to
reset the time on hourmeters with a programmed
Section 4 of this manual. A list of Alarm Codes
time limit.
including diagnostic procedures for each code is
presented in Section 5 of this manual.
3-15
02 February 2007
Service Test Mode Evacuation Test

Since the complexity of the control software makes it Evacuation Test allows a full system evacuation to
impossible to predict exact operating conditions, a be performed. All normally closed valves are
troubleshooting feature called Service Test Mode opened to allow the entire system to be completely
has been incorporated. This feature allows the unit evacuated before charging with refrigerant. If the
to be forced to a known set of operating conditions battery voltage falls below acceptable limits, the
in diesel or electric mode, regardless of setpoint or operator is prompted to connect a battery charger to
temperature sensor inputs. Service personnel can maintain sufficient battery voltage to hold all
use this mode to troubleshoot the system under necessary valves open during the procedure. If the
defined operating conditions. Service Test Mode battery voltage rises above acceptable limits, the
can be used with the unit running or non-running. controller will be turned off to prevent damage to the
Any shutdown alarms that are present must be electronics and/or system components.
cleared before Service Test Mode is available.
Software Revision
Interface Board Test The Software Revision menu shows the software
Interface Board Test Mode allows individual relays revision of the HMI Control Panel, the Base
or outputs to be energized. This permits service Controller and the Supervisor Software. The Base
personnel to troubleshoot individual circuits under Controller software also contains the software
known conditions. Interface Board Test Mode can necessary for the Expansion Module.
only be used with the unit in a non-running condition.
If Interface Board Test Mode is entered with the Set Time and Date
diesel engine or electric motor running the engine or The Set Time and Date menu allows the system
motor will be shut down. Any shutdown alarms that time and date to be checked and changed as
are present must be cleared before Interface Board required.
Test Mode is available.
Display Self Test

This menu allows the operator to perform a series of
built in tests on the HMI Control Panel.
3-16
02 February 2007
MAINTENANCE MENU FLOWCHART

Maintenance Menu Maintenance Menu
1 of 4 2 of 4
HOURMETERS (View and Reset Time) SENSORS

Total Hours Zone 1 Return Air Temperature
Total Run Time Hours Zone 1 Discharge Air Temperature
Engine Hours Zone 1 Temperature Differential
Electric Run Hours Zone 1 Evaporator Coil Temperature
Zone 1 Run Time Hours Zone 2 Return Air Temperature
Zone 2 Run Time Hours Zone 2 Discharge Air Temperature
Zone 3 Run Time Hours Zone 2 Temperature Differential
Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours Zone 2 Evaporator Coil Temperature
Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours Zone 3 Return Air Temperature
Controller Power On Hours Zone 3 Discharge Air Temperature
Pretrip Reminder Hours Zone 3 Temperature Differential
Engine Run Time Reminder #1 Hours Zone 3 Evaporator Coil Temperature
Engine Run Time Reminder #2 Hours Ambient Air Temperature
Electric Run Time Reminder #1 Hours Spare 1 Temperature
GAUGES Spare 3 Temperature
Coolant Temperature (CargoWatch) Datalogger Sensor 1 Temperature
Coolant Level (CargoWatch) Datalogger Sensor 2 Temperature
Amps (CargoWatch) Datalogger Sensor 3 Temperature
Battery Voltage (CargoWatch) Datalogger Sensor 4 Temperature
Engine RPM (CargoWatch) Datalogger Sensor 5 Temperature
Fuel Level Sensor (CargoWatch) Datalogger Sensor 6 Temperature
Discharge Pressure Board Temperature Sensor
Suction Pressure ALARMS
I/O (InputOutput State) Display all alarms
High Speed Relay Clear most alarms
Run Relay
Defrost Damper
Oil Pressure
Oil Level
Run Relay Feedback
Fuel Pressure
Alternator Frequency
Diesel/Electric Relay
Electric Ready Input
Electric Overload
Variable Speed Fan Current Pos Z2
Variable Speed Fan Desired Position Z2
Condenser Inlet Solenoid
Receiver Tank Inlet Pressure Solenoid
Purge Valve
Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 1
Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 2 Not all menu features
Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 3 may appear
Hot Gas Solenoid Zone 1
Suction Line Solenoid Zone 1
Suction Line Solenoid Zone 2 Not all menu features
Suction Line Solenoid Zone 3 ~ Continued Next Page ~
may appear
SR-2 M/T Rev 6510

9100 30 November
11 July 2006
3-17
02 February 2007
Maintenance Menu Flowchart (Continued)

3 of 4 4 of 4
SERVICE TEST DISPLAY SELF TEST

Test with Unit Running? LCD Test
Zone 1 Null Keypad Test
Zone 1 Low Speed Cool Backlight Test
Zone 1 High Speed Cool Brightness Test
Zone 1 Low Speed Heat Buzzer Test
Zone 1 High Speed Heat Heater Output
Zone 1 Defrost Unit On/Off Output Test
Zone 1 Minimal Heat SPR Digital Output Test
Zone 2 Null Serial E2
Zone 2 Low Speed Cool Datalog Flash
Zone 2 High Speed Cool RTC Update
Zone 2 Low Speed Heat EVACUATION TEST
Zone 2 High Speed Heat Connect Battery Charger
Zone 2 Defrost SOFTWARE REVISION
Zone 2 Minimal Heat Display Software Rev
Zone 3 Null Controller Software Rev
Zone 3 Low Speed Cool Supervisor Software Rev
Zone 3 High Speed Cool SET TIME AND DATE
Zone 3 Low Speed Heat Hour
Zone 3 High Speed Heat Minutes
Zone 3 Defrost Date
Zone 3 Minimal Heat Month
INTERFACE BOARD TEST Year
Preheat Relay
Buzzer
Run Relay
Damper Output
Indicator Light
Alarm Light
Diesel Electric Relay
High Speed | Electric Heat Relay
Receiver Tank Solenoid
Alternator Excite Relay
Purge Valve
Zone 1 Liquid Line Solenoid
Zone 1 Hot Gas Solenoid
Zone 1 Suction Line Solenoid
Fan Motor 2 Relay
Zone 2 Damper Output
Drain Hose Heater Zone 2
Fan Motor 3 Relay
Zone 3 Suction Line Solenoid Not all menu features
Zone 3 Liquid Line Solenoid may appear
SR-2 M/T Rev 6510 30 November 2006
3-18
02 February 2007
GUARDED ACCESS MENU

If no Security Code has been set the controller will
FEATURES enter the Guarded Access Menu directly.
The Guarded Access Menu allows unit operation to Bypassing the Security Code
be configured to user requirements. OptiSet If a Security Code is set and the Guarded Access
features can also be programmed. Menu must be accessed, the Security Code can be
bypassed by entering “4444”.
Security Code Protection

A security code can be set to restrict access to the Leaving the Guarded Access Menu
Guarded Access Menu. If a security code is set the
technician will be prompted to enter the correct code When leaving the Guarded Access Menu the base
when accessing the Guarded Access Menu. The controller will automatically turn the controller off and
security code is defaulted to off. then restart the controller in order to configure the
changes that may have been made. This power
Accessing the Guarded Access Menu cycle is termed a controller “warm restart”.
From the Standard Display press the MENU key.

The controller will display the Main Menu. From the
first Main Menu display (either Language or Alarms)
press and hold both the EXIT key and the key with
no label above it for 5 seconds.
After 5 seconds the controller will display the

Maintenance Menu. Press the NEXT key until the
Set Time and Date Menu appears. From the Set
Time and Date Menu press and hold both the EXIT
key and the key with no label above it for 5 seconds.
The controller may display a Security Code

challenge. If a Security Code has been set the
operator is prompted to enter the correct code using
the “+” and “-“ keys. When the correct code is set
press the YES key to enter the Guarded Access
Menu. If the correct Security Code is not entered
access to the Guarded Access Menu will be denied.
3-19
02 February 2007
GUARDED ACCESS MENU FLOWCHART

Guarded Access Menu Guarded Access Menu
1 of 4 2 of 4
Security Code (if enabled) Hourmeter Setup
Enter Access Code Program Hourmeter
Programmable Features Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Off)
Temperature Units (F) Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Off)
Pressure Units (PSIG) Controller Power On Hours (Off)
Restart Unit After Shutdown (Enabled) Pretrip Reminder Hours (Off)
Setpoint High Limit Zone 1 (80°F) Engine Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Off)
Setpoint Low Limit Zone 1 (-20°F) Engine Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Off)
Setpoint High Limit Zone 2 (80°F) Electric Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Off)
Setpoint Low Limit Zone 2 (-20°F) Electric Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Off)
Setpoint High Limit Zone 3 (80°F) Viewable Hourmeter Setup
Setpoint Low Limit Zone 3 (-20°F) Total Hours (Disabled)
Running Fans in Null (Disabled) Total Run Time Hours (Enabled)
Fresh | Frozen Range (15°F) Engine Hours (Enabled)
Door Open Forces (Log Only) Electric Run Hours (Enabled)
Door Open Timeout (HRS:MIN) Zone 1 Run Time Hours (Disabled)
Sleep Mode After Pretrip (Disabled) Zone 2 Run Time Hours (Disabled)
Rail Option (Disabled) Zone 3 Run Time Hours (Disabled)
Rail Alternate (Disabled) Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Disabled)
Limited Alarm Restarts (Disabled) Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Disabled)
Remote Device (Disabled) Controller Power On Hours (Disabled)
COM 1 Default Baud Rate (1200) Pretrip Reminder Hours (Disabled)
COM 2 Default Baud Rate (9600) Engine Run Time Reminder #1 Hours(Disabled)
COM 3 Default Baud Rate (9600) Engine Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Disabled)
Number of Limited Setpoints (0) Electric Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Disabled)
Limited Setpoint # 1 (-13°F) Electric Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Disabled)
Limited Setpoint # 2 (32°F) Sensor Calibration
Limited Setpoint # 3 (37°F) Zone 1 Return Air Sensor Grade (5H)
Limited Setpoint # 4 (55°F) Zone 1 Discharge Air Sensor Grade (5H)
Demand Defrost on Temp Rises (Disabled) Zone 2 Return Air Sensor Grade (5H)
Extended ServiceWatch Logging (Disabled) Zone 2 Discharge AIr Sensor Grade (5H)
Main Menu Configuration Zone 3 Return Air Sensor Grade (5H)
Add Keypad Lockout to Mode Menu (Disabled) Zone 3 Discharge AIr Sensor Grade (5H)
Add Sleep to Mode Menu (Disabled) Spare 1 Sensor Grade (5H)
Show SZC on Mode Menu (Disabled) Spare 2 Sensor Grade (5H)
Alarms Spare 3 Sensor Grade (5H)
Display all alarms Cycle Sentry Setup
Clear all alarms except Alarm Code 64 Cycle Sentry Amps Level (5)
Battery Sentry Voltage Level (12.2)
Defrost Setup
Defrost Interval In Range w/ Fresh Setpoint (6)
Defrost Interval Not In Range w/ Fresh Setpoint (4)
Defrost Interval In Range w/ Frozen Setpoint (6)
Defrost Interval Not In Range w/ Frozen Setpoint (4)
Maximum Defrost Duration (45)
~ Continued Next Page ~

may appear
3-20
02 February 2007
Guarded Access Menu Flowchart (Continued)

3 of 4 4 of 4
Language Setup Sensor Configuration (CargoWatch)
Default Language (See Cargo Watch description in Diagnostic Manual)
Enable Lanuages Logging Interval (15 Minutes)
HMI Rev 65xx HMI Rev 66xx HMI Rev 67xx Log Sensor 1
English English English Sensor Logging (On)
Spanish Russian Japanese Independant Sensor #1 Name (Log Sensor 1)
French Polish Out of Range Checking (Off)
German Hungarian Italian Option (Available with sensor 1 only) (Off)
Italian Romanian Sensor Averaging (Off)
Dutch Bulgarian Log Sensor 2
Portuguese Czech Sensor Logging (On)
Greek Danish Independant Sensor #1 Name (Log Sensor 2)
Turkish Swedish Out of Range Checking (Off)
Hebrew Norwegian Sensor Averaging (Off)
Arabic Finnish Log Sensor 3
Access Code Setup Same as Sensor 2
Enter Access Code Log Sensor 4
OptiSet Same as Sensor 2
Temperature Units (F) Log Sensor 5
Setpoint High Limit Zone 1 (80°F) Same as Sensor 2
Setpoint Low Limit Zone 1 (-20°F) Log Sensor 6
Setpoint Low Limit Zone 2 (-20°F) Log Digital In 1
Setpoint High Limit Zone 3 (80°F) Door Open Logging (On)
Setpoint Low Limit Zone 3 (-20°F) Digital Input #1 Name (Digital Input #1)
Number of Limited Setpoints Log Digital In 2
Limited Setpoint # 1 Degrees Same as Digital Input 1
Limited Setpoint # 2 Degrees Log Digital In 3
Limited Setpoint # 4 Degrees Unit Configuration
Fresh | Frozen Range Engine Type (Yanmar 2.1)
Range Limits Compressor Type (Recip)
OptiSet Range Dual Evaporator Configuration (No)
Cycle Sentry (On) How Many Zones in This Unit? (2 or 3)
Continuous (On) Zone 2 Evap Fans Configuration (2 Fans)
Cycle Sentry Null Restart Temperature (5.0°F) Zone 3 Evap Fans Configuration (2 Fans)
Cycle Sentry Door Open Forces (Log Only) Electric Standby Equipped? (No)
Cycle Sentry Run Fans in Null (Off) Electric Heat Option (No)
Continuous Door Open Forces (Log Only) Diesel to Electric Autoswitch Enabled? (No)
Continuous Run Fans in Null (Off) Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled? (No)
Unit Model (SB)
Defrost Motor Equipped? (No)
Fuel Sensor Type (None)
Rear Remote Control (None)
Rear Remote Control Action (Stand By)
Pretrip/Sleep Switch Options (Disable)

may appear
3-21
02 February 2007
Programmable Features Menu

Pressure Units
The Programmable Features Menu allows overall
Control Rev C000
unit operation to be configured to specific end user
HMI Rev 6510
requirements. These features are set to factory
Choices PSIG, KPa or BARS
defaults when shipped, but can easily be changed to
Factory Set PSI
suit the end user’s needs. Programmable features
Exceptions
are designed to allow the user to customize some
unit operating parameters without using OptiSet Description The controller can be set to display
pressures in PSIG, kPa or BARS.
IMPORTANT
If a feature has been programmed in OptiSet, the
HMI will display “programmed in OptiSet”, and
the feature cannot be updated from this menu.
Temperature Units
Control Rev C000
HMI Rev 6510
Choices FAHRENHEIT or CELSIUS
Factory Set FAHRENHEIT
Exceptions If OptiSet is active this feature is set
from the OptiSet Menu. The setting selected is used
for all ranges.
Description The controller can be set to display
temperatures in either degrees FAHRENHEIT or
degrees CELSIUS.
3-22
02 February 2007
Restart Unit After Shutdown Setpoint High Limit (for the indicated Zone)
Control Rev C000 Control Rev C000
HMI Rev 6510 HMI Rev 6510
Choices ENABLED, DISABLED, or Choices Maximum is 90°F (32°C)
CONTINUOUS Minimum is Setpoint Low Limit
Factory Set ENABLED Factory Set 80°F (27°C)
Exceptions Use the CONTINUOUS option for Exceptions If OptiSet is active this feature is set
rail applications only. from the OptiSet Menu. The Setpoint High Limit
Description Standard restart alarms become setting selected is used for all ranges in the
permanent shutdown alarms after several attempts indicated zone.
to start and run. The CONTINUOUS feature is Description Setpoint High Limit allows the
designed for rail applications where the unit runs upper setpoint limit to be set to a maximum of 90°F
unattended or is inaccessible for service. It allows (32°C) in one degree increments. The minimum
unlimited restart attempts to be made if the following setting is determined by the setting of Setpoint Low
restart alarms occur: Limit. If the driver attempts to select a setpoint
x Alarm Code 10 High Discharge Pressure higher than the Setpoint High Limit, the display will
x Alarm Code 18 High Engine Coolant Temp show Setpoint Limit, indicating that the selected
x Alarm Code 63 Engine Stopped Setpoint High Limit has been reached. Setting
x Alarm Code 82 High Compressor Temp Setpoint High Limit and the Setpoint Low Limit to the
If restarts are disabled, the unit will shut down on the same temperature results in a single setpoint
first alarm event. temperature available.
The following differences exist between a Standard If the Limited Setpoint feature is enabled this setting
Restart alarm and a Continuous Restart alarm: is not used.
x Standard Restart alarms force a permanent

shutdown if the alarm occurs a pre-determined This setting is zone specific.
number of times (usually 3). Continuous Restart

alarms allow an unlimited number of restarts for
the four alarm codes listed above.
x Standard Restart alarms typically use a 15
minute timer before a restart is allowed.
Continuous Restart alarms use a 1-hour timer
before a restart is allowed.
3-23
02 February 2007
Setpoint Low Limit (for the indicated zone) Fresh Frozen Range
Choices Minimum is –25°F (-32°C) Choices 24°F (-4°C) or 15°F (-9°C)
Maximum is Setpoint High Limit Factory Set 15°F (-9°C)
Factory Set -20°F (-29°C) Exceptions If OptiSet is active this feature is set
Exceptions If OptiSet is active this feature is set from the OptiSet Menu. The setting selected is used
from the OptiSet Menu. The Setpoint Low Limit for all ranges.
setting selected is used for all ranges. Description One set of general control
Description The Setpoint Low Limit allows the specifications is used when operating in the Fresh
lower setpoint limit to be set to a minimum of -25°F range, and another set of general operating
(-32°C) in one degree increments. The maximum specifications is used when operating in the Frozen
setting available is determined by the setting of range. This feature allows the line between Fresh
Setpoint High Limit. If the driver attempts to select a and Frozen ranges to be selected as either 15°F (-
setpoint lower than the Setpoint Low Limit, the 9°C) or 24°F (-4°C). All setpoints less than or equal
display will show Setpoint Limit, indicating that the to this value will be treated as frozen ranges. All
selected Setpoint Low Limit has been reached. setpoints greater than this value will be treated as
Setting the Setpoint High Limit and the Setpoint Low Fresh ranges.
Limit to the same temperature results in a single
setpoint temperature available. The Frozen setpoint range is from the limit of the
Setpoint Limit Low setting to the Fresh Frozen range
If the Limited Setpoint feature is enabled this setting setting. The Fresh setpoint range is from the limit of
is not used. the Fresh Frozen range + 1 degree to the setpoint
high limit setting.
This setting is zone specific.
When programming OptiSet, no range may include
both Frozen and Fresh range setpoints. This value
is the high value of the last frozen range
programmed. The next range programmed will start
at this value + 1-degree depending on the selection
made above. Changing this feature will reset all
OptiSet range values to default.
3-24
02 February 2007
Door Open Forces

Control Rev C000 Door Open Timeout
HMI Rev 6510 Control Rev C000
Choices UNIT NULL, ZONE NULL or LOG HMI Rev 6510
ONLY Choices 1:00 to 4:00 (Hours) in 10 Min
Factory Set LOG ONLY Increments or OFF
Exceptions If OptiSet is active this feature is set Factory Set OFF
from the OptiSet Menu. The optional door switch Exceptions If OptiSet is active this feature is set
must be installed. from the OptiSet Menu. The optional door switch
Description This feature allows the Door Open must be installed. Only appears if the DOOR OPEN
action to be set. The setting applies to all zones FORCES feature is set to ZONE NULL or UNIT
fitted with door switches. If this feature is set UNIT NULL.
NULL the base controller shuts the unit down and Description This feature allows the unit to
logs the door opening 4 seconds after the door is restart if the door open time exceeds the set limit.
opened. If the any zone is in defrost when the door
is opened, the defrost cycle will be completed before Door Open Timeout for the selected range can be
the unit shuts down. set to OFF or for a time limit from 1 to 4 hours, in 10-
minute increments. If set to OFF the unit will remain
If this feature is set to ZONE NULL the base off or in zone null until the door is closed. If a time
controller shuts the zone down and logs the door period is selected the unit will restart and run after
opening 4 seconds after the door is opened. The the time period elapses. It will continue to run even
unit will remain running if any other zone requires if the door is still open.
cooling or heating. If the zone is in defrost when the
door is opened, the defrost cycle will be completed
before the zone shuts down. If all zone door switch Sleep Mode After Pretrip
inputs are open, the unit will be forced to NULL. Control Rev C000
HMI Rev 6510
If this feature is set LOG ONLY the door opening will Choices ENABLED or DISABLED
be logged after 4 seconds but the unit will continue Factory Set DISABLED
to run. Door openings are logged in both the Exceptions
CargoWatch and ServiceWatch data loggers. The
Description If the feature is set ENABLED, the
door switch must be open or closed for 4 seconds
unit will enter Sleep Mode after a Pretrip Test. If the
before the event is logged to prevent false readings.
feature is set DISABLED, the unit will not enter
Sleep Mode after a Pretrip Test.
3-25
02 February 2007
Rail Option Limited Alarm Resets

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED Choices ENABLED or DISABLED
Factory Set DISABLED Factory Set DISABLED
Exceptions The optional fuel level switch must Exceptions Does not appear unless rail is
be installed. disabled and restarts are enabled.
Description If the unit is a rail application, this Description This feature modifies the ability to
feature is ENABLED. When the optional customer repeatedly clear certain alarms from the Main menu
fuel level switch closes (supplies chassis ground to or Operators menu. If these alarms occur
the base controller fuel level input), the unit will enter repeatedly, they may indicate a need for service to
a fuel conserve mode. If the unit is not a rail prevent unit or product damage. These alarms are
application this feature should be DISABLED. as follows:
x Alarm Code 23 Cooling Cycle Fault
x Alarm Code 24 Heating Cycle Fault
Rail Alternate x Alarm Code 32 Refrigeration Capacity Low
Control Rev C000 x Alarm Code 82 High Comp Discharge Temp
HMI Rev 6510
Choices ENABLED or DISABLED Setting this feature to ENABLED will allow the above
Factory Set DISABLED alarms to be cleared conventionally 2 times in a
Exceptions Only available if RAIL OPTION is continuous 12 hour period. If any of these alarms
ENABLED. are cleared more than 2 times in 12 hours, all
Description This feature changes the alerts subsequent occurrences can only be cleared from
criteria, defrost allowed temperature and defrost the Guarded Access Menu. This helps ensure that
termination temperature. It should only be used the alarms receive the attention of service
when specified by the customer. If rail alternate is personnel. The 12 hour timer is reset when any of
enabled a defrost cycle is allowed with an the above alarms is cleared from the Guarded
evaporator coil temperature less than or equal to 55 Access Menu. The 12 hour timer is not reset with a
°F (13°C) and terminates at 70°F (21°C). unit or controller power-down.
Setting this feature DISABLED will allow the above

alarms to be cleared conventionally an unlimited
number of times.
3-26
02 February 2007
Remote Device HMI Control Panel COM 2 Default Baud Rate

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED Choices 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
Factory Set DISABLED 38400, 57600, and 115200 BPS
Exceptions Requires optional device – see Factory Set 9600
below Exceptions
Description Description This feature allows the default baud
Setting this feature to ENABLED allows an external rate to be selected for the HMI Control Panel COM
device, such as TracKing, to start and stop a port 2.
properly equipped unit. Setting this feature to
DISABLED prevents this control. COM port 2 is used by the CargoWatch printer. If
units equipped with both SR-2 and PP-IV M/T
controllers with DAS are used in a customer’s fleet,
HMI Control Panel COM 1 Default Baud Rate the baud rate for COM 2 should be set to 2400. This
Control Rev C000 will allow printing from both the SR-2 and PP-IV
HMI Rev 6510 controllers without changing the printer baud rate.
Choices 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, Note that the printer baud rate must be set to match
38400, 57600, and 115200 BPS the baud rate setting of the Com 2 port.
Factory Set 1200
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the default baud
rate to be selected for the HMI Control Panel COM
port 1.
COM port 1 is used by Wintrac. The setting of this

feature should not be changed.
3-27
02 February 2007
HMI Control Panel COM 3 Default Baud Rate Number of Limited Setpoints
Choices 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, Choices 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4
38400, 57600, and 115200 BPS Factory Set 0
Factory Set 9600 Exceptions
Exceptions Description This feature allows programming of
Description This feature allows the default baud a limited number of predetermined setpoints to be
rate to be selected for the HMI Control Panel COM made available to the driver. From 1 to 4 setpoints
port 3. can be programmed. Setting this feature to [0]
results in normal operation with all setpoints
COM port 3 is used by R:COM or other Telematics available from the setting of Setpoint Low Limit to
devices. The setting of this feature should not be Setpoint High Limit.
changed.
As an example, if this feature is set to [3] then only
three setpoints can be programmed. If the Limited
Setpoints are set to -10°F, 35°F and 50°F then
pressing the Up or Down keys when selecting a
setpoint will scroll between these three setpoints
only. No other setpoints are available.
This feature is not zone specific. The Limited

Setpoints selected are available in all zones.
3-28
02 February 2007
Limited Setpoint # 1 Limited Setpoint # 3

Choices From Setpoint Low limit to Setpoint Choices From Setpoint Low limit to Setpoint
High Limit High Limit
Factory Set -13°F (-25°C) Factory Set 37°F (3°C)
Exceptions Only available if Number of Limited Exceptions Only available if Number of Limited
Setpoints is set greater that 0. Setpoints is set greater that 2.
Description The Number of Limited Setpoints Description The Number of Limited Setpoints
feature above determines the number of limited feature above determines the number of limited
setpoints allowed (from 1 to 4). This feature allows setpoints allowed (from 1 to 4). This feature allows
the first limited setpoint to be programmed. It can be the third limited setpoint to be programmed. It can
set to any temperature from Setpoint Low Limit to be set to any temperature from Setpoint Low Limit to
Setpoint High Limit. Setpoint High Limit.
Limited Setpoint # 2 Limited Setpoint # 4

Factory Set 32°F (0°C) Factory Set 55°F (13°C)
the second limited setpoint to be programmed. It the fourth limited setpoint to be programmed. It can
can be set to any temperature from Setpoint Low be set to any temperature from Setpoint Low Limit to
Limit to Setpoint High Limit. Setpoint High Limit.
3-29
02 February 2007
Demand Defrost on Temp Rises Extended ServiceWatch Logging

Choices Disabled, 5°F /Minute (2.8°C)/Minute Choices Enabled or Disabled
to 12°F/Minute (6.7°C)/Minute Factory Set Disabled
Factory Set Disabled Exceptions
Exceptions Description Enabling this feature forces the
Description This feature will force a demand ServiceWatch data logger to record a timed log
defrost in a zone if the temperature rises rapidly. every time a zone operating mode changes.
This rapid temperature rise is typically caused when
a zone access door is opened. Enabling this feature allows for the logging of
additional unit operating data. However, due to the
The programmable temperature rise settings are additional logging, the data logger memory will be
from 5°F (2.8°C) per minute to 12°F (6.7°C) per filled faster. If the memory is filled, subsequent logs
minute in one degree increments. If the temperature will be written over the oldest data in the memory. If
rises more than the programmed rise a demand old data is written over by new data, the old data
defrost is forced in that zone. information is permanently lost.
3-30
02 February 2007
Main Menu Configuration Menu

The Main Menu Configuration Menu determines if Add Sleep to Mode Menu
the Keypad Lockout, Sleep Mode and Single Zone Control Rev C000
Control menus are visible in the Main Menu | Mode HMI Rev 6510
Menu. These features are set to factory defaults Choices Enabled or Disabled
when shipped, but can easily be changed to suit the Factory Set Disabled
end user’s needs. Exceptions
Description Sleep Mode allows the operator to
place the unit in Sleep Mode from the Mode Menu.
Add Keypad Lockout to Mode Menu
Control Rev C000 Setting this feature Enabled adds the Sleep Mode
HMI Rev 6510 feature to the Mode Menu.
Choices Enabled or Disabled
Factory Set Disabled Setting this feature Disabled removes the Sleep
Exceptions Mode feature from the Mode Menu.
Description Keypad Lockout allows the operator

to lock the keypad to prevent tampering. Pressing
any soft key for 5 seconds will unlock the keypad.
Setting this feature Enabled adds the Keypad

Lockout feature to the Mode Menu.
Setting this feature Disabled turns the Keypad

Lockout feature off and removes the feature from the
Mode Menu.
3-31
02 February 2007
Show Single Zone Control on Mode Menu

Control Rev C000
HMI Rev 6510
Factory Set Disabled
Exceptions
Description Single Zone Control allows a multi-
temp unit to be placed in Single Temperature
operation. Typically the bulkheads are taken down
and the entire trailer is operated in the same manner
as a single temperature unit. All evaporators will be
operated in the same mode, (except for defrost)
when this mode is active. The unit will control the
entire trailer to a single temperature when this mode
is active.
Setting this feature Enabled places Single Zone

Control in the Mode Menu.
Setting this feature Disabled turns the Single Zone

Control feature off and removes the feature from the
Mode Menu.
3-32
02 February 2007
Alarm Display Menu

The Alarm Menu allows the technician to display and
clear any existing alarms except alarms that auto-
clear only. See Section 4 for operating details. If an
alarm condition still exists when the alarm is cleared,
the alarm will be set again as soon as the alarm
condition is detected.

Section 4 of this manual.
A list of Alarm Codes including diagnostic

procedures for each code is presented in Section 5
of this manual.
3-33
02 February 2007
Hourmeter Setup Menu

The Hourmeter Setup Menu allows the unit Total Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours
hourmeters to be configured to customer Control Rev C000
requirements. There are two sub-menus under the HMI Rev 6510
Hourmeter Setup Menu. Choices OFF, 1 to 99,999
Factory Set OFF
Programmable Hourmeter Sub-menu Exceptions If a time limit is set and exceeded
The hourmeters listed below allow a time limit to be then Alarm Code 132 will be set as a stored alarm.
established for each programmable Hourmeter. Description Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours
These time limits are defined by the customer and is one of two hourmeters that track the total amount
are typically used as maintenance reminders. With of time the unit has run in both diesel and electric
the exception of Controller Power On Hours and mode. If a time limit is set and exceeded then Alarm
Pretrip Reminder Hours there are two hourmeters Code 132 will be set as a stored alarm.
for each feature to allow two different maintenance
intervals to be set. This feature sets the meter limits for this
programmable hourmeter. The default setting is
The Program Hourmeter Sub-menu is used to set OFF. Time limits start at 100 hours and can be
and clear the adjustable time limits for each decreased to 1 and then OFF or increased to a
Hourmeter, as required by a customer’s maximum of 99,999 hours.
maintenance program. The default time limit for all
hourmeters is 100 hours. The hourmeters appear in
the order shown here.
3-34
02 February 2007
Total Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours Controller Power On Hours

Choices OFF, 1 to 99,999 Choices OFF, 1 to 99,999
Factory Set OFF Factory Set OFF
Exceptions If a time limit is set and exceeded Exceptions If a time limit is set and exceeded
then Alarm Code 133 will be set as a stored alarm. then Alarm Code 134 will be set as a stored alarm.
Description Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours Description Controller Power On Hours is the
is one of two hourmeters that track the total amount total amount of time the controller has been turned
of time the unit has run in both diesel and electric on. If a time limit is set and exceeded then Alarm
mode. If a time limit is set and exceeded then Alarm Code 134 will be set as a stored alarm.
Code 133 will be set as a stored alarm.
This feature sets the meter limits for this
This feature sets the meter limits for this programmable hourmeter. The default setting is
programmable hourmeter. The default setting is OFF. Time limits start at 100 hours and can be
OFF. Time limits start at 100 hours and can be decreased to 1 and then OFF or increased to a
decreased to 1 and then OFF or increased to a maximum of 99,999 hours.
maximum of 99,999 hours.
3-35
02 February 2007
Pretrip Reminder Hours Engine Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours

Description Controller Power On Hours is the Description Engine Run Time Reminder #1
total amount of time since the last Pretrip Test was Hours is one of two hourmeters that track the total
performed. If a time limit is set and exceeded then amount of time the unit has run in diesel mode. If a
Alarm Code 64 will be set as a stored alarm. time limit is set and exceeded then Alarm Code 128
will be set as a stored alarm.
programmable hourmeter. The default setting is This feature sets the meter limits for this
OFF. Time limits start at 100 hours and can be programmable hourmeter. The default setting is
decreased to 1 and then OFF or increased to a OFF. Time limits start at 100 hours and can be
maximum of 99,999 hours. decreased to 1 and then OFF or increased to a
3-36
02 February 2007
Engine Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours Electric Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours
Description Engine Run Time Reminder #2 Only appears if the unit is configured as being
Hours is one of two hourmeters that track the total equipped with optional electric standby.
amount of time the unit has run in diesel mode. If a Description Electric Run Time Reminder #1
time limit is set and exceeded then Alarm Code 129 Hours is one of two hourmeters that track the total
will be set as a stored alarm. amount of time the unit has run in electric mode. If a
time limit is set and exceeded then Alarm Code 130
This feature sets the meter limits for this will be set as a stored alarm.
OFF. Time limits start at 100 hours and can be This feature sets the meter limits for this
decreased to 1 and then OFF or increased to a programmable hourmeter. The default setting is
maximum of 99,999 hours. OFF. Time limits start at 100 hours and can be
decreased to 1 and then OFF or increased to a
3-37
02 February 2007
Electric Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours

Control Rev C000
HMI Rev 6510
Choices OFF, 1 to 99,999
Factory Set OFF
Exceptions If a time limit is set and exceeded
then Alarm Code 131 will be set as a stored alarm.
Only appears if the unit is configured as being
equipped with optional electric standby.
Description Electric Run Time Reminder #2
Hours is one of two hourmeters that track the total
amount of time the unit has run in electric mode. If a
time limit is set and exceeded then Alarm Code 131
will be set as a stored alarm.

OFF. Time limits start at 100 hours and can be
decreased to 1 and then OFF or increased to a
3-38
02 February 2007
Viewable Hourmeter Setup Sub-menu Total Hours

The hourmeters can also be programmed to be Control Rev C000
visible or hidden to the operator on the Main Menu. HMI Rev 6510
The hourmeters continue to accumulate time even if Choices Enabled or Disabled
the hourmeter view is hidden. Factory Set Disabled
Exceptions
If an hourmeter view is set On, then that hourmeter Description The setting of this feature
will appear in the Hourmeter menu in both the Main determines if the Total Hours hourmeter can be
Menu and Maintenance Menu. If the hourmeter viewed from the Main Menu. If the hourmeter is
view is not turned on, the hourmeter is only viewable Enabled it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it
from the Maintenance Menu. is Disabled it cannot be viewed from the Main Menu
but is visible from the Maintenance Menu.
With Model 30 units the default setting for the
Engine Hours hourmeter is Enabled. The default
setting of all other hourmeters is Disabled.
Total Run Time Hours (If Model 50)
Control Rev C000
With Model 50 units the default setting for the Total
HMI Rev 6510
Run Time Hours, Engine Hours and Electric Run
Hours hourmeters is Enabled. The default setting of
Factory Set Enabled if Model 50
all other hourmeters is Disabled.
Exceptions Only appears if the unit is
configured as being equipped with optional electric
The hourmeters appear in the order shown here.
standby.
Description The setting of this feature
determines if the Total Run Time Hours hourmeter
can be viewed from the Main Menu. If the
hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed from the Main
Menu. If it is Disabled it cannot be viewed from the
Main Menu but is visible from the Maintenance
Menu.
3-39
02 February 2007
Engine Hours Zone 1 Run Time Hours

Choices Enabled or Disabled Choices Enabled or Disabled
Factory Set Enabled Factory Set Disabled
Exceptions Exceptions
Description The setting of this feature Description The setting of this feature
determines if the Engine Hours hourmeter can be determines if the Zone 1 Run Time Hours hourmeter
viewed from the Main Menu. If the hourmeter is can be viewed from the Main Menu. If the
Enabled it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed from the Main
is Disabled it cannot be viewed from the Main Menu Menu. If it is Disabled it cannot be viewed from the
but is visible from the Maintenance Menu. Main Menu but is visible from the Maintenance
Menu.
Electric Run Hours (If Model 50)

Control Rev C000 Zone 2 Run Time Hours
HMI Rev 6510 Control Rev C000
Choices Enabled or Disabled HMI Rev 6510
Factory Set Enabled if Model 50 Choices Enabled or Disabled
Exceptions Only appears if the unit is Factory Set Disabled
configured as being equipped with optional electric Exceptions
standby. Description The setting of this feature
Description The setting of this feature determines if the Zone 2 Run Time Hours hourmeter
determines if the Electric Run Hours hourmeter can can be viewed from the Main Menu. If the
be viewed from the Main Menu. If the hourmeter is hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed from the Main
Enabled it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it Menu. If it is Disabled it cannot be viewed from the
is Disabled it cannot be viewed from the Main Menu Main Menu but is visible from the Maintenance
but is visible from the Maintenance Menu. Menu.
3-40
02 February 2007
Zone 3 Run Time Hours Total Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours

Choices Enabled or Disabled Choices Enabled or Disabled
Factory Set Disabled Factory Set Disabled
Exceptions Only appears if the unit is Exceptions
configured as being equipped with 3 zones. Description The setting of this feature
Description The setting of this feature determines if the Total Run Time Reminder # 2
determines if the Zone 3 Run Time Hours hourmeter Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the Main
can be viewed from the Main Menu. If the Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed
hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed from the Main from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled it cannot be
Menu. If it is Disabled it cannot be viewed from the viewed from the Main Menu but is visible from the
Main Menu but is visible from the Maintenance Maintenance Menu.
Menu.
Controller Power On Hours

Total Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours Control Rev C000
Control Rev C000 HMI Rev 6510
HMI Rev 6510 Choices Enabled or Disabled
Choices Enabled or Disabled Factory Set Disabled
Factory Set Disabled Exceptions
Exceptions Description The setting of this feature
Description The setting of this feature determines if the Controller Power On Hours
determines if the Total Run Time Reminder # 1 hourmeter can be viewed from the Main Menu. If
Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the Main the hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed from the
Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed Main Menu. If it is Disabled it cannot be viewed
from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled it cannot be from the Main Menu but is visible from the
viewed from the Main Menu but is visible from the Maintenance Menu.
Maintenance Menu.
3-41
02 February 2007
Pretrip Reminder Hours Engine Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours

Choices Enabled or Disabled Choices Disabled
Description The setting of this feature Description The setting of this feature
determines if the Pretrip Reminder Hours hourmeter determines if the Engine Run Time Reminder # 1
can be viewed from the Main Menu. If the Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the Main
hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed
Menu. If it is Disabled it cannot be viewed from the from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled it cannot be
Main Menu but is visible from the Maintenance viewed from the Main Menu but is visible from the
Menu. Maintenance Menu.
Engine Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours Electric Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours
Choices Disabled Choices Disabled
Exceptions Exceptions Only appears if the unit is
Description The setting of this feature configured as being equipped with optional electric
determines if the Engine Run Time Reminder # 1 standby.
Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the Main Description The setting of this feature
Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed determines if the Electric Run Time Reminder # 1
from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled it cannot be Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the Main
viewed from the Main Menu but is visible from the Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed
Maintenance Menu. from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled it cannot be
viewed from the Main Menu but is visible from the
Maintenance Menu.
3-42
02 February 2007
Electric Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours

Control Rev C000
HMI Rev 6510
Choices Disabled
Factory Set Disabled
Exceptions Only appears if the unit is
configured as being equipped with optional electric
standby.
Description The setting of this feature
determines if the Electric Run Time Reminder # 2
Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the Main
Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed
from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled it cannot be
viewed from the Main Menu but is visible from the
Maintenance Menu.
3-43
02 February 2007
Sensor Calibration Menu

The grade number for graded sensors must be set Zone 1 Return Air Sensor Grade
correctly for the unit to operate properly. Sensor Control Rev C000
grades were defined such that a sensor grade 5H HMI Rev 6510
does not exist. The default setting for a new Choices 1L thru 9H
controller or after a cold start is 5H. This serves as Factory Set 5H
a warning that the sensor grade is not set. The Exceptions
default grade of 5H is not a valid grade and will not Description This feature is used to set the
be stamped on any sensor. sensor grade for the Zone 1 Return Air Sensor.
If a sensor grade for a return air or discharge air The default setting for a new base controller or after
sensor is set to grade 5H, the alarm code for that a ServiceWatch base controller cold start is 5H.
sensor and Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grade Not Set This serves as a warning that the sensor grade is
will occur. not set. The default grade of 5H is not a valid grade
and will not be stamped on any sensor. If a sensor
Spare Sensors 1 thru 3 are graded sensors but an grade for a return air or discharge air sensor is set to
alarm code is not set if this sensor grade is set to grade 5H, the alarm code for that sensor and Alarm
5H. Code 92 Sensor Grade Not Set will occur. Alarm
Code 92 is not set if a Spare Sensor is set to 5H.
NOTE: To insure proper operation the grades must
be properly set to match the actual sensor grades to To insure proper operation the grades must be
prevent false alarm codes. Exercise care to properly properly set to match the actual sensor grades to
identify the sensor grades. The best way to prevent nuisance alarm codes. Exercise care to
positively identify the sensor grade is to physically properly identify the sensor grades. The best way to
check the sensor grade stamped on each graded positively identify the sensor grade is by physically
sensor. checking the sensor grade stamped on each graded
sensor.
The Sensor Calibration Menu allows the operator to
select the correct grade for all graded sensors.
Sensor grades range from 1L through 9H.
The sensors on a trailer multi-temperature unit

appear in the order shown here.
3-44
02 February 2007
Zone 1 Discharge Air Sensor Grade Zone 2 Return Air Sensor Grade
Choices 1L thru 9H Choices 1L thru 9H
Factory Set 5H Factory Set 5H
Description This feature is used to set the Description This feature is used to set the
sensor grade for the Zone 1 Discharge Air Sensor. sensor grade for the Zone 2 Return Air Sensor.
The default setting for a new base controller or after The default setting for a new base controller or after
a ServiceWatch base controller cold start is 5H. a ServiceWatch base controller cold start is 5H.
This serves as a warning that the sensor grade is This serves as a warning that the sensor grade is
not set. The default grade of 5H is not a valid grade not set. The default grade of 5H is not a valid grade
and will not be stamped on any sensor. If a sensor and will not be stamped on any sensor. If a sensor
grade for a return air or discharge air sensor is set to grade for a return air or discharge air sensor is set to
grade 5H, the alarm code for that sensor and Alarm grade 5H, the alarm code for that sensor and Alarm
Code 92 Sensor Grade Not Set will occur. Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grade Not Set will occur. Alarm
Code 92 is not set if a Spare Sensor is set to 5H. Code 92 is not set if a Spare Sensor is set to 5H.
To insure proper operation the grades must be To insure proper operation the grades must be
properly set to match the actual sensor grades to properly set to match the actual sensor grades to
prevent nuisance alarm codes. Exercise care to prevent nuisance alarm codes. Exercise care to
properly identify the sensor grades. The best way to properly identify the sensor grades. The best way to
positively identify the sensor grade is by physically positively identify the sensor grade is by physically
checking the sensor grade stamped on each graded checking the sensor grade stamped on each graded
sensor. sensor.
3-45
02 February 2007
Zone 2 Discharge Air Sensor Grade Zone 3 Discharge Air Sensor Grade
Exceptions Exceptions Only appears if the unit is
Description This feature is used to set the configured as being equipped with 3 zones.
sensor grade for the Zone 2 Discharge Air Sensor. Description This feature is used to set the
sensor grade for the Zone 3 Return Air Sensor.
The default setting for a new base controller or after
a ServiceWatch base controller cold start is 5H. The default setting for a new base controller or after
This serves as a warning that the sensor grade is a ServiceWatch base controller cold start is 5H.
not set. The default grade of 5H is not a valid grade This serves as a warning that the sensor grade is
and will not be stamped on any sensor. If a sensor not set. The default grade of 5H is not a valid grade
grade for a return air or discharge air sensor is set to and will not be stamped on any sensor. If a sensor
grade 5H, the alarm code for that sensor and Alarm grade for a return air or discharge air sensor is set to
Code 92 Sensor Grade Not Set will occur. Alarm grade 5H, the alarm code for that sensor and Alarm
Code 92 is not set if a Spare Sensor is set to 5H. Code 92 Sensor Grade Not Set will occur. Alarm
Code 92 is not set if a Spare Sensor is set to 5H.
To insure proper operation the grades must be
properly set to match the actual sensor grades to To insure proper operation the grades must be
prevent nuisance alarm codes. Exercise care to properly set to match the actual sensor grades to
properly identify the sensor grades. The best way to prevent nuisance alarm codes. Exercise care to
positively identify the sensor grade is by physically properly identify the sensor grades. The best way to
checking the sensor grade stamped on each graded positively identify the sensor grade is by physically
sensor. checking the sensor grade stamped on each graded
sensor.
3-46
02 February 2007
Zone 3 Discharge Air Sensor Grade Spare 1 Sensor Grade

Exceptions Only appears if the unit is Exceptions If the optional Spare 1 Sensor is not
configured as being equipped with 3 zones. present this feature need not be set.
sensor grade for the Zone 3 Discharge Air Sensor. sensor grade for the Spare 1 Sensor.
sensor. sensor.
3-47
02 February 2007
Spare 2 Sensor Grade Spare 3 Sensor Grade

Exceptions If the optional Spare 2 Sensor is not Exceptions If the optional Spare 3 Sensor is not
present this feature need not be set. present this feature need not be set.
sensor grade for the Spare 2 Sensor. sensor grade for the Spare 3 Sensor.
sensor. sensor.
3-48
02 February 2007
Cycle Sentry Setup Menu

The Cycle Sentry Menu allows the unit defaults for
Cycle Sentry Null and Sleep Null on battery charge
current and unit restart on battery voltage to be
modified as required by the customer.
Cycle Sentry Amps Level

Control Rev C000
HMI Rev 6510
Choices 2A to 8A in 1A increments
Factory Set 5A
Exceptions
Description When operating in Cycle Sentry or
Sleep mode the unit will automatically run to charge
the battery, until the charging current falls below this
set limit. This occurs even if cooling, heating or
defrosting is not required.
Battery Sentry Voltage Level

Control Rev C000
HMI Rev 6510
Choices 11.8V to 12.6V in 0.1V increments
Factory Set 12.2V
Exceptions
Description When operating in Cycle Sentry or
Sleep mode the controller will monitor battery
voltage and restart the unit to charge the battery, if
the battery voltage falls below this set limit. This
occurs even if cooling, heating or defrosting is not
required.
3-49
02 February 2007
Defrost Setup Menu

The Defrost Setup Menu allows the defrost cycle to Defrost Interval In Range with Frozen Setpoint
be configured for maximum performance. Control Rev C000

HMI Rev 6510
Defrost Interval In Range with Fresh Setpoint Choices 2, 4, 6, 8 or 12 Hours
Control Rev C000 Factory Set 6 Hours
HMI Rev 6510 Exceptions
Choices 2, 4, 6, 8 or 12 Hours Description This feature selects the timed
Factory Set 6 Hours interval between defrost cycles with Frozen range
Exceptions setpoints when the temperature is in range. This
Description This feature selects the timed setting applies to all zones.
interval between defrost cycles with Fresh range

setpoints when the temperature is in range. This
setting applies to all zones. Defrost Interval Not In Range with Frozen
Setpoint
Control Rev C000
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Fresh Setpoint HMI Rev 6510
Control Rev C000 Choices 2, 4, 6, 8 or 12 Hours
HMI Rev 6510 Factory Set 6 Hours
Choices 2, 4, 6, 8 or 12 Hours Exceptions
Factory Set 4 Hours Description This feature selects the timed
Exceptions interval between defrost cycles with Frozen range
Description This feature selects the timed setpoints when the temperature is not in range. This
interval between defrost cycles with Fresh range setting applies to all zones.
setpoints when the temperature is not in range. This

setting applies to all zones.
3-50
02 February 2007
Maximum Defrost Duration

Control Rev C000
HMI Rev 6510
Choices 30 or 45 Minutes
Factory Set 45 Minutes
Exceptions
Description This feature selects the maximum
time the unit can remain in a defrost cycle. A defrost
cycle normally terminates when the evaporator coil
temperature reaches 58°F (14°C). If rail alternate is
enabled a defrost cycle terminates at 70°F (21°C). If
the evaporator temperature does not reach this
temperature, the defrost cycle will terminate after the
elapsed time selected here.
3-51
02 February 2007
Language Setup Menu

This menu allows the display language to be There is an Enable Language screen for each
selected, as required. When a language is selected language included in the installed HMI software
all subsequent displays are in that language. version. English is included in all language sets and
is factory set as Enabled. Only enabled languages
The languages available are dependent on the will appear in the Main Menu Language selections.
software revision in the HMI control panel. Only one All languages other than English are factory set as
of the three software revisions can be installed, and Disabled. If only one language is enabled the
only the languages in that revision are available. Language selection screen does not appear in the
Other than language support, there is no difference Main Menu.
between the software revisions. English is included

in all HMI software versions. Enable Language
Control Rev C000
HMI control panel software revisions support the HMI Rev 6510
languages shown in the table below. Choices See Language Support Table
Factory Set English only
Software Revision Language Support Exceptions
Revision 65xx Revision 66xx Revision 67xx Description This feature allows any or all of the
English English English included languages to be enabled. Only enabled
Spanish Russian Japanese languages will appear in the Operators Language
French Polish Menu. All languages other than English are factory
German Hungarian set as Disabled. If only one language is enabled the
Italian Romanian Language Menu screen will not appear in the Main
Dutch Bulgarian Menu.
Portuguese Czech
Greek Danish
Turkish Swedish
Hebrew Norwegian
Arabic Finnish
3-52
02 February 2007
Access Code Setup Menu

This menu allows an Access code to be required for
entry to the Guarded Access Menu. If a code is
selected, an access code challenge will appear
when entering the Guarded Access menu. If the
correct code is not entered access is denied.
A technician can bypass an unknown security

code by entering “4444” and pressing the Enter
key.
Enter Access Code

The + and – keys are used to enter the desired
Access Code. The code should be recorded for
future use.
3-53
02 February 2007
OptiSet Menu
The OptiSet™ Temperature Management System x Ranges are programmed from the coldest
allows up to ten different temperature ranges to be range to the warmest range. If ranges have
defined and tailored for maximum operating been programmed and any range is
efficiency, as determined by customer load subsequently changed, the range that was
requirements. The term “OptiSet” refers to both the changed and all warmer ranges are reset to
programmable ranges and the features that can be defaults.
tailored as shown below.
OptiSet is programmed using the HMI Control Panel Programming OptiSet Features
keypad. The OptiSet features are programmed from the HMI
Control Panel OptiSet Menu. The flowchart on the
next page illustrates the features and menu flow.
OptiSet Reset Each feature is discussed fully in the following
OptiSet features may be reset to default settings pages.
several different ways. These should be considered

when changing OptiSet settings, to be certain that all Feature range values are programmable when
ranges are set as desired. required. Only valid programmable features will be
displayed as determined by the setting of Economy
x If any OptiSet features have been previously Mode, Cycle Sentry Mode and Continuous Mode. If
set, an OptiSet Reset is provided at the a feature is not allowed, it will not be displayed.
beginning of the OptiSet menu to return all

settings to the default values. If this OptiSet
Reset feature is used, all OptiSet settings
are returned to factory defaults.
x If any of the four OptiSet global features

(Temperature Units, Setpoint High Limit,
Setpoint Low Limit, and Fresh Frozen
Range) are changed, all OptiSet settings are
also returned to default settings.
3-54
02 February 2007
OptiSet Feature Flowchart
OptiSet
(in GA Menu)
Select
Reset
(only if OptiSet
is active)
Global Settings Individual Range Settings
Number of Cycle Sentry

Temperature
Limited Range Limits Run Fans in
Units
Setpoints Null
Zone 1 Limited Continuous

OptiSet Range
Setpoint High Setpoint #1 Door Open
0 thru 9
Limit XX Degrees Forces

Cycle Sentry
Setpoint Low Setpoint #2 Door Open
On / Off
Limit XX Degrees Timeout

Continuous
Setpoint High Setpoint #3 Run Fans in
On / Off
Limit XX Degrees Null
Zone 2 Limited Cycle Sentry

Setpoint Low Setpoint #4 Null Restart
Limit XX Degrees Temperature
Zone 3 Cycle Sentry

Fresh Frozen
Setpoint High Door Open
Range
Limit Forces
Zone 3 Cycle Sentry

Setpoint Low Door Open
Limit Timeout
19 July 2006
3-55
02 February 2007
OptiSet Global Features

Setpoint High Limit (for the indicated Zone)
The global features listed below affect all other Control Rev C000
OptiSet ranges and settings. If any of these are HMI Rev 6510
changed, all existing OptiSet programmable settings Choices Maximum is 90°F (32°C)
are returned to the default settings. Minimum is Setpoint Low Limit
Factory Set 80°F (27°C)
Note: Some of these settings are available in the Exceptions If OptiSet is active this feature is set
HMI Programmable Features Menu. If OptiSet has from the OptiSet Menu. The Setpoint High Limit
been programmed, then the Programmable setting selected is used for all ranges in the
Features screen will display “Programmed in indicated zone.
OptiSet”. Programming of the feature will not be Setpoint High Limit allows the upper setpoint limit to
allowed in the Programmable Features menu. be set to a maximum of 90°F (32°C) in one degree
increments. The minimum setting is determined by
x Temperature Units for all zones the setting of Setpoint Low Limit. If the driver
x Zone Setpoint High Limit for each zone attempts to select a setpoint higher than the Setpoint
x Zone Setpoint Low Limit for each zone High Limit, the display will show Setpoint Limit,
x Limited Setpoints for all Zones indicating that the selected Setpoint High Limit has
x Fresh Frozen Range for all zones been reached. Setting Setpoint High Limit and the
x Running Fans in Null Setpoint Low Limit to the same temperature results
in a single setpoint temperature available.
Temperature Units (for all zones) If the Limited Setpoint feature is enabled this setting
C000 is not used.

Control Rev
HMI Rev 6510
This setting is zone specific. If this setting is
Choices Fahrenheit or Celsius
changed all zone settings are returned to the default
Factory Set Fahrenheit
settings.
Exceptions
Description The controller can be set to display
temperatures in either degrees FAHRENHEIT or
degrees CELSIUS. Changing this feature will reset
all OptiSet range values to default..
3-56
02 February 2007
Setpoint Low Limit (for the indicated zone) Number of Limited Setpoints (for all zones)
Choices Minimum is –25°F (-32°C) Choices 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4
Maximum is Setpoint High Limit Factory Set 0
Factory Set -25°F (-32°C) Exceptions
Exceptions If OptiSet is active this feature is set Description This feature allows a limited number
from the OptiSet Menu. The Setpoint Low Limit of predetermined setpoints to be made available to
setting selected is used for all ranges in the the driver. From 1 to 4 setpoints can be
indicated zone. programmed. Setting this feature to [0] results in
Description The Setpoint Low Limit allows the normal operation with all setpoints available from the
lower setpoint limit to be set to a minimum of -25°F setting of Setpoint Low Limit to Setpoint High Limit.
(-32°C) in one degree increments. The maximum
setting available is determined by the setting of As an example, if this feature is set to [3] then only
Setpoint High Limit. If the driver attempts to select a three setpoints can be programmed. If the Limited
setpoint lower than the Setpoint Low Limit, the Setpoint features below are set to -10°F, 35°F and
display will show Setpoint Limit, indicating that the 50°F then pressing the Up or Down keys when
selected Setpoint Low Limit has been reached. selecting a setpoint will scroll between these three
Setting the Setpoint High Limit and the Setpoint Low setpoints only. No other setpoints are available.
Limit to the same temperature results in a single
setpoint temperature available. This feature is not zone specific. The Limited
Setpoints selected are available in all zones.
If the Limited Setpoint feature is enabled this setting
is not used.
This setting is zone specific. If this setting is

changed all zone settings are returned to the default
settings
3-57
02 February 2007
Limited Setpoint # 1 (for all zones) Limited Setpoint # 3 (for all zones)
Factory Set -13°F (-25°C) Factory Set 37°F (3°C)
the first limited setpoint to be programmed. It can be the third limited setpoint to be programmed. It can
set to any temperature from Setpoint Low Limit to be set to any temperature from Setpoint Low Limit to
Setpoint High Limit. Setpoint High Limit.
Limited Setpoint # 2 (for all zones) Limited Setpoint # 4 (for all zones)
Factory Set 32°F (0°C) Factory Set 55°F (13°C)
the second limited setpoint to be programmed. It the fourth limited setpoint to be programmed. It can
can be set to any temperature from Setpoint Low be set to any temperature from Setpoint Low Limit to
Limit to Setpoint High Limit. Setpoint High Limit.
3-58
02 February 2007
Fresh Frozen Range (for all zones)

Control Rev C000
HMI Rev 6510
Choices 24°F (-4°C) or 15°F (-9°C)
Factory Set 15°F (-9°C)
Exceptions
Description One set of general control
specifications is used when operating in the Fresh
range, and another set of general operating
specifications is used when operating in the Frozen
range. This feature allows the line between Fresh
and Frozen ranges to be selected as either 15°F (-
9°C) or 24°F (-4°C). All setpoints less than or equal
to this value will be treated as frozen ranges. All
setpoints greater than this value will be treated as
Fresh ranges.
The Frozen setpoint range is from the limit of the

Setpoint Limit Low setting to the Fresh Frozen range
setting. The Fresh setpoint range is from the limit of
the Fresh Frozen range + 1 degree to the setpoint
high limit setting.
When programming OptiSet, no range may include

both Frozen and Fresh range setpoints. This value
is the high value of the last frozen range
programmed. The next range programmed will start
at this value + 1-degree depending on the selection
made above. Changing this feature will reset all
OptiSet range values to default.
3-59
02 February 2007
OptiSet Range Limits and Range

The operation of each of these ranges can be
Selection
individually customized for optimum performance as
determined by user requirements. Changing any
These features allow the OptiSet ranges to be
range temperature limit will void all existing range
defined and selected.
settings above that range and will reset that range
and all ranges above it to the default configuration.
Up to ten programmable ranges can be defined as
follows:
x All ranges must fall between the settings of

Setpoint Low Limit and Setpoint High Limit.
x The first range starts at the setting of

Setpoint Limit Low.
x The last range ends at the setting of

Setpoint Limit High.
x The next range starts at the high

temperature of the previous range plus one
full degree.
x No range can include both fresh and frozen

setpoints. The last frozen range ends at the
setting of Fresh Frozen Range. The first
fresh range starts at the setting of Fresh
Frozen Range plus one full degree.
x One frozen range and one fresh range are

set from the factory or after a cold start.
3-60
02 February 2007
Range Limits (for all zones) OptiSet Range (for all zones)
Choices Up to 10 ranges, from 0 through 9 Choices Up to 10 ranges, from 0 through 9
Factory Set Range 0 is from -25qF (-32°C) to Factory Set
24°F (-4°C) Exceptions
Range 1 is from 25°F (-3°C) to 90°F Description This feature selects one of the
(32°C) ranges established by Range Limits (above) to be
Exceptions programmed. The ranges available are as
Description Up to 10 ranges (numbered from 0 determined by the setting of the Range Limits
to 9) can be programmed. Each range is defined by feature above. There can be up to 10 ranges. The
a minimum and maximum setpoint temperature. first range to be programmed is Range 0.
The first range programmed automatically starts at
the setting of Setpoint Limit Low. The last range
programmed automatically ends at the setting of
Setpoint Limit High. All ranges programmed must
be completely above or below the setting of
Fresh/Frozen range. No range can contain both
Fresh and Frozen setpoints. When programming
ranges, the next range automatically begins one full
degree (F or C) higher than the last range
programmed. Changing any range temperature limit
will void all existing range settings above that range
and will reset that range and all ranges above it to
the default configuration. The default setting is
Range 0 (Frozen) and Range 1 (Fresh).
3-61
02 February 2007
Range Mode Settings

Cycle Sentry Mode (for selected range)
These features allow the desired operating modes to Control Rev C000
be established for each range. The available modes HMI Rev 6510
are selected for the range being programmed. Choices Off or On
Cycle Sentry Mode and Continuous Mode are Factory Set On
available. Either of these modes can be turned on Exceptions
or off for each range, but either Cycle Sentry or Description Cycle Sentry Mode automatically
Continuous must be turned on. If more than one starts the unit when cooling, heating or defrosting is
mode is available in a range, it can be selected required and stops the unit when all requirements
using the Mode Menu or the Mode key. are satisfied. In Diesel Mode operation the unit also
starts and stops as necessary to keep the engine
The custom features for each range are determined warm and the unit battery charged. In Electric Mode
by the modes selected for that range. operation the unit starts and stops as necessary to
keep the unit battery charged.
x Cycle Sentry Mode A number of Cycle
Sentry features can be customized if Cycle This feature allows Cycle Sentry Mode to be turned
Sentry mode is allowed. These features are On or Off for the selected range. If both Cycle
the same for both Frozen and Fresh ranges. Sentry and Continuous are turned On, then they are
selectable using the Mode key or the Main Menu on
x Continuous Mode A number of the HMI Control Panel.
Continuous Mode features can be
customized. These features are different If Cycle Sentry is set On the Cycle Sentry OptiSet
with Frozen and Fresh ranges. custom features are available. The Cycle Sentry
OptiSet custom features are the same for Fresh and
Frozen ranges. These features are shown on the
following pages.
3-62
02 February 2007
Continuous Mode (for selected range)

Control Rev C000
HMI Rev 6510
Choices Off or On
Factory Set On
Exceptions
Description In Continuous Mode the unit is
started and continues to run, even if all requirements
are satisfied. This provides constant airflow over
and around the load.
This feature allows Continuous Mode to be turned

On or Off for the selected range. If both Cycle
Sentry and Continuous are turned On, they are
selectable using the Mode key or Mode Menu on the
HMI Control Panel.
If Continuous is set On the Continuous OptiSet

custom features are available. The Continuous
OptiSet custom features are different for Fresh and
Frozen ranges.
3-63
02 February 2007
Cycle Sentry Mode OptiSet Features

The features shown below can be modified in Cycle Cycle Sentry Door Open Forces (for selected
Sentry Mode operation. They are the same for range)
Frozen and Fresh ranges. Control Rev C000

HMI Rev 6510
Cycle Sentry Null Restart Temperature (for Choices UNIT NULL, ZONE NULL or LOG
selected range) ONLY
Control Rev C000 Factory Set LOG ONLY
HMI Rev 6510 Exceptions The optional door switch must be

Choices 5.0°F (2.7°C) to 15.0°F (8.5°C) in 1q installed.
increments Description This feature allows the Door Open
Factory Set 5.0°F (2.8°C) action to be set. The setting applies to all zones
Exceptions fitted with door switches. If this feature is set UNIT
Description This feature determines the number NULL the base controller shuts the unit down and
of degrees above setpoint that the temperature must logs the door opening 4 seconds after the door is
rise before the unit restarts in Cycle Sentry Mode. opened. If the any zone is in defrost when the door
is opened, the defrost cycle will be completed before
With frozen range setpoints, the maximum restart the unit shuts down.
limit can be no greater than 29°F (-1.6°C). This

prevents melt damage with frozen cargo. If this feature is set to ZONE NULL the base
controller shuts the zone down and logs the door
The Null Restart Temperature below setpoint is a opening 4 seconds after the door is opened. The
fixed value and cannot be changed. unit will remain running if any other zone requires
before the zone shuts down. If all zone door switch
inputs are open, the unit will be forced to NULL.
If this feature is set LOG ONLY the door opening will

be logged after 4 seconds but the unit will continue
to run. Door openings are logged in both the
3-64
02 February 2007
Cycle Sentry Door Open Timeout (for selected Cycle Sentry Run Fans in Null (for selected
range) range)
Choices 1:00 to 4:00 (Hours) in 10 Min Choices On or Off
Increments or OFF Factory Set Off
Factory Set OFF Exceptions
Exceptions Only appears if the DOOR OPEN Description This feature allows the fans in a zone
FORCES feature is set to ZONE NULL or UNIT to run when the zone is in running null. This
NULL. maintains airflow in the zone and is normally used
Description This feature allows the unit to restart if with fresh loads.
the door open time exceeds the set limit.
If this feature is set ON the zone fans will run for 3
Door Open Timeout for the selected range can be minutes, shut down for three minutes and then
set to OFF or for a time limit from 1 to 4 hours, in 10- restart for 3 minutes as long as the zone is in
minute increments. If set to OFF the unit will remain running null.
off or in zone null until the door is closed. If a time
period is selected the unit will restart and run after If this feature is Set OFF the zone fans will not run
the time period elapses. It will continue to run even when the zone is in running null.
if the door is still open.
3-65
02 February 2007
Continuous Mode OptiSet Features -

The features shown below can be modified in Continuous Door Open Forces (for selected
Continuous Mode operation. They are the same for range)
Frozen and Fresh ranges. Control Rev C000

HMI Rev 6510
Choices UNIT NULL, ZONE NULL or LOG
ONLY
Factory Set LOG ONLY
Exceptions The optional door switch must be
installed.
Description This feature allows the Door Open
action to be set. The setting applies to all zones
fitted with door switches. If this feature is set UNIT
NULL the base controller shuts the unit down and
logs the door opening 4 seconds after the door is
opened. If the any zone is in defrost when the door
is opened, the defrost cycle will be completed before
the unit shuts down.
If this feature is set to ZONE NULL the base

controller shuts the zone down and logs the door
opening 4 seconds after the door is opened. The
unit will remain running if any other zone requires
before the zone shuts down. If all zone door switch
inputs are open, the unit will be forced to NULL.
If this feature is set LOG ONLY the door opening will

be logged after 4 seconds but the unit will continue
to run. Door openings are logged in both the
3-66
02 February 2007
Continuous Door Open Timeout (for selected Continuous Run Fans in Null (for selected range)
range) Control Rev C000
HMI Rev 6510 Choices On or Off
Choices 1:00 to 4:00 (Hours) in 10 Min Factory Set Off
Increments or OFF Exceptions
Factory Set OFF Description This feature allows the fans in a zone
Exceptions Only appears if the DOOR OPEN to run when the zone is in running null. This
FORCES feature is set to ZONE NULL or UNIT maintains airflow in the zone and is normally used
NULL. with fresh loads.
Description This feature allows the unit to restart if
the door open time exceeds the set limit. If this feature is set ON the zone fans will run for 3
minutes, shut down for three minutes and then
Door Open Timeout for the selected range can be restart for 3 minutes as long as the zone is in
set to OFF or for a time limit from 1 to 4 hours, in 10- running null.
minute increments. If set to OFF the unit will remain
off or in zone null until the door is closed. If a time If this feature is Set OFF the zone fans will not run
period is selected the unit will restart and run after when the zone is in running null.
the time period elapses. It will continue to run even
if the door is still open.
3-67
02 February 2007
Sensor Configuration Menu –

Log Sensor (for CargoWatch sensor 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
CargoWatch Datalogger
or 6)
Control Rev C000
The CargoWatch Datalogger is internal to the HMI
HMI Rev 6510
Control Panel. This datalogger conforms to
Choices ON or OFF
European standard EN12830. The data logger
supports up to 6 temperature sensors and 3 digital Factory Set Sensors 1-2 ON, sensors 3-6 OFF
inputs. These sensors are optional sensors and are Exceptions
not the same as the temperature sensors used to Description This feature allows the desired
control the unit. The CargoWatch data logger sensors to be logged.
features the ability to customize logging parameters
and enable product temperature checking. Note that
the CargoWatch data logger does not record unit
sensors. Unit sensors and other unit operating data
are recorded by the ServiceWatch data logger. The
CargoWatch logger records the unit setpoint,
operating mode, and shutdown alarms.
Sensor Programming
Logging Interval
Control Rev C000
HMI Rev 6510
Choices 1 minute, 2 minutes and 5 to 60
minutes in 5-minute intervals
Factory Set 15 Minutes
Exceptions Wintrac is capable of setting
additional intervals as short as 1 minute.
Description This feature allows the desired
logging interval to be set.
3-68
02 February 2007
x Side
Independent Sensor Name (for CargoWatch x Right Side
sensor 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6) x Left Side
Control Rev C000 x Spare Front
HMI Rev 6510 x Spare Rear
Choices See table below x Spare Side
Factory Set Log Sensor 1 through 6 x Spare Right Side
Exceptions x Spare Left Side
Description This feature allows the desired x Fresh
sensor name to be specified. These names appear x Frozen
only on handheld printer reports. This aids in x Chilled
reading and understanding data logger printer x Dry
reports.
x Spare Fresh
Choices
x Spare Frozen
x Independent Sensor 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
x Spare Chilled
x Return Air
x Spare Dry
x Return Air Zone 1, 2 or 3
x Ambient
x Other Return Air
x Spare Ambient
x Discharge Air
x Log Sensor 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
x Discharge Air Zone 1, 2 or 3
x Other Discharge Air
x Spare Return Air
x Spare Return Air Zone 1, 2 or 3
x Other Spare Return Air
x Spare Discharge Air
x Spare Discharge Air Zone 1, 2 or 3
x Other Spare Discharge Air
x USDA 1, 2 or 3
x Spare USDA 1, 2 or 3
x Spare
x Other
x Other Spare
x Front
x Rear
3-69
02 February 2007
Out of Range Checking (for CargoWatch sensor Low

1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6) Control Rev C000
HMI Rev 6510 Choices From -1.0° to –20.0° in 0.1-degree
Choices ON or OFF increments, in either Fahrenheit or
Factory Set ON Celsius.
Exceptions Factory Set –10.8°F (-6.0°C)
Description This feature allows the Out of Exceptions
Range Checking feature to be turned on or off. If Description This feature allows the low limit for
Out of Range Checking is turned on, an alarm will Out of Range Checking to be set.
be set if the temperature, as sensed by the specified
sensor, is above or below setpoint by more than the
number of degrees determined by the setting of High
LOW and HIGH programmable features. The out of Control Rev C000
range condition must exist for 1 hour before the HMI Rev 6510
alarm is set. A visual notification will be provided to Choices From 1.0° to 20.0° in 0.1-degree
the driver on the standard display, as shown below. increments, in either Fahrenheit or
Celsius.
Factory Set 10.8°F (6.0°C)
OUT OF RANGE LIMIT Exceptions
Description This feature allows the high limit
°F
SET
POINT
35 GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
for Out of Range Checking to be set.
3-70
02 February 2007
Italian Option Sensor Averaging

Choices ON or OFF Choices ON or OFF
Exceptions This feature is only available on Exceptions
CargoWatch Sensor # 1. Description If this feature is turned OFF, the
Description If this feature is turned ON, the temperature logged will be the actual instantaneous
driver is presented a visual “Out of Range Limit” sensor reading at the time of log. If this feature is
notification and flashes the backlight if the box turned ON, the sensor is read once each minute.
temperature rises above -15°C. The visual The sensor readings are averaged dependant on
notification appears on the Standard Display as the setting of the Logging Interval feature selected
shown below. above.
For example, if the Logging Interval is 15 minutes

OUT OF RANGE LIMIT
the previous 15 sensor readings are averaged and
°F
SET
POINT
35 GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
logged instead of the actual instantaneous value. If
the Logging Interval is set for 10 minutes, the
previous 10 sensor readings are averaged and
logged.
3-71
02 February 2007
Digital Input Programming

The digital inputs are used to log the door switch
status.
Digital In for CargoWatch digital input 1, 2, 3 or 4

Control Rev C000
HMI Rev 6510
Choices Digital Input 1, 2, or 3
Factory Set
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the digital input
to be programmed to be selected.
Door Open Logging

Control Rev C000
HMI Rev 6510
Choices ON or OFF
Factory Set Digital Input 1 ON, 2 and 3 OFF
Exceptions
digital inputs to be logged or ignored.
3-72
02 February 2007
x Emergency Escape Hatch

Digital Input Name for CargoWatch digital input x Digital In 1, 2, 3 or 4
1, 2, 3 or 4
Control Rev C000
HMI Rev 6510
Choices See table below
Factory Set Digital Input 1 through 3
Exceptions
input name to be specified. This aids in reading and
understanding data logger downloads.
Choices
x Digital Input 1, 2, 3 or 4
x Door
x Other Door
x Main Door
x Back Door
x Front Door
x Side Door
x Left Door
x Right Door
x Other Back Door
x Other Front Door
x Other Side Door
x Other Left Door
x Other Right Door
x Fresh Door
x Other Fresh Door
x Frozen Door
x Other Frozen Door
x Chilled Door
x Other Chilled Door
x Dry Door
x Other Dry Door
3-73
02 February 2007
Unit Configuration Setup Menu Dual Evaporator Configuration
The Unit Setup Menu is used to specify the actual Control Rev C000
unit configuration. These features are set at the HMI Rev 6510
factory as required for each unit. The factory Choices YES or NO
settings shown below are for a replacement base Factory Set NO
controller. Exceptions If this feature is set YES then Unit
Model is forced to [SB] and Number of Zones is
Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly forced to [2].
If the base controller detects a mismatch between Description This feature enables the dual host
the detected unit components and the Unit (DE) evaporator configuration.
Configuration selections, Alarm Code 111 Unit Not
Configured Correctly will be set.
How Many Zones in This Unit
Control Rev C000
Engine Type Is HMI Rev 6510
Control Rev C000 Choices 2 or 3
HMI Rev 6510 Factory Set 2
Choices Exceptions
Factory Set Yanmar 2.1 Description This feature specifies if the unit is
Exceptions equipped with 2 or 3 zones. If the unit is equipped
Description This feature allows the engine type with 2 zones, this feature should be set to 2. If the
to be selected. Only Yanmar 2.1 is available on unit is equipped with 3 zones, this feature should be
trailer multi-temp units. set to 3.
Compressor Type Is
Control Rev C000
HMI Rev 6510
Choices
Factory Set Recip
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the compressor
type to be selected. Only Recip is available on
trailer multi-temp units.
3-74
02 February 2007
Zone 2 Evap Fans Configuration Electric Standby Equipped?

Choices 2, 3, 4 or 6 fans Choices YES or NO
Factory Set 3 Factory Set To match unit as built
Exceptions This screen only appears if the unit Exceptions This setting will automatically be
is configured for two or more zones. forced from “NO” to “YES” if the unit detects that
Description This feature is set to match the electric supply power is connected to the unit.
number of fans in the remote evaporator(s) used in Description This feature specifies if the unit is
zone 2. equipped with optional electric standby. If the unit is
equipped with electric standby, this feature should
be set Yes. If the unit is not equipped with electric
Zone 3 Evap Fans Configuration standby, this feature should be set No. A base
Control Rev C000 controller cold start will default this feature to Yes.
HMI Rev 6510
Choices 2, 3, 4 or 6 fans
Factory Set 3 Electric Heat Option
Exceptions This screen only appears if the unit Control Rev C000
is configured for three zones. HMI Rev 6510
Description This feature is set to match the Choices YES or NO
number of fans in the remote evaporator(s) used in Factory Set NO

zone 3. Exceptions Only appears if Model 50 unit and
Electric Standby Equipped (above) is set YES.
Description This feature specifies if the unit is
equipped with the electric heat option. If the unit is
equipped with electric heat, this feature should be
set Yes. If the unit is not equipped with electric heat,
this feature should be set No.
Electric heat is applicable to zone-1 host

evaporators only.
3-75
02 February 2007
Diesel to Electric Auto Switch Enabled? Unit Model

Choices YES or NO Choices SB, SLX, SUPER II
Factory Set NO Factory Set SB, match unit as built
Exceptions Screen appears only if Model 50 Exceptions
unit and the Electric Standby Equipped feature is set Description This feature specifies if the unit is an
YES SB, a SLX or a SUPER II.
Description This feature allows the Auto Switch
from Diesel to Electric to be enabled or disabled. If
this feature is set YES, the unit will switch Defrost Motor Equipped?
automatically to electric mode when standby power Control Rev C000
is connected. If the feature is set NO, the operator HMI Rev 6510
must manually switch the unit to electric mode using Choices YES or NO
the HMI control panel mode menu Factory Set NO, match unit as built
Exceptions
Electric to Diesel Auto Switch Enabled? equipped with a defrost solenoid or defrost motor. If
Control Rev C000 the unit is equipped with a defrost motor this feature
HMI Rev 6510 should be set Yes. If the unit is not equipped with a
Choices YES or NO defrost motor this feature should be set No.
Factory Set NO
Exceptions Screen appears only if Model 50 NOTE: All SLX units are equipped with defrost
unit and Electric Standby Equipped feature is set motors and this feature must be set YES.
YES
Description This feature allows the Auto Switch NOTE: A different interface board is required for
from Electric to Diesel to be enabled or disabled. If units equipped with a damper gear motor. The
this feature is set YES, the unit will switch damper gear motor interface board has added
automatically to diesel mode when standby power is electronic circuitry to drive the gear motor.
disconnected or fails. If the feature is set NO, the
operator must manually switch the unit to diesel
mode using the HMI control panel mode menu.
3-76
02 February 2007
Fuel Sensor Type Rear Remote Control Action

Choices NONE, SOLID STATE, FLOAT or Choices STAND BY, RUN ALL ZONES or
SWITCH RUN LAST CONFIG
Factory Set NONE Factory Set STAND BY
Exceptions Exceptions Only appears if Rear Remote
Description This feature is used to select the Control is set for COM 2
type of fuel level sensor installed, either float type, Description If the Action is set to STAND BY,
solid state, or switch. If no fuel level sensor is the unit will power up when the remote control ON
installed, this feature should be set to NONE. key is pressed. The setpoints can be changed from
the remote control panel but the unit will not start
and run. The unit must be started from the HMI
Rear Remote Control Control Panel on the unit. Pressing the remote
Control Rev C000 control OFF key will power down the control system.
HMI Rev 6510
Choices NONE, COM 2 If the Action is set to RUN ALL ZONES the unit will
Factory Set NONE automatically start and run all configured zones
Exceptions when the remote control ON key is pressed. The

feature will automatically turn zones that are turned
OFF to ON. Pressing a zone OFF key will turn that
equipped with the optional flush mount rear remote
zone off. Pressing the remote control OFF key will
control. If the unit is equipped with the flush mount
power down the control system.
rear remote control this feature should be set to
COM 2 and the flush mount control panel should be
If the Action is set to RUN LAST CONFIG the unit
connected to the COM2 port on the interface board.
will automatically start and run the unit in the last
If the unit is not equipped with a flush mount rear
operating condition when the remote control ON key
remote control, this feature should be set NONE.
is pressed. The feature will not turn zones that were
previously turned OFF to ON. Pressing a zone ON
or OFF key will turn that zone on or off. Pressing
the remote control OFF key will power down the
control system.
3-77
02 February 2007
Pretrip/Sleep Switch Options

Control Rev C000
HMI Rev 6510
Choices DISABLE, PRETRIP, SLEEP
Factory Set DISABLE
Exceptions
Description This feature is used to allow an
optional Sleep or Pretrip switch to be connected to
the controller. A momentary contact switch is
connected from chassis ground to the Controller
Sensor Connecter J7 pin 30. This feature
determines the action resulting when this input is
temporarily connected to chassis ground.
DISABLE results in no action. If a switch is not

connected this feature should be set to Disable.
PRETRIP will start a Pretrip Test in the same

manner as starting the test from the Main/Mode
menu.
SLEEP will place the unit in Sleep Mode in the same

manner as entering Sleep Mode from the
Main/Pretrip menu
3-78
02 February 2007
Section 4 – SR-2 SPECTRUM Operation
HMI Control Panel Features.................................................................................................................................... 3

Display .................................................................................................................................................................. 4
Keys....................................................................................................................................................................... 5
Hard Keys.......................................................................................................................................................... 5
Soft Keys ........................................................................................................................................................... 6
Display Heater ...................................................................................................................................................... 7
Turning the Unit On and Off ................................................................................................................................... 8
The Two Zone Standard Display .......................................................................................................................... 10
The Three Zone Standard Display ....................................................................................................................... 10
The Single Zone Control Standard Display ........................................................................................................ 11
Operating The Unit in Single Zone Mode ............................................................................................................ 11
The Temperature Watch Display.......................................................................................................................... 12
Changing the Setpoint .......................................................................................................................................... 13
Turning a Zone On and Off ................................................................................................................................... 16
Starting the Diesel Engine .................................................................................................................................... 18
Starting the Electric Motor.................................................................................................................................... 19
Switching from Diesel to Electric......................................................................................................................... 20
Switching from Electric to Diesel......................................................................................................................... 21
Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle ......................................................................................................................... 22
Selecting Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode...................................................................................................... 24
Optional Flush Mount Remote Control Panel..................................................................................................... 26
Remote Control Panel Functions ..................................................................................................................... 27
Keypad ................................................................................................................................................................ 29
Display ................................................................................................................................................................ 30
Reading a Typical Remote Standard Display.................................................................................................. 31
Turning the Unit and Zone 1 On or Off (Configured for STAND BY operation)........................................... 32
Turning the Unit and Zone 1 On and Off (Configured for RUN ALL ZONES or RUN LAST CONFIG
operation)............................................................................................................................................................ 32
Turning Remote Zones On and Off (Configured for STAND BY operation only) ........................................ 33
Turning Remote Zones On and Off (Configured for RUN ALL ZONES or RUN LAST CONFIG operation
only)..................................................................................................................................................................... 33
Changing a Zone Setpoint ................................................................................................................................ 34
Remote Control Panel Lockout ........................................................................................................................ 35
Menu Overview ...................................................................................................................................................... 36
Main Menu Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 37
Using the Main Menu............................................................................................................................................. 39
Main Menu Choices ............................................................................................................................................... 40
Languages .......................................................................................................................................................... 42
Alarms ................................................................................................................................................................. 44
Alarm Display ................................................................................................................................................. 44
Log Alarms...................................................................................................................................................... 45
Check Alarms ................................................................................................................................................. 45
Unit Level Prevent Alarms............................................................................................................................. 46
Zone Level Prevent Alarms ........................................................................................................................... 46
Unit Level Shutdown Alarms......................................................................................................................... 46
Zone Specific Shutdown Alarms .................................................................................................................. 47
Alarm Codes When Switching Between Diesel and Electric ..................................................................... 47
Clearing Alarm Codes.................................................................................................................................... 48
SR-2 Spectrum Alarm Codes ............................................................................................................................ 49
Viewing and Clearing Alarm Codes.............................................................................................................. 56
4-1
02 February 2007
Important Alarm Notes................................................................................................................................... 58

Gauges ................................................................................................................................................................ 59
Gauges Available ............................................................................................................................................... 60
Sensors ............................................................................................................................................................... 62
Sensors Available .............................................................................................................................................. 63
CargoWatch Data Logger.................................................................................................................................. 65
Hourmeters ......................................................................................................................................................... 68
Hourmeter Names and Definitions ............................................................................................................... 69
Mode.................................................................................................................................................................... 70
Turn Cycle Sentry On or Off.......................................................................................................................... 70
Single Zone Control – Multi Zone Control ................................................................................................... 70
Keypad Lockout ............................................................................................................................................. 70
Start Sleep Mode ............................................................................................................................................ 70
Pretrip.................................................................................................................................................................. 72
Pretrip Test Conditions.................................................................................................................................. 72
Conditions where Pretrip Tests are not allowed......................................................................................... 72
Pretrip Test Sequence ................................................................................................................................... 73
Pretrip Test Issues ......................................................................................................................................... 73
Performing a Pretrip Test .............................................................................................................................. 74
Diesel Mode/Electric Standby Menu ................................................................................................................ 77
Switching from Diesel to Electric ................................................................................................................. 77
Switching from Electric to Diesel ................................................................................................................. 79
Adjust Brightness .............................................................................................................................................. 80
Time..................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Maintenance Menu Overview ............................................................................................................................... 83
Using the Maintenance Menu ............................................................................................................................... 85
Maintenance Menu Choices ................................................................................................................................. 87
Hourmeters ......................................................................................................................................................... 87
Hourmeter Displays ....................................................................................................................................... 88
Gauges ................................................................................................................................................................ 89
Gauge Displays .............................................................................................................................................. 90
Sensors ............................................................................................................................................................... 91
Sensor Displays ............................................................................................................................................. 92
Alarms ................................................................................................................................................................. 93
Clearing Alarm Codes.................................................................................................................................... 94
Service Test Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 95
Service Test Mode Summary ........................................................................................................................ 97
Operation of SR-2 SPECTRUM Unit Solenoids and Valves ....................................................................... 98
Interface Board Test .......................................................................................................................................... 99
Interface Board Test Modes and Current Draw......................................................................................... 100
Display Self Test .............................................................................................................................................. 101
Evacuation Test................................................................................................................................................ 102
Software Revision ............................................................................................................................................ 103
Set Time and Date ............................................................................................................................................ 104
Guarded Access Menu Overview....................................................................................................................... 105
Using the Guarded Access Menu ...................................................................................................................... 107
Guarded Access Menu Features .................................................................................................................... 109
4-2
02 February 2007
HMI CONTROL PANEL FEATURES

The HMI (Human/Machine Interface) Control Panel is connected to the microprocessor and is used to operate the
unit and display unit information. The HMI communicates with the controller via a controller area network (CAN)
bus. The HMI also contains the CargoWatch® data logger. The HMI is located on the control box door.
CONTINUOUS
TEMP F
-8.2 35.1 48.8
ON
SET
OFF
-10 35 50 POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 MENU
SmartReefer2
The HMI control panel consists of a display and 8 touch-sensitive keys.
The display is capable of showing both text and graphics.
The keys on the left and right sides of the display are dedicated or single function keys. These are termed “hard”
keys.
The four keys under the display are termed “soft” keys. The functions of these keys change depending on the
operation being performed. If a soft key is active the current key function is shown in the display directly above
the key.
4-3
02 February 2007
Display
CONTINUOUS
TEMP F
-8.2 35.1 48.8
ON
SET
OFF
-10 35 50 POINT
SmartReefer2
The display presents information to the operator. This information can include setpoint and temperature for each
zone, unit or zone operating information, gauge readings, temperatures and other information as selected by the
operator.
The Standard Display of box temperature and setpoint for 3 zones is shown here. The unit is running in
Continuous Mode. Zone 1 has a setpoint of -10°F, and a return air temperature of -8.2°F. The downward
pointing arrow shows this zone is cooling. Zone 2 has a setpoint of 35°F, and a return air temperature of 35.1°F.
The absence of an arrow indicates that this zone is in null. Zone 3 has a setpoint of 50°F, and a return air
temperature of 48.8°F. The upward pointing arrow shows this zone is heating.
NOTE: The zone temperature shown is always return air temperature.
Pressing the soft key under each zone allows the setpoint for that zone to be changed. In addition, the soft keys
under Zone 2 and Zone 3 are used to turn those zones on and off. Pressing the soft key under MENU accesses
the MAIN MENU.
NOTE: Zone 1 is always on when the control system is powered up.
4-4
02 February 2007
Keys
Hard Keys
CONTINUOUS
ON
-8.2 35.8 48.8

TEMP F
SET
OFF -10 35 50 POINT
SmartReefer2
The keys on either side of the display are dedicated or “hard” keys. Their function always remains the same.
They are described below.
This key is used to turn the host unit and Zone 1 on. First the display will briefly show the
ON Thermo King Logo and then the statement “Configuring System – Please Wait”. When the
power-up sequence is complete the display shows the Standard Display of box temperature and
setpoint. For more information see “Turning the Unit On and Off” later in this section.
This key is used to turn the host unit and Zone 1 off. First the display will briefly show “System
OFF is Powering Down – Please Wait. Press On to Resume” and then “Off” will appear momentarily.
When the power-down sequence is complete the display will be blank. For more information
see “Turning the Unit On and Off” later in this section.
This key is used to initiate a manual defrost cycle. For more information see “Initiating a Manual
Defrost Cycle” later in this section.
This key is used to select Cycle Sentry Mode or Continuous Mode operation if allowed by
OptiSet. For more information see “Selecting Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode” later in this
section.
4-5
02 February 2007
Soft Keys
CONTINUOUS
ON
TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 48.8 SET
OFF -10 35 50 POINT
SmartReefer2
The four “soft” keys under the display are multi-purpose keys. Their function changes
depending on the operation being performed. If a soft key is active the key function is shown in
the display directly above the key. The keys are numbered from left to right, with Key 1 on the
far left and Key 4 on the far right.
Typical soft key functions:

ZONE ON/OFF and SETPOINT CHANGE
MENU
NEXT BACK
YES NO
+ -
SELECT EXIT
CLEAR HELP
HOUR METERS SENSORS
GAUGES
4-6
02 February 2007
Display Heater
The HMI control panel is equipped with a display heater. This heater is needed to make the display visible in cold
ambient temperatures.
The HMI has its own internal temperature sensor for the display heater. The heater is energized when the unit is
turned on and the ambient temperature is below 29.4°F (-2°C). The heater turns off when the temperature
sensed by the internal sensor rises above 37.4°F (+3°C). The heater draws from 1.4 to 1.7 amps when
energized.
The colder the ambient temperature the longer it will take for the heater to make the display visible on a cold
startup. It may take 10-15 seconds for the display to appear with very cold temperatures.
4-7
02 February 2007
TURNING THE UNIT ON AND OFF
The unit is turned on by pressing the ON hard key and off by pressing the OFF hard key. When the On key is
pressed the display briefly shows the THERMO KING Logo as the display initializes.
NOTE: With SPECTRUM Multi-Temp applications, Zone 1 is turned on any time the host unit is turned on. Zone
1 is turned off when the host unit is turned off.
NOTE: With extremely cold ambient temperatures it may take up to 15 seconds for the display to appear on initial
startup.
ON
OFF
Then the startup screen shown below appears while communications are established and the unit prepares for
operation.
ON CONFIGURING SYSTEM
OFF PLEASE WAIT
4-8
02 February 2007
Turning the Unit On and Off - (continued)
When the unit is ready to run the Standard Display appears. The 2 Zone display is shown here.
CONTINUOUS
ON
-8.2 35.8
TEMP F
SET
OFF -10 35 POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
Pressing the OFF hard key stops unit operation. The controller shuts down immediately and the display briefly
shows the power down message.
ON SYSTEM IS POWERING DOWN
OFF
PRESS ON TO RESUME
The display briefly shows OFF and then goes blank. To start the unit again, press the ON hard key.
ON
OFF
OFF
4-9
02 February 2007
THE TWO ZONE STANDARD DISPLAY

CONTINUOUS
ON
TEMP F
2
-8. 35.8 SET
OFF -10 35 POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
The Standard Display is the default display that appears if no other display function is selected. A 2 Zone
Standard display is shown here. The 2 Zone Standard Display above shows the return air temperature and
setpoint for two zones. The top of the display shows that the unit is operating in Continuous mode. The return air
temperature for Zone 1 is -8.2°F with a -10°F setpoint. The down-pointing arrow indicates that Zone 1 is cooling.
The return air temperature for Zone 2 is 35.8°F with a 35°F setpoint. The down-pointing arrow indicates that Zone
2 is also cooling. The soft key under each zone allows the Setpoint for that zone to be changed. In addition, the
soft key under Zone 2 is used to turn that zone on and off. The soft key labeled MENU allows the Main Menu to
be selected.
THE THREE ZONE STANDARD DISPLAY

CONTINUOUS
TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 48.8
ON
SET
OFF
-10 35 50 POINT
The 3 Zone Standard Display adds the third zone for units equipped with three zones. The 3 Zone Standard
Display functions the same way as the 2 Zone Standard Display, but with a third zone. The top of the display
shows that the unit is operating in Continuous mode. The return air temperature for Zone 1 is -8.2°F with a -10°F
setpoint. The down-pointing arrow indicates that Zone 1 is cooling. The return air temperature for Zone 2 is
35.8°F with a 35°F setpoint. The down-pointing arrow indicates that Zone 2 is also cooling. The return air
temperature for Zone 3 is 48.8°F with a 50°F setpoint. The up-pointing arrow indicates that Zone 3 is heating.
The soft key under each zone allows the Setpoint for that zone to be changed. In addition, the soft keys under
Zone 2 and Zone 3 are used to turn those zones on and off. The soft key labeled MENU allows the Main Menu to
be selected.
4-10
02 February 2007
THE SINGLE ZONE CONTROL STANDARD DISPLAY

CONTINUOUS
SETPOINT
°F
35.8
SETPOINT
35
MENU
This feature, if enabled in Guarded Access, allows Single Zone Control operation to be selected by choosing the
Main Menu and then selecting Single Zone Control from the Mode submenu. When this feature is selected, all
zones will be forced on and will control to the same selected setpoint. The Single Zone Control Standard Display
functions the same way as the other Standard Displays. The top of the display shows that the unit is operating in
Continuous mode. The box temperature for all zones is 35.8°F and all zones are controlling to a 35°F setpoint.
The down-pointing arrow indicates that all zones are cooling. The soft key labeled Setpoint allows the setpoint for
all zones to be changed. The soft key labeled Menu allows the Main Menu to be selected.
OPERATING THE UNIT IN SINGLE ZONE MODE

The following differences exist when operating the unit in Single Zone Control Mode.
x Single Zone Control Mode will appear in the Mode Menu only if the Single Zone Control feature has been
enabled in the Guarded Access/Main Menu Configuration menu. If the feature is enabled then Single
Zone Control will appear in the Main Menu/Mode Menu.
x If Single Zone Control operation is selected then all zones will be forced on and will control to the same
setpoint. The Zone 1 sensors are used to determine box temperature. All bulkheads should be taken
down to create one large compartment. With the exception of defrost the operating mode of each zone
evaporator(s) will be same when in this mode. Unit control is based on the temperature sensors of one
zone, (usually Zone 1).
x If Single Zone Control operation is selected the Single Zone Standard Display provides one soft key
labeled Set Point as shown above. This allows the setpoint for all zones to be changed simultaneously.
x If Single Zone Control operation is selected the individual zones cannot be turned off. The unit and all
zones are turned On and Off simultaneously using the On and Off hard keys at the left side of the display.
4-11
02 February 2007
THE TEMPERATURE WATCH DISPLAY

If there is no key activity and no check, prevent, or shutdown alarms are present the TemperatureWatch Display
appears 2½ minutes after the last key entry from the Standard Display. The TemperatureWatch screen will
remain on until any key is pressed or a check, prevent, or shutdown alarm occurs. The TemperatureWatch
Display shows the return air temperature and setpoint for each zone. Tenths of a degree are not shown by the
TemperatureWatch display. The large numbers allow unit conditions to be checked from a distance. Pressing
any soft key returns the display to the Standard Display.
ON
-8 36
OFF
-10 35
ZONE 1 °F ZONE 2 MENU
Two Zone TemperatureWatch Display
If an alarm condition (other than a log alarm) is present the TemperatureWatch Display will not appear. If an
alarm condition occurs while the TemperatureWatch Display is present the display will return to the Standard
Display. If the Defrost or Cycle Sentry keys are pressed the display will return to the TemperatureWatch Display
after defrost is initiated or the operating mode is changed.
In the Three Zone TemperatureWatch display the Menu soft key label covers the Zone 3 label as shown below
ON
-8 36 48
OFF
-10 35 50
ZONE 1 °F ZONE 2 MENU
Three Zone TemperatureWatch Display
If the unit is operating in Cycle Sentry mode the Cycle Sentry icon will appear near Zone 2 as shown above. If the
unit is operating in Continuous Mode the Cycle Sentry icon will not be present.
4-12
02 February 2007
CHANGING THE SETPOINT

If the TemperatureWatch display is shown, press any soft key to return to the Standard Display. From the
Standard Display, press the ZONE soft key for the desired zone. ZONE 1 is shown below.
CONTINUOUS
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
-10 35 POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
The setpoint display appears as shown below.
CURRENT ZONE 1 SETPOINT

ON
-10 F
OFF
+/- TO CHANGE
- + EXIT
The “-“ and “+” soft keys are used to increase or decrease the setpoint until the desired setpoint is shown. Here
the setpoint has been changed to 0°F using the “+” key.
NEW SETPOINT WILL BE

ON
0F
OFF
+/- TO CHANGE OK?
- + YES NO
4-13
02 February 2007
Changing the Setpoint – (continued)
The YES and NO soft keys confirm the setpoint change. When the desired setpoint has been selected using the
“+” and/or “-“ keys, press the YES soft key to confirm and load the new setpoint. If the setpoint is changed using
the “+” or “-“ keys, the change must be confirmed or rejected by pressing the YES or NO soft key within 10
seconds of changing the setpoint. A warning beep will sound after 5 seconds as a reminder. Failure to confirm
the new setpoint by pressing Yes or No within 10 seconds of changing the setpoint will result in no setpoint
change. If the setpoint is not confirmed, then Alarm Code 127 Setpoint Not Entered is set, to indicate that the
setpoint change was not completed.
NEW SETPOINT WILL BE

ON
0F
OFF
+/- TO CHANGE OK?
- + YES NO
After the YES soft key has been pressed, the display will briefly show PROGRAMMING NEW SETPOINT –
PLEASE WAIT. The display then confirms the new setpoint for two seconds.
NEW SETPOINT IS
ON
0F
OFF
If the NO soft key is pressed the display will briefly show SETPOINT NOT CHANGED and return to the Standard
Display. The Standard Display will show the old setpoint.
4-14
02 February 2007
Changing the Setpoint – (continued)
The display then returns to the Standard Display showing the new setpoint. Notice that the Zone 1 arrow now
points up, to indicate that Zone 1 is heating.
CONTINUOUS
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 35 POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
IMPORTANT: If the setpoint is changed using the “+” or “-“ keys, the change must be confirmed or
rejected by pressing the YES or NO soft key within 10 seconds of changing the setpoint.
x If the YES key is pressed, the setpoint change made with the “+” or “-“ key is accepted, the setpoint
changes, and the display returns to the Standard Display.
x If the NO key is pressed the setpoint change made with the “+” or “-“ key is not accepted, the setpoint is
not changed, and the display returns to the Setpoint Display.
x If the YES or NO key is not pressed within 10 seconds of making a change with the “+” or “-“ key, the
setpoint is not changed and the display returns to the Setpoint Display. The display briefly shows
[SETPOINT NOT CHANGED] and Alarm Code 127 Setpoint Not Entered is set, to indicate that the
setpoint change was started but not completed.
4-15
02 February 2007
TURNING A ZONE ON AND OFF

Zone 1 will always be turned on any time the unit is turned on. Zone 2 and Zone 3 (if present) can be turned on
and off as desired.
The state of each zone is retained when the unit is turned off and on. For example, on a three zone unit if zone 2
is turned off and Zone 3 is turned on and the unit is turned off, the zone states remain as they were. When the
unit is turned back on Zone 2 will still be off and Zone 3 will still be on.
NOTE: Units equipped with a remote control may operate in a slightly different manner. See Optional Flush
Mount Remote Control Panel in this section for additional details.
To turn Zone 2 or Zone 3 on or off, press the soft key under the desired zone. Zone 2 is selected here.
CONTINUOUS
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 35 POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
The Zone 2 setpoint display appears as shown below. If the zone is turned on, the third soft key will be labeled
TURN ZONE OFF. If the zone is turned off, the third soft key will be labeled TURN ZONE ON. In this case
TURN ZONE OFF is shown.

ON
35 F
OFF
+/- TO CHANGE
- + TURN
ZONE OFF
EXIT
4-16
02 February 2007
Turning a Zone On and Off (continued)
Press the TURN ZONE OFF soft key to turn the zone off

ON
35 F
OFF
+/- TO CHANGE
- + TURN
ZONE OFF
EXIT
The display briefly shows PROGRAMMING ZONE ON/OFF – PLEASE WAIT. The display then confirms the new
Zone 2 setting for several seconds.
ZONE 2 IS
ON
OFF
OFF
The display then returns to the Standard Display showing Zone 2 is off. The setpoint for Zone 2 has been
replaced with OFF as shown below to indicate that the zone is now off.
CONTINUOUS
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 OFF POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
4-17
02 February 2007
STARTING THE DIESEL ENGINE
Diesel engine preheating and starting is automatic in both Continuous Mode and Cycle Sentry Mode. The engine
will preheat and start as required when the unit is turned on. If any keys are being pressed on the HMI control
panel prior to the engine start, the engine preheat and start will be delayed until 10 seconds after the last key is
pressed.
NOTE: If the unit is equipped with optional Electric Standby there may be some additional prompts
before the engine will start. See STARTING THE ELECTRIC MOTOR on the following pages for details.
CAUTION: The engine may start automatically any time the unit is turned on.
WARNING: Never use starting fluid.
When the engine is preparing to start the HMI control panel will display the engine start screen, as shown below.
The preheat buzzer sounds during the engine preheat and crank sequence.
ON
DIESEL ENGINE STARTING
OFF
After the engine is started the display returns to the Standard Display of temperature and setpoint.
4-18
02 February 2007
STARTING THE ELECTRIC MOTOR
Units equipped with the Electric Standby option only
Electric motor starting is automatic in both Continuous Mode and Cycle Sentry Mode. The motor will start as
required when the unit is turned on. If any keys are being pressed on the HMI control panel prior to the motor
start, the motor start will be delayed until 10 seconds after the last key is pressed.
CAUTION: The motor may start automatically any time the unit is turned on.
When the motor is preparing to start the HMI control panel will display the motor start screen, as shown below.
The preheat buzzer sounds for 20 seconds before the electric motor starts.
ON
ELECTRIC MOTOR STARTING
OFF
4-19
02 February 2007
SWITCHING FROM DIESEL TO ELECTRIC
If the Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set YES then the unit will automatically
switch to Electric Mode operation when standby power is connected and available.
If the Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set NO then the prompt screen shown
below will appear when standby power is connected and available.
ELECTRIC STANDBY DETECTED

ON
DO YOU WISH TO SWITCH TO
ELECTRIC?
OFF
YES NO
If YES is selected then the display will briefly show the screen below.
ON PROGRAMMING ELECTRIC
STANDBY
OFF PLEASE WAIT
Electric Mode operation will briefly be confirmed. If unit operation is required the electric motor will start as shown
above in STARTING THE ELECTRIC MOTOR.
4-20
02 February 2007
SWITCHING FROM ELECTRIC TO DIESEL
If the Diesel to Electric Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set YES then the unit will automatically
switch to Diesel Mode operation when standby power is turned off or is no longer available.
If the Diesel to Electric Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set NO then the prompt screen shown
below will appear when standby power is turned off or is no longer available.
ELECTRIC STANDBY UNDETECTED

ON
DIESEL?
OFF
YES NO
If YES is selected then the display will briefly show the screen below.
ON
PROGRAMMING DIESEL MODE
OFF PLEASE WAIT
Diesel Mode operation will briefly be confirmed. If unit operation is required the diesel engine will start as shown
above in STARTING THE DIESEL ENGINE.
4-21
02 February 2007
INITIATING A MANUAL DEFROST CYCLE
Defrost cycles are usually initiated automatically based on time or demand. Manual defrost is also available
Manual defrost is only available if the zone is running and the zone evaporator coil temperature is less than or
equal to 45°F (7°C). Other features such as door switch settings may not allow manual defrost under some
conditions.
NOTE: If the Rail Alternate feature is set ENABLED then a manual defrost cycle is available with
temperatures less than or equal to 55qF (13qC).
To initiate a manual defrost cycle, press the Defrost Key as shown below.
CONTINUOUS
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 35 POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
The display will briefly show [DEFROST]. Then the Zone Select display will appear. Zone 1 has been selected
here.
ON
SELECT ZONE TO DEFROST
OFF
EXIT ZONE 1 ZONE 2
4-22
02 February 2007
Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle – (continued)
The display briefly shows [DEFROST], [PROGRAMMING DEFROST - PLEASE WAIT] and then [DEFROST
STARTED].
ON
DEFROST STARTED
OFF
The display then shows the Defrost display. The bar indicator shows approximately the percentage of time
remaining to complete the defrost cycle. The bar indicator below shows that the Zone 1 defrost cycle is
approximately 25% complete.
CONTINUOUS
ON
TEMP F
35.8 SET
OFF 35 POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
Terminating a Defrost Cycle

The defrost cycle terminates automatically when the coil temperature is greater than or equal to 58°F (14.5°C) or
the defrost timer expires. Defrost can also be terminated by turning the unit off and back on.
NOTE: If the Rail Alternate feature is set ENABLED then a defrost cycle will terminate with temperatures
greater than or equal to 70qF (21qC).
4-23
02 February 2007
SELECTING CYCLE SENTRY OR CONTINUOUS MODE
When Cycle Sentry mode is selected the unit will start and stop automatically to maintain setpoint, keep the
engine warm and the battery charged. When Continuous Mode is selected, the unit starts automatically and runs
continuously to maintain setpoint and provide constant airflow. Cycle Sentry or Continuous may not be available
from the Mode menu if OptiSet is in use. The Cycle Sentry/Continuous selection affects all zones.
If allowed by OptiSet, Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode is selected by pressing the Cycle Sentry/Continuous key.
Note that Continuous is shown at the top of the display.
CONTINUOUS
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 OFF POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
If the unit is in Continuous Mode, pressing the Cycle Sentry/Continuous key changes the mode from Continuous
Mode to Cycle Sentry Mode. The display confirms the change, as shown below.
ON PROGRAMMING CYCLS MODE
OFF
PLEASE WAIT
4-24
02 February 2007
Selecting Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode - (continued)
The new mode is confirmed for 2 seconds.
ON NEW SYSTEM MODE IS
OFF
CYCLE SENTRY
The display then returns to the Standard Display. In the example here the unit is running in Cycle Sentry Mode as
shown at the top of the display.
CYCLE SENTRY
ON
-8.2 35.8
TEMP F
SET
OFF
0 OFF POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
Pressing the Cycle Sentry/Continuous key again allows the operator to change back to Continuous Mode
operation.
IMPORTANT: If the unit is in Cycle Sentry null and the mode is switched to Continuous Mode, the unit
will start automatically.
NOTE: Cycle Sentry or Continuous mode may be disabled by OptiSet.
4-25
02 February 2007
OPTIONAL FLUSH MOUNT REMOTE CONTROL PANEL
The optional flush mount remote control panel is connected to the control system and is used to operate the unit
from a remote location, typically the rear of the trailer. All remote control panels feature 3 zones. The third zone
is not used on two zone applications.
When turned on either the Standard Display for each installed zone or [STAnd by] will appear on the display. The
zone currently being shown is identified by the Zone icon.
ZONE ZONE THERMO KING MULTI-TEMP

1 1
ON OFF
ZONE ZONE
2 2
ON OFF
ZONE
1234
ZONE ZONE
3 3
ON OFF
IMPORTANT: The SR-2 SPECTRUM remote control panel is capable of turning the control system on from a
powered down condition. It is not necessary to turn the control system on using the unit HMI Control Panel before
the remote control panel will operate.
IMPORTANT: There are two versions of the flush mount rear remote control panel available. They can be
identified by the color of the wide border around the actual control panel. SR-2 SPECTRUM flush mount rear
remote control panels have a blue border. uP-IV MultiTemp flush mount rear remote control panels have a black
border. These versions are not interchangeable.
4-26
02 February 2007
Remote Control Panel Functions

The remote control panel functions that are available are determined by the setting of the Rear Remote Control
Action feature in the Guarded Access Unit Configuration menu. The Rear Remote Control Action feature will not
appear and the remote control panel will not operate unless the Rear Remote Control feature is set for COM 2.
See Section 3 for details of these features.
STAND BY
If the Rear Remote Control Action feature is set for STAND BY the following functions are available from the
remote control panel.
x When powered up the unit will not start and run. The unit must be started from the HMI Control Panel
on the unit. The control system can only be powered up to change the setpoint(s).
x The control system can be powered up to change setpoints by pressing the ZONE 1 ON key. If the
control system is powered up from the rear control panel, both the rear control panel and the unit HMI
control panel will display a stand by message as shown below.
x The setpoints can be changed in all installed zones.
x The installed zones can not be turned on or off.
x The control system can be powered down by pressing the ZONE 1 OFF key.
x The unit can be started and run by pressing the unit HMI control panel ON key.
If the control system is powered up from the remote control panel a stand by message will appear in both the
remote control panel display and the unit HMI control panel display as shown below.
THERMO KING MULTI-TEMP REAR REMOTE CONTROL
STAND BY
Rear Remote Control Panel Unit HMI Control Panel
4-27
02 February 2007
RUN ALL ZONES

If the Rear Remote Control Action feature is set for RUN ALL ZONES the following functions are available from
the remote control panel.
x When powered up the unit will start and run Zone 1 and all installed zones.
x The unit and Zone 1 can be powered up and will start and run by pressing the ZONE 1 ON key. All
installed zones will be turned on, even if they were previously turned off.
x The installed zones can be turned on or off.
x The unit can be powered down by pressing the ZONE 1 OFF key.
RUN LAST CONFIG

If the Rear Remote Control Action feature is set for RUN LAST CONFIG the following functions are available from
the remote control panel.
x When powered up the unit will start and run Zone 1 and all installed zones that were turned on when
the unit was last powered down. Zones that were turned off when the unit was last powered down
will remain off.
x The unit and Zone 1 can be powered up and will start and run by pressing the ZONE 1 ON key. All
installed zones will be turned on if they were previously on, and remain off if they were previously off.
x The installed zones can be turned on or off.
x The unit can be powered down by pressing the ZONE 1 OFF key.
4-28
02 February 2007

1 1
ON OFF
ZONE ZONE
2 2
ON OFF
ZONE
1234
ZONE ZONE
3 3
ON OFF
Keypad
The nine touch sensitive keys are used to turn the unit and all installed zones on and off. They also allow the
setpoint to be changed in all installed zones.
ZONE ZONE 1 ON KEY Turns the unit on. Also turns Zone 1 on unless Rear Remote Control Action
1
ON
is set for STAND BY. Unlike previous versions, the SR-2 SPECTRUM
remote control panel can turn the control system on from a fully powered
down state. It is not necessary to turn the host unit on for the remote control
panel to operate.
ZONE ZONE 1 OFF KEY Turns the unit off. Also turns Zone 1 off.
1
OFF
ZONE ZONE 2 ON KEY Turns Zone 2 on unless Rear Remote Control Action is set for STAND BY.
2
ON
ZONE ZONE 2 OFF KEY Turns Zone 2 off.

2
OFF
ZONE ZONE 3 ON KEY Turns Zone 3 on (if installed) unless Rear Remote Control Action is set for
3
ON
STAND BY.
ZONE ZONE 3 OFF KEY Turns Zone 3 off (if installed).
3
OFF
UP ARROW KEY Increases setpoint for the selected zone.
DOWN ARROW KEY Decreases setpoint for the selected zone.
ENTER KEY Loads the new setpoint for the selected zone.
4-29
02 February 2007

1 1
ON OFF
ZONE ZONE
2 2
ON OFF
ZONE
1234
ZONE ZONE
3 3
ON OFF
Display
The display normally shows the Standard Display of return air temperature, setpoint and zone. If a zone is turned
on the operating mode is also shown. If a zone is turned off the display will show the return air temperature and
OFF. The display shown here has all possible segments lighted. The display icons are defined below.
Cool Icon This icon appears when the indicated zone is cooling.
Heat Icon This icon appears when the indicated zone is heating.
Not Used This icon appears during a remote control panel test but is not currently
used.
Defrost Icon This icon appears when the indicated zone is defrosting.
Cycle Sentry Icon This icon appears when the unit is operating in Cycle Sentry mode.
Alarm Icon This icon appears when an alarm condition has been detected by the
controller.
Electric Standby Icon This icon appears when the unit is operating in the optional electric standby
mode.
Setpoint Icon This icon appears when the setpoint is being shown in the display.
Not Used This icon appears during a remote control panel test but is not currently
used.
4-30
02 February 2007
ZONE Zone Icon This icon indicates which zone is currently being shown on the display.
1234
Reading a Typical Remote Standard Display
The Remote Standard Display for each installed zone will appear on the display for 10 seconds. Then the next
installed zone will appear. Only installed zones will appear.
THERMO KING THERMOGUARD
ZONE
2
The Remote Standard Display above shows the following information:

x Zone 2 is being shown in the display
x Zone 2 is cooling.
x The unit is operating in Cycle Sentry mode.
x The Zone 2 return air temperature is 35.8°F and the Zone 2 setpoint is 35°F.
4-31
02 February 2007
Turning the Unit and Zone 1 On or Off (Configured for STAND BY operation)
The control system is turned on by pressing the ON key and off by pressing the OFF key. When the On key is
pressed the remote display briefly shows all segments and then STAnd by as shown below. A stand by message
will also appear on the unit HMI control panel display. All setpoints can be changed but the unit will not start and
run. The unit can be started and run by pressing the unit HMI control panel ON key.

1 1
ON OFF
ZONE ZONE
2 2
ON OFF
ZONE ZONE
3 3
ON OFF
Turning the Unit and Zone 1 On and Off (Configured for RUN ALL ZONES or RUN LAST
CONFIG operation)
The unit and Zone 1 are turned on by pressing the ON key and off by pressing the OFF key. When the On key is
pressed the remote display briefly shows all segments and then COn FIg as the control system initializes. Then
the Remote Standard Display will appear as shown below. The unit will start and run if necessary.

1 1
ON OFF
ZONE ZONE
2 2
ON OFF
ZONE
2
ZONE ZONE
3 3
ON OFF
4-32
02 February 2007
Turning Remote Zones On and Off (Configured for STAND BY operation only)
The remote zones can not be turned on and off – only the setpoints can be changed.
Turning Remote Zones On and Off (Configured for RUN ALL ZONES or RUN LAST
CONFIG operation only)
Zone 2 and Zone 3 (if installed) are turned on by pressing the ON key and off by pressing the OFF key for the
appropriate zone. When a zone is turned on the return air temperature and setpoint is shown on the remote
standard display for that zone. In the illustration below Zone 2 is shown below turned on.

1 1
ON OFF
ZONE ZONE
2 2
ON OFF
ZONE
2
ZONE ZONE
3 3
ON OFF
When a zone is turned off the return air temperature and OFF is shown on the remote standard display for that
zone. In the illustration below Zone 2 is shown turned off.

1 1
ON OFF
ZONE ZONE
2 2
ON OFF
ZONE
2
ZONE ZONE
3 3
ON OFF
4-33
02 February 2007
Changing a Zone Setpoint
A zone must be currently shown on the display in order to change the zone setpoint.

1 1
ON OFF
ZONE ZONE
2 2
ON OFF
ZONE
2
ZONE ZONE
3 3
ON OFF
1. Press the On Key for the desired zone or wait until the desired zone is shown on the display. Pressing
the On key will immediately display that zone. If the Rear Remote Control Action feature is set for RUN
ALL ZONES or RUN LAST CONFIG pressing the On key will also turn the zone on if it was not already
on.
2. Immediately press the Up or Down Arrow Keys to select the desired setpoint for the selected zone.
3. When the desired setpoint for the selected zone is shown on the display, immediately press the Enter Key
to load the new setpoint into the microprocessor. The display will briefly show [Lod] and then the new
setpoint will reappear in the display.
IMPORTANT: The Enter key must be pressed or the setpoint will not be changed. The display will return to the
Standard Display and the setpoint will return to the old setpoint in about 10 seconds if the Enter Key is not
pressed.
IMPORTANT: Confirm that the correct setpoint is set for the each zone.
4-34
02 February 2007
Remote Control Panel Lockout

During some control system functions such as Pretrip Tests, Service Test Mode, Interface Board Test Mode and
while setting programmable features the remote control panel may be locked out. If this is the case the display
shown below will appear. The display will return to normal function when allowed by the control system.

1 1
ON OFF
ZONE ZONE
2 2
ON OFF
ZONE ZONE
3 3
ON OFF
4-35
02 February 2007
MENU OVERVIEW
may appear Display
Press Any
2.5 Minute Soft Key
Time-out
Zone 1 Soft Key

Standard
Setpoint Change
Main Menu Soft Key

Menu
Alarms
Gauges
Sensors
Datalogger Guarded Access Menu
Hourmeters (Not Available if Running)
Mode
Pretrip
Diesel Mode | Electric Standby Security Code (If required)
Adjust Brightness Programmable Features
Time Main Menu Configuration
Alarms
Controlled Access Hourmeter Setup
Sensor Calibration
Maintenance
Cycle Sentry Setup
Menu Defrost Setup
Hourmeters Language Setup
Gauges Access Code Setup
Sensors OptiSet
Alarms (CargoWatch) Sensor Configuration
Service Test Unit Configuration
Display Self Test
Evacuation Test
Software Revision Not all menu features
Set Time and Date may appear
Controlled Access SR-2 M/T Rev 6510 08 December 2006
4-36
02 February 2007
MAIN MENU OVERVIEW

Main Menu Main Menu
1 of 3 2 of 3
LANGUAGE SENSORS
Select from enabled languages Zone 1 Return Air Temperature
ALARMS Zone 1 Discharge Air Temperature
Display all alarms Zone 1 Temperature Differential
Clear most alarms Zone 1 Evaporator Coil Temperature
GAUGES Zone 2 Return Air Temperature
Coolant Temperature Zone 2 Discharge Air Temperature
Coolant Level Zone 2 Temperature Differential
Amps Zone 2 Evaporator Coil Temperature
Battery Voltage Zone 3 Return Air Temperature
Engine RPM Zone 3 Discharge Air Temperature
Fuel Level Sensor Zone 3 Temperature Differential
Discharge Pressure Zone 3 Evaporator Coil Temperature
Suction Pressure Ambient Air Temperature
I/O (InputOutput State) Spare 1 Temperature
High Speed Relay Spare 2 Temperature
Run Relay Spare 3 Temperature
Defrost Damper CargoWatch Datalogger Sensor 1 Temperature
Oil Pressure CargoWatch Datalogger Sensor 2 Temperature
Oil Level CargoWatch Datalogger Sensor 3 Temperature
Run Relay Feedback CargoWatch Datalogger Sensor 4 Temperature
Fuel Pressure CargoWatch Datalogger Sensor 5 Temperature
Alternator Frequency CargoWatch Datalogger Sensor 6 Temperature
Diesel/Electric Relay Board Temperature Sensor
Electric Ready Input DATALOGGER (CargoWatch)
Electric Overload Start of Trip
Variable Speed Fan Current Pos Z2 Print | View
Variable Speed Fan Desired Position Z2 HOURMETERS (View Enabled Hourmeters Only)
Variable Speed Fan Current Pos Z3 Total Hours
Variable Speed Fan Desired Position Z3 Total Run Time Hours
Condenser Inlet Solenoid Engine Hours
Receiver Tank Inlet Pressure Solenoid Electric Run Hours
Purge Valve Zone 1 Run Time Hours
Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 3 Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours
Hot Gas Solenoid Zone 1 Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours
Hot Gas Solenoid Zone 2 Controller Power On Hours
Hot Gas Solenoid Zone 3 Pretrip Reminder Hours
Suction Line Solenoid Zone 3 Electric Run Time Reminder #1 Hours
Electric Run Time Reminder #2 Hours

may appear
SR-2 M/T Rev 6510 Bld 41 29 November 2006
4-37
02 February 2007
MAIN Menu Overview (continued)

Main Menu
3 of 3
MODE
Turn On | Off Cycle Sentry
Single Zone Control
Keypad Lockout
Start Sleep Mode
Program a Wakeup Time
Enter Day to Wake Up
Enter Hour to Wake Up
Enter Minutes to Wake Up
PRETRIP (unless disabled from Guarded Access)
Full Pretrip if Not Running
Running Pretrip if Running
DIESEL MODE | ELECTRIC STBY (Model 50 Only)
ADJUST BRIGHTNESS
Off - Low - Medium - High
TIME (View Only)
Hour/Minute/Day/Date/Month/Year

may appear
4-38
02 February 2007
USING THE MAIN MENU
The Main Menu contains submenus that allow the operator to view information and modify unit operation. To
access the Main Menu press the MENU key.
CYCLE SENTRY
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 OFF POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
The first Main Menu choice will appear. Press the NEXT and BACK keys to scroll thru the menu choices. When
the desired selection is shown on the display, press the SELECT key to access it. The Pretrip selection is shown
here.
MAIN MENU
ON
PRETRIP
OFF
EXIT SELECT BACK NEXT
The Main Menu choices are shown on the next page. For detailed information see the individual explanations of
each submenu item on the following pages.
To return to the Standard Display press the EXIT key.
4-39
02 February 2007
MAIN MENU CHOICES
LANGUAGE – If more than one language is enabled, this menu item allows the operator to select a language
from a list of up to 11 languages at one time. All subsequent displays are shown in the selected language. Three
different language packages with a total of 24 languages are available. English is the default language and is
provided in each of the packages.
ALARMS – Allows the operator to view any active alarms, and allows most alarms to be cleared. If only one
language is enabled this will be the first menu item to appear.
GAUGES – Allows the operator to view the unit gauges and the state of the Inputs and Outputs on both the
Interface Board and Expansion Module.
SENSORS– Allows the operator to view the unit temperature sensors. If CargoWatch sensors are installed they
can be viewed as well.
DATA LOGGER – Allows the operator to set a Start of Trip marker to the CargoWatch and ServiceWatch data
loggers and print the contents of the CargoWatch data logger.
HOURMETERS – Allows the operator to view the unit hourmeters that have the view feature enabled in the
Guarded Access menu. If the view feature for a particular hourmeter is not enabled then that hourmeter cannot
be viewed.
MODE – Allows the operator to change the unit operating modes if allowed. Not all modes may appear
depending on the settings selected from the Guarded Access menu.
x Turn Off Cycle Sentry Mode/Turn On Cycle Sentry Mode (If Cycle Sentry is Off unit runs
in Continuous)
x Allow Single Zone Control or Multi Zone Control to be selected.
x Allow Keypad Lockout to be selected.
x Start Sleep Mode.
PRETRIP – Allows the operator to start a Pretrip Test. If an alarm is active, the Pretrip Test is not allowed and
the operator is prompted to clear the alarm(s).
4-40
02 February 2007
ELECTRIC STANDBY – If the Electric Standby option is present and the Diesel to Electric Auto-switch feature is
set NO, this feature allows the operator to manually select electric mode operation. This feature does not appear
if the unit does not feature optional Electric Standby or if the Diesel to Electric Auto-switch feature is set YES.
DIESEL MODE – If a unit equipped with electric standby is running in electric mode and the Electric to Diesel
Auto-switch feature is set NO, this feature allows the operator to manually select diesel mode operation. This
feature does not appear if the unit does not feature optional Electric Standby or if the Electric to Diesel Auto-
switch feature is set YES.
ADJUST BRIGHTNESS – Allows the operator to adjust the HMI control panel display backlight intensity as
required by local conditions.
TIME – Allows the operator to view the unit time and date. The time and date cannot be changed from this menu.
4-41
02 February 2007
Languages
If the Language feature is enabled, an alternate language can be selected from the Language Menu. After a new
language is chosen all displays will appear in that language. If the language feature is not enabled this menu
does not appear. The default language is English. Only languages that have been enabled in Guarded Access
will appear.
The languages available are dependant on the HMI control panel software revision. Languages currently
supported by software revision 65xx are English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Greek,
Turkish, Hebrew and Arabic. Languages currently supported by software revision 66xx are English, Russian,
Polish, Hungarian, Romanian, Bulgarian, Czech, Danish, Swedish, Norwegian and Finnish. Languages currently
supported by software revision 67xx are English and Japanese. Other than the languages supported, software
revisions 65xx, 66xx and 67xx are identical.
To select an alternate language, press the MENU key.
CYCLE SENTRY
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 OFF POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
If enabled, the Language Menu is the first menu item to appear as shown below. Press the SELECT key to
choose the Language menu.
MAIN MENU
ON
LANGUAGE
OFF
EXIT SELECT NEXT
4-42
02 February 2007
The Language menu will appear as shown below. Press the + or – keys to select the desired language. When
the desired language is shown press the YES key to confirm the choice.
NEW LANGUAGE WILL BE

ON
DEUTSCH
OFF
USE +/- TO CHANGE OK?
- + YES NO
The display will briefly show PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE – PLEASE WAIT in the new language. The display
will then return to the Language Menu, but will show the new language. German is shown below.
HAUPTMENU
ON
SPRACHE
OFF
BEENDEN AUSWHAL WEITER
x Exercise care when changing languages, as once changed all HMI Control panel displays will be in the
new language. If the user is not familiar with the new language, problems may be experienced returning
to the default language.
Repeat the process to select a different language. To select a different Main Menu item press the NEXT key. To
return to the Standard Display press the EXIT key.
NOTE: English and all other enabled languages may be accessed from the Standard Display. When the
Standard Display is shown press and hold the first and last soft key for 5 seconds as shown below.
CYCLE SENTRY
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 OFF POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
4-43
02 February 2007
Alarms
Alarm Display
If a unit alarm condition occurs the large Alarm Icon will appear on the Standard Display as shown below.
CONTINUOUS
ON
-8.2 35.8
OFF
0 35
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
If an alarm specific to a zone occurs then a small zone alarm icon will appear next to the affected zone as well.
Both Alarm Icons will be present. Here the small zone Alarm Icon indicates that an alarm exists specific to Zone
2.
CONTINUOUS
ON
-8.2 35.8
OFF
0 35
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
NOTE: Zone specific alarm codes use the standard Thermo King alarm code numbers. If an alarm is
specific to a zone then both the alarm code number and affected zone number are displayed.
NOTE: If the large alarm icon only appears, then the active alarm(s) are unit level alarm(s). If a zone
alarm icon and the large alarm icon are displayed there is a zone level alarm or a combination of zone
level and unit level alarms present.
4-44
02 February 2007
Log Alarms
Log Alarms are indicated for 60 seconds each time the unit is turned on. This level of alarm serves as a notice to
take corrective action before a problem becomes severe. Maintenance items such as maintenance hourmeter
time-outs are log alarms. The Temperature Watch screen is not disabled if only log alarm(s) are active.
When the unit is turned on the display will show the Thermo King Logo and then the “Configuring System”
message. If log alarm(s) are present the Log Alarm notice will appear on the display for 60 seconds as shown
below. The remote indicator alarm light (if installed) will also be on during this period. The Standard Display will
appear and the remote indicator alarm light will go off after 60 seconds.
NOTE: The Alarm Icon does not appear on startup with log alarms present.
ON LOG ALARMS ACTIVE

GO TO MENU TO VIEW
OFF
EXIT
NOTE: If required, an engine start may occur while the display above is still shown. This is normal
operation.
Check Alarms
Check Alarms are indicated by a steady alarm icon at the side of the display. If the alarm is specific to a zone
then a smaller alarm icon will appear next to the affected zone. This level of alarm serves as a notice to take
corrective action before a problem becomes severe. The unit will run with check alarms but some features and
functions may be inhibited. The Temperature Watch screen is disabled if a check alarm is active.
4-45
02 February 2007
Unit Level Prevent Alarms

Prevent Alarms are indicated by a steady alarm icon at the side of the display. The unit will be temporarily shut
down if a prevent alarm is active. The unit will remain shut down for a timed restart interval or until the fault
conditions are corrected and then restart. If the unit is in a temporary shutdown, Alarm Code 84 Restart Null will
be present along with the associated Prevent Alarm. In most cases the unit will restart with reduced performance
to determine if continued operation is possible. If the alarm does not reoccur with reduced performance then the
unit will then return to full performance. If the unit is operating with reduced performance Alarm Code 85 Forced
Unit Operation will also be present under some conditions. In general, if the alarm condition re-occurs a defined
number of times then the alarm is set as a shutdown alarm and no further restarts are possible. The Temperature
Watch screen is disabled if a unit level prevent alarm is active.
NOTE: If the Restart After Shutdown feature in the Guarded Access Menu is set for CONTINUOUS, then
an unlimited number of restart attempts are allowed.
Zone Level Prevent Alarms

A zone level prevent alarm will force the affected zone into a temporary shutdown, but allow the unit to continue to
run as required by the host unit or other zones. A small alarm icon will appear next to the affected zone. If zone
prevent alarms occur in all zones then the unit will be forced into a unit level prevent shut down. The
Temperature Watch screen is disabled if a zone level prevent alarm is active.
Unit Level Shutdown Alarms

Shutdown Alarms are indicated by all of the following:
x The Alarm Icon will appear.
x The display and backlight will flash on and off.
x The display will switch from normal video to reverse video and back to normal video. (Light areas
become dark and dark areas become light.)
Unit level shutdown alarms will force the unit into shutdown. The unit will remain in shutdown until the shutdown
alarm is manually cleared. Exceptions are some engine and electric shutdown alarms that become log alarms
when switched to the alternate operating mode (diesel to electric or electric to diesel). The Temperature Watch
screen is disabled if a unit level shutdown alarm is active.
4-46
02 February 2007
Zone Specific Shutdown Alarms

A zone shutdown alarm will force the affected zone to shutdown, but allow the unit to continue to run as required
by the host unit or other zones. A small alarm icon will appear next to the affected zone and blink with a period of
½ second on - ½ second off. If zone shutdown alarms occur in all zones then the unit will shut down and Alarm
Code 114 Multiple Alarms – Can Not Run will be set.
Alarm Codes When Switching Between Diesel and Electric

If a shutdown alarm occurs that affects only diesel mode operation and the unit is switched to electric, the diesel
mode shutdown alarm becomes an electric mode log alarm. This allows the unit to run in electric mode without
clearing the shutdown alarm that is preventing diesel mode operation. If the unit is switched back to diesel mode,
the alarm again become a diesel mode shutdown alarm and prevents unit operation.
In the same manner, if a shutdown alarm occurs that affects only electric mode operation and the unit is switched
to diesel, the electric mode shutdown alarm becomes a diesel mode log alarm to allow diesel mode operation. If
the unit is switched back to electric mode, the alarm reverts to an electric mode shutdown alarm and prevents unit
operation.
4-47
02 February 2007
Clearing Alarm Codes

Most alarm codes can be cleared conventionally from the Alarm Menu using the CLEAR soft key.
The following sensor alarm codes can only be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu. The CLEAR soft key will
not appear if the alarms are displayed from the Main Menu or the Maintenance Menu.
x Alarm Code 03 Check (Control) Return Air Sensor for all zones.
x Alarm Code 04 Check (Control) Discharge Air Sensor for all zones.
The following alarm codes clear automatically.

x Alarm Code 64 Pretrip Reminder – Clears when a Pretrip Test is performed.
x Alarm Code 84 Restart Null – Clears when the unit is no longer in a restart null due to a Prevent Alarm.
x Alarm Code 85 Forced Unit Operation – Clears when the unit is no longer running in a forced mode due
to a Prevent Alarm.
x Alarm Code 91 Check Electric Ready Input – Clears automatically when the unit starts running.
x Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grades Not Set – Clears when all installed graded sensor grades are changed
from 5H.
If the Limited Alarm Restarts feature is enabled the following additional alarm codes may only be cleared from the
Guarded Access Menu. If this is the case, the CLEAR soft key will not appear if the alarms are displayed from the
Main Menu or the Maintenance Menu. See the Limited Alarm Restarts feature in Section 3 for details.
x Alarm Code 10 High Discharge Pressure
x Alarm Code 32 Refrigeration Capacity Low
4-48
02 February 2007
SR-2 Spectrum Alarm Codes

Code Description Operator Help
00 No Alarms Exist
02 Check Evaporator Coil Sensor (for Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
specified zone) day.
03 Check Return Air Sensor (for Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
04 Check Discharge Air Sensor (for Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
05 Check Ambient Air Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.
06 Check Coolant Temp Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.
07 Check Engine RPM Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.
09 High Evaporator Temperature Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
day.
10 High Discharge Pressure If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
11 Unit Controlling on Alternate Sensor Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
day.
12 Sensor or Digital Input Shutdown The indicated zone is not longer able to operate and has been
shut down. Repair immediately.
13 Sensor Check Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
day.
15 Check Glow Plugs or Intake Air If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
Heater at end of the day.
17 Engine Failed to Crank If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
18 High Engine Coolant Temperature If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
4-49
02 February 2007

19 Low Engine Oil Pressure If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
20 Engine Failed to Start If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
21 Cooling Cycle Check Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
day.
22 Heating Cycle Check Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
day.
23 Cooling Cycle Fault The indicated zone is not longer able to operate and has been
24 Heating Cycle Fault The indicated zone is not longer able to operate and has been
25 Alternator Check If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
26 Check Refrigeration Capacity Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
day.
28 Pretrip or Self Check Abort Report alarm at end of the day.
29 Check Defrost Damper Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
30 Defrost Damper Stuck If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
31 Check Oil Pressure Switch If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
32 Refrigeration Capacity Low The unit is no longer able to operate and has been shut down.
Repair immediately.
33 Check Engine RPM Report alarm at end of the day.
35 Check Run Relay Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
4-50
02 February 2007

36 Electric Motor Failed to Run If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
37 Check Engine Coolant Level Report alarm at end of the day.
38 Electric Phase Reversed If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
39 Check Water Valve Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
40 Check High Speed Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
41 Check Engine Coolant Temperature If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
42 Unit Forced to Low Speed Report alarm at end of the day.
44 Check Fuel System If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
45 Check Hot Gas or Hot Gas Bypass If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
Circuit at end of the day.
46 Check Air Flow If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
48 Check Belts or Clutch If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
52 Check Heat Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
54 Test Mode Timeout Service Test or Interface Board Test timed out after 15 minutes.
Report alarm at end of the day.
61 Low Battery Voltage If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
62 Ammeter Out of Calibration If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
4-51
02 February 2007

63 Engine Stopped If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
64 Pretrip Reminder Report alarm at end of the day.
65 Abnormal Temperature Differential If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
66 Low Engine Oil Level Check engine oil level. If unit is shut down repair immediately.
Otherwise, report alarm at end of the day.
67 Check Liquid Line Solenoid Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
68 Internal Controller Fault Code Report alarm at end of the day.
70 Hourmeter Failure Report alarm at end of the day.
74 Controller Reset to Defaults Report alarm at end of the day.
77 Controller EEPROM Checksum If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
Failure at end of the day.
79 Internal Data Log Overflow Report alarm at end of the day.
84 Restart Null Report alarm at end of the day.
85 Forced Unit Operation Report alarm at end of the day.
86 Check Discharge Pressure Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.
87 Check Suction Pressure Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.
90 Electric Overload If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
4-52
02 February 2007

91 Check Electric Ready Input If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
92 Sensor Grades Not Set Report alarm at end of the day.
93 Low Compressor Suction Pressure If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
96 Low Fuel Level Check engine fuel level. If unit is shut down repair immediately.
Otherwise, report alarm at end of the day.
98 Check Fuel Level Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.
105 Check Receiver Tank Press Sol If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
Circuit at end of the day.
106 Check Purge Valve Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
107 Check Condenser Inlet Sol Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
108 Door Open Timeout Close Doors. Report alarm at end of the day.
110 Check Suction Line Solenoid Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
111 Unit Not Configured Correctly Report alarm at end of the day.
112 Check Remote Fans If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
113 Check Electric Heat Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
114 Multiple Alarms – Can Not Run If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
117 Auto Switch from Diesel to Electric Report alarm at end of the day.
4-53
02 February 2007

118 Auto Switch from Electric to Diesel Report alarm at end of the day.
120 Check Alternator Excite Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
121 Check Liquid Injection Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
122 Check Diesel/Electric Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
127 Setpoint Not Entered Be sure the setpoint is set to the required temperature.
128 Engine Run Time Maintenance Report alarm at end of the day.
Reminder #1
129 Engine Run Time Maintenance Report alarm at end of the day.
Reminder #2
130 Electric Run Time Maintenance Report alarm at end of the day.
Reminder #1
131 Electric Run Time Maintenance Report alarm at end of the day.
Reminder #2
132 Total Unit Run Time Reminder #1 Report alarm at end of the day.
133 Total Unit Run Time Reminder #2 Report alarm at end of the day.
134 Controller Power On Hours Report alarm at end of the day.
136 Check Spare Digital Outputs Report alarm at end of the day.
137 Check Damper Motor Heater Output Report alarm at end of the day.
141 Autoswitch Diesel to Electric Report alarm at end of the day.

Disabled
4-54
02 February 2007

143 Check Drain Hose Heater Output Report alarm at end of the day.
144 Loss of CAN Communication If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
145 Loss of 8X Input If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
146 Software Version Mismatch If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
at end of the day.
147 Check Multi-Temp Fan Speed If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
Control Output at end of the day.
148 Autoswitch Electric to Diesel Report alarm at end of the day.
Disabled
153 Expansion Module Flash Load If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm
Failure at end of the day.
4-55
02 February 2007
Viewing and Clearing Alarm Codes
If an alarm condition occurs that is not zone specific, the Alarm Icon will appear in place of the textual information
in the display as shown below.
CONTINUOUS
-8.2 35.8
ON
OFF
0 35
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
If the alarm condition is zone specific, the Alarm Icon will also appear in the appropriate zone. An alarm specific
to Zone 2 is shown below.
CONTINUOUS
-8.2 35.8
ON
OFF
0 35
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
Alarms are displayed and cleared using the Alarm Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU key.
CONTINUOUS
2
35.8
ON
-8.
OFF
0 35
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
4-56
02 February 2007
The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. If the Language Menu appears press the NEXT key to display
the Alarm Menu. When the Alarm Menu is shown press the SELECT key.
MAIN MENU
ON
ALARMS
OFF
EXIT SELECT NEXT
The Alarm Display will appear. If no alarms are present NO ALARMS will be shown on the display.
NO ALARMS
ON
0 OF 0 ALARMS
NO ALARMS
OFF
EXIT
If alarms are present, the quantity of alarms (if more than one), the alarm code number and alarm description will
be shown on the display. In the example below, there are two alarms present. The most recent is Alarm Code 6.
This alarm code indicates a problem with the coolant temperature sensor.
ALARM 6
ON
1 OF 2 ALARMS
COOLANT TEMP SENSOR
OFF
EXIT CLEAR HELP NEXT
4-57
02 February 2007
After the alarm situation is resolved press the CLEAR key to clear the alarm. For additional information regarding
the alarm shown on the display, press the HELP key. To display the next alarm, press the NEXT key.
ALARM 5
ON
2 OF 2 ALARMS
AMBIENT TEMP SENSOR
OFF
For additional information regarding the alarm shown on the display, press the HELP key. A help message will
appear. For the alarm shown below, the message “Check engine oil level. If unit is shut down repair
immediately. Otherwise, report alarm at end of the day.” will be shown on the display.
ALARM 66
ON
1 OF 1 ALARMS
LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL
OFF
EXIT CLEAR HELP
After the alarm situation is resolved press the CLEAR key to clear the alarm. To display the next alarm code
press the NEXT key. To return to the Standard Display press the EXIT key.
Important Alarm Notes

x If an alarm will not clear, it may still exist. If the alarm is not corrected, it will not clear.
x If an alarm cannot be cleared from the Main menu, the Clear key will not appear. These alarms must be
cleared from the Guarded Access Menus.
x All alarms must be viewed before any of the alarms can be cleared.
4-58
02 February 2007
Gauges
Unit Gauges and I/O (Input/Output) State are viewed using the Gauges menu. From the Standard Display, press
the MENU key.
CYCLE SENTRY
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 OFF POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to display the Gauges menu.
When the Gauges menu is shown press the SELECT key.
MAIN MENU
ON
GAUGES
OFF
The first Gauge menu display will appear. Press the NEXT and BACK keys to scroll thru the gauges. Pressing
the LOCK key will lock the gauges on the display for fifteen minutes.
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
ON
183 °F
OFF
EXIT LOCK NEXT
The gauges available are shown on the next page. To return to the Standard Display press the EXIT key.
4-59
02 February 2007
Gauges Available
Coolant Temperature – Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.
Coolant Level – Displays the coolant level in the overflow tank.
Amps – Displays the current flow in amps flowing to or from the unit battery
Battery Voltage – Displays the voltage of the unit battery.
Engine RPM – Displays the engine speed in RPMs.
Fuel Level Sensor – Displays the fuel level in the unit fuel tank.
Discharge Pressure – Displays the unit discharge pressure.
Suction Pressure – Displays the unit suction pressure.
I/O (Input/Output State) – Displays the current state of the input/output devices listed on the next page.
4-60
02 February 2007
I/O (Input/Output State) – Displays the current state of the input/output devices listed below.
x High Speed Relay x Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 1

x Run Relay x Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 2
x Defrost Damper x Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 3
x Oil Pressure x Hot Gas Solenoid Zone 1
x Oil Level x Hot Gas Solenoid Zone 2
x Run Relay Feedback x Hot Gas Solenoid Zone 3
x Fuel Pressure x Suction Line Solenoid Zone 1
x Alternator Frequency x Suction Line Solenoid Zone 2
x Diesel/Electric Relay x Suction Line Solenoid Zone 3
x Electric Ready Input
x Electric Overload
x Variable Speed Fan Current Pos Z2 Not all menu items may appear
x Variable Speed Fan Desired Pos Z2
x Variable Speed Fan Current Pos Z3
x Variable Speed Fan Desired Pos Z3
x Condenser Inlet Solenoid
x Receiver Tank Inlet Pressure Solenoid
x Purge Valve
4-61
02 February 2007
Sensors
Unit temperature sensors are viewed using the Sensors menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU key.
CYCLE SENTRY
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 OFF POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to display the Sensors menu.
When the Sensors menu is shown press the SELECT key.
MAIN MENU
ON
SENSORS
OFF
The first Sensors menu display will appear. Press the NEXT and BACK keys to scroll thru the sensors. Pressing
the LOCK key will lock the sensor on the display.
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE

ON
35. 7 °F
OFF
EXIT LOCK NEXT
The sensors available are shown on the next page. Only configured and enabled sensors are shown. For
example, if the unit is configured as a two zone unit, then zone 3 sensors are not shown. If the CargoWatch
sensors are not enabled, they will not be shown. To return to the Standard Display press the EXIT key.
4-62
02 February 2007
Sensors Available
Zone 1 Return Air Temperature – Displays the temperature of the Zone 1 Return Air Sensor.
Zone 1 Discharge Air Temperature – Displays the temperature of the Zone 1 Discharge Air Sensor.
Zone 1 Temperature Differential – Displays the Zone 1 Temperature Differential.
Zone 1 Evaporator Coil Temperature – Displays the temperature of the Zone 1 Evaporator Coil sensor.
Ambient Air Temperature – Displays the temperature of the ambient air temperature sensor.
Spare 1 Temperature – Displays the temperature of the Spare 1 temperature sensor.
4-63
02 February 2007
CargoWatch Data Logger Sensor 1 Temperature – Displays the temperature of the CargoWatch Data Logger 1
temperature sensor.
temperature sensor.
temperature sensor.
temperature sensor.
temperature sensor.
temperature sensor.
Board Temperature Sensor – Displays the temperature of the HMI control panel pc board.
4-64
02 February 2007
CargoWatch Data Logger
The CargoWatch Data Logger is physically located in the HMI Control Panel. It can support up to 6 optional
temperature sensors.
A Start of Trip can be sent to the unit ServiceWatch and CargoWatch Data Loggers and the CargoWatch Data
Logger contents can be printed with a hand-held printer.
The ServiceWatch and CargoWatch Data Logger are accessed using the Data Logger Menu. From the Standard
Display, press the MENU key.
CYCLE SENTRY
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 OFF POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to display the Data Logger
menu. When the Data Logger menu is shown press the SELECT key.
MAIN MENU
ON
DATA LOGGER
OFF
4-65
02 February 2007
The first feature that appears is the Start of Trip. To send a Start of Trip press the SELECT key to select the
feature, and then press it again to send the Start of Trip. The display will briefly show START OF TRIP
COMPLETE to confirm that a Start of Trip marker was set in the data logger.
START OF TRIP
ON
START OF TRIP
OFF
EXIT SELECT NEXT
NOTE: The start of trip marker is sent to both the CargoWatch and ServiceWatch data loggers.
Press the NEXT key to select the PRINT / VIEW feature. The PRINT / VIEW screen will appear.
DATALOGGER
ON
PRINT / VIEW
OFF
Press the SELECT key. The first PRINT / VIEW screen allows the operator to print a Delivery Ticket. Pressing
the SELECT key will print a delivery ticket. The Delivery Ticket is a short ticket that shows delivery specific details
including the current temperature.
PRINT DATA
ON
DELIVERY TICKET
OFF
EXIT SELECT NEXT
4-66
02 February 2007
Pressing the NEXT key allows the operator to print a Trip Ticket using a hand held printer. Pressing the SELECT
key will print a Trip Ticket. The Trip Ticket is a long ticket that shows details for the current trip including a
temperature history. The Trip Ticket is also called a Journey Ticket.
PRINT DATA
ON
TRIP TICKET
OFF
Pressing the EXIT key returns the display to the Main Menu.
For additional information concerning the CargoWatch Data Logger see Service Procedure A49A in Section 6 of
this manual.
4-67
02 February 2007
Hourmeters
Unit Hourmeters are viewed using the Hourmeters menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU key.
CYCLE SENTRY
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 OFF POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to display the Hourmeters
menu. When the Hourmeters menu is shown press the SELECT key.
MAIN MENU
ON
HOURMETERS
OFF
The first Hourmeters menu display will appear. Press the NEXT and BACK keys to scroll thru the hourmeters.
Pressing the LOCK key will lock the hourmeter on the display.
TOTAL HOURS
ON
7
138
OFF
EXIT LOCK NEXT
Hourmeter names and definitions are shown in the table on the next page in the order they appear. Only
configured hourmeters that have been enabled for viewing in Guarded Access will be shown.
4-68
02 February 2007
Hourmeter Names and Definitions

Only configured hourmeters that have been enabled in Viewable Hourmeter Setup Menu will be shown.
Hourmeter Name Definition
Total Hours Total number of hours the unit has been turned on (protection hours).
Total Run Time Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in both diesel and electric mode.
Engine Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in diesel mode.
Electric Run Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in electric mode.
Zone 1 Run Time Hours Total number of hours Zone 1 has run in both diesel and electric mode.
Total Run Reminder 1 Hours User Programmable – The number of hours before a Total Unit Run Time
Maintenance Reminder 1 occurs.
Controller Power On Hours Total hours the controller and HMI control panel have been turned on.
Pretrip Reminder Hours User Programmable – number of hours before a Pretrip Reminder occurs.
Engine Reminder 1 Hours User Programmable – The number of hours before an Engine Run Time
Electric Reminder 1 Hours User Programmable – The number of hours before an Electric Run Time
4-69
02 February 2007
Mode
Various operating modes can be selected using the Mode menu. Not all modes may be available, depending on
OptiSet usage and settings of other programmable features. The following modes may be available.
Turn Cycle Sentry On or Off

Cycle Sentry Mode can be turned On or Off. If Cycle Sentry is turned off the unit runs in Continuous mode.
Either Cycle Sentry or Continuous operation may be disabled via OptiSet.
Single Zone Control – Multi Zone Control

If enabled in Guarded Access, Single Zone Control allows single temperature operation. If Single Zone Control
operation is selected then all zones will be forced on and will control to the same setpoint. All bulkheads should
be down to create one large compartment. Multi Zone Control allows separate control for each configured zone.
For additional details see Operating the Unit in Single Zone Mode earlier in this section.
Keypad Lockout
If enabled in Guarded Access, the keypad can be locked to prevent unauthorized use. If the keypad is locked
only the On and Off keys function. The keypad will remain locked even if the unit is turned off and back on. If
Keypad Lockout is active, press and hold any soft key for 5 seconds to deactivate the feature.
Start Sleep Mode

If enabled in Guarded Access, Sleep Mode is used to keep the engine warm and the battery charged when the
unit is not in use. When the unit is in Sleep Mode the display will show “SLEEP” and the current time.
x Program Wakeup Time This feature allows a wakeup time to be specified. When the selected time is
reached the unit will start and resume normal operation.
If Wakeup Time is selected:
x Day to Wake Up This feature allows the day the unit is to wake up to be specified.
x Hour to Wake Up This feature allows the hour the unit is to wake up to be specified.
x Minute to Wake Up This feature allows the minute the unit is to wake up to be specified.
x Run Pretrip on Wake Up This feature allows a Pretrip Test to be automatically run when the unit wakes
up.
4-70
02 February 2007
Mode changes are made using the Mode Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU key.
CYCLE SENTRY
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 OFF POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to display the Mode menu.
When the Mode menu is shown press the SELECT key.
MAIN MENU
ON
MODE
OFF
The first Mode menu screen will appear. To chose that function press the SELECT key. To Scroll through the
Mode Menu press the NEXT key.
CHANGE MODE
ON
TURN OFF CYCLE SENTRY
OFF
EXIT SELECT NEXT
Possible Mode selections are shown on the previous page. Not all modes may be available, depending on
OptiSet usage and the settings of other programmable features.
4-71
02 February 2007
Pretrip
A Pretrip Test verifies unit operation. This display allows a Pretrip Test to be selected and initiated by the
operator. If the Pretrip Test is entered with the engine not running a Full Pretrip Test with device amp checks will
be performed. If the Pretrip Test is entered with the unit running in either diesel or electric mode a Running
Pretrip Test is performed. Test results are reported as PASS, CHECK or FAIL when the Pretrip Test is
completed.
Pretrip Test Conditions

x Current unit settings such as zones on or off and setpoints are saved and restored at the end of the
Pretrip Test or if the unit is turned off and back on.
x All zones are forced on.
x A Pretrip Test can be run in either Diesel or Electric Mode.
x The unit will auto switch from Diesel Mode to Electric Mode or from Electric Mode to Diesel Mode during a
Pretrip Test if these features are enabled and the auto switch conditions occur.
Conditions where Pretrip Tests are not allowed

x Any alarms are present.
x The unit is in Sleep Mode.
x Unit is in Service Test Mode, Interface Board Test Mode or Evacuation Mode.
4-72
02 February 2007
Pretrip Test Sequence

Pretrip tests proceed in the order shown below. A Full Pretrip Test is started with the engine or motor not running
and includes all tests. A Running Pretrip Test is started with the engine or motor running and does not include the
Amp Checks or Engine Start Check.
x Amp Checks – Each electrical control component is energized and the current drawn is confirmed as
within specification.
x Engine Start – The Engine will start automatically.
x Defrost - If the coil temperature in a zone is below 45°F (7°C), a defrost cycle is initiated for that zone.
x RPM Check – The engine RPM in high and low speed is checked.
x Zone 1 Cool Check – The ability of the zone to cool in low speed is checked.
x Zone 1 Heat Check - The ability of the zone to heat in low speed is checked.
x Zone 1 Return to Cool Check – The ability of the zone to return to cool mode is checked.
x Report Test Results – The test results are reported as PASS, CHECK or FAIL when the Pretrip Test is
completed. If test results are CHECK or FAIL alarm codes will exist to direct the technician to the source
of the problem.
Pretrip Test Issues

When performing a Pretrip Test, the following issues should be considered.
x If running a Pretrip Test on a trailer loaded with dry cargo, insure that proper airflow can occur around the
load. If the load restricts airflow, false test results may occur. Also, SR-2 units have high refrigeration
capacity which results in rapid temperature changes. Sensitive dry cargo may be damaged as a result.
x If running a Pretrip Test on a trailer that has just been washed down, the extremely high humidity inside
the trailer may result in false test results.
x If running a Pretrip Test on a trailer loaded with sensitive cargo, monitor the load temperature during the
test as normal temperature control is suspended during pre-trip operation.
x Always perform Pretrip Tests with the trailer cargo doors closed to prevent false test failures.
4-73
02 February 2007
Performing a Pretrip Test

If a Pretrip Test is initiated with the engine or electric motor not running then a Full Pretrip Test will be performed.
If a Pretrip Test is initiated with the engine or electric motor running a Running Pretrip Test is performed.
x Before initiating a Pretrip Test, clear all alarm codes.
x To stop a Pretrip Test at any time, turn the unit off.
Pretrip Tests are initiated using the Pretrip Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU key.
CYCLE SENTRY
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 OFF POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to display the Pretrip menu.
When the Pretrip menu is shown press the SELECT key to start a Pretrip Test.
MAIN MENU
ON
PRETRIP
OFF
If the unit is not running a Full Pretrip Test will be initiated. If the unit is running in either diesel or electric mode a
Running Pretrip will be performed.
ON PROGRAMMING PRETRIP MODE
OFF
PLEASE WAIT
4-74
02 February 2007
If all alarms were not cleared a prompt appears as shown below. Exit the Pretrip Test, clear all alarms and repeat
the Pretrip Test.
ON
NO PRETRIP -- ALARM ACTIVE
OFF
EXIT
The Pretrip Test display appears.
NON-RUNNING PRETRIP
TEST 1 OF 55
ON
SENSOR CHECK
OFF
HOUR SENSORS GAUGES

METERS
x The top line of the display indicates the unit is performing the non-running portion of the Pretrip Test.
x The second line shows Test 1 of 55 is being performed. Note that the tests may not be performed in
numerical order.
x The soft keys may be used during the Pretrip Test to select the Hourmeter, Gauge or Sensor menus.
x To stop a Pretrip Test at any time, turn the unit off. This will generate Alarm Code 28 Pretrip Abort. Other
alarm codes may also be generated. This is normal when the Pretrip Test is halted before completion.
4-75
02 February 2007
When the non-running tests are complete the unit will start automatically and continue with the Running Pretrip
Test. In the example shown below the unit is in the Running Pretrip and is performing Test 3 of 15 Zone 1 Cool
Test.
RUNNING PRETRIP
TEST 3 OF 15
ON
ZONE 1 COOL TEST

OFF
HOUR SENSORS GAUGES

METERS
When all tests are complete, the results are reported as PASS, CHECK or FAIL. If the results are CHECK or
FAIL, the accompanying alarm codes will direct the technician to the cause of the problem.
PRETRIP
ON
PASS
OFF
EXIT
If the Pretrip Test results are CHECK or FAIL the problem should be diagnosed and corrected and the Pretrip
Test repeated and passed before the unit is released for service. The Pretrip Test result screen will exit to the
Main Menu Alarm Submenu for convenient access to any alarms generated during the Pretrip Test.
4-76
02 February 2007
Diesel Mode/Electric Standby Menu
The Diesel Mode/Electric Standby menu allows the operator to manually select diesel or electric mode operation.
The unit can also be programmed to automatically select electric mode operation when standby power is
available and diesel mode operation if standby power fails or is removed. If the unit is programmed to switch
automatically from diesel to electric and electric to diesel these screens do not appear.
Switching from Diesel to Electric

If the unit is running in diesel and automatic switching to electric mode is disabled, the unit is switched to electric
mode using the Electric Standby Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU key.
CYCLE SENTRY
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 OFF POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to display the Electric Standby
menu. When the Electric Standby menu is shown press the SELECT key to switch to electric mode operation.
MAIN MENU
ON
ELECTRIC STANDBY
OFF
NOTE: This screen will not appear if diesel to electric switchover is enabled.
4-77
02 February 2007
If the unit has standby power available and is turned on, the electric standby run screen will appear. The new
mode is then confirmed for 10 seconds. The unit will start and run in electric mode and the display will return to
the Standard Display. If electric standby power is not available the display will prompt for a return to diesel mode
as shown below.
If the electric standby power source fails or is disconnected and manual switching to diesel mode is selected, the
unit will prompt for a switch to diesel. Selecting YES will switch unit operation back to diesel mode. Pressing the
NO key will force the unit to remain in Electric Standby mode even though standby power is not available. The
unit will not run and Alarm Code 91 Check Electric Ready Input will be set as a prevent alarm.
ELECTRIC STANDBY UNDETECTED

ON
DIESEL?
OFF
YES NO
4-78
02 February 2007
Switching from Electric to Diesel

If the unit is running in electric and manual switching to diesel mode is enabled, the unit is switched using the
Diesel Mode Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU key.
CYCLE SENTRY
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 OFF POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to show the Diesel Mode
Menu. When the Diesel Mode Menu is shown press the SELECT key.
MAIN MENU
ON
DIESEL MODE
OFF
The unit will return to Diesel Mode operation.
NOTE: This screen will not appear if electric to diesel switchover is enabled.
The unit can be programmed to automatically switch to electric mode operation when standby power is available.
It can also be programmed to automatically switch to diesel mode operation if the standby power fails or is
disconnected.
4-79
02 February 2007
Adjust Brightness
The brightness of the HMI Control Panel display backlight can be adjusted to allow for changing ambient light
conditions. The choices available to the operator are HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW and OFF. OFF actually results in a
very dim backlight suitable for low light conditions.
IMPORTANT: Before replacing an HMI with no backlight check the Adjust Backlight feature to be sure the
backlight is turned on.
Backlight brightness is adjusted using the Adjust Brightness Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU
key.
CYCLE SENTRY
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 OFF POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to show the Adjust Brightness
Menu. When the Adjust Brightness Menu is shown press the SELECT key.
MAIN MENU
ON
ADJUST BRIGHTNESS
OFF
4-80
02 February 2007
The Display Brightness menu will appear as shown below. Press the + or – keys to select the desired display
backlight brightness. When the desired backlight brightness is shown press the YES key to confirm the choice.
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS WILL BE

ON
MEDIUM
OFF
USE +/- TO CHANGE OK?
- + YES NO
The display will briefly show ADJUSTING BRIGHTNESS – PLEASE WAIT
ON ADJUSTING BRIGHTNESS
OFF
PLEASE WAIT
4-81
02 February 2007
Time
The Time and Date held by the HMI Control Panel real time clock can be checked. Time and Date cannot be
changed from the Main Menu.
The time and date is accessed using the Main Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU key.
CYCLE SENTRY
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 OFF POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT key as required to show the Time. When Time
is shown press the SELECT key. The current time and date will appear.
TIME MENU
ON
01:01 SUNDAY DECEMBER 10 2006
OFF
EXIT
4-82
02 February 2007
MAINTENANCE MENU OVERVIEW

1 of 4 2 of 4
HOURMETERS (View and Reset Time) SENSORS

Total Hours Zone 1 Return Air Temperature
Total Run Time Hours Zone 1 Discharge Air Temperature
Engine Hours Zone 1 Temperature Differential
Electric Run Hours Zone 1 Evaporator Coil Temperature
Zone 1 Run Time Hours Zone 2 Return Air Temperature
Zone 2 Run Time Hours Zone 2 Discharge Air Temperature
Zone 3 Run Time Hours Zone 2 Temperature Differential
Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours Zone 2 Evaporator Coil Temperature
Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours Zone 3 Return Air Temperature
Controller Power On Hours Zone 3 Discharge Air Temperature
Pretrip Reminder Hours Zone 3 Temperature Differential
Engine Run Time Reminder #1 Hours Zone 3 Evaporator Coil Temperature
Engine Run Time Reminder #2 Hours Ambient Air Temperature
GAUGES Spare 3 Temperature
Coolant Temperature (CargoWatch) Datalogger Sensor 1 Temperature
Coolant Level (CargoWatch) Datalogger Sensor 2 Temperature
Amps (CargoWatch) Datalogger Sensor 3 Temperature
Battery Voltage (CargoWatch) Datalogger Sensor 4 Temperature
Engine RPM (CargoWatch) Datalogger Sensor 5 Temperature
Fuel Level Sensor (CargoWatch) Datalogger Sensor 6 Temperature
Discharge Pressure Board Temperature Sensor
Suction Pressure ALARMS
I/O (InputOutput State) Display all alarms
High Speed Relay Clear most alarms
Run Relay
Defrost Damper
Oil Pressure
Oil Level
Run Relay Feedback
Fuel Pressure
Electric Overload
Purge Valve
Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 1
Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 2 Not all menu features
Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 3 may appear
Suction Line Solenoid Zone 1
Suction Line Solenoid Zone 2 Not all menu features
Suction Line Solenoid Zone 3 ~ Continued Next Page ~
may appear
SR-2 M/T Rev 6510

9100 30 November
11 July 2006
4-83
02 February 2007
Maintenance Menu Overview – (continued)

3 of 4 4 of 4
SERVICE TEST DISPLAY SELF TEST

Test with Unit Running? LCD Test
Zone 1 Null Keypad Test
Zone 1 Low Speed Cool Backlight Test
Zone 1 High Speed Cool Brightness Test
Zone 1 Low Speed Heat Buzzer Test
Zone 1 High Speed Heat Heater Output
Zone 1 Defrost Unit On/Off Output Test
Zone 1 Minimal Heat SPR Digital Output Test
Zone 2 Null Serial E2
Zone 2 Low Speed Cool Datalog Flash
Zone 2 High Speed Cool RTC Update
Zone 2 Low Speed Heat EVACUATION TEST
Zone 2 High Speed Heat Connect Battery Charger
Zone 2 Defrost SOFTWARE REVISION
Zone 2 Minimal Heat Display Software Rev
Zone 3 Null Controller Software Rev
Zone 3 Low Speed Cool Supervisor Software Rev
Zone 3 High Speed Cool SET TIME AND DATE
Zone 3 Low Speed Heat Hour
Zone 3 High Speed Heat Minutes
Zone 3 Defrost Date
Zone 3 Minimal Heat Month
INTERFACE BOARD TEST Year
Preheat Relay
Buzzer
Run Relay
Damper Output
Indicator Light
Alarm Light
Diesel Electric Relay
High Speed | Electric Heat Relay
Receiver Tank Solenoid
Alternator Excite Relay
Purge Valve
Fan Motor 2 Relay
Zone 2 Damper Output
Fan Motor 3 Relay
Zone 3 Suction Line Solenoid Not all menu features
Zone 3 Liquid Line Solenoid may appear
SR-2 M/T Rev 6510 30 November 2006
4-84
02 February 2007
USING THE MAINTENANCE MENU

The Maintenance Menu contains features that allow the technician to view additional information, perform unit
diagnostics using Service Test Mode and Interface Board Test Mode and evacuate and charge the unit with
refrigerant using Evacuation Mode. Software revisions can be checked and the time and date can be set.
To access the Maintenance Menu press the MENU key.
CYCLE SENTRY
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 OFF POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
The Maintenance Menu is accessed from the first Main Menu screen that appears; either the Language Display or
the Alarms Display. The Alarms Display is shown here. Press and hold both the unlabelled soft key and the Exit
key for 5 seconds as shown below.
MAIN MENU
ON
ALARMS
OFF
EXIT SELECT NEXT
4-85
02 February 2007
The first Maintenance Menu feature will appear. Press the NEXT and BACK keys to scroll thru the Maintenance
Menu choices. When the desired choice is shown on the display, press the SELECT key to access it.
MAINTENANCE MENU
ON
HOURMETERS
OFF
EXIT SELECT NEXT
The Maintenance Menu choices are shown on the next page. For detailed information see the individual
explanations of each item later in this section of the manual.
The HMI control panel will also return to the Standard Display 30 seconds after the last key is pressed.
4-86
02 February 2007
MAINTENANCE MENU CHOICES
Hourmeters
This menu allows the technician to view all the active unit hourmeters, even if the Main Menu hourmeter view has
been turned off. The Maintenance Menu Hourmeter Display also allows the technician to reset the time on
hourmeters with a programmed time limit.
Choose Hourmeters by pressing the SELECT key when HOURMETERS is shown by the Maintenance Menu.
The hourmeter screen appears as shown below.
ENGINE MAINTENANCE HOURS 1

ON
48
OFF
EXIT RESET PREVIOUS NEXT
The NEXT and BACK keys are used to scroll through the hourmeters.
The EXIT key returns to the Maintenance Menu
See the definition of hourmeters on the next page.
4-87
02 February 2007
Hourmeter Displays
Hourmeter Name Definition
Total Hours Total number of hours the unit has been turned on (protection hours).
Total Run Time Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in both diesel and electric mode.
Engine Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in diesel mode.
Electric Run Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in electric mode.
Zone 1 Run Time Hours Total number of hours that Zone 1 has run, including Null hours.
Controller Power On Hours Total hours the controller and HMI control panel have been turned on.
Pretrip Reminder Hours User Programmable – number of hours before a Pretrip Reminder occurs.
4-88
02 February 2007
Gauges
This menu allows the technician to view the unit gauges.
Choose Gauges by pressing the SELECT key when GAUGES is shown by the Maintenance Menu. The first
Gauges screen appears as shown below.
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
ON
183 °F
OFF
EXIT LOCK NEXT
The NEXT and BACK keys are used to scroll through the gauges.
The LOCK key allows a gauge display to be “locked” on the display for 15 minutes at the operator’s discretion.
Not all gauges are available on all units. Only gauges used by the specific unit will appear.
See the list of gauges on the next page.
The I/O submenu shows the state of each named device – either On or Off.
The Gauges Menu can also be accessed from the Main Menu.
4-89
02 February 2007
Gauge Displays
Coolant Temperature I/O (Input/Output State - continued)

Coolant Level Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 1
Amps Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 2
Battery Voltage Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 3
Engine RPM Hot Gas Solenoid Zone 1
Fuel Level Sensor Hot Gas Solenoid Zone 2
Discharge Pressure Hot Gas Solenoid Zone 3
Suction Pressure Suction Line Solenoid Zone 1
I/O (Input/Output State) Suction Line Solenoid Zone 2
High Speed Relay Suction Line Solenoid Zone 3
Run Relay
Defrost Damper
Oil Pressure Not all menu items may appear
Oil Level
Run Relay Feedback
Fuel Pressure
Electric Overload
Variable Speed Fan Desired Pos Z2
Variable Speed Fan Desired Pos Z3
Purge Valve
4-90
02 February 2007
Sensors
This menu allows the technician to view the unit temperature sensors.
Choose Gauges by pressing the SELECT key when SENSORS is shown by the Maintenance Menu. The
SENSORS screen appears as shown below.
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE

ON
83 °F
OFF
EXIT LOCK NEXT
The NEXT and BACK keys are used to scroll through the sensors.
The LOCK key allows a sensor display to be “locked” on the display to prevent the display from timing out.
See the list of sensors on the next page.
The Sensors Menu can also be accessed from the Main Menu.
4-91
02 February 2007
Sensor Displays
Zone 1 Return Air Temperature

Zone 1 Discharge Air Temperature
Zone 1 Temperature Differential
Zone 1 Evaporator Coil Temperature
Ambient Air Temperature
Spare 1 Temperature
Spare 2 Temperature
Spare 3 Temperature
(CargoWatch) Data Logger Sensor 1 Temperature
Board Temperature Sensor (HMI board)
Not all menu items may appear
4-92
02 February 2007
Alarms
Allows the technician to view all alarms and clear most alarms. The Alarms Menu is also available from the Main
Menu.
Choose Alarms by pressing the SELECT key when ALARMS is shown by the Maintenance Menu. The Alarms
screen appears as shown below.
ALARM 10
ON
1 OF 2 ALARMS
HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE
OFF
The soft key functions are:

x The EXIT key returns to the Maintenance Menu.
x The CLEAR key clears most alarms. Some alarms can only be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu.
x The HELP key accesses an Operator level help screen.
x The NEXT key is used to scroll through the alarms.
For as list of possible alarm codes and alarm code diagnostics see Section 5 of this manual.
4-93
02 February 2007

The following control and display sensor alarm codes can only be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu. The
CLEAR soft key will not appear if the alarms are displayed from the Main Menu or the Maintenance Menu.

to a Prevent Alarm.
x Alarm Code 91 Check Electric Ready Input – Clears automatically when the unit starts running.
from 5H.
4-94
02 February 2007
Service Test Mode

Service Test Mode allows the technician to force each zone to a known mode for diagnostic purposes. The unit
can be either running or not running. If the unit is not running and running tests are selected, the unit will start
after a test has been selected.
IMPORTANT: Service Test Mode is not allowed if any shutdown alarms exist or if the unit is in a Prevent Mode
shutdown null (Alarm Code 84). Clear all alarms before using Service Test Mode.
Choose Service Test Mode by pressing the SELECT key when SERVICE TEST is shown by the Maintenance
Menu. Select either Running or Non Running tests.
A typical Service Test Mode screen is shown below. The test shown is the Zone 1 Low Speed Cool test.
ZONE 1 LOW COOL TEST

ON
RET 10 F ECOIL 2F
DIS 4F DIFF -6 F
TIME REMAINING 12:32 MINS
OFF
EXIT TEST GAUGES NEXT
The Return, Discharge and Evaporator Coil temperatures as well as the Temperature Differential are shown. The
soft key functions are as follows.
x Pressing the EXIT key terminates Service Test Mode and returns to the Maintenance Menu.
x Pressing the TEST key scrolls thru the various tests available for the current zone.
x Pressing the GAUGES key scrolls through the unit gauges.
x Pressing the NEXT key switches between zones to allow a different test mode to be selected for each
zone.
A test will remain active for 15 minutes. A countdown timer shows the time remaining for the test. If the test
times out the test will terminate, the unit will be shut down (if running) and Alarm Code 54 Test Mode Timeout is
set.
Not all tests are available on all units. Only tests that apply to the specific unit will appear.
See the list of tests on the next page.
4-95
02 February 2007
Service Test Modes

Test with Unit Running – Yes or No?
x Zone 1 Null
x Zone 1 Low Speed Cool
x Zone 1 High Speed Cool
x Zone 1 Low Speed Heat
x Zone 1 High Speed Heat
x Zone 1 Defrost
x Zone 1 Minimal Heat
x Zone 2 Null
x Zone 2 Defrost
x Zone 3 Null
x Zone 3 Defrost
4-96
02 February 2007
Service Test Mode Summary

See the table Operation of SR-2 SPECTRUM Unit Solenoids and Valves on the next page for additional
details.
x Service Test Mode operation is forced operation to allow servicing to proceed under known conditions.
All protection controls are active during Service Test Mode operation to prevent unit damage. All other
controls (such as programmable features) are disabled when Service Test Mode is active.
x When a zone is cooling the Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) is energized (open).
x When a zone is heating or defrosting then the Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) is energized (open) and the Hot
Gas Solenoid (HGS) is energized (open). If a defrost test is being performed in a host zone, then the
defrost damper will be energized (closed). If a defrost test is being performed in a remote zone, then the
evaporator fan motors will be de-energized.
x When a zone is in reverse cycle heat then the Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) for that zone is energized
(open), the Hot Gas Solenoid (HGS) is energized (open) and the Suction Line Solenoid (SLS) is
energized (closed).
x When a zone is in Null then the Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) is de-energized (closed) and the Hot Gas
Solenoid (HGS) is de-energized (closed). If the test is being performed in a host zone, then the defrost
damper will be closed. If the test is being performed in a remote zone, then the evaporator fan motors will
be de-energized.
x When a zone is in minimal heat then the Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) is energized (open) and the Hot Gas
Solenoid (HGS) is energized (open).
4-97
02 February 2007
02 February 2007
Service Test Mode Output States
Low Speed High Speed Low Speed High Speed Minimal
Null Defrost
Cool Cool Heat Heat Heat
UNIT DEVICES
Condenser Inlet Solenoid (CIS) On or Off On or Off On or Off
Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1
Receiver Tank Press Sol (RTPS) On or Off On or Off On or Off
Purge Valve (PV) On or Off On or Off On or Off
High Speed Solenoid (HS) On On
Damper Solenoid (DS)

On
Note 2
ZONE DEVICES
4-98
On
Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) On On On On On
Operation of SR-2 SPECTRUM Unit Solenoids and Valves
Note 4
On
Hot Gas Solenoid (HGS) On On On
Note 4
Suction Line Solenoid (SLS) On if other On if other On if other
Note 5 zone in cool zone in cool zone in cool
Fan Motors On
Note 3 On On On On
Note 3 Note 4
Drain Hose Heaters On
Note 1 - These devices operate as required depending on system pressures and ambient temperature.
Note 2 - Damper solenoid on host unit and Zone 2 if unit is a DE.
Note 3 - Fan motors operate in Running Null.
Note 4 - Minimal Heat is allowed only if all other zones are in Null or Off.
Note 5 - Suction Line Solenoid is On only if another zone is cooling (Reverse Cycle operation).

Allows the technician to energize and de-energize individual outputs for diagnostic purposes. The unit can not be
running to use this test. If the test is entered with the unit running, the unit will shut down.
IMPORTANT: Interface Board Test Mode is not allowed if any shutdown alarms exist or if the unit is in a Prevent
Mode shutdown null (Alarm Code 84). Clear all alarms before using Interface Board Test Mode.
Choose Interface Board Test by pressing the SELECT key when INTERFACE BOARD TEST is shown by the
Maintenance Menu. The first Interface Board Test screen appears. Press the NEXT soft key as required to
select the desired test. The Run Relay test is shown below.
RUN RELAY
ON
HED-P 169 AMPS 0.0
SCT-P 169 VOLTS 13.2
OFF
EXIT TEMP ON LOCK ON NEXT
Discharge Pressure, Suction Pressure, Amps and Volts are displayed. The soft key functions are as follows.
x Pressing the EXIT key returns to the Maintenance Menu.
x Pressing the TEMP ON key momentarily energizes the indicated control device.
x Pressing the LOCK ON key locks the indicated control device on for 15 minutes. If the test times out
Alarm Code 54 Test Mode Timeout is set. Not all tests can be locked on. See the next page.
x Pressing the NEXT key allows a test mode to be selected. There is no BACK key – the Next key scrolls
through the entire test list and then starts over at the beginning of the list.
The LOCK ON key energizes the device for 15 minutes. Not all tests can be locked on. Here the Run Relay has
been locked on. Comparing the AMPS display with the display above where the Run Relay was not energized, it
can be seen that the Run Relay is drawing about 1.7 amps.
RUN RELAY
ON
HED-P 169 AMPS -1.7
SCT-P 169 VOLTS 13.2
OFF
EXIT UNLOCK
4-99
02 February 2007
Interface Board Test Modes and Current Draw

Not all tests are available on all units. Only tests used by the specific unit will appear. Device current draw will
vary dependant on battery voltage and battery condition.
Interface Board Test Approximate Device Notes
Current Draw
Preheat Relay 70 Amps Temporary On only
Buzzer Negligible Temporary On only
Run Relay 2.0 Amps
Condenser Inlet Solenoid 1.3 Amps
Damper Output 5.7 Amps
Indicator Light 0.1 Amps
Alarm Light 0.1 Amps
Diesel/Electric Relay 1.1 Amps Not available if ER is high
High Speed Relay 4.6 Amps
Receiver Tank Solenoid 0.7 Amps
Alternator Excite Relay Depends on alternator type
Purge Valve 0.7 Amps
Zone 1 Liquid Line Solenoid 1.5 Amps
Zone 1 Hot Gas Solenoid 1.5 Amps
Zone 1 Suction Line Solenoid 1.3 Amps
Fan Motor 2 Relay 8.0 Amps (Per Motor) Depends on unit configuration
Zone 2 Damper Output (DE only) 5.7 Amps
Drain Hose Heater Zone 2 2.0 Amps (Each) Current doubles if Parallel Evaps
Zone 2 Hot Gas Solenoid 1.5 Amps Current doubles if Parallel Evaps
Zone 2 Suction Line Solenoid 1.3 Amps Current doubles if Parallel Evaps
Zone 2 Liquid Line Solenoid 1.3 Amps Current doubles if Parallel Evaps
Fan Motor 3 Relay 8.0 Amps (Per Motor) Depends on unit configuration
Drain Hose Heater Zone 3 2.0 Amps (Each) Current doubles if Parallel Evaps
Zone 3 Hot Gas Solenoid 1.5 Amps Current doubles if Parallel Evaps
Zone 3 Suction Line Solenoid 1.3 Amps Current doubles if Parallel Evaps
Zone 3 Liquid Line Solenoid 1.3 Amps Current doubles if Parallel Evaps
4-100
02 February 2007
Display Self Test

The Display Self Test allows the technician to perform a number of self tests on the HMI Control Panel. The tests
available are shown below.
Choose Display Self Test by pressing the SELECT key when DISPLAY SELF TEST is shown by the Maintenance
Menu. The Display Self Test screen appears. Select a test from the list below.
x LCD Test – This test allows the technician to select a normal or inverted display. If inverted is chosen the
display is reversed – segments that were turned on are now turned off and segments that were turned off
are now turned on. The technician visually verifies that all display segments are functioning properly.
x Keypad Test – This test prompts the technician to press the four soft keys, the Defrost key and the Cycle
Sentry key. Each time the requested key is pressed the next prompt is displayed, allowing the technician
to verify proper operation on these keys.
x Backlight Test – This test allows the technician to turn the backlight on and off to confirm operation.
x Brightness Test – This test allows the technician to select Low, Medium or High backlight intensity.
x Buzzer Test – This test allows the technician to turn the HMI buzzer on and off to verify operation.
x Heater Output – This test allows the technician to turn the HMI display heater on and off.
x Serial E2 – This test allows the technician to perform an internal HMI memory test. The test takes less
than 1 second and the results are reported as PASS or FAIL.
x Datalog Flash – This test allows the technician to perform an internal HMI CargoWatch data logger
memory test. The test takes less than 1 second and the results are reported as PASS or FAIL.
x RTC Update – This test allows the technician to perform an internal HMI real time clock test. The test
takes less than 3 seconds and the results are reported as PASS or FAIL.
4-101
02 February 2007
Evacuation Test
This menu allows the technician to open all normally closed refrigeration system valves to evacuate and charge
the unit with refrigerant. If the battery voltage falls below 13.0 Vdc the technician is prompted to connect a battery
charger to maintain sufficient voltage to hold all valves open.
IMPORTANT: Evacuation mode has no time-out. The unit will remain in Evacuation Mode indefinitely
unless the battery voltage becomes excessive.
All selectable unit features will be disabled when in evacuation mode. Auto switch from diesel to electric or from
electric to diesel is allowed, but unit will not start.
Evacuation mode is not allowed if:

x Any shutdown alarms are present.
x The unit is in restart null.
x The unit is in a start sequence.
When in evacuation mode:

x If the unit is running it will shut down automatically when entering Evacuation Mode.
x Alarm Code 86 Check Discharge Pressure Sensor is disabled.
x Alarm Code 87 Check Suction Pressure Sensor is disabled.
x Door switch operation is disabled.
Choose Evacuation Test by pressing the SELECT key when EVACUATION TEST is shown by the Maintenance
Menu. The Evacuation Test display shown below will appear and remain on the display so long as the battery
voltage does not fall below 13.0 Vdc. All normally closed refrigerant valves are energized to the open position to
allow system evacuation to effectively remove air and moisture from the refrigeration system.
EVAC MODE BATTERY VOLTS

ON
OFF
13.1 V
EXIT
4-102
02 February 2007
If the battery voltage falls below 13.0 Vdc the technician is prompted to install a battery charger to guarantee
sufficient voltage to keep all valves open during the evacuation process.
CONNECT BATTERY CHARGER

ON
OFF
12.9 V
EXIT
To exit Evacuation Mode press the EXIT soft key or turn the unit off.
Software Revision
This menu allows the technician to view the software revision for the HMI control panel, the controller and the
supervisor.
Choose Software Revision by pressing the SELECT key when SOFTWARE REVISION is shown by the
Maintenance Menu. The Software Revision display appears as shown below.
DISPLAY SOFTWARE REVISION

ON
6510
OFF
EXIT NEXT
The NEXT and BACK soft keys allow the technician to scroll through the software revisions. Software revisions
appear in the order shown below:
x Display Software Rev
x Controller Software Rev
x Supervisor Software Rev
NOTE: Supervisor software revision will not appear on HMI-1 Control Panels.
4-103
02 February 2007
Set Time and Date

This menu allows the technician to view and change the HMI control panel clock/calendar.
Choose Set Time and Date by pressing the SELECT key when SET TIME AND DATE is shown by the
Maintenance Menu. The Set Time and Date display appears as shown below.
ENTER HOUR
ON
16:00
OFF
+/- TO CHANGE OK?
- + YES NO
The – and + soft keys are used to change the hour as required. Pressing YES changes the hour to the selected
time and then shows the next Time/Date screen. The screens appear in the order shown below.
x Hour
x Minute
x Date (Day)
x Month
x Year
After the YEAR is set the new time and date are displayed to allow the technician to verify they are correct.
4-104
02 February 2007
GUARDED ACCESS MENU OVERVIEW

See Section 3 of this manual for a complete description of each Guarded Access Menu features.
1 of 4 2 of 4

Running Fans in Null (Disabled) Total Run Time Hours (Enabled if Model 50)
Door Opened (Enabled) Electric Run Hours (Enabled if Model 50)
Door Open Forces (Log Only) Zone 1 Run Time Hours (Disabled)
Rail Option (Disabled) Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Disabled)
Limited Alarm Restarts (Disabled) Controller Power On Hours (Disabled)
Remote Device (Disabled) Pretrip Reminder Hours (Disabled)
COM 3 Default Baud Rate (9600) Electric Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Disabled)
Limited Setpoint # 1 (-13°F) Sensor Calibration
Demand Defrost on Temp Rises (Disabled) Zone 2 Discharge AIr Sensor Grade (5H)
Extended ServiceWatch Logging (Disabled) Zone 3 Return Air Sensor Grade (5H)
Main Menu Configuration Zone 3 Discharge AIr Sensor Grade (5H)
Add Keypad Lockout to Mode Menu (Disabled) Spare 1 Sensor Grade (5H)
Alarms Cycle Sentry Setup
Display all alarms Cycle Sentry Amps Level (5)
Clear all alarms except Alarm Code 64 Battery Sentry Voltage Level (12.2)
Defrost Setup

may appear
4-105
02 February 2007
See Section 3 of this manual for a complete description of each Guarded Access Menu features.
3 of 4 4 of 4
Unit Model (SB)

may appear
4-106
02 February 2007
USING THE GUARDED ACCESS MENU

The Guarded Access Menu contains menus that allow the technician to check and change the unit’s
programmable features. These features are detailed in Section 3 of this manual. Service Procedure A02A
explains how to read and record the Guarded Access feature settings. Service Procedure A04A explains how to
set the Guarded Access features.
NOTE: A warm restart is performed when the Guarded Access menu is exited. The unit is reconfigured so that
any changes that were made from the Guarded Access menu take affect.
The Guarded Access Menu is entered from the last feature of the Maintenance Menu. The unit must not be
running in order to enter the Guarded Access Menu. If the unit is running, enter Interface Board Test from the
Maintenance menu to shut the unit down. Press the EXIT key to return to the Maintenance Menu and continue
scrolling to the end of the Maintenance Menu.
To access the Guarded Access menu press the MENU key.
CYCLE SENTRY
ON TEMP F
-8.2 35.8 SET
OFF
0 OFF POINT
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 MENU
The Maintenance Menu is accessed from the first Main Menu screen that appears; either the Language Display or
the Alarms Display. The Alarms Display is shown here. Press and hold both the unlabelled soft key and the Exit
key for 5 seconds.
MAIN MENU
ON
ALARMS
OFF
EXIT SELECT NEXT
4-107
02 February 2007
The first Maintenance Menu feature will appear. Press the NEXT key to scroll to the Maintenance Menu/Set Time
and Date selection. The NEXT key will disappear. Press and hold both the unlabelled soft key and the Exit key
for 5 seconds as shown below.
NOTE - If the unit is running, enter Interface Board Test from the Maintenance menu to shut the unit down. Press
the EXIT key to return to the Maintenance Menu and continue scrolling to the end of the Maintenance Menu.
MAINTENANCE MENU
ON
SET TIME AND DATE
OFF
EXIT SELECT BACK
If an Access Code is required the operator will be prompted to enter the code. If an Access Code is not enabled
or when the correct security code is entered (4444 always works) the first Guarded Access menu feature will
appear. Press the NEXT and BACK keys to scroll thru the Guarded Access Menu choices. When the desired
feature is shown on the display, press the SELECT key to access it.
GUARDED ACCESS MENU

ON
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
OFF
EXIT SELECT NEXT
4-108
02 February 2007
Guarded Access Menu Features

The Guarded Access Menu features are shown on Guarded Access Overview at the beginning of this section.
For detailed information see the individual explanations of each feature in Section 3 of this manual.
Service Procedure A02A explains how to read and record the Guarded Access feature settings. Service
Procedure A04A explains how to set the Guarded Access features.
To return to the Standard Display press the EXIT key. NOTE: A warm restart is performed when the Guarded
Access menu is exited.
4-109
02 February 2007
4-110
02 February 2007
Section 5 – SR-2 SPECTRUM Diagnostics
TABLE OF CONTENTS – SECTION 5
SR-2 Diagnostics ..................................................................................................................................................... 5

SR-2 SPECTRUM Control System Notes............................................................................................................... 6
Electrostatic Discharge........................................................................................................................................... 6
Physical protection.................................................................................................................................................. 6
Corrective Actions As A Result Of Alarm Codes ................................................................................................. 7
Alarm Types ............................................................................................................................................................. 7
Log Alarms ........................................................................................................................................................... 7
Check Alarms ....................................................................................................................................................... 7
Unit Level Prevent Alarms .................................................................................................................................. 8
Zone Level Prevent Alarms................................................................................................................................. 8
Unit Level Shutdown Alarms .............................................................................................................................. 8
Zone Specific Shutdown Alarms ........................................................................................................................ 9
Alarm Codes When Switching Between Diesel and Electric........................................................................... 9
Special Considerations......................................................................................................................................... 10
Pretrip Alarm Codes .......................................................................................................................................... 10
Zone Off Alarm Codes ....................................................................................................................................... 10
Clearing Alarm Codes ....................................................................................................................................... 10
00 No Alarms Exist ................................................................................................................................................ 11
02 Check Evaporator Coil Sensor........................................................................................................................ 11
03 Check Return Air Sensor ................................................................................................................................. 14
04 Check Discharge Air Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 17
05 Check Ambient Temperature Sensor ............................................................................................................. 20
06 Check Coolant Temperature Sensor .............................................................................................................. 22
07 Check Engine RPM Sensor.............................................................................................................................. 24
09 High Evaporator Temperature......................................................................................................................... 26
10 High Discharge Pressure................................................................................................................................. 27
11 Unit Controlling on Alternate Sensor ............................................................................................................. 29
12 Sensor Shutdown ............................................................................................................................................. 30
13 Sensor Check.................................................................................................................................................... 31
13 Sensor Check.................................................................................................................................................... 32
15 Check Intake Air Heater ................................................................................................................................... 33
17 Engine Failed to Crank..................................................................................................................................... 34
18 High Engine Coolant Temperature ................................................................................................................. 35
19 Low Engine Oil Pressure ................................................................................................................................. 36
5-1
02 February 2007
20 Engine Failed to Start....................................................................................................................................... 38

21 Cooling Cycle Check........................................................................................................................................ 39
22 Heating Cycle Check ........................................................................................................................................ 40
23 Cooling Cycle Fault .......................................................................................................................................... 41
24 Heating Cycle Fault .......................................................................................................................................... 42
25 Alternator Check............................................................................................................................................... 43
26 Check Refrigeration Capacity ......................................................................................................................... 44
28 Pretrip Abort...................................................................................................................................................... 45
29 Check Defrost Damper Circuit ........................................................................................................................ 46
30 Defrost Damper Stuck...................................................................................................................................... 48
31 Check Oil Pressure Switch .............................................................................................................................. 49
32 Refrigeration Capacity Low ............................................................................................................................. 50
33 Check Engine RPM ........................................................................................................................................... 51
35 Check Run Relay Circuit.................................................................................................................................. 52
36 Electric Motor Failed to Run............................................................................................................................ 53
37 Check Engine Coolant Level ........................................................................................................................... 54
38 Electric Phase Reversed.................................................................................................................................. 56
39 Check Water Valve Circuit ............................................................................................................................... 57
40 Check High Speed Circuit................................................................................................................................ 58
40 Check High Speed Circuit................................................................................................................................ 59
41 Check Engine Coolant Temperature............................................................................................................... 60
42 Unit Forced to Low Speed ............................................................................................................................... 61
44 Check Fuel System........................................................................................................................................... 62
45 Check Hot Gas Circuit...................................................................................................................................... 63
46 Check Air Flow.................................................................................................................................................. 65
48 Check Belts or Clutch ...................................................................................................................................... 66
52 Check Heat Circuit............................................................................................................................................ 67
54 Test Mode Timeout ........................................................................................................................................... 67
61 Low Battery Voltage ......................................................................................................................................... 68
62 Ammeter Out of Calibration............................................................................................................................. 70
63 Engine Stopped ................................................................................................................................................ 71
64 Pretrip Reminder............................................................................................................................................... 73
65 Abnormal Temperature Differential ................................................................................................................ 74
66 Low Engine Oil Level ....................................................................................................................................... 75
67 Check Liquid Line Solenoid Circuit ................................................................................................................ 76
68 Internal Controller Fault Code......................................................................................................................... 79
5-2
02 February 2007
70 Hourmeter Failure............................................................................................................................................. 79
74 Controller Reset to Defaults ............................................................................................................................ 80
77 Controller EPROM Checksum Failure ............................................................................................................ 80
79 Internal Data Logger Overflow ........................................................................................................................ 81
84 Restart Null........................................................................................................................................................ 82
85 Forced Unit Operation...................................................................................................................................... 83
86 Check Discharge Pressure Sensor................................................................................................................. 84
86 Check Discharge Pressure Sensor................................................................................................................. 85
87 Check Suction Pressure Sensor ..................................................................................................................... 86
90 Electric Overload .............................................................................................................................................. 88
91 Check Electric Ready Input ............................................................................................................................. 89
92 Sensor Grades Not Set .................................................................................................................................... 90
93 Low Compressor Suction Pressure ............................................................................................................... 91
96 Low Fuel Level .................................................................................................................................................. 92
98 Check Fuel Level Sensor ................................................................................................................................. 93
105 Check Receiver Tank Pressure Sol Circuit.................................................................................................. 94
106 Check Purge Valve Circuit............................................................................................................................. 96
107 Check Condenser Inlet Solenoid Circuit...................................................................................................... 98
108 Door Open Timeout ...................................................................................................................................... 100
110 Check Suction Line Solenoid Circuit.......................................................................................................... 101
111 Unit Not Configured Correctly..................................................................................................................... 104
112 Check Remote Fans ..................................................................................................................................... 105
113 Check Electric Heat Circuit.......................................................................................................................... 108
114 Multiple ALarms – Can Not Run.................................................................................................................. 109
117 Auto Switch From Diesel to Electric........................................................................................................... 109
118 Auto Switch From Electric to Diesel........................................................................................................... 110
120 Check Alternator Excite Circuit................................................................................................................... 111
121 Check PWM/Liquid Injection Circuit ........................................................................................................... 113
122 Check Diesel/Electric Circuit....................................................................................................................... 114
127 Setpoint Not Entered.................................................................................................................................... 115
128 Engine Run Time Maintenance Reminder #1............................................................................................. 116
129 Engine Maintenance Run Time Reminder #2............................................................................................. 116
130 Electric Run Time Maintenance Reminder #1............................................................................................ 116
131 Electric Run Time Maintenance Reminder #2............................................................................................ 116
132 Total Unit Run Time Maintenance Reminder #1 ........................................................................................ 116
133 Total Unit Run time maintenance Reminder #2......................................................................................... 116
5-3
02 February 2007
134 Controller Power On Hours ......................................................................................................................... 116

136 Check Spare Digital Outputs ....................................................................................................................... 117
137 Check Damper Motor Heater Output .......................................................................................................... 118
141 Autoswitch Diesel to Electric Disabled ...................................................................................................... 118
143 Check Drain Hose Heater Output................................................................................................................ 119
144 Loss of CAN Communication...................................................................................................................... 122
145 Loss of 8XP Input ......................................................................................................................................... 123
146 Software Version Mismatch......................................................................................................................... 124
147 Check Multi-Temp Fan Speed Control Output........................................................................................... 125
148 Autoswitch Electric to Diesel Disabled ...................................................................................................... 126
153 Expansion Module Flash load Failure ........................................................................................................ 127
5-4
02 February 2007
SR-2 DIAGNOSTICS
Section 5 is devoted to diagnostic routines designed to help the technician quickly identify the cause of a problem
and repair it using the correct tools, information and procedures. It is important that the required procedures be
followed exactly. Failure to do so may result in an incomplete repair.
The remaining material is divided into two sections. The first section suggests corrective actions as a result of
alarm codes. The second section suggests corrective actions as a result of symptoms other than alarm codes.
The following hints will prove helpful.
x Every effort should be made to perform a Pretrip Test on a suspect unit. In almost all cases, the Pretrip Test
will result in one or more alarm codes that will lead you directly to the problem.
x Operators should record all alarm codes in sequence for reference. Alarm codes are displayed in order of
occurrence, with the most recent alarm code displayed last.
x Clear all alarm codes before starting a Pretrip Test.
x Use Interface Board Test and Service Test Mode as appropriate to verify unit operation
x Be certain all connectors on the interface board, HMI Control Panel and Expansion Module are properly
seated.
x Be certain all harness connectors are properly seated. Be sure to check harness connectors located in the
evaporator section.
x Make sure all programmable features are set to the customer’s specifications before releasing the unit for
service.
5-5
02 February 2007
SR-2 SPECTRUM CONTROL SYSTEM NOTES
The following procedures must be followed when working on units equipped with SR-2 base controllers.
x Never use testers consisting of a battery and a light bulb to test circuits on any solid state control
systems.
x Any time a Return Air or Discharge Air sensor is changed, it must be calibrated using the Sensor
Calibration feature in the Guarded Access Menu.
x Any time the base controller is replaced these Service Procedures must be used:
A02A - Recording Existing Base Controller Setup
A03A - Base Controller Removal and Replacement
A04A - Base Controller Setup
x Any time welding is necessary, Service Procedure A26A must be followed.
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
The following electrostatic precautions must be taken.
x Keep all SR-2 base controllers/interface boards, expansion modules, and HMI control panels in anti-static
bags at all times.
PHYSICAL PROTECTION
x Protect any defective SR-2 base controllers and HMI control panels from physical damage by placing them in
the shipping carton supplied with the replacement. They will be returned for failure analysis and possible re-
manufacture.
5-6
02 February 2007
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS AS A RESULT OF ALARM CODES
Every effort should be made to perform a Pretrip Test on a unit suspected of having a defect. In almost
all cases, the Pretrip Test will result in one or more alarm codes that will lead you directly to the problem.
ALARM TYPES
Alarms may be one of four types as shown below.
Log Alarms
Log Alarms are indicated for 60 seconds each time the unit is turned on. This level of alarm serves as a notice to
take corrective action before a problem becomes severe. Maintenance items such as maintenance hourmeter
time-outs are log alarms. The Temperature Watch screen is not disabled if only log alarm(s) are active.
When the unit is turned on the display will show the Thermo King Logo and then the “Configuring System”
message. If log alarm(s) are present the Log Alarm notice will appear on the display for 60 seconds as shown
below. The remote indicator alarm light (if installed) will also be on during this period. The Standard Display will
appear and the remote indicator alarm light will go off after 60 seconds.
Check Alarms
Check Alarms are indicated by a steady alarm icon at the side of the display. If the alarm is specific to a zone
then a smaller alarm icon will appear next to the affected zone. This level of alarm serves as a notice to take
corrective action before a problem becomes severe. The unit will run with check alarms but some features and
functions may be inhibited. The Temperature Watch screen is disabled if a check alarm is active.
5-7
02 February 2007
Unit Level Prevent Alarms

Prevent Alarms are indicated by a steady alarm icon at the side of the display. The unit will be temporarily shut
down if a prevent alarm is active. The unit will remain shut down for a timed restart interval or until the fault
conditions are corrected and then restart. If the unit is in a temporary shutdown, Alarm Code 84 Restart Null will
be present along with the associated Prevent Alarm. In most cases the unit will restart with reduced performance
to determine if continued operation is possible. If the alarm does not reoccur with reduced performance then the
unit will then return to full performance. If the unit is operating with reduced performance Alarm Code 85 Forced
Unit Operation will also be present under some conditions. In general, if the alarm condition re-occurs a defined
number of times then the alarm is set as a shutdown alarm and no further restarts are possible. The Temperature
Watch screen is disabled if a unit level prevent alarm is active.
NOTE: If the Restart After Shutdown feature in the Guarded Access Menu is set for CONTINUOUS, then
an unlimited number of restart attempts are allowed.
Zone Level Prevent Alarms

A zone level prevent alarm will force the affected zone into a temporary shutdown, but allow the unit to continue to
run as required by the host unit or other zones. A small alarm icon will appear next to the affected zone. If zone
prevent alarms occur in all zones then the unit will be forced into a unit level prevent shut down. The
Temperature Watch screen is disabled if a zone level prevent alarm is active.
Unit Level Shutdown Alarms

Shutdown Alarms are indicated by all of the following:
x The Alarm Icon will appear.
x The display and backlight will flash on and off.
x The display will switch from normal video to reverse video and back to normal video. (Light areas
become dark and dark areas become light.)
Unit level shutdown alarms will force the unit into shutdown. The unit will remain in shutdown until the shutdown
alarm is manually cleared. Exceptions are some engine and electric shutdown alarms that become log alarms
when switched to the alternate operating mode (diesel to electric or electric to diesel). The Temperature Watch
screen is disabled if a unit level shutdown alarm is active.
5-8
02 February 2007
Zone Specific Shutdown Alarms

A zone shutdown alarm will force the affected zone to shutdown, but allow the unit to continue to run as required
by the host unit or other zones. A small alarm icon will appear next to the affected zone and blink with a period of
½ second on - ½ second off. If zone shutdown alarms occur in all zones then the unit will shut down and Alarm
Code 114 Multiple Alarms – Can Not Run will be set.
Alarm Codes When Switching Between Diesel and Electric

If a shutdown alarm occurs that affects only diesel mode operation and the unit is switched to electric, the diesel
mode shutdown alarm becomes an electric mode log alarm. This allows the unit to run in electric mode without
clearing the shutdown alarm that is preventing diesel mode operation. If the unit is switched back to diesel mode,
the alarm again become a diesel mode shutdown alarm and prevents unit operation.
In the same manner, if a shutdown alarm occurs that affects only electric mode operation and the unit is switched
to diesel, the electric mode shutdown alarm becomes a diesel mode log alarm to allow diesel mode operation. If
the unit is switched back to electric mode, the alarm reverts to an electric mode shutdown alarm and prevents unit
operation.
5-9
02 February 2007
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
Pretrip Alarm Codes

If an alarm occurs during a Pretrip Test the alarm code will be displayed as Pretrip Alarm XX, where XX is the
alarm code number.
Zone Off Alarm Codes

If the host unit is turned on, zone conditions are monitored even if the zone is turned off. For example,
temperature sensor Alarm Codes 02, 03 and 04 can be set for a zone even when that zone is turned off.

The following sensor alarm codes can only be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu. The CLEAR soft key will
not appear if the alarms are displayed from the Main Menu or the Maintenance Menu.

to a Prevent Alarm.
x Alarm Code 91 Check Electric Ready Input – Clears automatically when the unit starts running or the unit
is switched to diesel mode.
from 5H.
5-10
02 February 2007
ALARM CODE DIAGNOSTICS

00 NO ALARMS EXIST Page 1 of 1
02 CHECK EVAPORATOR COIL SENSOR Page 1 of 3

In Indicated Zone
Alarm Type Zone Specific Check Alarm
(Shutdown Alarm during a Pretrip Test).
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 13 Sensor Calibration Check
Codes Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly
Component Description and Location

This sensor is an un-graded sensor and does not require calibration. The sensor is located on the evaporator
coil.
Circuit Description
This sensor circuit is a two wire circuit and is polarity sensitive. The Zone 1 sensor is connected to the base
controller. Zone 2 and Zone 3 sensors are connected to the expansion module. The CTP (+) wire connects to
the blue sensor wire. The CTN (-) wire connects to the brown sensor wire. The Zone 1 sensor wires are routed
in the Sensor Harness. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 sensor wires are located in the Expansion Module Harness. The
Zone 1 sensor is hard-wired to the harness. See the Schematic Diagram and Wiring Diagram for connectors and
pin numbers for each zone sensor.
Considerations
1. Sensors should be positioned to minimize the potential for moisture entry where the wires enter the
sensor shell. Mount sensors with the barrel up and the wires down wherever possible.
2. The sensors located in remote evaporators have two harness connections. One connection point is
located in the host evaporator section. The second connection is located in the remote evaporator. If
remote zone alarm code is present, inspect both connectors for contamination and proper connection,
(e.g. pushed or damaged pins).
5-11
02 February 2007

In Indicated Zone
How Alarm is Set
1. If the sensor reading is over 200°F (93°C) for 10 seconds then Alarm Code 02 is set as a check alarm.
The sensor reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal. This condition is termed a
“hard” sensor failure.
2. If the sensor reading is under -50°F (-46°C) for 10 seconds then Alarm Code 02 is set as a check alarm.
The sensor reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal. The -50°F (-46°C) check is
ignored when the zone is in a Low Evaporator Coil Temperature Demand Defrost. This condition is
termed a “hard” sensor failure.
3. If the differential between the coil and other sensors is too large when Alarm Code 02 is cleared then
Alarm Code 02 and Alarm Code 13 Sensor Calibration Check are set as check alarms. This condition is
termed a “soft” sensor failure.
4. If the sensor reading is erratic over time but does not go above 200°F (93°C) or below -50°F (-46°C) then
5. If a valid sensor reading is detected in a zone that has not been configured then Alarm Code 02 is set as
a check alarm and Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly is set as a log alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared

This alarm can be cleared manually. When the alarm is cleared the return air sensors, discharge air sensors and
evaporator coil sensor must all read within 30qF (17qC) of each other. If they do not, it is assumed that the sensor
reading is not accurate. The alarm code is not cleared and Alarm Code 13 Sensor Calibration Check will also be
set. Also, if the sensor is over or under range when the alarm clear is attempted, the alarm will not be cleared.
If the alarm is set by Condition #5 above, Alarm Codes 02 and 111 will clear automatically if the unit configuration
is changed to allow the sensor in that zone or if the sensor is no longer exhibiting a valid reading.
This is a graded sensor. The sensor grade must be correctly set in the Guarded Access Menu.
5-12
02 February 2007

In Indicated Zone
Diagnostic Procedure
Download the ServiceWatch data logger using Wintrac. Review the data using Technician Level to determine the
conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the alarm is set and
cleared. This data can be very helpful in determining the cause of the alarm.
Alarm Code 02 (Sensor was out of range)

1. Display the sensor reading using the Sensor Menu. If the display shows [----], the sensor is defective and
should be replaced. If the condition still exists, check the sensor circuit for an open wire or short to
ground. See Service Procedure D01A. Check the base controller using Service Procedure A01A.
2. If the display is normal proceed as shown below.
Alarm Code 02 and Alarm Code 13 (Sensor was reading erratically)

1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the senor reading at the time the alarm was set. Also
review the history to see if previous alarm codes exist that would indicate an intermittent problem. If the
sensor appears to have read incorrectly, it should be replaced.
2. If the problem reoccurs, check the sensor connector as shown in Service Procedure D01A.
3. Check the sensor circuit as shown by Service Procedure D01A.
Alarm Code 02 And Alarm Code 111 (Configuration Error)

1. Check unit configuration to confirm proper setting.
If all or many of the Sensor Codes (02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11, 12 and 13) are set
1. Be sure the 35 pin base controller sensor connector J3 is securely attached.
2. Be sure the 35 pin Expansion Module connector is securely attached.
3. Be sure the CAN connector on the expansion module is connected securely (Zone 2 and Zone 3 specific
alarms).
4. Check the base controller as shown by Service Procedure A01A.
5-13
02 February 2007
03 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR Page 1 of 3

In Indicated Zone
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 11 Unit Controlling on Alternate Sensor
Codes Alarm Code 13 Sensor Check
Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grades Not Set
Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly
The sensor is located in the return air stream. It is a graded sensor.
Circuit Description
This sensor circuit is a two wire circuit and is polarity sensitive. The RTP (+) wire connects to the blue sensor
wire. The RTN (-) wire connects to the brown sensor wire. The Zone 1 sensor is connected to the base
controller. Zone 2 and Zone 3 sensors are connected to the expansion module. The Zone 1 sensor wires are
routed in the Sensor Harness. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 sensor wires are located in the Expansion Module
Harness. The Zone 1 sensor is hard-wired to the harness. See the Schematic Diagram and Wiring Diagram for
connectors and pin numbers for each zone sensor.
Considerations
1. The unit normally controls on return air temperature. If a problem occurs with the return air sensor, the
unit will switch to Discharge Air Control. Alarm Code 03 Check Return Air Sensor and Alarm Code 11
Unit Controlling on Alternate Sensor will be set.
2. Sensor grades must be correctly set to the actual grade of the sensor installed. Failure to do so may
result in nuisance sensor alarm codes.
5-14
02 February 2007

In Indicated Zone
How Alarm is Set
2. If the sensor reading is under -50°F (-46°C) for 10 seconds then Alarm Code 03 is set as a check alarm.
The sensor reading will display dashes [ - - - ] may return to normal. This condition is termed a “hard”
sensor failure.
3. If the differential between the return air temperature and other temperature sensors is too large when
Alarm Code 03 is cleared then Alarm Code 03 and Alarm Code 13 Sensor Calibration Check are set as
check alarms. This condition is termed a “soft” sensor failure.
5. If the sensor grade is set to 5H then Alarm Code 03 and Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grades Not Set are set
as check alarms.
check alarm and Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly is set as a log alarm.

This alarm can be cleared manually from the Guarded Access menu. When the alarm is cleared the return air
sensor, discharge air sensor and evaporator coil sensor must all read within 30qF (17qC) of each other. If they do
not, it is assumed that the sensor reading is not accurate. The alarm code is not cleared and Alarm Code 13
Sensor Calibration Check will also be set. Also, if the sensor is over or under range when the alarm clear is
attempted, the alarm will not be cleared.
If the alarm is set by Condition #5 above, Alarm Code 92 will clear automatically if the sensor grade is changed
from 5H. If the sensor grade remains 5H, Alarm Code 92 can not be cleared.
5-15
02 February 2007

In Indicated Zone
Alarm Code 03 (Sensor was out of range) Only

Alarm Code 03 and Alarm Code 13 (Sensor drifted or was reading erratically)
1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the senor reading at the time the alarm was set. Also,
2. Be sure the sensor grades are set to the actual sensor grade.
3. Check for an airflow obstruction and correct sensor mounting.
5. Check the sensor circuit, as shown by Service Procedure D01A.
Alarm Code 03 and Alarm Code 92 (Sensor grade set to 5H)

1. Verify and set the sensor grade.

1. Check unit configuration to confirm the proper setting.
If all or many of the Sensor Codes (02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11 and 12) are set
1. Be sure the 35 pin base controller sensor connector J3 is connected securely.
alarms).
5-16
02 February 2007
04 CHECK DISCHARGE AIR SENSOR Page 1 of 3

In Indicated Zone
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 11 Unit Controlling on Alternate Sensor
Codes Alarm Code 13 Sensor Check
Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grades Not Set
Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly
The sensor is located in the discharge air stream. It is a graded sensor.
Circuit Description
This sensor circuit is a two wire circuit and is polarity sensitive. The DTP (+) wire connects to the blue sensor
wire. The DTN (-) wire connects to the brown sensor wire. The Zone 1 sensor is connected to the base
controller. Zone 2 and Zone 3 sensors are connected to the expansion module. The Zone 1 sensor wires are
routed in the Sensor Harness. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 sensor wires are located in the Expansion Module
Harness. The Zone 1 sensor is hard-wired to the harness. See the Schematic Diagram and Wiring Diagram for
connectors and pin numbers for each zone sensor.
Considerations
1. Sensor grades must be correctly set to the actual grade of the sensor installed. Failure to do so may
result in nuisance sensor alarm codes.
5-17
02 February 2007

In Indicated Zone
How Alarm is Set
2. If the sensor reading is under -50°F (-46°C) for 10 seconds then Aalrm Code 04 is set as a check alarm.
sensor failure.
3. If the differential between the discharge and other sensors is too large when Alarm Code 04 is cleared
then Alarm Code 04 and Alarm Code 13 Sensor Calibration Check are set as check alarms. This
condition is termed a “soft” sensor failure.
5. If the sensor grade is set to 5H then both Alarm Code 04 and Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grades Not Set are
set as check alarms.
a check alarm and Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly is set as a log alarm.

This alarm can be cleared manually from the Guarded Access menu. When the alarm is cleared the return air
sensors, discharge air sensors and evaporator coil sensor must all read within 30qF (17qC) of each other. If they
do not, it is assumed that the sensor reading is not accurate. The alarm code is not cleared and Alarm Code 13
Sensor Calibration Check will also be set. Also, if the sensor is over or under range when the alarm clear is
attempted, the alarm will not be cleared.
If the alarm is set by Condition #5 above, Alarm Code 92 will clear automatically if the sensor grade is changed
from 5H. If the sensor grade remains 5H, Alarm Code 92 can not be cleared.
5-18
02 February 2007

In Indicated Zone

1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the sensor reading at the time the alarm was set. Also,
2. Be sure the sensor grades are set to the actual sensor grade.
Alarm Code 04 and Alarm Code 92 (Sensor grade set to 5H)

1. Verify and set the sensor grade.

alarms).
5-19
02 February 2007
05 CHECK AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Page 1 of 2

Alarm Type Check Alarm
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 13 Sensor Check
Codes
This sensor is an un-graded sensor and does not require calibration. The sensor is located in the condenser air
stream behind the condenser grill.
Circuit Description
This sensor circuit is a two wire circuit and is polarity sensitive. The ATP (+) wire connects to the blue sensor
wire. The ATN (-) wire connects to the brown sensor wire. The wires are routed in the Sensor Harness and the
sensor is hardwired to the harness. See the Schematic Diagram and Wiring Diagram for connectors and pin
numbers for the ambient sensor.
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

1. If the sensor reading is over 200°F (93°C) for 10 seconds then set alarm code 05 as a check alarm. The
sensor reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal. This condition is termed a “hard”
sensor failure.
2. If the sensor reading is under -50°F (-46°C) for 10 seconds then set alarm code 05 as a check alarm.
sensor failure.

This alarm is cleared manually. If the sensor is over or under range when the alarm clear is attempted, the alarm
will not be cleared.
5-20
02 February 2007
05 CHECK AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Page 2 of 2


1. Display the sensor reading using the Sensor Menu. If the display shows [- - - - ], the sensor is defective
and should be replaced. If the condition still exists, check the sensor circuit for an open wire or short to
1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the sensor reading at the time the alarm was set. Also,
5-21
02 February 2007
06 CHECK COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Page 1 of 2

Alarm Type Log, Check or Shutdown Alarm
(Shutdown Alarm during a Pretrip Test or if Alarm Code 37 Check Engine Coolant
Level is set)
(Becomes a Log Alarm in the unit is switched to electric operation.)
Associated Alarm
Codes
This sensor is an un-graded sensor and does not require calibration. The sensor is located in the engine
thermostat housing.
Circuit Description
This sensor circuit is a two wire circuit and is polarity sensitive. The WTP (+) wire connects to the blue sensor
wire. The WTN (-) wire connects to the brown sensor wire. The wires are routed in the Sensor Harness. The
sensor is connected to the harness with a Deutsch connector. See the Schematic Diagram and Wiring Diagram
for connectors and pin numbers for the coolant temperature sensor.
Considerations
1. Connectors should be positioned to minimize the potential for moisture entry where the wires enter the
connector shell.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the sensor reading is over 250°F (121°C) for 10 seconds then alarm code 06 is set as a check alarm.
The sensor reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal.
2. If the sensor reading is under -50°F (-46°C) for 10 seconds then alarm code 06 is set as a check alarm.
The sensor reading will display dashes [ - - - ] may return to normal.

This alarm is cleared manually. If the sensor is over or under range when the alarm clear is attempted, the alarm
will not be cleared.
5-22
02 February 2007
06 CHECK COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Page 2 of 2


1. Display the sensor reading using the Sensor Menu. If the display shows [- - - - ], the sensor is defective
and should be replaced. If the condition still exists, check the sensor circuit for an open wire or short to
5-23
02 February 2007
07 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR Page 1 of 2

Associated Alarm
Codes
The flywheel sensor is a proximity sensor that generates a pulse as each flywheel tooth passes the sensor. The
base controller counts these pulses and performs the math necessary to convert the pulses into engine rpm. The
flywheel sensor is located on the flywheel housing above the starter.
Circuit Description
The flywheel sensor circuit is a two wire circuit and is not polarity sensitive. The FS1 wire connects the interface
board 36 pin connector J7 pin 35 to one side of the flywheel sensor. The FS2 wire connects the interface board
36 pin connector J7 pin 36 to the other side of the flywheel sensor. The sensor wires are routed in the Main
Harness.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the alternator frequency is greater than 100 Hz and oil pressure input is high but the RPM sensor
indicates less than 800 RPM then Alarm Code 07 is set as a check alarm.
2. If the alternator frequency is greater than 100 Hz and oil pressure input is high but the RPM sensor
indicates less than 300 RPM for 4 seconds then Alarm Code 07 is set as a check alarm.
3. If the RPM is less than 40 during an engine start attempt then Alarm Code 07 is set as a check alarm.

This alarm is cleared manually.
5-24
02 February 2007
07 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR Page 2 of 2

1. Disconnect the sensor wires at the flywheel sensor. Check the ac voltage at the sensor with the engine
running. If a small ac voltage (greater than 1.0 VAC) is not present check the sensor adjustment. Turn
the unit off, loosen the lock nut and turn the sensor in until it contacts the flywheel. Back the sensor out ½
turn and tighten the lock nut. Start the unit and recheck the sensor voltage. If more than 1.0 VAC is still
not present the sensor is defective and must be replaced.
2. If ac voltage is present, disconnect the flywheel harness at the base controller and disconnect the
flywheel sensor. Using a Fluke meter set for ohms, check for shorts to chassis ground on the FS1 and
FS2 wires. If a short exists, examine the wiring harness for chaffed areas and repair, as required.
3. If no shorts to chassis ground exist, connect the FS1 wire to the FS2 wire at the sensor. Check continuity
from FS1 to FS2 at the 36 pin interface board connector. The circuit should measure less than 1 ohm. If
the circuit is open, check the harness using the wiring diagram for the unit.
4. Disconnect the FS1 and FS2 connections and check the flywheel sensor continuity. The resistance
between the flywheel sensor terminals should be approximately 250 to 300 ohms. Also check from each
flywheel sensor terminal to ground. If either terminal is shorted to ground the flywheel sensor is defective.
5-25
02 February 2007
09 HIGH EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Unit Level Prevent or Shutdown Alarm
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 84 Restart Null

Codes
See Alarm Code 02 Evaporator Coil Sensor for sensor location information.
How Alarm is Set

If the unit is running and the evaporator coil temperature was greater than or equal to 155°F (68°C) or the
discharge air temperature was greater than or equal to 135°F (57°C).

1. Check refrigeration system operation, especially in heat and defrost.

a. This alarm can be set if the hot gas solenoid is stuck in the open position.
b. This alarm can be set if a host evaporator defrost damper is stuck in the closed position.
c. This alarm can be set if a remote evaporator motor(s) are failed or are inoperable due to a faulty
connection or Expansion Module output failure.
2. Check evaporator coil sensor operation, as shown in Alarm Code 02 Check Evaporator Coil Sensor. If
the evaporator coil sensor reads high due to a defective sensor Alarm Code 09 High Evaporator
Temperature may be set.
located in the host evaporator section. The second connection is located in the remote evaporator. If a
5-26
02 February 2007
10 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE Page 1 of 2


Codes
The high pressure cutout switch (HPCO) is located on the compressor discharge manifold.
Circuit Description
The high pressure cutout circuit is a two wire circuit. The HPCO wire connects the interface board 36 pin
connector J7 pin 17 to one side of the high pressure cutout switch. The PHPC wire connects the interface board
36 pin connector J7 pin 18 to the other side of the high pressure cutout switch. The switch is not polarity
sensitive. The switch wires are routed in the Main Harness. The switch is connected to the sensor harness with
a Deutsch connector.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the HPCO switch opens then alarm code 10 is set as a prevent alarm. Two restart attempts will be
made to allow continued operation at temporarily reduced performance. If, at the end of the two attempts
full performance is not possible, the alarm is set as a Shutdown alarm. The temporary shutdown period is
15 minutes Code 84 restart null is set along with the code 10 alarm to indicate the unit is in a temporary
shutdown mode.
If continuous restarts are enabled, a shutdown alarm is not set after 2 attempts. The temporary shutdown
period is 60 minutes if continuous restarts are enabled. Code 84 restart null is set along with the code 10
alarm to indicate the unit is in a temporary shutdown mode.
If restarts are disabled, the alarm will be set as a shutdown on the first occurrence.
2. If the discharge pressure transducer exceeds a pre-set value and the discharge pressure transducer is
not failed then alarm code 10 is set as a prevent alarm. Two restart attempts will be made to allow
continued operation at temporarily reduced performance. If, at the end of the two attempts full
performance is not possible, the alarm is set as a Shutdown alarm. The temporary shutdown period is 15
minutes Code 84 restart null is set along with the code 10 alarm to indicate the unit is in a temporary
shutdown mode.
If continuous restarts are enabled, a shutdown alarm is not set after 2 attempts. The temporary shutdown
period is 60 minutes if continuous restarts are enabled. Code 84 restart null is set along with the code 10
alarm to indicate the unit is in a temporary shutdown mode.
If restarts are disabled, the alarm will be set as a shutdown on the first occurrence.

1. The alarm can be cleared manually if the condition no longer exists.
2. The alarm will clear automatically at the conclusion of a successful prevent routine.
5-27
02 February 2007
10 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE Page 2 of 2

Considerations
If the HPCO switch is open it will always shut the unit down. The switch contacts break power to the Run Relay
and the fuel solenoid.
1. Check the refrigeration system for high discharge pressure and correct as required.
2. Check the High Pressure Cutout Switch for proper operation (closed under normal conditions). Check the
switch for excessive resistance. The nominal switch resistance is less than 1 ohm.
3. Check interface board fuse F25.
4. Check the discharge pressure transducer for correct and accurate readings.
5. Check the refrigeration system valves for correct operation. A fault that prevents refrigerant flow from the
system high side to the system low side may create high discharge pressure.
6. Review the ServiceWatch download in technician level view. The associated alarm data will show the
status of the HPCO switch.
5-28
02 February 2007
11 UNIT CONTROLLING ON ALTERNATE SENSOR Page 1 of 1

In Indicated Zone
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 03 Check Return Air Sensor

Codes Alarm Code 12 Sensor Shutdown

See Alarm Codes indicated above.
Circuit Description
How Alarm is Set

1. If the Return Air Sensor has failed and the unit is controlling on the Discharge Air sensor then Alarm Code
11 Unit Controlling on Alternate Sensor is set as a check alarm.

This alarm is cleared manually. The associated sensor alarm code must be cleared before Alarm Code 11 can be
cleared.
If Alarm Code 12 Sensor Shutdown is set then Alarm Code 11 will be auto cleared.
1. Determine the cause for Alarm Codes 03. Proceed as shown for that alarm code.
5-29
02 February 2007
12 SENSOR SHUTDOWN Page 1 of 1

In Indicated Zone
Alarm Type Zone Specific Check or Shutdown Alarm

Codes Alarm Code 04 Check Discharge Air Sensor

Circuit Description
How Alarm is Set

Both return and discharge sensors in a zone have failed.
Zone with Fresh Range Setpoint

1. With a fresh range setpoint and with only 1 zone running the alarm is set as a unit shutdown alarm.
2. If more than one zone is running, a zone shutdown alarm will be set for the affected zone but the unit can
continue to run as required by unit or other zone demands. The affected zone will be forced to zone null.
3. If the affected zone setpoint is changed to a frozen range setpoint, the zone will remain in zone shutdown.
Zone with Frozen Range Setpoint

1. With a frozen range setpoint the alarm is set as a zone check alarm and the zone will be forced into low
speed cool.
2. If the affected zone setpoint is changed to a fresh range setpoint, the zone check alarm will become a
zone shutdown alarm and the affected zone will be forced to zone null.

This alarm is cleared automatically when the associated sensor Alarm Codes 03 and 04 are cleared.
1. Determine the cause for sensor Alarm Codes 03 and 04. Proceed as shown for those alarm codes.
5-30
02 February 2007
13 SENSOR CHECK Page 1 of 2

In Indicated Zone
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 02 Check Evaporator Coil Sensor

Codes Alarm Code 03 Check Return Air Sensor
Alarm Code 04 Check Discharge Air Sensor
Alarm Code 05 Check Ambient Temp Sensor
Alarm Code 65 Abnormal Temperature Differential
Circuit Description
How Alarm is Set

1. Evaporator Coil Sensor Check If the evaporator coil, return and discharge sensors in a zone do not read
within a specified number of degrees of each other 20 minutes after a defrost cycle terminates then Alarm
Code 13 is set as a check alarm. Alarm Code 02 Check Evaporator Coil Sensor will also be set.
2. Return and Discharge Sensor Check If sensors drift apart then set Alarm Code 65 Abnormal
Temperature Differential. If the return and discharge sensors are reading erratically over a specified time
then Alarm Code 13 will be set as a check alarm along with the alarm code for the erratic sensor (Alarm
Code 03 or Alarm Code 04). If the erratic sensor cannot be determined and the temperature differential is
greater than 35°F then Alarm Code 13 and Alarm Code 65 Abnormal Temperature Differential will be set.
3. Return, Discharge, Evaporator Coil and Ambient Sensor Check If one or more of the return, discharge,
evaporator coil or ambient sensors are reading erratically over a specified time then Alarm Code13 will be
set along with the alarm code for the erratic sensor (Alarm Code 02, Alarm Code 03, Alarm Code 04 or
Alarm Code 05).

5-31
02 February 2007
13 SENSOR CHECK Page 1 of 2

In Indicated Zone
Determine which sensor Alarm Codes (02, 03, 04, or 05) are present. Proceed as shown for that Alarm Code.
Sensor alarms can occur in the following ways.
A “Hard Failure” is defined by an out of range sensor reading, typically caused by an open or shorted sensor,
connector, or harness conductor. The sensor display will show dashes if a hard failure occurs. If this occurs, only
the alarm code for that sensor will be set (such as Alarm Code 03 if the return air sensor failed). Note: The
controller may not be showing dashes for the sensor reading, but the alarm will be active when the unit is
inspected. If a sensor alarm code is set, a failure did occur at some point. Checking a ServiceWatch data logger
download (if available) may indicate when the hard failure occurred.
A “Soft Failure” is defined by erratic operation or sensor drift that exceeds acceptable tolerances (sensor is out of
calibration). If this occurs, the alarm code for the suspect sensor will be set along with Alarm Code 13. This
indicates a potential problem that may not be immediately apparent, and that a hard failure as defined above did
not occur. Note: Alarm Code 13 alarm is driver clearable, while sensor Alarm Codes 03 and 04 are Guarded
Access clearable only. If the unit has only Alarm Code 03 or 04 set when inspected, then Alarm Code 03 or 04
may have been originally set with Alarm Code 13. Checking a ServiceWatch data logger download (if available)
may indicate when the failure occurred.
If Alarm Code 13 occurs with Alarm Code 65, it indicates that a potential problem may exist, but the suspect
sensor or problem cannot be determined. This condition can be caused by a sensor “Soft Failure” or may be an
indication of an airflow problem. See Alarm Code 65 Abnormal Temperature Differential for additional details.
5-32
02 February 2007
15 CHECK INTAKE AIR HEATER Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Unit Level Log, Check or Shutdown Alarm
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 62

Codes
The intake air heater is located at the intake manifold.
Circuit Description
Power to the intake air heater is supplied by the H circuit. The associated interface board fuse is F5. Intake air
heater current is monitored by the Interface Board shunt.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the current draw is out of specification during an engine start then Alarm Code 15 is set as a log alarm if
the current is below the minimum and the battery voltage is within specifications. The alarm is set as a
check alarm if the current exceeds the maximum specification. Minimum preheat current for the Yanmar
engine is 63 amps. Maximum preheat current for the Yanmar engine is 80 amps.
2. If the current draw is out of specification during a Pretrip Test then Alarm Code 15 is set as a check
alarm. Minimum preheat current on the Yanmar engine is 63 amps. Maximum preheat current on
Yanmar engine is 80 amps.
3. If during a Pretrip Test the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps when de-energized then Alarm
Code 15 is set as a shutdown alarm.

The alarm is cleared manually.
1. Check the operation of the preheat circuit using Interface Board Test Mode. LED 3 should light. Current
draw should be approximately 70 amps.
2. If the current draw is zero, check for an open heater, blown fuse F5 or defective K2 Preheat Relay.
3. If the current draw is low check for low battery voltage or high circuit resistance. The intake air heater
nominal resistance is 0.0433 ohms.
4. If the current draw is in excess of 80 amps, check for a shorted intake air heater. The intake air heater
nominal resistance is 0.0433 ohms.
5. Check for battery voltage at the intake air heater when the preheat circuit is energized. The voltage
should be above 11.2 volts. If the voltage is low, check the entire preheat circuit for excessive resistance
due to burned preheat relay contacts or loose or corroded connections. Be sure all connections are
secure.
5-33
02 February 2007
17 ENGINE FAILED TO CRANK Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Unit Level Log, Check, Prevent or Shutdown Alarm
Unit Level Log Alarm in Electric Mode
Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If the engine fails to reach 40 RPM or rises above and then falls below 40 RPM during the engine crank
sequence, then this alarm is set as a prevent alarm. Two attempts are made to crank, and then Alarm
Code 17 Engine Failed to Crank is set as a shutdown alarm.
An Alarm Code 17 that follows an Alarm Code 20/84 Failed to Start will be set as a shutdown alarm.
If Alarm Code 17 follows an Alarm Code 63 alarm clear, only one crank attempt will be made.
1. Check the battery, battery cables and starter.
2. Be sure the interface board fuse F3 is not blown.
3. Check the operation of the starter circuit by forcing an engine start in Continuous mode. LED 25 should
light indicating the starter motor is energized and the engine should start.
4. Check the 8S circuit for a pushed pin, loose pin crimp or broken wire.
5. Check the High Current Harness 8S wire with an ohmmeter for continuity, per Service Procedure H04A.
6. Check for a seized compressor or engine.
7. If a Model 50 electric standby unit, check for a failed clutch or seized electric motor.
5-34
02 February 2007
18 HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 42 Unit Forced to Low Speed
Codes Alarm Code 84 Restart Null
How Alarm is Set

1. If the coolant temperature is high as determined by the coolant temperature sensor, and the coolant level
sensor is not indicating low coolant level then alarm code 18 is set as a prevent alarm. Two attempts will
be made to allow continued operation at temporarily reduced performance. If, at the end of the two
attempts full performance is not possible, the alarm is set as a Shutdown alarm. The temporary shutdown
period is 15 minutes Code 84 restart null is set along with the code 18 alarm to indicate the unit is in a
temporary shutdown mode.
If continuous restarts are enabled, a shutdown alarm is not set after 2 attempts. .The temporary
shutdown period is 60 minutes if continuous restarts are enabled. Code 84 restart null is set along with
the code 18 alarm to indicate the unit is in a temporary shutdown mode. If restarts are disabled, the
alarm will be set as a shutdown on the first occurrence.
2. If the coolant temperature is high as determined by the coolant temperature sensor and the coolant level
sensor is indicating low coolant level then alarm Code 18 is set as a shutdown alarm.

Considerations
This alarm becomes a log alarm if the unit is switched to electric mode. Alarm Code 18 alarm conditions will be
monitored while the unit is operating in electric mode, and will auto-clear when the engine coolant temperature is
reduced to a safe value.
1. Check the engine water temperature using the Gauge Menu. If the temperature is above 220°F (104°C),
check the engine cooling system to determine the cause of overheating.
2. Check the engine coolant level. Bleed air from the cooling system if necessary. CAUTION: Do not
open the cap on the expansion tank when the coolant is hot!
3. Check the water pump drive belt.
4. Check the radiator for airflow and coolant flow restrictions.
5. Check the Water Temperature Sensor, as shown in Alarm Code 06 above.
5-35
02 February 2007
19 LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE Page 1 of 2

Alarm Type Unit Level Shutdown Alarm in Diesel Mode
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 31 Check Oil Pressure Switch
Codes Alarm Code 66 Low Engine Oil Level

The oil pressure switch is located at the side of the oil filter housing.
Circuit Description
The low oil pressure switch circuit is a single wire circuit. The 20B wire connects the interface board 36 pin
connector J7 pin 28 to the low oil pressure switch. The switch is not polarity sensitive and is closed on low oil
pressure. This applies chassis ground to the base controller. The switch wire is routed in the Main Harness.
Circuit Description
See Alarm Code 31 Check Oil Pressure Switch
How Alarm is Set

1. If running in diesel mode and the oil pressure is low for 30 seconds then alarm code 19 is set as a
shutdown alarm. If the low oil level switch is indicating low oil level when this occurs then alarm Code 66
Low Engine Oil Level will also be set as a shutdown alarm.

Considerations
This alarm becomes a log alarm if the unit is switched to electric mode. It will again become a shutdown alarm if
the unit is switched to diesel mode.
5-36
02 February 2007
19 LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE Page 2 of 2

1. Check for Alarm Code 31 as a related alarm.
2. Check engine oil level.
3. Display the oil pressure when the unit is running, using the Gauge menu. The oil pressure should be
[OK]. If not, the switch may be stuck closed or the switch circuit may be shorted.
4. Verify the oil pressure switch is open with good oil pressure and closed with low oil pressure. The oil
pressure switch should be closed when the engine is not running and open when the engine is running.
Confirm using an ohmmeter.
5. Check the voltage of the 20B-01 wire at the 36 pin interface board connector J7 pin 28. Battery volts
should be present when the engine is running.
6. Check the 20B wire in the Main Harness with an ohmmeter for continuity per Service Procedure H04A
7. Connect an external oil pressure gauge and confirm that adequate oil pressure (20 psig or above) is
present when the unit is running.
5-37
02 February 2007
20 ENGINE FAILED TO START Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Unit Level Log, Check, Prevent or Shutdown Alarm
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 84, Restart Null
Codes Alarm Code 15, Check Air Intake Heater
How Alarm is Set

1. If the engine failed to start after the starter motor was allowed to crank for the maximum allowed time then
alarm code 20 is set as a prevent alarm. Two start attempts are normally made.
If the engine coolant sensor temperature is greater than 10qF, (-12qC), the crank timer on the first start
attempt is 15 seconds. The crank timer on the second start is 15 seconds.
If the engine coolant temperature is less than 10qF (-12qC), the crank timer on the first start attempt is 6
seconds. The crank timer on the second start is 30 seconds.
Notes:
If Alarm Code 20 follows an Alarm Code 17/84 Failed to Crank then alarm code 20 will be set as a shutdown
alarm.
If Alarm Code 20 follows an Alarm Code 63 alarm clear, only one crank attempt will be made.

Considerations
This alarm becomes a log alarm if the unit is switched to Electric mode.
1. Check the unit fuel level.
2. Check fuel solenoid, fuel pump, and fuel system electrically, mechanically and for fuel flow restrictions or
blockages.
3. Check for cause of slow start or no start of the engine.
4. In cold ambient temperatures check for fuel gelling.
5. Check for restricted air cleaner or air intake system.
6. Verify the intake air heater is operating properly, using Interface Board Test Mode.
7. If a Model 50 electric standby unit, check for a failed clutch or seized electric motor.
5-38
02 February 2007
21 COOLING CYCLE CHECK Page 1 of 1

In Indicated Zone
Alarm Type Zone Specific Prevent Alarm
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 23 Cooling Cycle Fault

Alarm Code 85 Forced Unit Operation
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit or zone is exhibiting a heating temperature differential ('T) while operating in cool mode then
Alarm Code 21 is set as a prevent alarm.

This alarm is cleared automatically or manually.
Considerations
1. This is a Prevent alarm. A second occurrence of this alarm will be set as Alarm Code 23 Cooling Cycle
Fault shutdown alarm.
2. If restarts are disabled, Alarm Code 23 will be set as a shutdown alarm on the first occurrence of the
alarm.
1. Check temperature differential by displaying the temperature differential, or by checking the difference
between the zone return and discharge air temperature sensors.
2. Check refrigerant level.
3. Attach gauges and evaluate unit refrigeration system performance.
4. Verify that sensor grades are set correctly.
5. Check for proper air flow. Short cycling, caused by a blocked air flow path, may generate this code.
6. Check the zone hot gas valve. A defective valve that does not return to the cooling position may cause
this alarm.
5-39
02 February 2007
22 HEATING CYCLE CHECK Page 1 of 1

In Indicated Zone
Alarm Type Zone Specific Check or Prevent Alarm
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 24 Heating Cycle Fault

Alarm Code 85 Forced Unit Operation
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit or zone is exhibiting a cooling temperature differential ('T) while operating in heat mode then
Alarm Code 22 is set as a prevent alarm.

This alarm is cleared automatically or manually.
Considerations
1. This is a Prevent alarm. A second occurrence of this alarm will be set as Alarm Code 24 Heating Cycle
Fault shutdown alarm if the zone is operating in the Fresh setpoint range.
2. The alarm is set as a check level alarm if the zone is operating in the frozen setpoint range. Heat
operation is locked out if an Alarm Code 24 is set in a zone that is operating in the frozen setpoint range.
alarm.
6. Check the zone hot gas valve. A defective valve that does not shift to the heating position may cause this
alarm.
5-40
02 February 2007
23 COOLING CYCLE FAULT Page 1 of 1

In Indicated Zone
Alarm Type Zone Specific Shutdown Alarm
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 21 Cooling Cycle Check

Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit or zone was operating with a heating temperature differential ('T) while operating in cool mode
and Alarm Code 21 Cooling Cycle Check has previously been set then Alarm Code 23 is set as a
shutdown alarm. If the unit is in a Pretrip Test or Restarts are set DISABLED then Alarm Code 23 can be
set without Alarm Code 21 Cooling Cycle Check having occurred.

This alarm is cleared manually. If the Limited Alarm Resets feature is active then Alarm Code 23 will be promoted
to Guarded Access clear.
If restarts are disabled Alarm Code 24 will be set as a shutdown alarm on the first occurrence of the alarm.
Considerations
1. This is a Shutdown alarm. It is typically preceded by Alarm Code 21 Cooling Cycle Check alarm.
alarm.
6. Check the zone hot gas valve. A defective valve that does not return to the cooling position may cause
this alarm.
5-41
02 February 2007
24 HEATING CYCLE FAULT Page 1 of 1

In Indicated Zone
Alarm Type Zone Specific Shutdown Alarm
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 22 Heating Cycle Check

Codes
How Alarm is Set
2. If the unit or zone was operating with a cooling temperature differential ('T) while operating in heat mode
and Alarm Code 22 Heating Cycle Check has previously been set then Alarm Code 24 is set as a
shutdown alarm. If the unit is in a Pretrip Test or Restarts are set DISABLED then Alarm Code 24 can be
set without Alarm Code 22 Heating Cycle Check having occurred.

This alarm is cleared manually. If the Limited Alarm Resets feature is active Alarm Code 24 will be promoted to
Guarded Access clear.
Considerations
1. This is a Shutdown alarm. It is typically preceded by Alarm Code 22 Heating Cycle Check alarm.
2. If restarts are disabled Alarm Code 24 will be set as a shutdown alarm on the first occurrence of the
alarm.
3. This alarm cannot be set in a zone operating in the frozen setpoint range. See the Alarm Code 22
description.
6. Check the zone hot gas valve. A defective valve that does not shift to the heating position may cause this
alarm.
5-42
02 February 2007
25 ALTERNATOR CHECK Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Unit Level Log, Check or Shutdown Alarm
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 120 alternator excite output.

Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If the engine or electric motor is running and the charge amps are less than -1.0 amps, and the battery
voltage is less than 13.2 volts for 3 minutes then Alarm Code 25 is set as a Check alarm in normal
operation and during a Pretrip Test and as a Shutdown alarm in Sleep mode.
2. If the engine or electric motor is running, and the battery voltage is greater than 16.0 volts for 3 minutes
then Alarm Code 25 is set as a Shutdown alarm.

1. Check and adjust the alternator drive belt.
2. Start the engine or electric motor and check the battery voltage and amperage, using the Gauge Display
in the Maintenance Menu. The voltage should be greater than 13.2 volts but less than 16 volts. Current
flow should be greater than –1.0 amps. Test and repair charging system as required.
3. Check the alternator connections.
4. Check the excitation voltage at the alternator. Excitation voltage should be equal to the battery voltage.
5. Check the operation of the Alternator Excite Relay using Interface Board Test Mode. Be sure the
Alternator Excite LED 18 lights.
6. Check the sense voltage at the alternator. Sense voltage should be equal to the battery voltage
7. Check Fuse F20 on the interface board.
8. If the unit is equipped with a Prestolite alternator, verify that fuse F4 is in place on the interface board and
is not open. Units equipped with a Bosch or a Thermo King alternator should not have fuse F4 installed
on the interface board.
5-43
02 February 2007
26 CHECK REFRIGERATION CAPACITY Page 1 of 1

In Indicated Zone
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 32 Refrigeration Capacity Low

Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit or zone heating or cooling capacity is reduced far enough below normal levels to indicate a
refrigeration problem then Alarm Code 26 is set as a check alarm. The capacity loss is not significant
enough to force the unit into shutdown mode.

This alarm is cleared manually or automatically.
Considerations
If all configured zones have an Alarm Code 26 set, then a unit level Alarm Code 32 Refrigeration Capacity Low
will be set. See the description for Alarm Code 32 Refrigeration Capacity Low for details.
6. Check the superheat for the affected zone evaporator(s).
5-44
02 February 2007
28 PRETRIP ABORT Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Unit Level Shutdown Alarm
Associated Alarm Any associated Pretrip alarm

Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If a shutdown alarm occurs during a Pretrip test then Alarm Code 28 is set and the unit is shut down. The
alarm condition that caused the shutdown is also set. Alarm Code 28 is also set if the unit is turned off
while a Pretrip Test is in progress, or if the Pretrip Test is terminated by a communications command.

1. This is a normal alarm any time the Pretrip Test is terminated before the completion of all tests.
2. Proceed with the corrective actions for any alarm codes that occurred.
3. After repairs, repeat the Pretrip Test. See Section 4 for details.
4. If only Alarm Code 28 is set, the unit may have been turned off during a Pretrip Test, or the test may have
been interrupted by a communications request. Clear the alarm and repeat the Pretrip Test.
5-45
02 February 2007
29 CHECK DEFROST DAMPER CIRCUIT Page 1 of 2

In Indicated Zone
Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
1. Power for the Zone 1 damper circuit requires the run relay to be energized.
2. The damper gear motor requires the use of the appropriate interface board with the damper gear motor
circuitry.
3. Alarm is applicable to host evaporators only.

The defrost damper is located in the discharge air stream at the top of the unit. It is closed during defrost to
prevent warm air from being circulated over the load. The damper solenoid is mounted just outside the discharge
plenum and is connected to the damper door by means of mechanical linkage.
DE Unit Only: DE units feature a split evaporator coil and two defrost dampers to serve two separate zones.
Zone 1 is on the street side and Zone 2 is on the curb side. They are both located in the discharge air streams at
the top of the unit and each is operated by a separate damper solenoid and linkage.
Circuit Description
The Damper Solenoid circuit is a two wire circuit. The Damper Solenoid is energized by Relay K4 and Fuse F6
on the Interface Board. The 29 wire applies 12 VDC to one side of the Damper Solenoid to energize the solenoid.
The CHD wire connects the other side of the solenoid to chassis ground at the ground plate near the unit battery.
The solenoid is not polarity sensitive, but the suppression diode must be installed with the bar end of the diode
toward the 29 wire. The wires are routed in the Main Harness.
DE Unit Only: DE units feature a split evaporator coil and two defrost dampers to serve two separate zones.
Zone 1 is on the street side and Zone 2 is on the curb side. The Zone 1 damper circuit is as described above.
The Zone 2 damper circuit is the same but is energized by the expansion module fan motor output that would
otherwise be used by Zone 2 fans.
5-46
02 February 2007
29 CHECK DEFROST DAMPER CIRCUIT Page 2 of 2

In Indicated Zone
How Alarm is Set
1. Zone 2 DE only If the zone is configured with a damper solenoid and current is not between 2 to 10 amps
3 seconds after the solenoid is energized then Alarm Code 29 is set as a check alarm. The defrost cycle
will be terminated and no further defrost cycles are allowed until Alarm Code 29 is cleared.
2. Zone 2 DE only If the zone is configured with a damper solenoid and current does not return to less than
0.5 amps 3 seconds after the solenoid is de-energized then Alarm Code 29 is set as a check alarm.
3. If during a Pretrip Test the zone is configured with a damper solenoid and current is not between 2 to 10
amps when the solenoid is energized then Alarm Code 29 is set as a check alarm.
4. If during a Pretrip Test the zone is configured with a damper solenoid and current does not return to less
than or equal to 0.5 amps when de-energized then Alarm Code 29 is set as a shutdown alarm.
5. If during a Pretrip Test the unit is equipped with a damper gear motor and the motor travel timer exceeds
its limit and the motor stall current has not been exceeded then Alarm Code 29 is set as a check alarm.

1. Check the operation of the damper door circuit using Interface Board Test Mode. Be sure the damper
relay LED 4 lights (for Zone 1). Fan output 1 is used for the Zone 2 damper on DE units. (Damper
Solenoid Only)
2. Use the HMI Control Panel amps gauge to check the current drawn by the damper solenoid while
operating the damper door with Interface Board Test Mode. The current draw should be approximately 6
amps. (Damper Solenoid Only)
3. Energize the damper solenoid using Interface Board Test Mode and check for battery voltage on the 29
circuit. If voltage is present and no current was measured in the step above replace the damper solenoid.
(Damper Solenoid Only)
5-47
02 February 2007
30 DEFROST DAMPER STUCK Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Zone Specific Check Alarm. (Alarm applies to units equipped with damper gear
motor actuators only)
Associated Alarm
Codes
The defrost damper door is located in the discharge air stream at the top of the unit. It is closed during defrost to
prevent warm air from being circulated over the load. The Damper Gear Motor is mounted just outside the
discharge plenum and is connected to the damper door by means of mechanical linkage.
Circuit Description
The damper motor circuit is a two wire circuit. The GM- (black) wire is connected to one side of the damper gear
motor and the GM+ (red) wire is connected to the other side of the gear motor. The motor wires are routed in the
Main Harness. The Damper Heater wires 8F-01 and CH-19 are also routed in the Main Harness.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the damper gear motor draws excessive current for a specified time this alarm is set as a check alarm.
This indicates that the damper is frozen or stalled.

This alarm is cleared manually. When the alarm is cleared the damper door operation is confirmed by driving the
damper full open and then full closed. The damper will then be positioned open or closed as required by current
conditions.
Considerations
1. The damper gear motor requires an interface board equipped with damper motor provisions. See Section
7 Information for Service Part Numbers.
1. Check the operation of the damper door gear motor circuit, using Interface Board Test Mode. Be sure
LED31 Damper Door Open and LED32 Damper Door Close light as appropriate.
2. The initial (breakaway) current draw occurs over a very short period of time and cannot be accurately
measured. Once the motor is running the current draw should not exceed 0.8 amps.
3. Check for ice buildup between the damper blade and damper housing. Breaking the ice may cause
excessive current draw.
4. Check the door and linkage for binding, ice or other restrictions to proper door operation.
5-48
02 February 2007
31 CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Unit Level Log or Shutdown Alarm
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 19 Low Engine Oil Pressure
Codes Alarm Code 66 Low Engine Oil Level

The oil pressure switch is located at the side of the oil filter housing.
Circuit Description
See alarm code 19 circuit description.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the unit is in diesel mode but is not running, the oil level is good, and the oil pressure switch is indicating
oil pressure for more than 30 seconds then Alarm Code 31 Check Oil Pressure Switch is set as a Log
alarm.
2. If the unit is in diesel mode but is not running, the oil level is not good, and the oil pressure switch is
indicating oil pressure for more than 30 seconds then Alarm Code 31 Check Oil Pressure Switch is set as
a Shutdown alarm. The shutdown alarm becomes a log alarm if the unit is switched to electric mode.
3. If the unit is running in electric mode and the oil pressure switch is indicating oil pressure then Alarm
Code 31 Check Oil Pressure Switch is set as a Log alarm.

Considerations
If this alarm is set as a Shutdown alarm in diesel mode operation, it becomes a log alarm if unit is switched to
electric mode operation.
If the alarm exists in electric mode and the unit is switched to diesel, either condition #1 or #2 in the “How Alarm is
Set” section apply.
1. Display the oil pressure when the unit is not running, using the Gauge menu. The oil pressure should
show [LOW]. If not, the switch may be stuck open or the switch circuit may be open.
2. Check the 20B wires in the Main Harness for continuity with an ohmmeter as shown by Service
Procedure H04A
5-49
02 February 2007
32 REFRIGERATION CAPACITY LOW Page 1 of 1

In Indicated Zone
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 26 Check Refrigeration Capacity

Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit heating or cooling capacity has degraded to the point where it has insufficient capacity to
operate then Alarm Code 32 is set as a shutdown alarm. The unit's cooling or heating performance is
considerably impaired and corrective actions, such as defrost have failed to improve performance.
NOTE: Alarm Code 26 Check Refrigeration Capacity must be set in all zones prior to the unit level Alarm Code
32 being set.

This alarm is cleared manually. If the Limited Alarm Resets feature is active code 32 will be promoted to Guarded
Access clear.
Considerations
Alarm Code 32 requires that Alarm Code 26 Check Refrigeration Capacity has been set in all active zones.
5. Check for proper air flow. Short cycling caused by a blocked air flow path may generate this code.
6. Check compressor and refrigeration system.
5-50
02 February 2007
33 CHECK ENGINE RPM Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Unit Level Check Alarm (Pretrip Only)
Associated Alarm Alarm 07 Check Engine RPM Sensor

Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If during a Pretrip Test the engine high speed RPM is not within the correct range for the unit
configuration then Alarm Code 33 is set as a check alarm.
2. If during a Pretrip Test the engine low speed RPM is not within the correct range for the unit configuration
then Alarm Code 33 is set as a check alarm.
NOTE: For engine RPM speeds see the Maintenance Manual for the unit.

Considerations
Only checked during a Pretrip Test.
1. Check and adjust high speed, as shown in the Maintenance Manual for the unit.
2. Check and adjust low speed, as shown in the Maintenance Manual for the unit.
3. Check for a binding solenoid or disconnected linkage.
4. Verify the selected High and Low speeds match the programmed unit configuration.
NOTE: Use Service Test Mode to run the unit in high speed cool and low speed cool. See Section 4 for
details.
5-51
02 February 2007
35 CHECK RUN RELAY CIRCUIT Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Circuit Description
The K1 Run Relay, LED 6, and fuse F25 are located on the Interface Board. The 7K circuit is only on the SR-2
interface board and base controller.
When the Run Relay is energized, 8 power is supplied to the 7K circuit. This alarm code indicates that 7K circuit
digital input is not present when the Run Relay output is energized or that 7K power is present when the Run
Relay is de-energized.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the Run Relay is energized and the 7K input is low at the base controller then Alarm Code 35 is set as a
Shutdown Alarm.
2. If the Run Relay is not energized and the 7K input is high at the base controller for 4 seconds then Alarm
Code 35 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
3. If current draw is not between 0.4 to 5 amps when the Run Relay is energized during a Pretrip Test Amps
Check then Alarm Code 35 is set as a shutdown alarm.
4. If current draw is not less than 0.5 amps when the Run Relay is de-energized during a Pretrip Test Amps
Check then Alarm Code 35 is set as a shutdown alarm.

1. Check fuse F25 on the Interface Board.
2. Check to be sure the K1 Run Relay LED 6 is energized.
3. Check the operation of the K1 Run Relay circuit using Interface Board Test Mode.
4. Check to be sure the High Pressure Cutout Switch is closed (HPCO and PHPCO circuits).
5. Check the voltage of the HPCO wire at the HPCO switch. Battery volts should be present when the unit
is turned on.
6. Review the ServiceWatch download in technician level view. The associated alarm data will show the
status of the 7K circuit when the alarm was set.
5-52
02 February 2007
36 ELECTRIC MOTOR FAILED TO RUN Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Unit Level Log, Check, Prevent, or Shutdown Alarm in Electric Mode
Unit Level Log Alarm in Diesel Mode
Codes Alarm Code 122 Check Diesel/Electric Circuit
How Alarm is Set

1. If the alternator frequency is less than 100 Hz for 10 seconds when the electric motor should be running
then Alarm Code 36 is set as a prevent alarm.

Considerations
This alarm becomes a log alarm if the unit is switched to diesel.
1. Check the motor, motor contactor, overload relay and other associated electric standby motor circuitry. The
internal pull coil/hold coil circuits in the contactor may be defective, requiring replacement of contactor.
2. Check the voltages at the phase detect module. Battery voltage should be present on the ER wire and the 8
wire.
3. Check the standby power voltage at the phase detect module. Standby power should be available at L1, L2
and L3.
4. Check the voltage at the motor contactor coils. Battery voltage should be present on either the 7EC or 7EB
wire when the motor should be running.
5. Check for reason that the motor fails to turn the alternator, such as slipping belts, clutch, etc.
6. Check the alternator, as shown under Alarm Code 25.
7. Download and inspect the ServiceWatch data logger to determine the operating conditions present when the
alarm code was set. Use the running Service Test Mode Feature to duplicate the operating conditions. The
alternator frequency and engine RPM are logged in ServiceWatch and this information is viewable in
technician mode. This information can be used to confirm the RPM sensor reading and alternator frequency
when the alarm was set.
5-53
02 February 2007
37 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Log or Shutdown Alarm
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 06 Check Coolant Temp Sensor

Codes
Circuit Description
Magnetic Switch The magnetic switch is actuated by a float inside the coolant expansion tank. The switch is
closed if the coolant level is adequate. The two wire switch supplies + 5 VDC from the CLP wire to the CLS wire
when the coolant level is adequate. The circuit is opened if coolant level falls below an adequate level. This
alarm will self-clear automatically if the coolant level rises above the sensor location. The wiring is located in the
Main Harness via the CLS and CLP circuits.
Considerations
The Discharge Pressure Transducer, Suction Pressure Transducer and Coolant Level switch each have a
separate 5 Vdc power supply. A short circuit condition in one transducer or switch circuit should not affect the
others.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the engine coolant level input indicates low coolant level for 3 minutes and the unit is in electric mode
then Alarm Code 37 will be set as a log alarm. If the engine coolant level input indicates low coolant level
for 3 minutes and the unit is in diesel mode then Alarm Code 37 will be set as a check alarm. If the unit is
switched to electric mode this alarm remains a check alarm.
2. If Alarm Code 06 Check Coolant Temp Sensor is set and the engine coolant level input indicates low
coolant level for 3 minutes and the unit is in electric mode then Alarm Code 37 will be set as a check
alarm. If Alarm Code 06 Check Coolant Temp Sensor is set and the engine coolant level input indicates
low coolant level for 3 minutes and the unit is in diesel mode then Alarm Code 37 will be set as a
shutdown alarm.

The alarm self-clears if coolant level input indicates good coolant level for 30 seconds. It can also be manually
cleared.
5-54
02 February 2007
37 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Page 1 of 1

CAUTION: Exercise extreme care when checking hot coolant.
1. Check the engine coolant level and mixture. Be sure coolant is above the sensor when the coolant is
cold.
2. Check the sensor connector for a pushed pin or missing orange pin lock, loose pin crimp or broken wire.
3. Check that +5 Vdc is present between the (CLP-01) wire from the base controller and chassis ground.
4. Check the voltage between the (CLS-01) wire and chassis ground. Voltage should be +5 Vdc when the
coolant level is adequate and less than +0.5 Vdc when the coolant level is low.
See Service Bulletin T&T 379 for additional information on testing the coolant level switch.
5-55
02 February 2007
38 ELECTRIC PHASE REVERSED Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Shutdown Alarm if unit is running in electric mode
Log Alarm if unit is switched from electric mode to diesel mode
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 90 Electric Overload

Codes
Considerations
This shutdown alarm becomes a log alarm if the unit is switched to diesel.
This alarm is disabled if Alarm Code 03 Check Return Air sensor or Alarm Code 04 Check Discharge Air Sensor
is set for the host unit sensors.
How Alarm is Set

Two phases are reversed on 3 phase standby power between the motor contactor and the motor or the motor is
mis-wired, causing the compressor and condenser fan to rotate in the wrong direction. This is checked by
monitoring the Zone 1 (host unit) evaporator temperature differential.
1. If the unit is running in electric mode and the temperature differential between Zone 1 return air
temperature and discharge air temperature is greater than 50°F (10°C) and is still greater than 45°F (7°C)
after 5 minutes then Alarm Code 38 is set as a shutdown alarm. The large temperature differential
indicates the motor is rotating in the wrong direction.

1. Check motor wiring to be sure phase rotation is correct.
2. Confirm that the 7EC-01 wire is connected to the MCB motor contactor and the 7EB-01 wire is connected
to the MCA motor contactor.
3. Check the voltages at the phase detect module. Battery voltage should be present on the 7EA wire and
the 8 wire.
4. Check the standby power voltage at the phase detect module. Standby power should be available at L1,
L2 and L3.
5. Confirm that the phase wiring between contactor MCA and MCB is correct.
5-56
02 February 2007
39 CHECK WATER VALVE CIRCUIT Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Check Alarm (Pre-trip only)
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 28 Pretrip Abort

Codes
How Alarm is Set
The water valve is not currently used. However, the associated output is checked during the Non-running Pretrip
Test to be certain nothing has been mistakenly connected to it. The output is energized and then de-energized to
insure that no device is connected to the circuit and that the base controller is operating properly.
1. If current flow is detected during the output energized phase of the Non-running Pretrip Test then Alarm
Code 39 will be set as a check alarm. The Non-running Pretrip Test will be allowed to complete.
2. If current draw is detected during the output de-energized phase of the Non-running Pretrip Test then
Alarm Code 39 is set as a check alarm and Alarm Code 28 Pretrip Abort will be set as a shutdown alarm.
The Pretrip Test will be aborted.

2. Check the interface board wiring to insure that there is no connection to connector J7, pin 9.
5-57
02 February 2007
40 CHECK HIGH SPEED CIRCUIT Page 1 of 2

Alarm Type Check or Shutdown Alarm
Associated Alarm None

Codes
The high speed solenoid is located at the rear of the injector pump.
Circuit Description
The High Speed Solenoid circuit is a two wire circuit. The High Speed Solenoid is energized by Relay K3 and
Fuse F6 on the Interface Board. The 7D wire applies 12 VDC to one side of the High Speed Solenoid to energize
the solenoid. The CHHS wire connects the other side of the solenoid to chassis ground at the ground plate near
the unit battery. The solenoid is not polarity sensitive, but the suppression diode must be installed with the bar
end of the diode toward the 7D wire. The wires are routed in the Main Harness.
How Alarm is Set

1. If during a Pretrip Test the current is not between 2 to 8 amps when the solenoid is energized then Alarm
Code 40 is set as a check alarm.
Code 40 is set as a shutdown alarm. If current draw is detected during the output de-energized phase of
the Non-running Pretrip Test then Alarm Code 40 is set as a check alarm and Alarm Code 28 Pretrip
Abort will be set as a shutdown alarm. The Pretrip Test will be aborted.

5-58
02 February 2007
40 CHECK HIGH SPEED CIRCUIT Page 1 of 2

1. Check the operation of the high speed circuit, using Interface Board Test Mode. Be sure the High Speed
Relay LED 5 lights. If LED 5 does not light the base controller or interface board may be defective.
Check the base controller and Interface Board as shown by Service Procedure A01A.
2. Use the HMI control panel amps gauge to check the current drawn by the high speed solenoid, while
operating the high speed solenoid with Interface Board Test Mode. The current draw should be
approximately 4.6 amps. If the current is greater than 8 amps check the circuit for a shorted conductor or
speed solenoid. If the current draw is zero check interface board fuse F6. See the unit wiring diagrams
for wire numbers, locations and additional details.
3. Energize the high speed solenoid using Interface Board Test Mode, and check for battery voltage on the
7D-01 circuit. If voltage is present at the solenoid terminals and no current was measured in the step
above replace the high speed solenoid. If voltage is not present at the solenoid terminals check the high
speed circuit conductors for continuity. See the unit wiring diagrams for wire numbers, locations and
additional details.
5-59
02 February 2007
41 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 42 Unit Forced to Low Speed

Codes
Considerations
Alarm Code 41 indicates the engine coolant temperature is above expected operating limits, but is not high
enough to force a shutdown condition.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the engine coolant temperature rises above 210qF and remains above 205qF for 60 seconds then Alarm
Code 41 is set as a check alarm.

1. Check the engine coolant temperature by pressing the Gauge key
2. Check the engine coolant level.
3. Check the water pump drive belt.
4. Check the radiator for airflow or coolant flow blockage.
5. Download and inspect the ServiceWatch data logger information to determine the operating conditions
that were present when the alarm code was set. Use running Service Test Mode to duplicate the
operating conditions.
5-60
02 February 2007
42 UNIT FORCED TO LOW SPEED Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Log Alarm
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 10 High Discharge Pressure or Temperature

Codes Alarm Code 18 High Engine Coolant Temperature
Alarm Code 41 Check Engine Coolant Temperature
How Alarm is Set

1. If the unit has been forced to low speed operation as a result of high engine coolant temperature or high
discharge pressure then Alarm Code 42 will be set as a log alarm. Alarm Code 10, Alarm Code 18 or
Alarm Code 41 will also be set.

Alarm will self-clear if unit returns to normal operation.
1. Troubleshoot as shown for the associated alarm code.
2. Download and inspect the ServiceWatch data logger information to determine the operating conditions
that were present when the alarm code was set. Use running Service Test Mode to duplicate the
operating conditions.
5-61
02 February 2007
44 CHECK FUEL SYSTEM Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Log Alarm or Shutdown Alarm
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 63 Engine Stopped

Codes
Circuit Description
How Alarm is Set

1. If the engine is running and the fuel pressure switch was indicating good fuel pressure and is now
indicating low fuel pressure for 15 seconds set Alarm Code 44 as a Shutdown alarm.
2. If after a successful engine start the fuel pressure switch indicates low fuel pressure for 15 seconds, the
following occurs:
x Engine goes to high speed for 2 minutes.
x If the 2 minutes is exceeded and fuel pressure is low, set Alarm Code 44 as a shutdown alarm.
x If fuel pressure is good after 2 minutes return to normal operation.

This alarm is cleared manually
Considerations
This alarm becomes a log alarm if the unit is switched to electric operation.
This alarm is only active if the unit is equipped with a low fuel pressure switch.
1. Check the fuel level.
2. Check for loose fuel lines and/or air in the fuel lines.
3. Check for gelled diesel fuel when operating in extremely cold conditions.
4. Check fuel pressure switch and connections.
5-62
02 February 2007
45 CHECK HOT GAS CIRCUIT Page 1 of 3

In Indicated Zone
Alarm Type Zone Specific Check or Shutdown alarm.

Codes
Considerations
On systems with remote zone parallel evaporators the respective Expansion Module hot gas valve output will
supply power to both of the remote zone hot gas valves. The Pretrip and SmartFet current limits will be adjusted
for the increased current drawn by parallel evaporators based on the zone configuration settings.
During a non-running Pretrip the current draw is determined by the shunt reading feedback to the base controller.
During normal operation the current draw is determined by the Smart FET feedback to the base controller.
If a code is set during normal operation then the ServiceWatch Datalogger will list the Code, FLTCT (Fault
Current), Battery Volts, and the Shunt Current. The FLTCT will be the high or low current draw as determined by
the Smart FET feedback that caused the code to set.

The Zone 1 (host) hot gas solenoid is located in the evaporator section of the host unit. The remote zone hot gas
solenoids are located in the remote evaporators.
NOTE: If the unit is a DE unit the Zone 2 hot gas solenoid is located in the host unit Zone 2 evaporator section.
Circuit Description
The hot gas solenoid circuit is a two wire circuit. Smart FETs in the Expansion Module energize the Hot Gas
Solenoids for all zones on multi-temp units. The HGSx wire applies 12 VDC to one side of the Hot Gas Solenoid
to energize the solenoid. The CHHG wire connects the other side of the solenoid to chassis ground. All ground
wires are run back to the unit ground plate. Solenoid valves in remote zones have supply circuits with connectors
in the remote evaporator and at the host unit. The solenoid is not polarity sensitive. The wires are routed in the
Main Harness or Expansion Module Harness. The circuits have connectors in the remote evaporator and at the
host unit. See the unit Wiring Diagram for wire numbers, locations and additional details.
5-63
02 February 2007

In Indicated Zone
How Alarm is Set
1. If during normal operation the current is not between 0.5 to 3 amps (1.0 to 6 amps if parallel evaporators)
3 seconds after the solenoid is energized then Alarm Code 45 is set as a check alarm and the output is
turned off. Hot gas valve operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 45 is cleared. The zone will continue
to run but with reduced performance until the condition is corrected and the alarm is cleared. If this
condition occurs when the unit is in Evacuation Mode then Alarm Code 45 will be set as a shutdown
alarm.
2. If during normal operation the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps 3 seconds after the solenoid
is de-energized then Alarm Code 45 is set as a check alarm. Hot gas valve operation is not allowed until
Alarm Code 45 is cleared. The zone will continue to run but with reduced performance until the condition
is corrected and the alarm is cleared.
3. If during a Pretrip Test the current is not between 0.5 to 3 amps (1.0 to 6 amps if parallel evaporators)
when the solenoid is energized then Alarm Code 45 is set as a check alarm.

5-64
02 February 2007

In Indicated Zone
1. Verify that the Expansion Module status LED (heartbeat LED) is flashing. If it is not then check the
Expansion Module for proper operation as shown by Service Procedure A01D in Section 6.
2. If the Expansion Module Status LED is flashing then check the operation of the hot gas circuit using
Interface Board Test Mode. Be sure the appropriate Expansion Module hot gas circuit LED lights. For
Expansion Module LED identification see the LED decal on the control box door. If the Expansion
Module hot gas circuit LED lights go to Step 3. If the Expansion Module hot gas circuit LED does not light
go to Step 4.
3. If the Expansion Module hot gas circuit LED does light then use the HMI Control Panel amps gauge to
check the current drawn by the hot gas solenoid, while operating the solenoid with Interface Board Test
Mode. The current draw should be approximately 1.5 amps (3.0 amps if parallel evaporators). If the
current is not within limits then check for a short circuit, open circuit or loose ground connection as shown
in Step 4. Verify that all circuit connectors are secure.
4. If the Expansion Module hot gas circuit LED does not light then disconnect the Expansion Module 35 pin
connector J1 and check the circuit with an accurate ohmmeter for a short circuit, open circuit or loose
connection. The solenoid coil resistance should be approximately 8.3 ohms (4.1 ohms with parallel
evaporators).
5. If no problems are found in steps 1-4 and the output LED does not turn on then replace the Expansion
Module.
6. Confirm the unit configuration is correct.
7. To verify the multi-temp refrigeration system operation of the Hot Gas Solenoid see Service Procedure
R03A Hot Gas Solenoid Test in Section 8.
46 CHECK AIR FLOW Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Not used on multi-temperature applications.
5-65
02 February 2007
48 CHECK BELTS OR CLUTCH Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Shutdown Alarm
Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
Applies to units equipped with electric standby only. This alarm is set in diesel mode only.
How Alarm is Set

1. The ratio between the engine RPM and alternator frequency is monitored. If these values are not in the
proper ratio it is an indication that drive belt slippage is occurring. If this occurs then Alarm Code 48 is set
as a shutdown alarm.

1. Check clutch and belts for condition, operation and slippage.
2. Check for a stuck compressor.
3. Check alternator operation.
4. Check "W" circuit including resistor for continuity. Monitor with Wintrac or a frequency meter.
5. Check unit configuration if this alarm occurs on a Model 30 (diesel only) unit.
6. Verify the unit model is correctly configured. This alarm is dependant on the alternator drive pulley sizes
used in the unit. The pulley sizes can vary between unit models.
7. Verify that the correct pulley is installed on the alternator. This code can occur if the alternator is replaced
with an alternator with the wrong size pulley installed.
8. Download and inspect the ServiceWatch data logger to determine the operating conditions present when
the alarm code was set. Use the running Service Test Mode Feature to duplicate the operating
conditions. The alternator frequency and engine RPM are logged in ServiceWatch and this information is
viewable in technician mode. This information can be used to confirm the RPM sensor reading and
alternator frequency when the alarm was set.
5-66
02 February 2007
52 CHECK HEAT CIRCUIT Page 1 of 2

In indicated zone
54 TEST MODE TIMEOUT Page 1 of 1


Codes
Considerations
The HMI will display the remaining test time. The timer can be reset by pressing the HMI test “Select” key while
the respective Service Test Mode or Interface Board Test Mode test is active.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the unit has been in the same Service Test Mode function for 15 minutes then Alarm Code 54 is set as
a shutdown alarm.
2. If the unit has been in the same Interface Board Test Mode function for 15 minutes then Alarm Code 54 is
set as a shutdown alarm.

This alarm is manually cleared.
1. If the unit is in Service Test Mode or Interface Board Test Mode and the function is not changed for 15
minutes then Alarm Code 54 is set as a shutdown alarm. Clear the alarm and re-enter the test mode as
necessary to complete the diagnosis or repair.
5-67
02 February 2007
61 LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE Page 1 of 2

Alarm Type Log Alarm or Shutdown Alarm
Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
No other alarm codes are set after this alarm code is set as a shutdown alarm and is not cleared.
This alarm code can be set by either low voltage or excessive voltage conditions.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the unit is not preheating or starting, and battery voltage is less than 11.2 volts for 3 minutes, Alarm
Code 61 is set as a Shutdown alarm.
2. If during the preheat cycle prior to an engine start the battery voltage is below 10 volts during an engine
start, Alarm Code 61 is set as a Log alarm. NOTE: The preheat output will be have been de-energized
prior to the alarm being set.
3. If during a Pretrip Test the preheat amps check is not within limits, and battery voltage is less than 11.3
volts, Alarm Code 61 is set as a Shutdown alarm.
4. If during a Pretrip Test all outputs are de-energized, and battery voltage is not within limits, Alarm Code
61 is set as a Shutdown alarm.
5. If the unit is in Evacuation mode, and battery voltage is greater than 16.0 volts for 3 minutes, Alarm Code
61 is set as a Shutdown alarm
6. If three power-up and start attempt are made, Alarm Code 61 is set as a Shutdown Alarm. This indicates
that the battery voltage dropped low enough during the start sequence that the base controller powered
down.

5-68
02 February 2007
61 LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE Page 2 of 2

1. Check for discharged battery and charge as required.
2. Check the battery terminals for tightness and corrosion.
3. Check the unit ground plate connections for tightness and corrosion.
4. With the engine running, check the battery voltage and charge rate using the Gauge Menu.
5. Check the operation of the alternator. Be sure the belt is properly adjusted.
6. Load test the battery, replace if necessary.
7. Download and inspect the ServiceWatch data logger to determine the operating conditions present when
the alarm code was set. The battery voltage, charge current, and alternator frequency are logged in
ServiceWatch and this information is viewable in technician mode. This information can be used to
determine which condition caused the alarm to be set.
5-69
02 February 2007
62 AMMETER OUT OF CALIBRATION Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Shutdown Alarm (Pretrip Only)
Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
The current shunt on SR-2 interface boards is a surface mount device and is conformal coated for protection.
Field resistance measurement of this circuit cannot be made.
How Alarm is Set

1. Shunt calibration check in Pretrip Test shows shunt circuit is out of calibration with all outputs de-
energized.

1. Check the base controller/interface board assembly, using Service Procedure A01A. The Diagnostic Tool
may indicate a defective Interface Board, but this Alarm Code usually indicates a defective Base
Controller.
2. Check the current draw with the unit off and compare it to the reading of a clamp-on ammeter.
5-70
02 February 2007
63 ENGINE STOPPED Page 1 of 2

Alarm Type Log, Prevent or Shutdown Alarm

Codes
Considerations
Becomes a log alarm if unit is switched to electric mode.
If the Restart Unit After Shutdown feature is set for Continuous, then the shutdown alarm condition is disabled
and the interval between restart attempts is increased from 15 minutes to 1 hour. Note: This feature is
recommended only for rail application where the equipment is operated unattended for long periods of time. See
the Restart Unit After Shutdown feature in Section 3 for additional information.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the unit was running and still should be but has stopped then Alarm Code 63 is set as a prevent alarm.
This is determined based on multiple factors, and can be caused by an intermittent condition. Three
restart attempts will be made to allow continued operation at temporarily reduced performance. The time
interval between restart attempts is 15 minutes. If at the end of the three attempts full performance is not
possible, the alarm is set as a Shutdown alarm. If the Restart Unit After Shutdown feature is set for
Continuous, then the shutdown alarm condition is disabled. If the Restart Unit After Shutdown feature is
set for Disabled, then the alarm will be set as a shutdown alarm on the first occurrence.
2. If Alarm Code 17 Engine Failed to Crank, or Alarm code 20 Engine Failed to Start alarm occurs after
Alarm Code 63 is cleared then Alarm Code 63 will be set as a Shutdown alarm.

This alarm is cleared manually or automatically.
5-71
02 February 2007
63 ENGINE STOPPED Page 2 of 2

1. Download the ServiceWatch data logger and check the conditions when the alarm code was set.
2. Check for other alarm codes and proceed as indicated for each code.
3. Perform a Pretrip Test to determine cause for shutdown.
4. Verify the fuel level and check the fuel pump for proper operation.
5. Check the air cleaner and intake hose for obstructions.
6. Check the unit fuses.
7. Check the RPM sensor for proper operation.
8. Check Run Relay and fuel solenoid components and circuits.
9. Check for low battery voltage.
10. Be sure all ground connections on the master ground plate are secure.
11. Check for a seized compressor or engine.
12. Download and inspect the ServiceWatch datalogger information to determine the operating conditions
that were present when the alarm code was set. Use the running service test mode feature to duplicate
the operating conditions as required. Unit operating data is logged in ServiceWatch and the data is
viewable in technician mode.
5-72
02 February 2007
64 PRETRIP REMINDER Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
The alarm is cleared when Pretrip Test is entered. If the Pretrip Test is not successful, the alarm will not be reset.
If the Pretrip Test is not successful then diagnose and correct the fault.
How Alarm is Set

1. If a programmable hour meter is set as a Pretrip Reminder and the hourmeter time expires then Alarm
Code 64 is set as a log alarm.

The alarm self-clears when a Pretrip Test is entered.
This feature must be programmed. See Section 3 Hourmeters for details.
1. Perform a Pretrip Test to confirm unit operation.
2. Reset the Pretrip Reminder hourmeter after a Pretrip Test is entered.
5-73
02 February 2007
65 ABNORMAL TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL Page 1 of 2

In Indicated Zone
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 13 Sensor Calibration Check

Codes
Considerations
Alarm Code 65 Abnormal Temperature Differential indicates that the temperature differential ('T) is abnormal
based on expected unit capacity. It may be an indication of a drifting temperature sensor or an airflow restriction.
This alarm will be set with Alarm Code 13 Sensor Check to indicate that a sensor may be causing a problem, but
that the suspect sensor cannot be identified.
The temperature differential is monitored in both cool and heat mode. If the temperature differential becomes
unrealistic, Alarm Code 65 Abnormal Temperature Differential is set. This alarm may result from incorrect sensor
readings, if defrost damper is stuck closed, if a remote evaporator fan motor(s) has failed, or as a result of
severely restricted air flow.
If Alarm Code 65 Abnormal Temperature Differential occurs with a frozen range setpoint, the alarm is set as a
check alarm and the unit will be forced to low speed cool. If Alarm Code 65 Abnormal Temperature Differential
occurs with a fresh range setpoint, the alarm is set as a zone shutdown alarm.
Alarm Code 65 checks are not active during defrost mode and for 20 minutes after defrost.
How Alarm is Set

1. If an abnormally large temperature differential exists when cooling or heating then Alarm Code 65 and
Alarm Code 13 Sensor Check are set as check alarms.

1. Check the sensor connector at the affected remote evaporator for pushed or damaged pins
2. Check the zone to host evaporator sensor connectors for pushed or damaged pins.
3. Check for blocked airflow in the affected zone.
5-74
02 February 2007
66 LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL Page 1 of 2

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
A shutdown level Alarm Code 66 becomes a log alarm if the unit is switched from diesel mode to electric mode. A
log level Alarm Code 66 becomes a shutdown alarm if the unit is switched from electric to diesel mode.

The switch is located on the top of the engine oil pan. The switch is open with full oil level and closed with low oil
level.
Circuit Description
The wiring is located in the Main Harness via the OLS and CHOL circuits.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the engine oil level switch indicates low engine oil for 3 minutes then Alarm Code 66 is set as a
Shutdown alarm.
2. If Alarm Code 66 is manually cleared and the engine oil level is still low then Alarm Code 66 is reset as a
Shutdown Alarm.

1. Check and adjust the engine oil level.
2. Check the switch with an ohmmeter. It should be open when the oil level is satisfactory.
3. Check the harness wires OLS-01 and CHOL with an ohmmeter for continuity, per Service Procedure H04A.
5-75
02 February 2007
67 CHECK LIQUID LINE SOLENOID CIRCUIT Page 1 of 3

In indicated zone

Codes
Considerations
On systems with remote zone parallel evaporators the respective Expansion Module liquid line solenoid output
will supply power to both of the remote zone liquid line solenoids. The Pretrip and SmartFet current limits will be
adjusted for the increased current drawn by parallel evaporators based on the zone configuration settings.

The Zone 1 (host) liquid line solenoid is located in the condenser section of the host unit. The remote zone liquid
line solenoids are located in the remote evaporators.
NOTE: If the unit is a DE unit the Zone 2 liquid line solenoid is located in the host unit Zone 2 evaporator section.
Circuit Description
The Liquid Line Solenoid circuit is a two wire circuit. See the unit wiring diagram for connector and pin number
identification. The Zone 1 Liquid Line Solenoid is controlled from the interface board. The remote zone Liquid
Line Solenoids are controlled from the Expansion Module (including Zone 2 on DE units).
Zone 1
The Liquid Line Solenoid is energized by Relay K8 and Fuse F11 on the Interface Board. The LLS wire applies
12 VDC to one side of the Liquid Line Solenoid to energize the solenoid. The CHLL wire connects the other side
of the solenoid to chassis ground at the ground plate near the unit battery. The solenoid is not polarity sensitive.
The wires are routed in the Main Harness. See the unit wiring diagrams for wire numbers, locations and
additional details.
Remote Zones
The Liquid Line Solenoid is energized by a Smart FET on the Expansion Module. The LLS wire applies 12 VDC
to one side of the Liquid Line Solenoid to energize the solenoid. The CH wire connects the other side of the
solenoid to chassis ground. All ground wires are run back to the unit ground plate. Solenoid valves in remote
zones have supply circuits with connectors in the remote evaporator and at the host unit. The solenoid is not
polarity sensitive. The wires are routed in the Expansion Module Harness. The circuits have connectors in the
remote evaporator and at the host unit. See the unit wiring diagrams for wire numbers, locations and additional
details.
5-76
02 February 2007

In indicated zone
How Alarm is Set
1. If the current is not between 0.5 to 3 amps (1.0 to 6 amps if parallel evaporators) 3 seconds after the
solenoid is energized then Alarm Code 67 is set as a check alarm (set as shutdown alarm if the condition
occurs in Evacuation Mode).
2. If the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps 3 seconds after the solenoid is de-energized then
Alarm Code 67 is set as a shutdown alarm. If the setpoint is in the frozen range and Alarm Codes 67 and
12 are set then Alarm Code 114 Multiple Alarms – Can Not Run will be set. In single zone frozen range
operation the unit will shut down. In multiple zone frozen range operation the offending zone will shut
down. The unit or zone will remain shut down until the alarms are cleared.
5. If during a Pretrip Test the unit is not configured for the zone being tested and amp draw is greater than
the allowable limit then Alarm Code 67 is set as a check alarm and Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured
Correctly is set as a log alarm.

5-77
02 February 2007

In indicated zone
2. If the Expansion Module Status LED is flashing then check the operation of the liquid line circuit using
Interface Board Test Mode. Be sure the appropriate Expansion Module liquid line circuit LED lights. For
Expansion Module LED identification see the LED decal on the control box door. If the Expansion
Module liquid line circuit LED lights go to Step 3. If the Expansion Module liquid line circuit LED does not
light go to Step 4.
3. If the Expansion Module liquid line circuit LED does light then use the HMI Control Panel amps gauge to
check the current drawn by the liquid line solenoid, while operating the solenoid with Interface Board Test
Mode. The current draw should be approximately 1.5 amps (3.0 amps if parallel evaporators). If the
4. If the Expansion Module liquid line circuit LED does not light then disconnect the Expansion Module 35
pin connector J1 and check the circuit with an accurate ohmmeter for a short circuit, open circuit or loose
connection. The solenoid coil resistance should be approximately 8.3 ohms (4.1 ohms with parallel
evaporators).
Module.
7. To verify the refrigeration system operation of the Liquid Line Solenoid see Service Procedure R04A
Liquid Line Solenoid and Liquid Return Check Valve Solenoid Test.
5-78
02 February 2007
68 INTERNAL CONTROLLER FAULT CODE Page 1 of 1

How Alarm is Set

1. If a shutdown level internal fault occurs in the base controller then Alarm Code 68 is set as a shutdown
alarm.
2. If a check level internal fault occurs in the base controller then Alarm Code 68 is set as a check alarm.
3. If a log level internal fault occurs in the base controller the Alarm Code 68 is set as a log alarm.
1. Replace the base controller.
2. Return failed base controller for failure analysis
70 HOURMETER FAILURE Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If one or more hourmeters exceeds 499,999 hours the Alarm Code 70 is set as a log alarm.

1. If the hourmeter readings are normal, perform a Cold Start per Service Procedure A07A.
2. If the code can now be cleared, proceed with base controller setup, using Service Procedure A04A.
IMPORTANT: Any time a Cold Start is performed the base controller must be set up using Service
Procedure A04A. Failure to do so may result in the unit not operating to customer specifications.
5-79
02 February 2007
74 CONTROLLER RESET TO DEFAULTS Page 1 of 1

How Alarm is Set

1. If all the base controller programmable features have been reset to factory defaults the Alarm Code 74 is
set as a check alarm. Alarm Code 74 is typically set by a cold start.

This alarm can only be cleared from the Guarded Access menu.
1. Be sure the interface board cold start jumper J101 is in the correct (up) position. It should match the
white mark on the interface board, at the side of the jumper. If the jumper is in the wrong position a cold
start will occur every time the unit is turned on.
2. Complete the base controller setup, using Service Procedure A04A.
3. Alarm code 74 will be cleared during the base controller setup.
IMPORTANT: Any time Alarm Code 74 occurs the base controller must be set up using Service Procedure
A04A. Failure to do so may result in the unit not operating to customer specifications.
77 CONTROLLER EPROM CHECKSUM FAILURE Page 1 of 1

How Alarm is Set

1. If a shutdown level internal memory fault has occurred in the base controller or data logger then Alarm
1. Replace the base controller.
2. Return failed base controller for failure analysis
5-80
02 February 2007
79 INTERNAL DATA LOGGER OVERFLOW Page 1 of 1

How Alarm is Set

If too many data logger events occurred at once or if too many data logger events occurred during a download
then Alarm Code 79 is set as a log alarm.

No corrective action is possible. This serves only as an indication that an event occurred that was not recorded
by the data logger.
5-81
02 February 2007
84 RESTART NULL Page 1 of 2

Alarm Type Prevent Alarm
Associated Alarm Alarm Codes 10, 17, 18. 20, 21, 22, 36, 42, 63, 90, 91 and 93
Codes
Considerations
x This alarm is a secondary alarm that is set along with the associated primary alarm.
x The alarm indicates that the unit is in a temporary (“prevent” or “restart null”) shutdown. The alarm clears
automatically if the condition does not re-occur.
x Many of these actions include a “waiting period” (to allow the engine to cool down, a high pressure
condition to subside or the like). The alarm code that caused the condition and Alarm Code 84 might be
present to indicate that the base controller is taking a corrective action and that a restart will be attempted
when conditions permit.
x If the corrective action is successful, the original alarm code and Alarm Code 84 are cleared
automatically. If the original alarm condition continues to occur, and the corrective actions taken by the
base controller are not successful, the original alarm code remains. Alarm Code 84 is automatically
cleared and the unit shuts down.
x This alarm occurs if unit operation is not allowed as a result of the associated prevent alarm. For
example, if a high discharge pressure condition shuts the unit down, a waiting period occurs to allow
system pressures to equalize. A restart occurs when conditions permit.
x If restarts are disabled Alarm Code 84 is also disabled.
x Most prevent alarms become shutdown alarm if three occurrences of the alarm occur within a set time
period.
x Alarm Codes 10, 18 and 63 are not promoted to shutdown level if the Continuous Restarts feature is
enabled.
x Alarm Codes 32 and 63 are promoted to guarded access clearable shutdown alarms if the Limited
Restarts Feature is enabled and the shutdown alarm occurs 3 times with a 12 hour time period.
x Some prevent alarms will result in modified unit operation after the alarm is self cleared. For example,
Alarm Code 10 High Discharge Pressure will result in Alarm Code 42 Unit Forced to Low Speed being set
and the unit being forced to low speed for a 1 hour period.
x If the unit is turned off while Alarm Code 84 is present the primary alarm becomes a shutdown alarm
when the unit is turned back on.
5-82
02 February 2007
84 RESTART NULL Page 2 of 2

How Alarm is Set
1. This alarm is set with the associated alarm that caused the condition.

This alarm clears automatically if the condition is resolved.
Check for associated alarms and repair as required.
85 FORCED UNIT OPERATION Page 1 of 1

5-83
02 February 2007
86 CHECK DISCHARGE PRESSURE SENSOR Page 1 of 2

Associated Alarm
Codes
Circuit Description
The 3-wire discharge pressure sensor is supplied with +5 Vdc and ground from the base controller. The wiring is
located in the Sensor Harness via the DPP, DPN and DPI circuits.
Considerations
other devices.
The maximum discharge pressure that can be displayed is 500 psig. If the sensed pressure is greater than 500
psig, the HMI Control Panel will display [ - - - - ] instead of the discharge pressure.
The minimum discharge pressure that can be sensed is –10 psig. The control system cannot determine if the
minimum sensed pressure is the result of an electrical short or very low system pressure.
If Alarm Code 86 Check Discharge Pressure Sensor is set then the control system will revert to the High Pressure
Control Switch (HPCS) switch to control the Condenser Inlet Solenoid (CIS) and the engine high speed output for
refrigeration system control.
The Discharge Pressure Transducer will have a “500” on the body of the part. The Suction Pressure Transducer
will have a “200” on the body of the part. They are not interchangeable.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the unit is not running and the discharge pressure transducer reading is greater than 500 psig for 10
seconds then Alarm Code 86 is set as a check alarm. If the unit is in a Pretrip Test this alarm is set as a
shutdown alarm.
2. If the unit is running, the ambient temperature is greater than 10°F (-12°C) and the discharge pressure
transducer reading is less than +15 psig for 10 seconds then Alarm Code 86 is set as a check alarm. If
the unit is in a Pretrip Test this alarm is set as a shutdown alarm.
3. If Alarm Code 10 is cleared and the discharge pressure transducer reading is greater than or equal to 425
psig but less than 500 psig then Alarm Code 86 is set as a check alarm.

5-84
02 February 2007
86 CHECK DISCHARGE PRESSURE SENSOR Page 2 of 2

1. Check the discharge pressure display using the Gauge Menu.
2. If the discharge pressure is not displayed by the base controller, unplug the transducer and check for +5
Vdc between DPP and DPN. If +5 Vdc is not present check the base controller using Service Procedure
A01A.
3. Check the harness wires DPP, DPN and DPI for continuity using an ohmmeter.
4. Connect refrigeration gauges to verify that the sensor is displaying the correct pressure. Replace the
sensor if required.
5-85
02 February 2007
87 CHECK SUCTION PRESSURE SENSOR Page 1 of 2

Associated Alarm
Codes
Circuit Description
The 3-wire suction pressure sensor is supplied with +5 VDC and ground from the base controller. The sensor is
located in the suction line and downstream of the ETV if present. The wiring is located in the Sensor Harness via
the SPP, SPN and SPI circuits.
Considerations
others.
The maximum suction pressure that can be displayed is 200 psig. If the sensed pressure is greater than 200
psig, the HMI Control Panel will display [ - - - - ] instead of the suction pressure. When the unit is off and the
refrigerant pressures have equalized, the system pressure can exceed 200 psig when ambient temperatures are
above 90°F (35°C). If this occurs the HMI Control Panel will display [ - - - - ]. This is normal operation and no
cause for concern.
The minimum suction pressure that be sensed is -12 psig.
If the sensor opens the display will read -10 PSIG. An alarm may not be generated immediately but the unit will
be forced to low speed due to low suction pressure.
The Suction Pressure Transducer will have a “200” on the body of the part. The Discharge Pressure Transducer
will have a “500” on the body of the part. They are not interchangeable.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the unit is running and the suction pressure sensor reading is greater than 200 PSIG for 10 seconds
then Alarm Code 87 is set as a check alarm. If the unit is in a Pretrip Test this alarm is set as a shutdown
alarm. If the suction pressure is greater than 200 PSIG the sensor display will be dashes [ - - - - ].
2. If the unit is running and the suction pressure sensor reading is less than -9 PSIG for 20 minutes then the
unit will be forced into a prevent alarm condition. During the prevent shutdown period Alarm Code 93
Low Suction Pressure and Alarm Code 84 Restart Null will be set. If during the prevent shutdown period
the suction pressure does not rise then Alarm Code 87 is set as a check alarm. If the unit is in a Pretrip
Test this alarm is set as a shutdown alarm.

5-86
02 February 2007
87 CHECK SUCTION PRESSURE SENSOR Page 2 of 2

1. Check the suction pressure display using the Gauge Menu. If the suction pressure is -10 psig then turn
the unit off and allow the system refrigerant pressures to equalize. If the displayed suction pressure
remains at –10 psig then the suction pressure transducer is defective and must be replaced. NOTE:
System refrigerant pressures can equalized quickly by energizing the zone hot gas valves using Interface
Board Test.
2. Check the suction pressure display using the Gauge Menu. If the sensor reads [ - - - - ] psig then turn
the unit off and allow the system pressures to equalize.
x If the suction pressure is less than 180 psig, but the displayed suction pressure remains at
[ - - - - ] then the transducer is defective and must be replaced.
x If the suction pressure is greater than 180 psig, the suction pressure transducer may be operating
normally. Place Zone 1 in full cool and allow the return air temperature to drop below 50qF
(10qC). If the suction pressure display remains at [ - - - - ] then the transducer, controller power
supply, or conductors are faulty. NOTE: System refrigerant pressures can equalized quickly by
energizing the zone hot gas valves using Interface Board Test.
3. If the suction pressure is not displayed by the base controller, unplug the transducer and check for +5 Vdc
between SPP-01 and SPN-01. If 5 volts is not present check the base controller, using Service
Procedure A01A.
4. Connect refrigeration gauges to verify that the sensor is not displaying the correct pressure. Replace the
sensor.
5. Check the harness wires SPP-01, SPN-01 and SP-01 for continuity using an ohmmeter.
5-87
02 February 2007
90 ELECTRIC OVERLOAD Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Log, Check or Prevent Alarm

Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If in electric mode operation and if the electric motor overload relay (EOL) has tripped then Alarm Code
90 will be set as a prevent alarm.
2. If during a Pretrip Test the unit is not configured electric standby and the EOL input is low then Alarm
Code 90 Electric Overload is set as a check alarm and Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly is
set as a log alarm.

Considerations
This alarm becomes a Log alarm if the unit is switched from electric mode to diesel mode.
CAUTION: High voltage is present any time the unit is connected to standby power. Exercise extreme
care.
1. Check the electric motor for current draw. Refer to the motor nameplate for the Full Load Amperage
rating (FLA) of the motor.
2. Check the setting of the motor overload relay. It should be 10% greater than full load rating of the motor.
3. Check the EOL circuit for continuity from J6 pin 2 on the interface board to the overload relay.
4. Check for continuity between the overload relay terminals 95 and 96. The contacts should be normally
closed.
5. Check the CHHV circuit for continuity to chassis ground.
5-88
02 February 2007
91 CHECK ELECTRIC READY INPUT Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Log or Prevent Alarm

Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If electric mode operation is selected and the base controller determines that 3 standby power is not
connected (ER input is low) then set Alarm code 91 as a prevent alarm. This alarm will only be set if the
unit is configured for manual switchover from electric to diesel.

This alarm is cleared automatically when one of the two actions occur:
x The unit is auto switched or manually switched to diesel mode operation.
x 3 standby power is restored to the unit.
Considerations
This alarm automatically clears if the unit is switched from electric mode to diesel mode.
The electric standby phase detection module contains protection for missing phase, low voltage, and over
voltage. If any of these 3 standby power conditions are present the module with not energize it ER output.
CAUTION: High voltage is present any time the unit is connected to standby power. Exercise extreme
care.
1. Check the ER-01 Circuit from the phase detect module for 12 volts to chassis ground when standby
power is connected to the unit.
2. Check the 8 circuit at the phase detect module for 12 volts.
3. Check to be sure standby power of the correct voltage is present at L1, L2 and L3 on the phase detect
module.
4. Check the ER-01 Circuit for continuity from J6 pin 5 on the interface board to the phase detect module.
5. If steps 1-5 above are correct, check the base controller using Service Procedure A01A.
6. If steps 1, 2, 4 or 5 above do not correct the fault, replace the phase detect module.
5-89
02 February 2007
92 SENSOR GRADES NOT SET Page 1 of 1

In indicated zone

Codes Alarm Code 04 Check Discharge Air Sensor
Considerations
The sensor grade must be set using the Sensor Calibration feature in the Guarded Access Menu. If the sensor
grade is not properly set the sensor reading will not be accurate. Grade 5H is set as the default grade on factory
base controllers and is used as an indication that the sensor grade has not been set.
How Alarm is Set

1. If any graded sensor (return, discharge or spare sensor) is in valid range and the sensor grade is set to
grade 5H (default) when the unit power switch is turned on then set Alarm Code 92 as a log alarm. The
offending sensor alarm code (Alarm Code 03 Check Return Air Sensor or Alarm Code 04 Check
Discharge Air Sensor) is also set.

Clears automatically when the sensor grade is set to other than 5H. The offending sensor alarm code (Alarm
Code 03 Check Return Air Sensor or Alarm Code 04 Check Discharge Air Sensor) must be manually cleared in
Guarded Access after the sensor grades have been set.
1. Verify actual sensor grades for all graded sensors.
2. Using this information, calibrate the sensors using the Sensor Calibration feature in the Guarded Access
Menu. See Service Procedure A15A in Section 6 of this manual for details.
5-90
02 February 2007
93 LOW COMPRESSOR SUCTION PRESSURE Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 87 Check Suction Pressure Sensor

Codes
How Alarm is Set
If the compressor suction pressure is low as determined by the Suction Pressure Sensor then Alarm Code 93 is
set as a prevent alarm. If the unit is running and the suction pressure sensor reading is less than -9 psig for 20
minutes then the unit will be forced into a prevent alarm condition. During the prevent shutdown period Alarm
Code 93 Low Suction Pressure and Alarm Code 84 Restart Null will be set. If during the prevent shutdown period
the suction pressure rises then Alarm Code 93 is set as a shutdown alarm. If the unit is in a Pretrip Test this
alarm is set as a shutdown alarm.

Considerations
If Alarm Code 87 Check Suction Pressure Sensor is set then Alarm Code 93 is disabled.
2. Attach gauges and verify suction pressure transducer is reading properly.
3. Attach gauges and evaluate unit refrigeration system performance for causes of low suction pressure.
5-91
02 February 2007
96 LOW FUEL LEVEL Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 98 Check Fuel Level Sensor

Codes
Considerations
This alarm is enabled only if the unit is configured with a fuel level sensor.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the fuel level indicated by the fuel level sensor falls to 15% of tank capacity then Alarm Code 96 is set
as a check alarm.

This alarm is cleared automatically when the fuel level exceeds 25% of tank capacity. The alarm will not clear
manually until the fuel level is greater than 20%.
1. Check fuel tank level and fill as required.
5-92
02 February 2007
98 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 96 Low Fuel Level

Codes
Considerations
This alarm is enabled only if the unit is configured with a fuel level sensor.
How Alarm is Set

1. Alarm is set when the fuel level sensor is determined to be out of range.

1. Check fuel level sensor harness to be sure it is connected and secure.
2. Check fuel level sensor harness for continuity.
3. Replace fuel level sensor.
5-93
02 February 2007
105 CHECK RECEIVER TANK PRESSURE SOL CIRCUIT Page 1 of 2


Codes
Considerations

The Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid is located in the host unit condenser section.
Circuit Description
The Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid circuit is a two wire circuit. The Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid is
energized by a Smart FET on the Interface Board. The RTPS wire applies 12 VDC to one side of the Receiver
Tank Pressure Solenoid to energize the solenoid. The CHRT wire connects the other side of the solenoid to
chassis ground at the ground plate near the unit battery. The solenoid is not polarity sensitive. The wires are
routed in the Main Harness.
How Alarm is Set

1. If during normal operation the current is not between 0.5 to 3 amps 3 seconds after the solenoid is
energized then Alarm Code 105 is set as a check alarm and the output is turned off. Receiver Tank
Pressure Solenoid operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 105 is cleared. The unit will continue to run
but with reduced performance until the condition is corrected and the alarm is cleared. If this condition
occurs when the unit is in Evacuation Mode then Alarm Code 105 will be set as a shutdown alarm.
is de-energized then Alarm Code 105 is set as a check alarm. Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid
operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 105 is cleared. The unit will continue to run but with reduced
performance until the condition is corrected and the alarm is cleared.
3. If during a Pretrip Test the current is not between 0.5 to 3 amps when the solenoid is energized then
Alarm Code 105 is set as a check alarm.
5-94
02 February 2007
105 CHECK RECEIVER TANK PRESSURE SOL CIRCUIT Page 2 of 2

1. Check the operation of the receiver tank pressure solenoid circuit using Interface Board Test Mode. Be
sure the interface board receiver tank pressure solenoid circuit LED lights. For interface board LED
identification see the LED decal on the control box door. If the interface board receiver tank pressure
solenoid circuit LED lights go to Step 2. If the interface board receiver tank pressure solenoid circuit LED
does not light go to Step 3.
2. If the interface board receiver tank pressure solenoid circuit LED does light then use the HMI Control
Panel amps gauge to check the current drawn by the receiver tank pressure solenoid, while operating the
solenoid with Interface Board Test Mode. The current draw should be approximately 0.7 amps. If the
3. If the interface board receiver tank pressure solenoid circuit LED does not light then disconnect the 36 pin
connection. The solenoid coil resistance should be approximately 17.0 ohms.
4. If no problems are found in steps 1-3 and the output LED does not turn on then test the base
controller/interface board assembly as shown in Service Procedure A01A.
5. To verify the refrigeration system operation of the Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid see Service
Procedure R08A Condenser Inlet Solenoid, Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid and Purge Check Valve
Solenoid Test.
5-95
02 February 2007
106 CHECK PURGE VALVE CIRCUIT Page 1 of 1


Codes
Considerations

The Purge Valve is located in the host unit condenser section.
Circuit Description
The Purge Valve circuit is a two wire circuit. The Purge Valve is energized by a Smart FET on the Interface
Board. The PV wire applies 12 VDC to one side of the Purge Valve to energize the solenoid. The CHPV wire
connects the other side of the solenoid to chassis ground at the ground plate near the unit battery. The solenoid
is not polarity sensitive. The wires are routed in the Main Harness.
How Alarm is Set

energized then Alarm Code 106 is set as a check alarm and the output is turned off. Purge valve
operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 106 is cleared. The unit will continue to run but with reduced
performance until the condition is corrected and the alarm is cleared. If this condition occurs when the
unit is in Evacuation Mode then Alarm Code 106 will be set as a shutdown alarm.
is de-energized then Alarm Code 106 is set as a check alarm. Purge valve operation is not allowed until
Alarm Code 106 is cleared. The unit will continue to run but with reduced performance until the condition
is corrected and the alarm is cleared.
5-96
02 February 2007
106 CHECK PURGE VALVE CIRCUIT Page 1 of 1

1. Check the operation of the purge valve circuit using Interface Board Test Mode. Be sure the interface
board purge valve circuit LED lights. For interface board LED identification see the LED decal on the
control box door. If the interface board purge valve circuit LED lights go to Step 2. If the interface board
purge valve circuit LED does not light go to Step 3.
2. If the interface board purge valve circuit LED does light then use the HMI Control Panel amps gauge to
check the current drawn by the purge valve, while operating the valve with Interface Board Test Mode.
The current draw should be approximately 0.7 amps. If the current is not within limits then check for a
short circuit, open circuit or loose ground connection as shown in Step 3. Verify that all circuit connectors
are secure.
3. If the interface board purge valve circuit LED does not light then disconnect the 36 pin connector J7 and
check the circuit with an accurate ohmmeter for a short circuit, open circuit or loose connection. The
valve coil resistance should be approximately 17.0 ohms.
5. To verify the refrigeration system operation of the Purge Valve see Service Procedure R07A Purge Valve
Test and Service Procedure R08A Condenser Inlet Solenoid, Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid and
Purge Check Valve Solenoid Test.
5-97
02 February 2007
107 CHECK CONDENSER INLET SOLENOID CIRCUIT Page 1 of 2


Codes
Considerations

The Condenser Inlet Solenoid is located in the host unit condenser section.
Circuit Description
The Condenser Inlet Solenoid circuit is a two wire circuit. The Condenser Inlet Solenoid is energized by a Smart
FET on the Interface Board. The CIS wire applies 12 VDC to one side of the Condenser Inlet Solenoid to
energize the solenoid. The CHCI wire connects the other side of the solenoid to chassis ground at the ground
plate near the unit battery. The solenoid is not polarity sensitive. The wires are routed in the Main Harness.
How Alarm is Set

energized then Alarm Code 107 is set as a check alarm and the output is turned off. Condenser Inlet
Solenoid operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 107 is cleared. If this condition occurs when the unit
is in Evacuation Mode then Alarm Code 107 will be set as a shutdown alarm.
is de-energized then Alarm Code 107 is set as a check alarm. Condenser Inlet Solenoid operation is not
allowed until Alarm Code 107 is cleared. The unit will continue to run but with reduced performance until
the condition is corrected and the alarm is cleared.
5-98
02 February 2007
107 CHECK CONDENSER INLET SOLENOID CIRCUIT Page 2 of 2

1. Check the operation of the condenser inlet solenoid circuit using Interface Board Test Mode. Be sure the
interface board condenser inlet solenoid circuit LED lights. For interface board LED identification see the
LED decal on the control box door. If the interface board condenser inlet solenoid circuit LED lights go to
Step 2. If the interface board condenser inlet solenoid circuit LED does not light go to Step 3.
2. If the interface board condenser inlet solenoid circuit LED does light then use the HMI Control Panel
amps gauge to check the current drawn by the condenser inlet solenoid, while operating the solenoid with
Interface Board Test Mode. The current draw should be approximately 1.3 amps. If the current is not
within limits then check for a short circuit, open circuit or loose ground connection as shown in Step 3.
Verify that all circuit connectors are secure.
3. If the interface board condenser inlet solenoid circuit LED does not light then disconnect the 36 pin
connection. The solenoid coil resistance should be approximately 9.6 ohms.
5. To verify the refrigeration system operation of the Condenser Inlet Solenoid see Service Procedure R08A
Condenser Inlet Solenoid, Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid and Purge Check Valve Solenoid Test.
5-99
02 February 2007
108 DOOR OPEN TIMEOUT Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
If the unit is programmed to force the unit or zone to null when the door switch is open, the unit or zone will not re-
enter null until after the door switch is closed and then re-opened.
Changes in the door switch state are not recognized for 4 seconds. This is to prevent rapid unit or zone operation
changes if the door is ajar or the door switch is defective.
The unit or zone will be restarted after the off timer expires.
How Alarm is Set

1. If a door switch installed and the unit is programmed to force the unit or zone off on door opening and
restart if a maximum door open time is programmed and time has expired then Alarm Code 108 is set as
a check alarm.

1. Download the ServiceWatch data logger and inspect the information to determine if the door switch is
defective or if the door was left open for an extended period of time during loading or unloading of the
trailer.
2. Check the operation of the door switches.
5-100
02 February 2007
110 CHECK SUCTION LINE SOLENOID CIRCUIT Page 1 of 3

In Indicated Zone

Codes
Considerations
On systems with remote zone parallel evaporators the respective Expansion Module suction line solenoid output
will supply power to both of the remote zone suction line solenoids. The Pretrip and SmartFet current limits will
be adjusted for the increased current drawn by parallel evaporators based on the zone configuration settings.

The Zone 1 (host) suction line solenoid is located in the evaporator section of the host unit. The remote zone
suction line solenoids are located in the remote evaporators.
NOTE: If the unit is a DE unit the Zone 2 suction line solenoid is located in the host unit Zone 2 evaporator
section.
Circuit Description
The Suction Line Solenoid circuit is a two wire circuit. The Suction Line Solenoids are energized by Smart FETs
in the Expansion Module. The SLS wire applies 12 VDC to one side of the Suction Line Solenoid to energize the
solenoid. The CHSL wire connects the other side of the solenoid to chassis ground. The solenoid is not polarity
sensitive. The wires are routed in the Expansion Module Harness. The circuits have connectors in the remote
evaporator and at the host unit.
5-101
02 February 2007

In Indicated Zone
How Alarm is Set
1. If during normal operation the current is not between 0.5 to 3 amps (1.0 to 6 amps if parallel evaporators)
3 seconds after the solenoid is energized then Alarm Code 110 is set as a check alarm and the output is
turned off. Suction line solenoid operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 45 is cleared. If this condition
occurs when the unit is in Evacuation Mode then Alarm Code 110 will be set as a shutdown alarm.
With a frozen range setpoint the following occurs:
If in single zone operation then the unit runs normally.
If in multi-zone operation and all the zones are running in cool, heat, or heat and defrost then the unit
runs normally.
If the offending zone requires heat and one or more zones are in cool, force the offending zone into
null.
If the offending zone requires defrost and one or more zones are in cool, force all zones in cool into
running null. Zones will resume cooling after defrost in the offending zone is completed.
With a fresh range setpoint the following occurs:
If in single zone operation then the unit runs normally.
If in multi-zone operation and all the zones are running in cool, heat, or heat and defrost then the unit
runs normally.
If the offending zone requires heat or defrost and one or more zones are in cool then force all zones
in cool into running null. Zones will resume cooling after heating and or defrost in the offending zone
is completed.
2. If the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps 3 seconds after the solenoid is de-energized and
the unit is in multi-zone operation then Alarm Code 110 is set as a check alarm. If the current does
not return to less than 0.5 amps 3 seconds after the solenoid is de-energized and the unit is in single
zone operation then Alarm Code 110 is set as a shutdown alarm.
4. If during a Pretrip Test the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps when de-energized then
Alarm Code 110 is set as a shutdown alarm.

5-102
02 February 2007

In Indicated Zone
2. If the Expansion Module Status LED is flashing then check the operation of the suction line solenoid
circuit using Interface Board Test Mode. Be sure the appropriate Expansion Module suction line solenoid
LED lights. For Expansion Module LED identification see the LED decal on the control box door. If the
Expansion Module suction line solenoid circuit LED lights go to Step 3. If the Expansion Module suction
line solenoid circuit LED does not light go to Step 4.
3. If the Expansion Module suction line solenoid circuit LED does light then use the HMI Control Panel amps
gauge to check the current drawn by the suction line solenoid, while operating the solenoid with Interface
Board Test Mode. The current draw should be approximately 1.3 amps (2.6 amps if parallel evaporators).
If the current is not within limits then check for a short circuit, open circuit or loose ground connection as
shown in Step 4. Verify that all circuit connectors are secure.
4. If the Expansion Module suction line solenoid circuit LED does not light then disconnect the Expansion
Module 35 pin connector J1 and check the circuit with an accurate ohmmeter for a short circuit, open
circuit or loose connection. The solenoid coil resistance should be approximately 9.6 ohms (4.8 ohms
with parallel evaporators).
Module.
7. To verify the refrigeration system operation of the Suction Line Solenoid see Service Procedure R05A
Suction Line Solenoid Test and Service Procedure R06A Suction Line Check Valves and Condenser Inlet
Check Valve Test.
5-103
02 February 2007
111 UNIT NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm 02, 03, 04, 29, 30, 45, 67, 90, 110, 113, 122, 137 and 143
Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If a mismatch exists between the unit hardware configuration and the unit hardware as detected by the
base controller then Alarm Code 111 is set as a log alarm.

1. Verify actual unit configuration.
2. Set the unit configuration using the Unit Configuration sub-menu of the Programming Menu, as shown in
Service Procedure A04A.
5-104
02 February 2007
112 CHECK REMOTE FANS Page 1 of 3

In Indicated Zone
Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
Fan power is supplied from the Expansion Module. 2A power is connected to the Expansion Module at the large
power studs on the module.
Remote evaporators will have 2 or 3 fan motors. Any zone can have a minimum of 2 fan motors and a maximum
of 6 fan motors. An individual unit can support up to 12 fan motors.
On systems with parallel remote zone evaporators the respective Expansion Module fan motor output will supply
power to two fan motors. See the respective unit wiring diagram for details.
On systems with single remote zone evaporators the respective Expansion Module fan motor output will supply
power to one fan motor. See the respective unit wiring diagram for details.
On DE units the Zone 2 fan motor output is used to operate the Zone 2 damper. See Alarm Code 29 Defrost
Damper Circuit Check for additional details.
The Pretrip and SmartFet current limits will be adjusted for current draw based on the zone configuration
settings.
The circuits have connectors in the remote evaporator and at the host unit.

The fans are located in the remote evaporator(s). The tests values are determined by the type of remote
evaporators and the actual unit configuration for number of evaporators in a zone.
Circuit Description
The evaporator fans are energized by Smart FETs in the Expansion Module. The blue wires connect the fan
motor to chassis ground. All ground wires are run back to the unit ground plate. The wires are routed in the
Expansion Module Harness. The circuits have connectors in the remote evaporator and at the host unit.
5-105
02 February 2007

In Indicated Zone
How Alarm is Set
1. If during normal operation the current is not greater than 0.5 amps 30 seconds after the fan(s) are
energized then Alarm Code 112 is set as a check alarm and the output is turned off.
x If the unit is in single temperature operation and all fan motors have Alarm Code 112 set then
Alarm Code 114 will be set as a shutdown alarm. If one or more fans are allowed to run then the
unit will continue to run.
x If in multi-temperature operation and all fan motors in a remote evaporator have Alarm Code 112
set then the remote evaporator will be forced into shutdown and all remote evaporator outputs for
that evaporator will be forced off. Alarm Code 12 will be set as a zone shutdown alarm.
2. If during normal operation the current is greater than 20.0 amps 30 seconds after the fan(s) are energized
then Alarm Code 112 is set as a check alarm and the output is turned off.
3. If during normal operation the current is greater than 0.5 amps 3 seconds after the fan(s) are de-
energized then Alarm Code 112 is set as a check alarm and the output is turned off.
x All defrost functions are disabled until the alarm is cleared.
4. If during normal operation the current is greater than the Smart FET current limit 1 second after the fan(s)
are energized then Alarm Code 112 is set as a check alarm and the output is turned off.
5. If during a Pretrip Test the current is not in specification when the fans are energized then Alarm Code
112 is set as a check alarm.
6. If during a Pretrip Test the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps when the fans are de-energized
then Alarm Code 112 is set as a shutdown alarm.
5-106
02 February 2007

In Indicated Zone
2. If the Expansion Module Status LED is flashing then check the operation of the fan circuit using Interface
Board Test Mode. Be sure the appropriate Expansion Module fan circuit LED lights. For Expansion
Module LED identification see the LED decal on the control box door. If the Expansion Module fan circuit
LED lights go to Step 3. If the Expansion Module fan circuit LED does not light go to Step 4.
3. If the Expansion Module fan circuit LED does light then use the HMI Control Panel amps gauge to check
the current drawn by the fan circuit, while operating the fans with Interface Board Test Mode. If the
4. If the Expansion Module fan circuit LED does not light then disconnect the Expansion Module 6 pin
connection.
Module.
5-107
02 February 2007
113 CHECK ELECTRIC HEAT CIRCUIT Page 1 of 1

In Indicated Zone
Alarm Type Check or Shutdown Alarm (Pretrip test only)
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 28 Pretrip Abort.

Codes
Considerations
Electric heat is applicable to the Zone 1 evaporator on Model 50 units only. Electric heat is a configurable option.
How Alarm is Set

1. If during a Pretrip Test the current is more than 0.5 amps when the circuit is energized then Alarm Code
113 is set as a check alarm.
2. If during a Pretrip Test the current does not return to within 0.25 amps of reference amps when de-
energized then Alarm Code 113 is set as a shutdown alarm.

2. Check the 26E wire to the heater contactor.
5-108
02 February 2007
114 MULTIPLE ALARMS – CAN NOT RUN Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm indicating cause of shutdown.

Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If a multi-temp unit has zone shutdown alarms in all configured zones then set Alarm Code 114 as a
shutdown alarm.

1. Proceed as indicated for associated alarm codes.
117 AUTO SWITCH FROM DIESEL TO ELECTRIC Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 118 Auto Switch from Electric to Diesel
Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit is switched from diesel operation to electric operation during a Pretrip Test then set Alarm code
117 as a log alarm. The Pretrip Test will be restarted from the beginning in Electric Mode.
2. If the unit is switched from diesel operation to electric operation during a non-running Service Test Mode
operation then set Alarm code 117 as a shutdown alarm.
3. If the unit is switched from electric operation to diesel operation during normal operation this alarm is set
as a log alarm for information only.

Information only. No action is required.
5-109
02 February 2007
118 AUTO SWITCH FROM ELECTRIC TO DIESEL Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 117 Auto Switch from Diesel to Electric
Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit is switched from electric operation to diesel operation during a Pretrip Test then set Alarm code
117 as a log alarm. The Pretrip Test will be restarted from the beginning in Diesel Mode.
2. If the unit is switched from electric operation to diesel operation during a non-running Service Test Mode
operation then set Alarm code 117 as a shutdown alarm.
3. If the unit is switched from diesel operation to electric operation during normal operation this alarm is set
as a log alarm for information only.

Information only. No action is required.
5-110
02 February 2007
120 CHECK ALTERNATOR EXCITE CIRCUIT Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
The alternator excite output is featured on revision SR-2/C base controller and revision IB/B interface boards.
This hardware can be identified by the “T3” suffix on the respective hardware serial number. Unit’s manufactured
with “T3” hardware must use “T3” replacement hardware.
Circuit Description
The Alternator Excite circuit is a single wire circuit. The Alternator Excite circuit is energized by a Smart FET on
the Interface Board. The EXC wire applies 12 VDC to energize the alternator excite circuit. The wire is routed in
the Main Harness.
How Alarm is Set

1. If during normal operation the current is not within specifications 3 seconds after the alternator excite
output is energized then Alarm Code 120 is set as a check alarm and the output is turned off. Alternator
excite operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 120 is cleared. The unit will continue to run but with
reduced performance until the condition is corrected and the alarm is cleared.
2. If during normal operation the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps 3 seconds after the alternator
excite output is de-energized then Alarm Code 120 is set as a check alarm. Alternator excite operation is
not allowed until Alarm Code 120 is cleared. The unit will continue to run but with reduced performance
until the condition is corrected and the alarm is cleared.
3. If during a Pretrip Test the current is not within specifications when the alternator excite output is
energized then Alarm Code 120 is set as a check alarm.

5-111
02 February 2007
120 CHECK ALTERNATOR EXCITE CIRCUIT Page 1 of 1

1. Check the operation of the alternator excite circuit using Interface Board Test Mode. Be sure the
alternator excite circuit LED lights. If the alternator excite circuit LED lights then go to Step 2. If the
alternator excite circuit LED does not light then go to Step 3.
2. If the alternator excite circuit LED does light then check for 12 Vdc at the alternator excite terminal. If 12
Vdc is not present check for a short circuit, open circuit or loose connection.
3. If the alternator excite circuit LED does not light then check the circuit with an accurate ohmmeter for a
short circuit, open circuit or loose connection.
4. Disconnect the EXC wire at the alternator and check for 12 Vdc when the engine is running.If 12 VDC is
not present check the EXC circuit for continuity.
5-112
02 February 2007
121 CHECK PWM/LIQUID INJECTION CIRCUIT Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Log or Shutdown Alarm (Pretrip only)
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 28 Pretrip Abort.

Codes
How Alarm is Set
The PWM/Liquid Injection Circuit is not currently used. However, the associated output is checked during the
Non-running Pretrip Test to be certain nothing has been mistakenly connected to it. The output is energized and
then de-energized to insure that no device is connected to the circuit and that the base controller is operating
properly.
1. If current flow is detected during the output energized phase of the Non-running Pretrip Test then Alarm
Code 121 will be set as a check alarm. The Non-running Pretrip Test will be allowed to complete.
2. If current draw is detected during the output de-energized phase of the Non-running Pretrip Test then
Alarm Code 121 is set as a check alarm and Alarm Code 28 Pretrip Abort will be set as a shutdown
alarm. The Pretrip Test will be aborted.

2. Check the interface board wiring to insure that there is no connection to connector J7, pin 10.
5-113
02 February 2007
122 CHECK DIESEL/ELECTRIC CIRCUIT Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Check or Shutdown Alarm (Pretrip test only)
Associated Alarm
Codes
Circuit Description
The Diesel/Electric circuit is energized by the Diesel/Electric Relay K5 on the Interface Board. The 7E wire
supplies 12 VDC the Phase Select Module to energize the appropriate Standby Motor contactor.
How Alarm is Set

1. If during a Pretrip Test the unit is configured with Diesel/Electric Relay and current is not greater than 0.5
amps when the circuit is energized then Alarm Code 122 is set as a check alarm.
2. If during a Pretrip Test the zone is configured with Diesel/Electric Relay and current does not return to
less than 0.5 amps of run relay reference when de-energized then Alarm Code 122 is set as a shutdown
alarm.

1. Check the operation of the Diesel/Electric relay using Interface Board Test Mode in the Maintenance
Menu. Be sure the Diesel/Electric LED 7 lights.
2. Use the HMI control panel amps gauge to check the current drawn by the Diesel/Electric relay while
operating the Diesel/Electric relay with Interface Board Test Mode. The current draw should be between
0.1 to 2 amps.
5-114
02 February 2007
127 SETPOINT NOT ENTERED Page 1 of 1

In Indicated Zone
Associated Alarm
Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If the setpoint was changed but the change was not confirmed by pressing the YES key then Alarm Code
127 is set as a check alarm. The setpoint has not been changed and has returned to the original setting.

Information only. Be sure setpoint is adjusted properly.
5-115
02 February 2007
128 ENGINE RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER #1 Page 1 of 1

129 ENGINE MAINTENANCE RUN TIME REMINDER #2 Page 1 of 1
130 ELECTRIC RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER #1 Page 1 of 1
131 ELECTRIC RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER #2 Page 1 of 1
132 TOTAL UNIT RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER Page 1 of 1
#1
133 TOTAL UNIT RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER Page 1 of 1
#2
134 CONTROLLER POWER ON HOURS Page 1 of 1
Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
The programmable hourmeter alarms can be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu only.
How Alarm is Set
1. If one of the hourmeters above has exceeded the programmed time limit then the appropriate alarm code
is set as a log alarm.

This alarm is cleared from the Guarded Access Menu only.
1. Perform required maintenance, as dictated by owner requirements.
2. Reset the hourmeter limit after completion using the Hourmeter menu. See Section 4 for details.
5-116
02 February 2007
136 CHECK SPARE DIGITAL OUTPUTS Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Check Alarm (Pretrip Only)
Associated Alarm
Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If the Pretrip test indicates that a connection has been made to a spare digital output and should not have
been then Alarm Code 136 is set as a check alarm.

Correct the wiring error.
5-117
02 February 2007
137 CHECK DAMPER MOTOR HEATER OUTPUT Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Not applicable to SR-2 MT
141 AUTOSWITCH DIESEL TO ELECTRIC DISABLED Page 1 of 1

Considerations
When this alarm is set the unit will remain in diesel mode operation even when connected to a fully functional
electric standby power system.
How Alarm is Set
1. If autoswitch diesel to electric is set yes and the unit switches to electric mode operation and an Electric
Mode shutdown alarm is already set, then set Alarm Code 141 as a check alarm.

1. Check for associated alarms and repair as required.
5-118
02 February 2007
143 CHECK DRAIN HOSE HEATER OUTPUT Page 1 of 3

In Indicated Zone
Associated Alarm
Codes
The drain hose heater is used on remote evaporators to keep the evaporator drain hose free of ice. They are
located in the remote evaporator drain hoses.
Circuit Description
The drain hose heater circuit is a two wire circuit. Smart FETs in the Expansion Module energize the drain hose
heaters for all remote zones on multi-temp units. The DHx wire applies 12 VDC to one side of the drain hose
heater. The CHHG wire connects the other side of the drain hose heater to chassis ground. All ground wires are
run back to the unit ground plate. Drain hose heaters in remote zones have supply circuits with connectors in the
remote evaporator and at the host unit. The heater is not polarity sensitive. The wires are routed in the
Expansion Module Harness. See the unit wiring diagrams for wire numbers, locations and additional details.
Considerations
Drain hose heaters are used in remote zones only. On systems with remote zone parallel evaporators the
respective drain hose heater output will supply power to all of the zone heaters. On zones with a single
evaporator there are two heaters. On zones with parallel evaporators there are four heaters.
On systems with remote zone parallel evaporators the respective Expansion Module drain hose heater output will
supply power to all of the drain tube heaters. The Pretrip and SmartFet current limits will automatically adjust for
the increased current drawn by parallel evaporators based on the zone configuration settings.
5-119
02 February 2007

In Indicated Zone
How Alarm is Set
1. If during normal operation the current is not between 0.5 to 6 amps (1.0 to 12 amps if parallel
evaporators) 3 seconds after the drain hose heater is energized then Alarm Code 143 is set as a log
alarm (set as shutdown alarm if the condition occurs in Evacuation Mode). Zone drain hose heater
operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 143 is cleared.
2. If during normal operation the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps 3 seconds after the drain
hose heater is de-energized then Alarm Code 143 is set as a check alarm. Zone drain hose heater
operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 143 is cleared.
3. If during normal operation the current is limited by the SmartFET due to excessive current draw 1 second
after the drain hose heater is energized then Alarm Code 143 is set as a check alarm. Zone drain hose
heater operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 143 is cleared.
4. If during a Pretrip Test the current is not between 3 to 10 amps when the drain hose heater is energized
then Alarm Code 143 is set as a check alarm.
6. If during a Pretrip Test the unit is a trailer unit and is not configured for the zone being tested and amp
draw is greater than the allowable limit then Alarm Code 143 and Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured
Correctly are set as log alarms.

5-120
02 February 2007

In Indicated Zone
2. If the Expansion Module Status LED is flashing then check the operation of the drain hose heater circuit
using Interface Board Test Mode. Be sure the appropriate Expansion Module drain hose heater LED
lights. For Expansion Module LED identification see the LED decal on the control box door. If the
Expansion Module drain hose heater circuit LED lights go to Step 3. If the Expansion Module drain hose
heater circuit LED does not light go to Step 4.
3. If the Expansion Module drain hose heater circuit LED does light then use the HMI Control Panel amps
gauge to check the current drawn by the hot gas solenoid, while operating the drain hose heater with
Interface Board Test Mode. The current draw should be approximately 0.5 to 6 amps (1 to 12 amps if
parallel evaporators). If the current is not within limits then check for a short circuit, open circuit or loose
ground connection as shown in Step 4. Verify that all circuit connectors are secure.
4. If the Expansion Module drain hose heater circuit LED does not light then disconnect the Expansion
Module 35 pin connector J1 and check the circuit with an accurate ohmmeter for a short circuit, open
circuit or loose connection.
Module.
5-121
02 February 2007
144 LOSS OF CAN COMMUNICATION Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Circuit Description
The SR-2 Control Platform utilizes CAN communications to pass information back and forth between the base
controller, HMI control panel and the expansion module. These cables are connected to the Interface Board as
shown here.
J12 – Connects the base controller to the expansion module.
J14 – Connects the base controller to the HMI control panel.
See the Wiring Diagram for details of each cable.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the unit is a multi-temp unit with multi-temp software or a single temp unit with multi-temp software and
communication is lost between the controller and expansion module for 5 seconds then set Alarm Code
144 as a shutdown alarm and de-energize all outputs.

The alarm will clear automatically when communications are re-established.
1. Check all CAN cables to be sure they are connected securely.
5-122
02 February 2007
145 LOSS OF 8XP INPUT Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Circuit Description
How Alarm is Set

1. If the base controller and HMI control panel have established communication and the 8XP device
feedback input is low for 3 seconds then set Alarm Code 145 as a log alarm.

1. Check for blown F7 fuse.
1. Check for an open connection at Interface Board Connector J14 pin 6.
2. Check for an open connection at HMI Control Panel Connector pin 6.
3. Check for an open or shorted BLK3 wire.
4. Check for a defective HMI Control Panel if there is voltage on pin 6 of the HMI Control Panel connector.
5-123
02 February 2007
146 SOFTWARE VERSION MISMATCH Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If single temp software is detected in a unit with an expansion module connected then set Alarm Code
146 as a shutdown alarm.

This alarm will auto clear if the correct software is flash loaded.
Flash load the correct software. See Section 7 of this manual for the compatible software.
5-124
02 February 2007
147 CHECK MULTI-TEMP FAN SPEED CONTROL Page 1 of 1

OUTPUT
In indicated zone
Associated Alarm
Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If the fan speed feedback control is not within 10% of the requested value then set Alarm Code 147 as a
check alarm.

1. Check that fan speed wires are connected correctly.
2. On remote zones with single evaporators, the fan speed output will be approximately 0 volts during fresh
setpoint operation and 4-5 volt during frozen operation.
3. On remote zones with dual evaporators, the fan speed output will be approximately 4-5 volts during fresh
setpoint operation and 3-4 volts during frozen operation.
5-125
02 February 2007
148 AUTOSWITCH ELECTRIC TO DIESEL DISABLED Page 1 of 1

How Alarm is Set

1. If autoswitch electric to diesel is set yes and the unit switches to diesel mode operation and an diesel
mode shutdown alarm is already set, then set Alarm Code 148 as a check alarm.

Alarm code 148 will auto-clear when all of the diesel shutdown alarms are cleared.
1. Check for associated alarms and repair as required.
5-126
02 February 2007
153 EXPANSION MODULE FLASH LOAD FAILURE Page 1 of 1

Multi-Temp Applications Only
Associated Alarm
Codes
The Expansion Module is located inside the control box.
Circuit Description
The expansion module allows the addition of up to two additional temperature controlled zones. The module
provides the interface between the base controller and the zone 1, zone 2 and zone 3 multi-temperature
components such as sensors, solenoids, valves, and fan motors. It also provides overcurrent and short circuit
protection for the associated circuits.
How Alarm is Set

1. The controller attempted to flash load the Expansion Module and was unsuccessful.

1. This alarm is automatically cleared when the Expansion Module is successfully flash loaded.
The Expansion Module software is automatically flash loaded any time software is flash loaded to the SR-2
Controller. Software cannot be flash loaded directly to the Expansion module – it is always part of an SR-2
Controller flash load. See Service Procedure A46A Flash Loading SR-2 Controller Software for flash load details.
1. Check the CAN cable from J12 on the Interface Board to the 8 pin CAN connector on the Expansion
Module. Be sure connections are secure and all pins are fully seated in the connector.
2. Verify the Expansion Module heartbeat LED is lit.
3. Repeat the Controller flash load.
5-127
02 February 2007
5-128
02 February 2007
THERMO KING

Microprocessor Control System
TK 53080-2-OD (01/07)
DIAGNOSTIC MANUAL
Used on: SPECTRUM SB
HMI Control Panel Software Revision 6510, 6610 or 6710
Revision History – SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Diagnostic Manual

Full Release TK 53080-2-OD (01/07) Controller C000, HMI 6510/6610/6710
covered by the following SR-2 software revisions:

and
HMI Control Panel Software Revision 6510 or 6610 or 6710
Earlier versions of software are similar but may not include or support all
features as shown in this manual.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Because not everyone is familiar with microprocessor based control systems, please
take a few minutes to read this page. It explains the content and structure of this
manual. This will make it easier for you to find the information you need.
• Section 1 - Safety information
This section contains the safety information for the SR-2 SPECTRUM control system. Read this
material carefully before working on the unit.
• Section 2 - Hardware Description
This section describes the SR-2 SPECTRUM control system hardware. It identifies and locates
controllers, relays, LED’s, fuses and other components and provides connector maps for all
connectors.
• Section 3 - Software Description
This section discusses the operation of the SR-2 SPECTRUM control system software and
programmable features. Each menu and feature is discussed individually to illustrate how they
are used.
• Section 4 - Operation
This section explains how to operate the SR-2 SPECTRUM control system. This information is
referenced by material in Section 5 Diagnostics.
• Section 5 - Diagnostics
This section explains how to diagnose units equipped with the SR-2 SPECTRUM control system.
It includes both Alarm Code Diagnostics and Other Symptom Diagnostics. This section will
reference material in Section 4 Operation and Section 6 Service Procedures.
• Section 6 - Service Procedures
This section includes Service Procedures to assist the technician when servicing units equipped
with the SR-2 SPECTRUM control system. These procedures are referenced by the diagnostic
routines in Section 5 Diagnostics.
• Section 7 - Service Information
This section offers Service Information on the basic component parts of the SR-2 SPECTRUM
control system. It includes a software revision history and a list of applicable bulletins.
• Section 8 – Refrigeration Service Information, Service

Procedures and Evaporator Diagrams
This section includes Refrigeration Service Procedures to assist the technician when servicing
SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temperature units.
• Section 9 – Schematics and Wiring Diagrams
This section includes the SR-2 SPECTRUM control system electrical schematics and unit wiring
diagrams.
Control System Notes
The following procedures must be followed when working on units equipped with
microprocessor based control systems.
• Never use testers consisting of a battery and a light bulb to test circuits on any
microprocessor based equipment.
• The unit must be turned off before connecting or disconnecting the battery.
• Any time a graded sensor is replaced it must be calibrated as shown in Service

Procedure A15A Temperature Sensor Grade Calibration.
•Any time the Base Controller is replaced, these Service Procedures must be
used:
• Any time the Interface Board is replaced, Service Procedure A03A

Replacement of the Base Controller or Interface Board must be followed.
• Any time welding is to be done on the unit or vehicle Service Procedure A26A
Welding on Units Equipped with Microprocessors must be followed.
This manual is published for informational purposes only and the information so provided should
not be considered as all-inclusive or covering all contingencies. If further information is required
Thermo King Corporation should be consulted.
Sale of product shown in this manual is subject to Thermo King's terms and conditions
including, but not limited to, the THERMO KING LIMITED EXPRESS WARRANTY. Such
terms and conditions are available upon request. Thermo King's warranty will not apply to
any equipment which has been "so repaired or altered outside the manufacturer’s plants
as, in the manufacturer’s judgment, to affect its stability".
No warranties, express or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose

or merchantability, or warranties arising from course of dealing or usage of trade, are
made regarding the information, recommendations and descriptions contained herein.
Manufacturer is not responsible and will not be held liable in contract or in tort (including
negligence) for any special, indirect or consequential damages, including injury or
damage caused to vehicles, contents or persons, by reason of the installation of any
Thermo King product or its mechanical failure.
SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Software

Features
This manual contains information, data, procedures, and processes

Section 6 – SR-2 SPECTRUM Service Procedure Index
Table of Contents Section 6

A01A Base Controller/Interface Board Functional Test
A01B HMI Control Panel Functional Test
A01C HMI Control Panel Self Test
A01D MultiTemp Expansion Module Test
A03B Replacement of the HMI Control Panel
A03C Replacement of the SPECTRUM Expansion Module
A05A Clock/Calendar Setup (See Section 4)
A06A Checking Software Revision (See Section 4)
A07A Performing a Cold Start
A15A Temperature Sensor Grade Calibration
A17A Full Pretrip Test (See Section 4)
A26A Welding on Units Equipped with Microprocessors
A28A Setting Unit Running Time Hourmeters
A34A Operating Service Test Mode (See Section 4)
A44A Operating Interface Board Test Mode (See Section 4)
A46A Flash Loading Base Controller Software
A46B Flash Loading HMI Control Panel Software
A47A Programming OptiSet Features
A48A Phase Detect Module Operation and Diagnostics
A49A CargoWatch Data Logger
A50A ServiceWatch Data Logger
D01A Temperature Sensor Test
D03A Pressure Sensor Test
F01A Checking and Replacing the Oil Level Switch
F05A Checking the Oil Pressure Switch
F07B Magnetic Coolant Level Switch
F08A Coolant Temperature Sensor Test
F09A RPM Sensor Test and Adjustment
H04A Wiring Harness Continuity Test
Page 1
05 February 2007
Section 6 – SR-2 SPECTRUM Service Procedure Index
Page 2
05 February 2007
Section 6 – SR-2 and SR-2 M/T Service Procedure A01A
Microprocessor/Interface Board Functional Test
Where Used
All SR-2 and SR-2 Spectrum Multi-Temp units
Purpose
To confirm proper operation of the microprocessor and interface board
Table of Contents
Microprocessor/Interface Board Functional Test....................................................................................................... 1
Materials Required ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Operation ............................................................................................................................................................... 2
Important Notes...................................................................................................................................................... 2
Important PC Notes ............................................................................................................................................... 2
Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................................................................. 3
Materials Req
uired
IMPORTANT A new Diagnostic Tool (Service Part 3 204-1196) and Diagnostic Tester Software 3.0.0 or greater
is required to test the SR-2/C Base Controller/Interface Board. This tester will also work on previous SR-2 Single
Temp base controllers and interface boards. The new tester can be identified by the blue plastic housing. An
upgrade kit (Service Part # 204-1197) is available to upgrade the original Service Part 204-1102 Diagnostic Tool
to the current standards. The new tester is required for the SR-2/C Base Controller/Interface Board, but not the
HMI Control Panel.
x Thermo King SR-2 Diagnostic Tool – Service Part Number 204-1196.
x Thermo King SR-2 Diagnostic Software Revision 3.0.0 installed on a pc computer.
Revision 3.0.0 software will prompt the user that the blue Diagnostic Tool is required.
Page 1
P41SA01A 06 February 2007
Operation
The following procedure allows the technician to determine if the microprocessor or interface board is operating
properly using the Thermo King SR-2 Diagnostic Tool.
Important Notes
x Supply power from know good battery, a suitable power supply or by connecting a battery charger to the
unit battery. Low voltage caused by low unit battery will affect results. The threshold for battery power
influencing test results appears to be about 11.5 VDC.
x When testing a microprocessor, supply power to the interface board, not the tester. Supplying power to
the tester may result in a communication failure.
x Be certain to make secure connections both when attaching the tester and when reconnecting the unit
wiring harnesses.
x Never accept an initial failure. Always retest to confirm. If component fails the test, be sure wiring is
connected correctly.
Important PC Notes
The following notes apply to the pc computer used in conjunction with the Thermo King SR-2 Diagnostic Tool.
x The SR-2 Diagnostic Tool may not function properly on pc computers running Windows ME.
x The pc computer must be set for English. Select Control Panel – Regional and Language Options. Then
use the Regional Dropdown menu to select English.
x The pc computer must be set to use the decimal point (.) for the decimal symbol, not the comma (,). If a
comma is used it will be ignored – 12,3 will be read as 123. Select Control Panel – Regional and
Language Options – Customize – Decimal Symbol – select (.) instead of (,).
Page 2
The TKSR-2 Diagnostic Tool will be referred to as the “T ester”in this proc edure.
Step Action Result Comments
Microprocessor/Interface
Board Assembly Test
1 Turn the Microprocessor On/Off Failure to do so may damage the
switch off. microprocessor or interface
board.
2 If not already done, connect all

tester cables and the serial cable
to the tester.
3 Disconnect all harness wires The Microprocessor On/Off

from the interface board except Switch and the heavy power and
for the J4 Microprocessor On/Off chassis ground wires will be
Switch connector and the heavy used to apply test power to the
power and chassis ground wires assembly under test.
at J23, J24 and J25.
4 Connect a serial cable from the The serial cable must be The TK Diagnostic Tool will be
left side tester serial port to a pc connected to the left side Tester referred to as the “Tester” in
computer. serial connector for the base this procedure.
controller/interface board test.
5 Start the TK Diagnostic Tool The TK Diagnostic Tool Software The TK Diagnostic Tool will be
software on the computer. will also provide step by step referred to as the “Tester” in
connection and test instructions. this procedure.
Page 3

6 Diagnostic Tool software version If the prompt below does not
3.x.x will prompt the technician to appear you are using software
use the correct Diagnostic Tool prior to Revision 3.x. This
as shown below. software will not test
SPECTRUM Multi-Temp SR-2/C
base controller/interface board
assemblies.
7 From the Tester software menu Use SR2 SB Series for all SB
select “SR2 SB Series” or “SR2 units with damper solenoids.
SL Series”.
Use SR2 SL Series for all SL
units with damper motors.
8 Left click RUN SELECTED

TEST.
9 Confirm the test selection by left

clicking RUN TEST.
Page 4

10 Follow the prompts as shown Press any key to step thru the
below to connect the tester to the connection prompts shown on
unit microprocessor/interface the pc.
board assembly under test.
11 Connect the black Tester J3 Do not connect the blue Tester

Sensor Harness connector and HMI Control Panel harness to
J7, J8 and J15 Main Harness the HMI.
connectors to the assembly
under test.
12 Connect the Tester H wire to the

J26 connector of the assembly
under test.
13 Connect the Tester Remote and This must be done even on

Electric Standby harnesses to the Model 30 units, since the tester
J6 and J8 connectors of the checks all control circuits.
assembly under test.
14 Connect the Tester CAN

Harnesses to the J12, J13 and
J14 connectors of the assembly
under test.
15 Connect the Tester RS232 Serial

Harnesses to the J9 and J10
connectors of the assembly
under test.
Page 5

16 Turn the Microprocessor On/Off This supplies power to the
switch On. assembly under test.
17 Press any key on the pc to start

the test.
18 The Tester will establish

communications and perform the
selected test.
19 When the test is complete the

results will be reported on the pc.
20 If the assembly failed the test, The test results will indicate if a
check the test results for possible problem exists with the
causes and correct as directed. microprocessor or interface
board.
21 Retest the assembly if necessary

to confirm the test results.
22 Turn the Microprocessor On/Off

switch off.
23 Record the data requested in the

fields on the test report.
Page 6

24 Print the test report for future
use.
25 Disconnect the tester and Be sure all connectors are

reconnect the unit harness wires. secure and harnesses are
properly routed and held in place
with tie bands.
26 After repairs are completed

perform a Full Pretrip Test to
confirm unit operation.
Page 7
Page 8
Section 6 – SR-2 and SR-2 M/T Service Procedure A01B
HMI Control Panel Functional Test
Where Used
Purpose
To confirm proper operation of the HMI Control Panel
Materials Required
IMPORTANT A new Diagnostic Tool (Service Part 3 204-1196) and Diagnostic Tester Software 3.0.0 or greater
is required to test the SR-2/C Base Controller/Interface Board. This tester will also work on previous SR-2 Single
Temp base controllers and interface boards. The new tester can be identified by the blue plastic housing. An
upgrade kit (Service Part # 204-1197) is available to upgrade the original Service Part 204-1102 Diagnostic Tool
to the current standards. The new tester is required for the SR-2/C Base Controller/Interface Board, but not the
HMI Control Panel.
x Thermo King SR-2 Diagnostic Tool – Service Part Number 204-1196.

x Thermo King SR-2 Diagnostic Software Revision 3.0.0 installed on a pc computer.
Operation
The following procedure allows the technician to determine if the HMI Control Panel is operating properly using
the Thermo King SR-2 Diagnostic Tool.
Page 1
P41SA01B 06 February 2007
Important Notes
x Supply power from know good battery, a suitable power supply or by connecting a battery charger to the
unit battery. Low voltage caused by low unit battery will affect results. The threshold for battery power
influencing test results appears to be about 11.5 VDC.
x When testing an HMI Control Panel, supply power from the interface board, not the tester. Supplying
power from the tester may result in a communication failure.
x Be certain to make secure connections both when attaching the tester and when reconnecting the unit
wiring harnesses.
x Never accept an initial failure. Always retest to confirm. If component fails the test, be sure wiring is
connected correctly.
x There is a Display Self Test included in the Maintenance Menu. See Section 4 and Service Procedure
A01C for details.
Important PC Notes
The following notes apply to the pc computer used in conjunction with the Thermo King SR-2 Diagnostic Tool.
x The SR-2 Diagnostic Tool may not function properly on pc computers running Windows ME.
x The pc computer must be set for English. Select Control Panel – Regional and Language Options. Then
use the Regional Dropdown menu to select English.
x The pc computer must be set to use the decimal point (.) for the decimal symbol, not the comma (,). If a
comma is used it will be ignored – 12,3 will be read as 123. Select Control Panel – Regional and
Language Options – Customize – Decimal Symbol – select (.) instead of (,).
Page 2
The TK Diagnostic Tool will be referred to as the “Tester” in this procedure.
HMI Control Panel Test
1 Turn the Microprocessor On/Off Failure to do so may damage the
switch off. microprocessor or interface
board.
2 If not already done, connect all

tester cables and the serial cable
to the tester.
3 Connect a serial cable from the The serial cable must be The TK Diagnostic Tool will be
right side tester serial port to a pc connected to the right side referred to as the “Tester” in
computer. Tester serial connector for the this procedure.
HMI Control Panel test.
Page 3

4 Start the TK Diagnostic Tool The TK Diagnostic Tool Software The TK Diagnostic Tool will be
software on the computer. will also provide step by step referred to as the “Tester” in
connection and test instructions. this procedure.
5 Diagnostic Tool software version If the prompt below does not

3.x.x will prompt the technician to appear you are using software
use the correct Diagnostic Tool prior to Revision 3.x. This
as shown below. software will not test
SPECTRUM Multi-Temp SR-2/C
base controller/interface board
assemblies.
6 From the Tester software menu

select “HMI Test”.
7 Left click RUN SELECTED

TEST.
Page 4

8 Confirm the test selection by left
clicking RUN TEST.
9 Follow the prompts as shown Press any key to step thru the
below to connect the tester to the connection prompts shown on
HMI Control Panel under test. the pc.
10 Connect the blue Tester HMI Do not connect the black

Harness connector to the HMI Tester J3 Sensor Harness
Control Panel under test. connector to the base
controller/interface board
assembly.
11 Turn the Microprocessor On/Off This supplies power to the

switch On. assembly under test.
12 Press the On hard key on the

HMI Control Panel under test.
13 When the HMI display shows

“Configuring the System, Please
Wait” press any pc key to start
the test.
14 The Tester will establish
communications and perform the
selected test.
15 Observe and confirm the display

requests as they occur.
Page 5

16 Press the HMI Control Panel
keys as requested by the test.
17 When the test is complete the

results will be reported on the pc.
18 If the assembly failed the test, The test results will indicate if a
check the test results for possible problem exists with the HMI
causes and correct as directed. Control Panel.
19 Retest the assembly if necessary

to confirm the test results.
20 Record the data requested in the

fields on the test report.
21 Print the test report for future

use.
22 Disconnect the tester and Be sure all connectors are
reconnect the harness wires. secure and harnesses are
properly routed and held in place
with tie bands.
Page 6
Section 6 – SR-2 Service Procedure A01C
HMI Control Panel Self Test
Where Used
All SR-2 units
Purpose
To confirm proper operation of the HMI Control Panel using the built in Display Self Test
Materials Required
x None
Operation
The following procedure allows the technician to determine if the HMI Control Panel is operating properly using
the built in HMI Self Tests.
Important Notes
x Replace only one component at a time to be certain the problem component is correctly identified.
Page 1
P41SA01C 06 February 2007
HMI Control Panel Self Test
1 To access the Maintenance
Menu press the MENU key.
2 The Maintenance Menu is

accessed from the first Main
Menu screen that appears; either
the Language Display or the
Alarms Display. Press and hold
both the unlabelled soft key and
the Exit key for 5 seconds.
3 The first Maintenance Menu

feature will appear. Press the
NEXT and BACK keys to scroll
thru the Maintenance Menu
choices. When DISPLAY SELF
TEST is shown on the display,
press the SELECT key to access
it.
5 The DISPLAY SELF TEST menu

appears. The available tests are
shown in the table on page 4.
6 Press the NEXT and BACK keys

to scroll thru the Display Self Test
Menu choices.
Page 2
7 When DISPLAY SELF TEST is

shown on the display, press the
SELECT key to access it.
8 When the individual test is

complete another test can be
selected.
9 When testing is finished press

EXIT to return to the
Maintenance Menu.
Page 3
x LCD Test – This test allows the technician to select a normal or inverted display. If inverted is chosen the
display is reversed – segments that were turned on are now turned off and segments that were turned off
are now turned on. The technician visually verifies that all display segments are functioning properly.
x Keypad Test – This test prompts the technician to press the four soft keys, the Defrost key and the Cycle
Sentry key. Each time the requested key is pressed the next prompt is displayed, allowing the technician
to verify proper operation of these keys.
x Backlight Test – This test allows the technician to turn the backlight on and off to confirm operation.
x Brightness Test – This test allows the technician to select Low, Medium or High backlight intensity.
x Buzzer Test – This test allows the technician to turn the HMI buzzer on and off to verify operation.
x Heater Output – This test allows the technician to turn the HMI display heater on and off.
x Unit On/Off Output Test – This test allows the technician to turn the Unit On/Off output off. This turns
the unit off to confirm that the output can be turned off. To restart the unit, press the On key.
x SPR Digital Output Test – This test allows the technician to turn digital output 2 on and off. This allows
the operation of a device attached to the this output to be checked.
x Serial E2 – This test allows the technician to perform an internal HMI memory test. The test takes less
than 1 second and the results are reported as PASS or FAIL.
x Datalog Flash – This test allows the technician to perform an internal HMI CargoWatch data logger
memory test. The test takes less than 1 second and the results are reported as PASS or FAIL.
x RTC Update – This test allows the technician to perform an internal HMI real time clock test. The test
takes less than 3 seconds and the results are reported as PASS or FAIL.
Page 4
Section 6 – SR-2 SPECTRUM Service Procedure A01D
SR-2 MultiTemp Expansion Module Test
Where Used
All SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp units
Purpose
To confirm proper operation of the SR-2 SPECTRUM Expansion Module using Interface Board Test Mode
Materials Required
x Accurate digital multimeter.
Operation
The following procedure allows the technician to determine if the SR-2 SPECTRUM Expansion Module is
operating properly.
Important Notes
x Replace only one component at a time to be certain the problem component is correctly identified.
x Under normal unit operation the SmartFET and associated LED for that output will be turned off if an
overcurrent or undercurrent condition exists.
x When using Interface Board Test Mode the SmartFET and associated LED will be on if an undercurrent
condition exists (such as an open solenoid coil). The SmartFET and associated LED will be off if an
overcurrent condition exists (such as a short to ground).
x The expansion module communicates with the base controller via a CAN bus connection.
Page 1
P41SA01D 06 February 2007
Expansion Module Test
This test assumes that a
particular output is to be tested to
verify proper operation.
1 Turn the unit on and check the See the LED location at the back Green Status LED– Flashes
Expansion Module green Status of this procedure or the once per second when the base
LED. The green Status LED Expansion Module LED Location controller is powered and
should be flashing once per decal on the control panel door operating normally.
second when the base controller for LED locations.
is powered and operating Flashes several time per second
normally. when flash loading.
If the Status LED is out or is not Is on without flashing during

flashing go to Step 2. reboot and when under test.
If the Status LED is flashing once Flashes twice within one second
per second go to Step 9. followed by one second off if a
CAN communication error is
present.
2 If the green Status LED is not Power to operate the expansion

flashing once per second or is module is supplied via the black
off, check to be sure the J2 8 pin and yellow wires in the J2 8 pin
CAN connector is securely CAN connector. Chassis ground
attached to the Expansion to operate the expansion module
Module and the Interface Board is supplied via the orange wire in
Connector. the J2 8 pin CAN connector.
This harness is connected to
CAN connector J12 at the
interface board.
Page 2

3 Check fuse F8 on the interface Fuse F8 supplies 2A power via
board. pin 5 (black wire) of the CAN
connector to operate the
expansion module logic.
4 Check for 12 Vdc at the This step can be performed with

Expansion Module CAN the unit on or off.
connector J12 pin 5 (black wire).
If 12 Vdc is not present at J12 pin
5 (black wire) then check the
CAN harness for continuity.
5 Check fuse F7 on the interface Fuse F7 supplies 8X power via

board. pin 6 (yellow wire) of the CAN
connector to turn the expansion
module on.
6 Check for 12 Vdc at the This step must be performed with

Expansion Module CAN the unit on.
connector J12 pin 6 (yellow wire).
If 12 Vdc is not present at J12 pin
6 (yellow wire) then check the
CAN harness for continuity.
7 Check for chassis ground at the

Expansion Module CAN
connector pin 8 (orange wire). If
chassis ground is not present at
pin 8 (orange wire) then check
the CAN harness for continuity.
Page 3

8 If steps 2 - 7 do not restore the
flashing Status LED then replace
the Expansion Module.
9 If the Status LED is flashing once The LED for the desired output See Section 4 for information on
per second then use Interface should turn on. operating Interface Board Test
Board Test Mode to energize the Mode.
desired output and lock it on.
10 If the desired output can be Be sure all connectors are

energized and the LED turns on securely plugged in, the device
using Interface Board Test Mode coil is not open and verify circuit
then check the associated output harness continuity.
circuit for an open circuit.
11 If the desired output LED will not If a short circuit condition exists
turn on using Interface Board the output SmartFET will turn the
Test Mode there may be a short output off even though the
in the associated circuit. Expansion Module has turned it
on. If this occurs it will happen
so fast the LED will not turn on or
even blink.
12 Unplug the 35 pin J1 connector Unplugging the 35 pin J1

at the Expansion Module. connector also disconnects all
remote zone temperature
sensors. Alarm codes will be
generated for these sensors.
This is normal operation.
Page 4

13 Use Interface Board Test Mode If the LED for the desired output Troubleshoot the associated
to energize the desired output does turn on with the 35 pin J1 circuit for a short circuit condition
and lock it on. connector unplugged then a such as a shorted solenoid coil
short circuit exists in the or shorted wiring harness.
associated circuit.
14 If the LED for the desired output

does not turn on with the 35 pin
J1 connector unplugged then
replace the Expansion Module.

Page 5
LED Functions
Expansion Module LED Functions
LED # Function
Output LEDs are provided to indicate outputs that
LED 1 Fan Output # 1 / Zone-2 Damper
are energized. These LED indicators are located in
Solenoid.
the corner of the expansion module body. They are
defined by the table below. The LED is illuminated
when the associated circuit output is energized.
LED 7 Zone 1 Drain Tube Heater Output Note1

LED 9 Zone 3 Drain Tube Heater Output
4 5 6 LED 10 Zone 1 Hot Gas Solenoid Output
7 8 9
10 11 12
LED 16 Status – Flashes once per second when
13 14 15 the base controller is powered and
operating normally.
16 17 18
Flashes several time per second when
flash loading. Is on without flashing
during reboot and when under test.
Flashes twice within one second
Green Status LED followed by one second off if a CAN
(All other LEDs are red)
communication error is present.
Note 1 – The Zone 1 drain tube heater output is not
used on trailer units.
Page 6
Section 6 – SR-2 SPECTRUM Service Procedure A02A
Recording Existing Programmable Feature Settings
Where Used
Purpose
To retrieve and record the current settings of a microprocessor
Materials Required
x Prepare a copy of the Setup Sheet at the back of this Service Procedure.
Operation
x The settings of all programmable features must be retrieved before replacing a microprocessor or
performing a Cold Start. These settings will then be duplicated in the replacement microprocessor or
after the Cold Start.
x The Guarded Access Menu Overview on the next page will prove helpful.
x See Section 3 of this manual for a complete description of programmable features.
x The default settings are shown on the Setup Sheet at the back of this Service Procedure.
x If a sensor grade is not shown on the setup sheet physically check the sensor to determine the grade. It
is important that sensor grades be set properly.
Page 1
SR-2 SPECTRUM M/T Guarded Access Menu Overview

1 of 4 2 of 4

Defrost Setup

may appear
Page 2

3 of 4 4 of 4
Unit Model (SB)

may appear
Page 3
Procedure
Consult the Guarded Access Menu Overview on the previous page for specific menu information.
1 Turn the unit on.
2 Press the MENU key. The Operator Menu appears. Do not let the unit start. The
Guarded Access Menu can not
be entered in the unit is running.
3 Press and hold both the EXIT The Maintenance Menu appears.
and unlabelled key for 5
seconds.
4 Press the NEXT key as required

to display the Software Revision
Menu. Then press the SELECT
key to enter the Software
Revision menu.
5 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Record the software revisions on

keys to scroll through the HMI the Setup Sheet.
Control Panel and Base
Controller software revisions.
6 When the software revisions

have been recorded press the
EXIT key to return to the
Maintenance Menu.
Page 4

7 Press the NEXT key as required The real time clock is located in
to display the Set Time and Date the HMI Control Panel. The time
Menu. Then press the SELECT is supplied to the microprocessor
key to enter the Set Time and each time the unit is turned on.
Date Menu. If the microprocessor is changed
the clock setting will be supplied
to the microprocessor when the
unit is turned on. If the HMI
Control Panel is changed the
time and date must be checked
and set if necessary.
8 Check the Time to determine the Record the time zone on the Compare local time to unit time
time zone used by the customer. Setup Sheet. to determine time zone.
9 Be sure the unit is not running. If the unit is running, scroll back
and enter Interface Board Test
Mode. This will cause the unit to
shut down. Scroll back to the
Set Time and Date Menu and
proceed with the next step.
10 Press and hold both the EXIT The Guarded Access Menu If a Security Code is requested
and unlabelled key for 5 appears. then enter the Security Code or
seconds. [4444] to enter the Guarded
Access Menu.
11 The Programmable Features The Programmable Features

Menu will appear. Then press Menu appears.
the SELECT key to enter the
Programmable Features Menu.
Page 5

12 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Record all Programmable
keys to scroll through all settings Features settings on the Setup
in the Programmable Features Sheet.
Menu.
13 When all Programmable

Features settings have been
recorded press the EXIT key to
return to the Guarded Access
Menu.
14 Press the NEXT key to display The Main Menu Configuration

the Main Menu Configuration Menu appears.
key to enter the Main Menu
Configuration Menu.
15 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Record all Main Menu

keys to scroll through all settings Configuration settings on the
in the Main Menu Configuration Setup Sheet.
Menu.
16 When all Main Menu

Configuration settings have been
Menu.
Page 6

17 Press the NEXT key to display The Hourmeter Setup Menu
the Hourmeter Setup Menu. appears.
18 When the Hourmeter Menu is The Program Hourmeter Menu

shown press the SELECT key to appears.
access the Program Hourmeter
Menu.
19 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Record all Program Hourmeter

keys to scroll through all settings on the Setup Sheet.
Program Hourmeter settings.
20 When all Program Hourmeter The Hourmeter Setup Menu

settings have been recorded appears.
press the EXIT key to return to
the Hourmeter Setup Menu.
21 When the Hourmeter Setup

Menu is shown press the NEXT
key to chose the Viewable
Hourmeter Setup Menu.
22 Press the SELECT key to access The Viewable Hourmeter Setup

the Viewable Hourmeter Setup Menu appears.
Menu.
23 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Record all Viewable Hourmeter

keys to scroll through all Setup settings on the Setup
Viewable Hourmeter Setup Sheet.
settings.
Page 7

24 When all Viewable Hourmeter The Hourmeter Setup Menu
Setup settings have been appears.
return to the Hourmeter Setup
Menu.
25 Press the EXIT key again to The Guarded Access Menu

return to the Guarded Access appears.
Menu.
26 Press the NEXT key as required The Sensor Calibration Menu

to display the Sensor Calibration appears.
key to enter the Sensor
Calibration Menu.
27 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Record the grade of each sensor
keys to scroll through all on the Setup Sheet.
sensors.
28 When all Sensor Calibration The Guarded Access Menu

Setup settings have been appears.
recorded press the EXIT key
again to return to the Guarded
Access Menu.
Page 8

29 When the Guarded Access Menu The Cycle Sentry Setup Menu
is shown press the NEXT key to will appear.
access the Cycle Sentry Setup
Menu. Then press the Select key
to enter the Cycle Sentry Setup
Menu.
30 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Record the setting of each Cycle
keys to scroll through the Cycle Sentry feature on the Setup
Sentry settings. Sheet.
31 When all Cycle Sentry settings

Guarded Access Menu.
32 When the Guarded Access Menu The Defrost Setup Menu will
is shown press the NEXT key to appear.
access the Defrost Setup Menu.
Then press the Select key to
enter the Defrost Setup Menu.
33 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Record the setting of each

keys to scroll through the Defrost Defrost feature on the Setup
settings. Sheet.
34 When all Defrost settings have

been recorded press the EXIT
key to return to the Guarded
Access Menu.
Page 9

35 When the Guarded Access Menu The Language Setup Menu will
is shown press the NEXT key to appear.
access the Language Setup
Menu. Then press the Select
key to enter the Language Setup
Menu.
36 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Record the setting of each

keys to scroll through the Language feature on the Setup
Language settings. Sheet.
37 When all Language settings

38 Press the NEXT key again to The OptiSet features will be

access the OptiSet Setup Menu. retrieved later using a separate
OptiSet Procedure. See Service
Procedure P41SA47A
Programming OptiSet Features.
39 Press the NEXT key again to The Sensor Configuration Setup
access the Sensor Configuration Menu will appear.
Setup Menu. Then press the
Select key to enter the Sensor
Configuration Setup Menu.
Page 10

40 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Record the setting of each The Sensor Configuration menu
keys to scroll through the Sensor Sensor Configuration feature on is used to set up the
Configuration settings. the Setup Sheet. CargoWatch data logger.
41 When all Sensor Configuration

settings have been recorded
the Guarded Access Menu.
42 Press the NEXT key again to The Unit Configuration Setup

access the Unit Configuration Menu will appear.
Setup Menu. Then press the
Select key to enter the Unit
Configuration Setup Menu.
43 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Record the setting of each Unit
keys to scroll through the Unit Configuration feature on the
Configuration settings. Setup Sheet.
44 When all Unit Configuration

settings have been recorded
the Guarded Access Menu.
45 Press the EXIT key again to

return to the Standard Display.
Page 11

46 Connect a serial cable from the
unit Service Watch connector to
a pc equipped with Wintrac.
47 Download the ServiceWatch and This information may be needed

CargoWatch data loggers. for diagnostics.
48 Record the OptiSet settings

using Service Procedure
P41SA47A Programming
OptiSet Features.
Page 12
Setup Sheet
SOFTWARE REVISION
Function Default Setting Recorded Setting

HMI Control Panel Software Revision 65xx, 66xx or 67xx
Microprocessor Software Revision C0xx
SET DATE AND TIME
Compare local time to unit time to determine time zone. The real time clock is located in the HMI Control Panel.
The time is supplied to the microprocessor each time the unit is turned on. If the microprocessor is changed the
clock setting will be supplied to the microprocessor when the unit is turned on. If the HMI Control Panel is
changed the time and date must be checked and set if necessary.
Time Zone As specified by
customer
SECURITY CODE

Security Code as specified by customer None
If an unknown security code is set use 4444 to gain access.
Page 13
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES

Temperature Units FAHRENHEIT
Pressure Units PSI
Restart Unit After Shutdown ENABLED
Setpoint High Limit Zone 1 80°F
Setpoint Low Limit Zone 1 -20°F
Running Fans in Null DISABLED
Fresh | Frozen Range 15°F
Door Opened ENABLED
Door Open Forces LOG ONLY
Door Open Timeout (HRS:MIN) OFF
Sleep Mode After Pretrip DISABLED
Rail Option DISABLED
Rail Alternate (If Rail Option = ENABLED) DISABLED
Limited Alarm Restarts DISABLED
Remote Device DISABLED
COM 1 Default Baud Rate 1200
Number of Limited Setpoints 0
Limited Setpoint #1 -13°F
Limited Setpoint #2 32°F
Demand Defrost on Temp Rises DISABLED
Extended ServiceWatch Logging DISABLED
Page 14
MAIN MENU CONFIGURATION

Add Keypad Lockout to Mode Menu DISABLED
Add Sleep to Mode Menu DISABLED
Show SZC on Mode Menu DISABLED
HOURMETER SETUP– PROGRAM HOURMETER

Total Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours OFF
Total Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours OFF
Controller Power On Hours OFF
Pretrip Reminder Hours OFF
Engine Run Time Reminder # 1 OFF
Engine Run Time Reminder # 2 OFF
Electric Run Time Reminder # 1 OFF
Electric Run Time Reminder # 2 100 HOURS
Page 15
HOURMETER SETUP– VIEWABLE HOURMETER SETUP

Total Hours DISABLED
Total Run Time Hours ENABLED
Engine Hours ENABLED
Electric Run Hours ENABLED
Zone 1 Run Time Hours DISABLED
Total Run Time Reminder # 1 Viewing DISABLED
Total Run Time Reminder # 2 Viewing DISABLED
Controller Power On Hours DISABLED
Pretrip Reminder Hours DISABLED
Engine Run Time Reminder # 1 Viewing DISABLED
Engine Run Time Reminder # 2 Viewing DISABLED
Electric Run Time Reminder # 1 Viewing DISABLED
Electric Run Time Reminder # 2 Viewing DISABLED
SENSOR CALIBRATION

Zone 1 Return Air Sensor Grade 5H
Zone 1 Discharge Air Sensor Grade 5H
Spare 1 Sensor Grade 5H
Page 16
CYCLE SENTRY SETUP

Cycle Sentry Amps Level 5 AMPS
Battery Sentry Voltage Level 12.2 VOLTS
DEFROST SETUP

Defrost Interval In Range with Fresh Setpoint 6 HOURS
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Fresh Setpoint 4 HOURS
Defrost Interval In Range with Frozen Setpoint 6 HOURS
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Frozen Setpoint 4 HOURS
Maximum Defrost Duration 45 MINUTES
LANGUAGE SETUP (First language = 65xx, second language 66xx, third language = 67xx)

Default Language ENGLISH
Enable Language English ENABLED
Enable Language Spanish or Russian or Japanese DISABLED
Enable Language French or Polish DISABLED
Enable Language German or Hungarian DISABLED
Enable Language Italian or Romanian DISABLED
Enable Language Dutch or Bulgarian DISABLED
Enable Language Portuguese or Czech DISABLED
Enable Language Greek or Danish DISABLED
Enable Language Turkish or Swedish DISABLED
Enable Language Arabic of Norwegian DISABLED
Enable Language Hebrew or Finnish DISABLED
ACCESS CODE SETUP

Enter Access Code NO CODE
Page 17
OPTISET
See Service Procedure P41SA47A Programming OptiSet Features
SENSOR CONFIGURATION (CargoWatch)
Log Interval is set for all sensors.

Log Interval 5 minutes
Up to 6 sensors may be configured

Default 1 2 3 4 5 6
Function
Sensor Logging On
Sensor Name Log Sensor X
Out of Range Checking OFF
Low Limit -6°
High Limit 6°
Italian Logging OFF (S1 only)
Sensor Averaging OFF
Up to 3 digital inputs may be configured

Default 1 2 3
Function
Door Open Logging 1On, 2-3 Off
Digital Input #X Name Digital Input #X
Page 18
UNIT CONFIGURATION

Engine Type Is YANMAR 2.1
Compressor Type Is RECIP
Dual Evaporator Configuration NO
How Many Zones in This Unit 2 or 3
Zone 2 Evap Fans Configuration 3
Zone 3 Evap Fans Configuration 3
Electric Standby Equipped NO YES
Electric Heat Option NO
Diesel to Electric Auto Switch Enabled NO
Electric to Diesel Auto Switch Enabled NO
Unit Model SB
Defrost Motor Equipped NO
Fuel Sensor Type NONE
Rear Remote Control NONE
Rear Remote Control Action STAND BY
Pretrip/Sleep Switch Options DISABLE
Page 19
Page 20
Replacement of the Base Controller or Interface Board
Where Used
Purpose
To replace the base controller or interface board
Materials Required
x Cable ties
Operation
The base controller and interface board are removed from the control box as an assembly. They are separated
on the bench and the defective component is replaced.
Important Notes
x Be sure the harnesses are reconnected properly and do not place excessive strain on the connectors.
Secure the harnesses with cable ties as required.
Page 1
1 If possible,log existing ba se This information will be used
controller setting using Service to set up the replacement
Procedure A02A. This step is base controller.
not necessary if replacing the
interface board.
2 Turn the unit off.
3 Disconnect standby power,if

connected.
4 Disconnect the unit battery.
5 Disconnect all harness

connectors from the base
controller and interface board
assembly.
6 Remove the screws securing the

base controller to the control box
and remove the base controller
and interface board assembly
from the control box.
7 Place the base controller and

interface board assembly on a
clean bench for further
disassembly.
Page 2

8 To remove the interface board Exercise care to prevent
from the base controller,re move bending or damaging the pins
the interface board screws and on the J1 and J2 base
carefully pull the interface board controller/interface board 24
straight back from the base pin connectors
controller.
9 Reassembly the components in If the base controller is

the reverse order,usin g the replaced,rem ove the
replacement part. Be sure to cardboard protectors from J1
use the correct hardware, as and J2 on the new base
some screw lengths may vary. controller and place on the
Take care not to over-tighten the old base controller to prevent
screws. pin damage.
10 Install the base controller and

interface board assembly in the
control box.
11 Reconnect all harness Apply Super Lube as needed.

connectors to the base controller Be sure all connectors are
and interface board assembly. securely mated and secure
the harnesses with cable ties
as required.
12 Reconnect the unit battery.
13 Reconnect the standby power if

needed.
Page 3

14 Turn the unit on. The real time clock settings
will be loaded from the HMI
Control Panel when the unit is
turned on.
15 Clear any alarm codes as shown
in Section 4.
16 Set up all programmable This step is required only if

features using Service the base controller was
Procedure A04A. replaced.
17 Run a Pretrip Test as shown in

Section 4 to verify proper unit
operation.
Page 4
Replacement of the HMI Control Panel
Where Used
Purpose
To replace the HMI Control Panel
Materials Required
x Cable ties
Operation
The HMI Control Panel is removed from the control box as an assembly.
Important Notes
Page 1


connected.
3 Disconnect the unit battery.
4 Disconnect the 35 pin harness

connector from the HMI Control
Panel.
5 Remove the four screws

securing the HMI Control Panel
to the control box and remove
the HMI Control Panel from the
control box.
6 Install the new HMI Control Multi Temp SR-2 must have a
Panel in the control box. HMI-2 Control Panel with a
serial number that ends in
“0T2 ”.
7 Re-connect the 35 pin harness Be sure all connectors are
connector to the HMI Control securely mated and secure
Panel. Apply Super Lube as the harnesses with cable ties
required as required.
Page 2


needed.
10 Turn the unit on. The programmable feature

settings will be loaded from
the microprocessor when the
unit is turned on.
in Section 4.
12 Check the setting of the real time The clock may also be set by
clock as shown in Section 4 and connecting to the
correct if necessary. CargoWatch Datalogger with
Wintrac 4.6
13 Run a Full Pretrip Test as shown
in Section 4 to verify proper unit
operation.
Page 3

Page 4

Section 6 – SR-2 M/T Service Procedure A03C
Replacement of the HMI Control Panel
Where Used
All SR-2 Spectrum Multi-Temp units
Purpose
To replace the SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Expansion Module
Materials Required
x Cable ties
Operation
The expansion module is removed from the control box as an assembly. It has no user repairable parts.
Important Notes
Page 1


connected.
3 Disconnect the unit battery. The battery must be

disconnected since the 2A
wires on the expansion
module are energized any
time the battery is connected.
4 Disconnect the 35 pin expansion

module connector,the 6 pi n
evaporator fan connector and the
8 pin CAN connector.
5 Remove the hardware securing

the expansion module to the
control box and remove the
expansion module.
6 Disconnect the 2A wires from Be sure the unit battery is

one stud at a time on the old disconnected.
expansion module and transfer
them to the new expansion
module.
Page 2


7 Install the new expansion
module in the control box using
the existing hardware.
8 Re-connect the 35 pin expansion

module connector,the 6 pi n
evaporator fan connector and the
8 pin CAN connector. Apply
Super Lube as required.
9 Be sure all connectors are

securely mated and secure the
harnesses with cable ties as
required.

needed.
12 Turn the unit on.

in Section 4.
14 Run a Full Pretrip Test as shown

in Section 4 to verify proper unit
operation.
Page 3

Page 4

Programmable Feature Setup
Where Used
Purpose
To program sensor grades and programmable features to customer specifications
Materials Req
uired
x A completed copy of the Setup Sheet at the back of Service Procedure A02A Recording Existing
Programmable Feature Settings.
Operation
x The settings of the programmable features must be programmed after replacing a base controller or
performing a Cold Start.
x The Programming Menu Overview on the next page may prove helpful.
x See Section 3 for a complete description of programmable features.
x The default settings are shown on the Setup Sheet at the back of Service Procedure A02A Recording
Existing Base controller Settings.
x If a sensor grade is not shown on the setup sheet visually check the sensor to determine the grade. It is
very important that sensor grades be set properly.
Page 1
Programming Menu Overview

1 of 4 2 of 4

Defrost Setup
~C ontinued Nex
t Page ~

may appear
Page 2

3 of 4 4 of 4
HMI Rev 65xx HMI Rev 66xx HMI Rev 67x
x Log Sensor 1
Unit Model (SB)

may appear
Page 3
Procedure
Consult the Programming Menu Overview on the previous page for specific menu information.
1 Turn the unit on.
2 Press the MENU key. The Operator Menu appears.
seconds.

to display the Software Revision
Menu.
5 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Verify the Software revisions are
keys to scroll through the HMI as desired.
Control Panel and Base
Controller software revisions.
6 When the software revisions

Maintenance Menu.

to display the Set Time and Date
Menu.
Page 4

8 Set the time and date to that The real time clock is located in
shown on the Setup Sheet. the HMI Control Panel. The
time is supplied to the base
controller each time the unit is
turned on. If the base controller
is changed the clock setting will
be supplied to the base
controller when the unit is
turned on. If the HMI Control
Panel is changed the time and
date must be checked and set if
necessary.
and unlabelled key for 5 appears. enter the Security Code or
Access Menu.

to display the Programmable
Features Menu.
11 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Set all Programmable Features

keys to scroll through all to those shown on the Setup
features in the Programmable Sheet.
Features Menu.
12 When all Programmable The Guarded Access Menu

Features have been set press appears.
the EXIT key to return to the
Guarded Access Menu
Page 5

to display the Main Menu
Configuration Menu.
14 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Set all Programmable Features

keys to scroll through all features to those shown on the Setup
in the Main Menu Configuration Sheet.
Menu.
15 When all Main Menu The Guarded Access Menu

Configuration features have appears.
been set press the EXIT key to
Menu.

17 When the Hourmeter Menu is The Program Hourmeter Menu

shown press the SELECT key to appears.
access the Program Hourmeter
Menu.
18 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Set all Program Hourmeter

keys to scroll through all settings to those shown on the
Program Hourmeter settings. Setup Sheet.
19 When all Program Hourmeter The Hourmeter Setup Menu

settings have been set press the appears.
Page 6

20 When the Hourmeter Setup
Menu is shown press the NEXT
key to chose the Viewable
Hourmeters Setup Menu.
21 Press the SELECT key to access The Viewable Hourmeter Setup

the Viewable Hourmeter Setup Menu appears.
Menu.
22 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Set all Viewable Hourmeter

keys to scroll through all settings to those shown on the
Viewable Hourmeter settings. Setup Sheet.
23 When all Viewable Hourmeter The Hourmeter Setup Menu

settings have been set press the appears.
24 Press the EXIT key again to The Guarded Access Menu

return to the Guarded Access appears.
Menu.

Menu.
26 When the Sensor Calibration Zone 1 Return Air Sensor Grade

Menu is shown press the and the current grade appear.
SELECT key to access the Set the grade to that shown on
Sensor Calibration Menu. the Setup Sheet.
Page 7

27 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Set the grade of each sensor to
keys to scroll through all sensor the grade shown on the Setup
grade settings. Sheet.
28 Press the EXIT key to return to The Guarded Access Menu

the Guarded Access Menu. appears.
29 When the Guarded Access Menu

is shown press the NEXT key to
Menu.
30 When the Cycle Sentry Menu is The Cycle Sentry Setup Menu
shown press the Select key to will appear.
Menu.
31 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Set each Cycle Sentry setting to
keys to scroll through the Cycle that shown on the Setup Sheet.
Sentry settings.
32 When all Cycle Sentry settings

have been set press the EXIT
Access Menu.

access the Defrost Setup Menu.
Page 8

34 When the Defrost Menu is shown The Defrost Setup Menu will
press the Select key to access appear.
the Defrost Setup Menu.
35 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Set each Defrost setting to that
keys to scroll through the Defrost shown on the Setup Sheet.
features.
36 When all Defrost settings have

been set press the EXIT key to
Menu.

Menu.
38 When the Language Setup Menu The Language Setup Menu will
is shown press the Select key to appear.
Menu.
39 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Set each Language setting to

keys to scroll through the that shown on the Setup Sheet.
Language settings.
40 When all Language settings

have been set press the EXIT
Access Menu.
Page 9

41 Press the NEXT key again to The OptiSet features will be
access the OptiSet Menu. retrieved later using a separate
OptiSet Procedure. See Service
Procedure P41SA47A
42 Press the NEXT key again to
access the Sensor Configuration
Menu.
43 When the Sensor Configuration The Sensor Configuration Menu The Sensor Configuration menu
Menu is shown press the Select will appear. is used to set up the Cargo
key to access the Sensor Watch data logger.
Configuration Menu.
44 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Set each Sensor Configuration

keys to scroll through the Sensor setting to that shown on the
45 When all Sensor Configuration

settings have been set press the
46 Press the NEXT key again to

access the Unit Configuration
Menu.
47 When the Unit Configuration The Unit Configuration Menu will

Menu is shown press the Select appear.
key to access the Unit
Configuration Menu.
Page 10

48 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Set each Unit Configuration
keys to scroll through the Unit setting to that shown on the
49 When all Unit Configuration

settings have been set press the
50 Press the EXIT key again to

return to the Standard Display.
51 Set up OptiSet settings using

Service Procedure P41SA47A

operation.
Page 11
Page 12
Section 6 – SR-2 and SR-2 M/T Service Procedure A07
A
Performing a Cold Start
Where Used
Purpose
To perform a Cold Start
Materials Req
uired
x None
Operation
This procedure will perform a Cold Start on the base controller. All programmable features are reset except
hourmeters and Service Watch data logger. The Cold Start can be performed by means of an Interface Board
jumper or by using Wintrac. Both methods are shown here.
IMPORTANT: All programmable features such as sensor calibration, defrost settings and feature settings will be
returned to the standard (default) settings. They must be set up using Service Procedures A04A after performing
a Cold Start or the unit may not operate to the customer’s requirements.
Page 1
A
Diagnostic Procedure – Cold Start Using the Interface Board J

umper
1 Log existing base controller This information will be used to If the information cannot be
settings using Service Procedure set up the base controller after retrieved the customer
A02A. performing the Cold Start. specified settings must be
used.
2 Turn off the Base controller

On/Off switch.
3 Locate the J101 jumper on the It is located in the upper center See the illustration on the
relay board. of the interface board. next page.
4 Remove the J101 jumper from

the center pin and upper pin and
place it over the center pin and
lower pin.
5 Turn on the Base controller This performs the Cold Start.

On/Off switch.
6 Turn the unit on and check for This confirms the Cold Start
Alarm Code 74 Controller Reset was successful.
to Defaults.
7 Turn off the Base controller

On/Off switch.
Page 2
A
J4 F2
J14 J13 J12
F13
REMOTE LIGHT
15A
K5 J8
2A
ON/OFF
SWITCH
F10
K4 F9 F12 F8 2A
3A 5A 5A
10A
LED4 F7 LED23 K9
J27 J6
ELECTRIC
LED26
K3
RS232-1 RS232-2
J9 J10
15A
F6
LED5
LED6
J102 J103 F11
J101 K1 F4
J15
10A
29 7D F15
GM1
8
DF
F12
LED21
GM2
8S
K8
LED25 LED17
8D 8DP
LED24 LED18
LED22
LED19
LED20
K6 K7
J23
40A LED8 CH
J24 F3 LED9
2 LED10
LED11
LED3
F20 2A F25
60A
7.5A
LED30
F5
LED27
J25 2A H LED29
K2
LED28
J26
J3
1
J7
Page 3
A

8 Remove the J101 jumper from
the center pin and upper pin and
place it over the center pin and
lower pin.
9 Turn the unit on. The following Alarm Code 74 indicates the The sensor codes will not
Alarm Codes will be present: Cold Start was successful. The clear until the sensor grades
Alarm Code 74 other alarm codes exist because have been set properly set.
Alarm Code 92 the sensor grades have been set The sensor codes and code
All Graded Sensor Alarm to 5H. Alarm Code 92 will clear 74 may be cleared in the
Codes when the sensor grades are Alarms Menu.
properly set.
10 Set up all programmable NOTE: All programmable base

features using Service controller functions except the
Procedure A04A. hourmeters will be returned to
the standard (default) settings.
They must be set up using
Service Procedure A04A after

operation.
Page 4
A
Diagnostic Procedure – Cold Start Using Wintrac

1 Log existing base controller This information will be used to If the information cannot be
settings using Service Procedure set up the base controller after retrieved the customer
A02A. performing the Cold Start. specified settings must be
used.
2 Connect the download cable to

the ServiceWatch port on the
unit.
3 Turn unit on.
4 Start Wintrac 4.6. The Wintrac Display will appear.
5 From the Wintrac display press The Tool Menu appears in the
CTRL-SHIFT-T to enable the Wintrac menu bar.
Wintrac Tool Menu
6 Select Tools – Restart Device – The display shown below will

Cold Restart appear.
7 Select Yes to continue. The display shown below will

appear.
Page 5
A
8 Select Yes to continue. The cold start takes

approximately 15 seconds.
9 Turn the unit on. The following Alarm Code 74 indicates the The sensor codes will not
Alarm Codes will be present: Cold Start was successful. The clear until the sensor grades
Alarm Code 74 other alarm codes exist because have been properly set. The
Alarm Code 92 the sensor grades have been set sensor codes and code 74
All Graded Sensor Alarm to 5H. Alarm Code 92 will clear may be cleared in the Alarms
Codes when the sensor grades are Menu.
properly set.
10 Set up all programmable NOTE: All programmable base

features using Service controller functions except the
Procedure A04A. hourmeters will be returned to
the standard (default) settings.
They must be set up using
Service Procedure A04A after

operation.
Page 6
Temperature Sensor Grade Calibration
Where Used
Purpose
To calibrate the sensor grades of replacement Return Air Sensors and Discharge Air Sensors
Materials Req
uired
x None
Operation
The control and display return air temperature sensors and the control and display discharge air temperature
sensors are graded sensors. Any time these sensors are replaced the grade of the new sensor must be correctly
entered to insure optimum performance of the unit. The sensor grade is stamped on the barrel of each
replacement sensor. Failure to properly calibrate sensors may result in nuisance alarm codes.
Important Notes
x Always record the sensor grades of any replacement return or discharge temperature sensors. The
grade is required to complete the sensor calibration procedure.
x If a sensor grade is set 5H then Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grades Not Set will occur.
Page 1
1 Verify the sensor grades by
physically checking the sensor.
Record the grades of the Control
and Display Return Air and/or
Discharge Air sensors.
2 Turn the unit on.
3 Press the MENU key. The Main Menu appears.
seconds.
5 Press the NEXT key as required The Set Time and Date Menu
to display the Set Time and Date appears.
Menu.
6 Press and hold both the EXIT The Guarded Access Menu
and unlabelled key for 5 appears.
seconds.

Menu.
8 When the Sensor Calibration The first graded sensor and the
Menu is shown press the current grade appear.
SELECT key to access the
Sensor Calibration Menu.
Page 2

9 If necessary, use the NEXT These keys scroll thru all graded Be sure the correct sensor is
and/or BACK keys to select the sensors installed on the unit. selected.
sensor to be calibrated.
10 When the sensor to be calibrated The Sensor Change menu for

is shown on the display, press the selected sensor will appear.
the SELECT key.
11 Use the “+” and “-“ keys to

change the sensor grade to
match the grade stamped on the
sensor.
12 When the correct grade is shown

press the YES key to confirm the
choice.
13 If necessary, repeat steps 9 – 12

to change any other sensor
grades that are not correct.
14 Press Exit to leave the Sensor

Calibration Menu.
15 If graded sensor alarms exist The Alarms Menu will appear.

(Alarm Codes 03 and/or 04), use
the BACK key to return to the
Alarms Menu in Guarded
Access.
Page 3

16 Press the SELECT key to enter
the Alarms Menu.
17 Press the CLEAR key to clear

the sensor alarms.
18 When finished, press the EXIT

key several times or turn the unit
off to exit the Sensor Calibration
Menu.
Page 4
Welding on Units Eq
uipped with SR-2 Microprocessor s
Where Used
Purpose
To prevent damage to the microprocessor during welding operations
Materials Req
uired
x None
Operation
Electric welding generates extremely high amperage currents that can damage electrical and electronic
components. In order to minimize the possibility of damage the following procedures must be followed.
Page 1
Before Welding
1. Turn the unit off.
2. Disconnect standby power, if

connected.
3. Remove the both battery cables.
4. Connect the welder ground cable

as close as possible to the area
where the welding is to be
performed. Move the welder
ground cable as required.
After Welding
1. Reconnect the battery cable.
2. Reconnect the standby power if

needed.
3. Perform a Pretrip Test as shown

in Section 4 to confirm operation.
Page 2
A
Setting Unit Running Time Hourmeters
Where Used
Purpose
This procedure should be followed to set the fixed running time hourmeters Total Hours, Total Run Time Hours,
Engine Hours, Electric Run Time Hours and Zone Run Hours after replacing a microprocessor with a new
replacement microprocessor. If all hourmeters have less than 100 hours accumulated, time can be added to
them as shown in this procedure. If hourmeter time exceeds 100 hours, the hourmeter time can no longer be
changed.
Materials Req
uired
x None
IMPORTANT: Time can only be added if all hourmeters have less than 100 hours accumulated. If hourmeter
time exceeds 100 hours, the hourmeter time can no longer be changed.
IMPORTANT: If time in excess of 100 hours has been entered the hourmeters can no longer be changed.
Exercise care when changing these hourmeter settings. Be sure the correct number of hours are selected for
each hourmeter.
IMPORTANT: Do not allow the 3 minute Guarded Access keypad timeout to occur during this procedure. If the
keypad times out before all desired changes are made and an hourmeter exceeds 100 hours, the hourmeters can
no longer be changed.
IMPORTANT: Do not exit hourmeter setup until all hourmeters have been set as required. Once the hourmeter
setup has been exited this menu is locked out and the hourmeters can no longer be changed.
Page 1
A
Procedure
1 Determine the number of hours
to be set on each hourmeter. If
the unit is a Model 50 unit, be
sure the total of Engine Hours
and Electric Run Time Hours is
equal to the number of hours to
be set as Total Run Time Hours.
2 Turn the unit on.
3 Press the MENU key. The Main Menu appears. Press the MENU key.
seconds.

to display the Set Time and Date
Menu.
6 Press and hold both the EXIT The Guarded Access Menu
and unlabelled key for 5 appears.
seconds. If a Security Code is
requested enter the Security
Code or [4444] to enter the
Page 2
A

8 Press the SELECT key to

choose the Hourmeter Setup
Menu.
9 Press the SELECT key again to

choose the Program Hourmeter
Menu.
10 Press the NEXT key to scroll to

the last item in the Program
Hourmeter Menu. The NEXT
key will disappear.
11 Press and hold both the EXIT This will add the non- IMPORTANT: Do not exit the
and unlabelled key for 5 programmable hourmeters to the hourmeter setup or allow the
seconds. menu only if these hourmeters Guarded Access keypad
are less than 100 hours. timeout to occur during this
procedure. If the keypad
times out and an hourmeter
exceeds 100 hours, the
hourmeters will be locked and
can no longer be changed.
Page 3
A

12 Use the NEXT and/or BACK
keys to show the desired
hourmeter. When the desired
hourmeter is shown press the
SELECT key to chose it.
13 Change the value of the

hourmeter by pressing the + or -
keys.
14 When the correct number of IMPORTANT: If time in

hours is shown press the YES excess of 100 hours has
key to accept the change. been entered the hourmeters
Exercise care when changing
hourmeter settings.
15 Repeat Steps 12-14 as

necessary to change the
remaining hourmeters.
16 When all hourmeters are set IMPORTANT: If time in

press the EXIT key to return to excess of 100 hours has
the Program Hourmeter menu. been entered the hourmeters
Be sure all settings are
correct before leaving this
menu.
Page 4
Flash Loading SR-2 Base Controller Software
Where Used
Purpose
To update software for the Thermo King SR-2 base controller using a computer and Wintrac 4.6 or later software
Materials Req
uired
The following materials are required to perform a flash load.
x Thermo King Wintrac 4.6 or later software loaded on a PC computer.
x Interconnect Cable, Thermo King Service Part Number TK 44-9417 (20 foot, 6 meter) or TK 44-9418 (50 foot,
15 meter).
x Adapter Cable, Thermo King Service Part Number TK 204-918, 15 Pin “D” connector to 5 pin Deutsch.
x The correct version Flash Load file.
Obtaining Flash Load Files and Preparing Them for Use

A file containing the new software is required in order to perform a flash load. These files are supplied in the
following format:
Early SR-2/A and SR-2/B Single Temp

Microcode Update B0xx for SR2 Microprocessor.exe (where xx = the software revision)
SR-2/C Multi-Temp (SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp applications must use revision C0x
xsoft ware)
Microcode Update C0xx for SR2 Microprocessor.exe (where xx = the software revision)
IMPORTANT: There are also flash load files for the SR2 HMI Control Panel. Be sure to select the file for SR2
Microprocessor.
Page 1
Software flash load files can be obtained in a number of different ways.

x The Thermo King web site www.thermoking.com/.
x An attachment to a Lotus Notes message.
x An attachment to an e-mail message.
Create a sub-directory and detach or download the necessary file or files. The files must then be prepared for
use.
Preparing flash load files for use by Wintrac

Flash load files must be prepared for use before the Wintrac flash load process can be started. To prepare the
files proceed as follows:
1. Using Windows Explorer locate the sub-directory containing the files. The files will be in the format:
Early SR-2/A and SR-2/B Single Temp

Microcode Update B0xx for SR2 Microprocessor.exe (where xx = the software revision)
SR-2/C Multi-Temp (SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp applications must use revision C0x
xsoft ware)
Microcode Update C0xx for SR2 Microprocessor.exe (where xx = the software revision)
2. Double click the desired file. The file will be uncompressed and installed in the sub-directory
Wintrac\Flashload\SR2. If this directory does not exist it will be created automatically. There will be two files
in this sub-directory. However, only one file will appear when the directory is displayed by Wintrac.
The software files are now ready for flash loading using Wintrac.
Page 2
Connecting the Cables

The same cables used for downloading are required to perform a flash load. Typically two cables are used to
connect the computer to the base controller as shown below.
Data Cable The data cable has a 9 pin “D” connector installed on one end to attach to the computer and a 15 pin
“D” connector on the other end. The cable is available as either a 20 foot or 50 foot cable as shown below.
Adapter Cable An adapter cable is required to complete the connection to the base controller or data logger.
This cable has a 15 pin “D” connector on one end and a 5 pin Deutsch connector on the other end. The 15 pin
“D” connector is attached to the 15 pin “D” connector on the data cable and the 5 pin Deutsch connector is
attached to the Service Watch connector above the HMI Control Panel. Do not attach the cable to the Cargo
Watch connector.
Flash Load Details

Flashload status is reported on the PC, not on the HMI Control Panel. The HMI Control Panel will display the
message COMMUNICATION FAILURE – LOST CONTROLLER CONNECT. This is normal.
The unit must remain on and connections must not be disturbed during the flash load process.
If communications are lost, Wintrac will not be able to find the device.
If the Status LED is flashing rapidly (several times per second), the base controller is stuck in a flash load.
If the Status LED is flashing once per second the base controller is operating normally.
Page 3
Flash Load Procedure

The following procedure should be followed to flash load software using a direct connection to the base controller.
NOTE: SR-2 Base Controllers
retain all the programmed
features when being flash
loaded. It is not necessary to
reprogram the SR-2 Base
Controller after a flash load.
1 Obtain and prepare the flash
load files as described above.
2 Connect the data cables from the Be sure the cable is

PC to the Service Watch connected to the Service
connector as described above. Watch connector.
3 Connect a power source to the Do not rely on a laptop

PC computer. battery as low power may
cause communications to
be lost and the flash load to
fail.
4 Start Wintrac 4.6 or later as

shown in the Wintrac manual.
5 Turn the unit on. The unit can be The unit must remain on
running. It will shut down and connections must not
automatically during the flash be disturbed during the
load process. flash load process.
Page 4

6 Allow the unit to
power up and the
Standard Display to
appear before starting
a flash load. Failure to
do so may result in
unreliable results.
7 If the Wintrac menu bar The TOOLS menu will

does not show TOOLS, appear in the Wintrac
press and hold the menu bar.
computers “Ctrl” and
“Shift” keys and then
press the “T” key.
8 Left click “Tools”. The TOOLS menu will

appear.
9 From the Tools menu A download data warning

left click “Flash Load”. menu appears.
10 Left click “Yes” to A directory containing

continue. the flash load files
appears.
Page 5

11 Double click the flash
load directory and
locate the correct flash
load file.
12 Double click the flash Several status screens

load file. are shown briefly and
then a confirmation
message will appear.
13 If the information If the unit is running it will

shown is correct left shut down. The HMI
click “Yes” to continue. Control Panel will display
The flash load will “Communication Failure
proceed automatically. – Lost Controller
Connect”. This is
normal. The flash load
will take several minutes.
14 The unit must remain Several status screens

on and connections are shown as the flash
must not be load proceeds.
disturbed during the
flash load process.
Page 6

15 When the flash load is
complete a message
appears confirming a
successful flash load.
16 Left click “OK” to SR-2 Base Controllers retain all the programmed
complete the flash features when being flash loaded. It is not
load. The unit will necessary to reprogram the SR-2 Base Controller
automatically restart after a flash load.
and run.
17 Clear any alarm

codes.
18 Run a Full Pretrip Test This confirms proper unit operation.

as shown in Section 4.
Page 7
Flash Load Failure During a Flash Load

When a flash load is initiated, Wintrac will perform a Full flash load. The full set of Wintrac commands is sent to
the base controller, such as seek device and read device properties. If the flash load procedure does not
complete successfully, the following message will appear.
Left click “Yes” to retry the flash load process.
The Retry flash load differs from the Full flash load as follows. Since the base controller is already in flash load
mode it does not respond to the full set of Datapac commands. Therefore, during a flash load Retry, Wintrac skips
most of the initial communications with the device and goes directly to the actual flash load routine.
Wintrac simply sends the flash load write commands. If these fail then Wintrac will generate an error. If the flash
load write succeeds then Wintrac will finish the flash load in the same way as a normal flash load.
Page 8
Flash Loading a Base controller Already in Flash Load Mode

There may be instances where the base controller is already in flash load mode, but the flash load did not
complete. If this is the case the HMI Control Panel will show “Communication Failure – Lost Controller Connect”
and the Status LED (21) will be flashing rapidly (several times per second). This procedure is usually successful
in recovering the flash load.
Make the usual connections and start a flash load as described above. The first flash load attempt will be a Full
flash load. Since the base controller is already in flash load mode, it will not respond to the first flash load
command “Searching for Device on COM 1”. If the search continues for more than 5 seconds, click Cancel.
The Retry message will appear.
Left click “Yes” to retry the flash load process.
With a Retry flash load, Wintrac skips most of the initial communications checking with the device and goes
directly to the actual flash load routine. Wintrac simply sends the flash load write commands. If these fail then
Wintrac will generate an error. If the flash load write succeeds then Wintrac will finish the flash load in the same
way as a normal flash load. The Retry flash load will usually correct the problem.
Page 9
Page 10
Flash Loading SR-2 HMI Control Panel Software
Where Used
Purpose
To change or update software for the Thermo King SR2 HMI Control Panel using a computer and Wintrac 4.6 or
later software. IMPORTANT: This flash load takes at least 10 minutes. Plan accordingly.
Materials Req
uired
The following materials are required to perform a flash load.
x Thermo King Wintrac 4.6 or later software loaded on a PC computer.
x Interconnect Cable, Thermo King Service Part Number TK 44-9417 (20 foot, 6 meter) or TK 44-9418 (50 foot,
15 meter).
x Adapter Cable, Thermo King Service Part Number TK 204-918, 15 Pin “D” connector to 5 pin Deutsch.
x The correct version Flash Load file.
Page 1
Obtaining Flash Load Files and Preparing Them for Use

A file containing the new software is required in order to perform a flash load. These files are supplied in the
following format:
Microcode Update 65xx for SR2 HMI Control Panel.exe (where xx = the software revision)
or
Microcode Update 66xx for SR2 HMI Control Panel.exe (where xx = the software revision)
The only difference between 65xx and 66xx HMI Control Panel software is language support as shown below.
65xx 66xx 67xx

English English English
Spanish Russian Japanese
French Polish
German Hungarian
Italian Romanian
Dutch Bulgarian
Portuguese Czech
Greek Danish
Turkish Swedish
Hebrew Norwegian
Arabic Finnish
IMPORTANT: There are also flash load files for the SR2 Base controller. Be sure to select the file for SR2 HMI
Control Panel.
Software flash load files can be obtained in a number of different ways.

x The Thermo King web site www.thermoking.com/.
x An attachment to a Lotus Notes message.
x An attachment to an e-mail message.
Create a sub-directory and detach or download the necessary file or files. The files must then be prepared for
use.
Page 2
Preparing flash load files for use by Wintrac

Flash load files must be prepared for use before the Wintrac flash load process can be started. To prepare the
files proceed as follows:
1. Using Windows Explorer locate the sub-directory containing the files. The files will be in the format
“Microcode Update 65xx for SR2 HMI Control Panel.exe” (where xx = the software revision)
or
or
2. Double click the desired file. The file will be uncompressed and installed in the sub-directory
Wintrac\Flashload\SR2. If this directory does not exist it will be created automatically. There will be two files
in this sub-directory.
The software files are now ready for flash loading using Wintrac.
Connecting the Cables

The same cables used for downloading are required to perform a flash load. Typically two cables are used to
connect the computer to the base controller as shown below.
Data Cable The data cable has a 9 pin “D” connector installed on one end to attach to the computer and a 15 pin
“D” connector on the other end. The cable is available as either a 20 foot or 50 foot cable as shown below.
Adapter Cable An adapter cable is required to complete the connection to the base controller or data logger.
This cable has a 15 pin “D” connector on one end and a 5 pin Deutsch connector on the other end. The 15 pin
“D” connector is attached to the 15 pin “D” connector on the data cable and the 5 pin Deutsch connector is
attached to the Cargo Watch connector above the HMI Control Panel. Do not attach the cable to the Service
Watch connector.
Page 3
Flash Load Recovery

The unit must remain on and connections must not be disturbed during the flash load process.
If the HMI is turned off during a flash load it will lock up. Power will need be to removed from the HMI before the
flash load can be completed. This can be accomplished by removing the connector at the back of the HMI or by
disconnecting the unit battery).
If the power was turned off during flash load, the next flash load attempt will generate an error, but the second
attempt will flash successfully. The failure on the first attempt is 'as designed'. On the second attempt, some of
the error checking between the HMI and Wintrac is bypassed.
Page 4
Flash Load Procedure

The following procedure should be followed to flash load software using a direct connection to the base controller.
1 Obtain and prepare the flash
load files as described above.
2 Connect the data cables from the Be sure the cable is

PC to the Cargo Watch connected to the Cargo
connector as described above. Watch connector.
3 Connect a power source to the Do not rely on a laptop

PC computer. battery as low power may
cause communications to
be lost and the flash load to
fail. See Flash Load
Recovery on the previous
page.
4 Start Wintrac 4.6 or later as

shown in the Wintrac manual.
5 Turn the unit on. The unit can be The unit must remain on
running. It will shut down and connections must not
automatically during the flash be disturbed during the
load process. flash load process.
6 Allow the unit to power up and

the Standard Display to appear
before starting a flash load.
Failure to do so may result in
unreliable results.
Page 5

7 If the Wintrac menu bar does not The TOOLS menu will appear in
show TOOLS, press and hold the Wintrac menu bar.
the computers “Ctrl” and “Shift”
keys and then press the “T” key.
8 Left click “Tools”. The TOOLS menu will appear.
9 From the Tools menu left click A download data warning menu
“Flash Load”. appears.
10 Left click “Yes” to continue. A directory containing the flash If the file is not present,
load files appears. navigate to the file using
conventional Windows
navigation methods.
11 Double click the flash load
directory and locate the correct
flash load file.
12 Double click the flash load file. A confirmation message will

appear.
13 If the information shown is If the unit is running it will shut The unit must remain on
correct left click “Yes” to down. This is normal. The flash and connections must not
continue. The flash load will load will take at least 10 be disturbed during the
proceed automatically. minutes. flash load process.
Page 6

14 When the flash load is complete
a message appears confirming a
successful flash load.
15 Left click “OK” to complete the

flash load. The unit will
automatically restart and run.
16 Clear any alarm codes.
17 Run a Pretrip Test as shown in This confirms proper unit

Section 4. operation.
Page 7
Page 8
Section 6 – SR-2 SPECTRUM Service Procedure A47
A
Programming OptiSet Features
Where Used
Purpose
To program OptiSet features
Table of Contents
Programming OptiSet Features................................................................................................................................. 1
Table of Contents................................................................................................................................................... 1
OptiSet Menu ......................................................................................................................................................... 2
OptiSet Reset......................................................................................................................................................... 2
Programming OptiSet Features ............................................................................................................................. 2
OptiSet Global Features ........................................................................................................................................ 3
OptiSet Range Limits and Range .......................................................................................................................... 3
Range Mode Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 4
OptiSet Menu Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 5
OptiSet Procedure.................................................................................................................................................. 6
Setup Sheet ............................................................................................................................................................. 11
Materials Req
uired
x Prepare a copy of the Setup Sheet at the back of this Service Procedure.
General Information
x The settings of all OptiSet programmable features must be retrieved before replacing a microprocessor or
performing a Cold Start. These settings will then need to be duplicated in the replacement
microprocessor or after the Cold Start.
x The OptiSet Menu Overview on page 5 may prove helpful.
x See Section 3 of this manual for a complete description of OptiSet programmable features.
x The default settings are shown on the Setup Sheet at the back of this Service Procedure.
Page 1
A
OptiSet Menu
The OptiSet™ Temperature Management System allows up to ten different temperature ranges to be defined and
tailored for maximum operating efficiency, as determined by customer load requirements. The term “OptiSet”
refers to both the programmable ranges and the features that can be tailored as shown below. OptiSet is
programmed using the HMI Control Panel keypad.
OptiSet Reset
OptiSet features may be reset to default settings several different ways. These should be considered when
changing OptiSet settings, to be certain that all ranges are set as desired.
x If any OptiSet features have been previously set, an OptiSet Reset is provided at the beginning of the
OptiSet menu to return all settings to the default values. If this OptiSet Reset feature is used, all OptiSet
settings are returned to factory defaults.
x If any of the four OptiSet global features (Temperature Units, Setpoint High Limit, Setpoint Low Limit, and
Fresh Frozen Range) are changed, all OptiSet settings are also returned to default settings.
x Ranges are programmed from the coldest range to the warmest range. If ranges have been programmed
and any range is subsequently changed, the range that was changed and all warmer ranges are reset to
defaults.
Programming OptiSet Features

The OptiSet features are programmed from the HMI Control Panel OptiSet Menu. The flowchart on the next page
illustrates the features and menu flow. Each feature is discussed fully in the following pages.
Feature range values are programmable when required. Only valid programmable features will be displayed as
determined by the setting of Economy Mode, Cycle Sentry Mode and Continuous Mode. If a feature is not
allowed, it will not be displayed.
Page 2
A
OptiSet Global Features
The global features listed below affect all other OptiSet ranges and settings. If any of these are changed, all
existing OptiSet programmable settings are returned to the default settings.
Note: Some of these settings are available in the HMI Programmable Features Menu. If OptiSet has been
programmed, then the Programmable Features screen will display “Programmed in OptiSet”. Programming of the
feature will not be allowed in the Programmable Features menu.
x Temperature Units for all zones
x Zone Setpoint High Limit for each zone
x Zone Setpoint Low Limit for each zone
x Limited Setpoints for all Zones
x Fresh Frozen Range for all zones
x Running Fans in Null
x Door Open Operation
OptiSet Range Limits and Range

These features allow the OptiSet ranges to be defined and selected.
Up to ten programmable ranges can be defined as follows:

x All ranges must fall between the settings of Setpoint Low Limit (Minimum of -25°F) and Setpoint High
Limit (Maximum of 90°F).
x The first range starts at the setting of Setpoint Limit Low (-25°F).
x The last range ends at the setting of Setpoint Limit High (90°F).
x The next range starts at the high temperature of the previous range plus one full degree.
x No range can include both fresh and frozen setpoints. The last frozen range ends at the setting of Fresh
Frozen Range. The first fresh range starts at the setting of Fresh Frozen Range plus one full degree.
x One frozen range and one fresh range are set from the factory or after a cold start.
The operation of each of these ranges can be individually customized for optimum performance as determined by
user requirements. Changing any range temperature limit will void all existing range settings above that range
and will reset that range and all ranges above it to the default configuration.
Page 3
A
Range Mode Settings
These features allow the desired operating modes to be established for each range. The available modes are
selected for the range being programmed. Cycle Sentry Mode and Continuous Mode are available. Either of
these modes can be turned on or off for each range, but either Cycle Sentry or Continuous must be turned on. If
more than one mode is available in a range, it can be selected using the Mode Menu or the Mode key.
The custom features for each range are determined by the modes selected for that range.
x Cycle Sentry Mode The Cycle Sentry Null Restart Temperature, Cycle Sentry Door Open Forces and
Cycle Sentry Run Fans in Null features can be customized if Cycle Sentry mode is allowed.
x Continuous Mode The Continuous Door Open Forces and Continuous Run Fans in Null features can
be customized if Continuous mode is allowed.
Page 4
A
OptiSet Menu Overview
OptiSet
(in GA Menu)
Select
Reset
(only if OptiSet
is active)
Global Settings Individual Range Settings
Number of Cycle Sentry

Temperature
Limited Range Limits Run Fans in
Units
Setpoints Null
Z
one 1 Limited Continuous
OptiSet Range
Setpoint High Setpoint #1 Door Open
0 thru 9
Limit XX Degrees Forces
Z
Cycle Sentry
Setpoint Low Setpoint #2 Door Open
On / Off
Limit XX Degrees Timeout
Z
Continuous
Setpoint High Setpoint #3 Run Fans in
On / Off
Limit XX Degrees Null
Z
one 2 Limited Cycle Sentry
Setpoint Low Setpoint #4 Null Restart
Limit XX Degrees Temperature
Z
one 3 Cycle Sentry
Fresh Frozen
Setpoint High Door Open
Range
Limit Forces
Z
one 3 Cycle Sentry
Setpoint Low Door Open
Limit Timeout
19 July 2006
Page 5
A
OptiSet Procedure
Consult the OptiSet Menu Overview on the previous page for specific menu information.
1 Turn the unit on.
2 Press the MENU key. The Alarm or Language selection Do not let the unit start. The
of the Main Menu appears. Guarded Access Menu can not
be entered in the unit is running.
seconds.
4 Press the NEXT key as required If the unit is running, scroll back
to display the Set Time and Date and enter Interface Board Test
Menu. Mode. This will cause the unit to
shut down.
and unlabelled key for 5 appears. then enter the Security Code or
Access Menu.

to choose the OptiSet Setup
Menu.
Page 6
A

7 When the OptiSet Menu is The Temperature Units display
shown press the SELECT key to will appear.
access the Menu.
8 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Set or record all OptiSet Global The OptiSet Setup Sheet is
keys to scroll through all settings Features settings using page 1 located at the back of this
in the OptiSet Global Features of the OptiSet Setup Sheet. See Service Procedure. It is used to
Menu. Use the SELECT key to the OptiSet Menu Overview on specify feature settings when
choose the feature to change or page 5 or the OptiSet Setup setting up OptiSet or to record
read. Use the - and + keys to Sheet for a list of global settings. the existing settings when
change the feature to the desired For information on setting up retrieving OptiSet feature
setting. Press the YES key to OptiSet Global Features see settings. The OptiSet default
save the feature setting or the page 3 of this Service settings are shown on this sheet.
NO key to go back to change the Procedure. Additional
setting. information is available in
Section 3 of this manual.
9 When the OptiSet Global

Feature Settings are complete
and the Range Limits Menu is
shown press the SELECT key to
access the Menu.
Page 7
A

10 Use the NEXT and/or BACK
keys to choose the desired range
and press the SELECT key.
11 The low limit of the range cannot

be changed. It is shown for
reference only. Press the NEXT
key to display the upper limit for
the range.
12 Press the SELECT key to

choose the upper limit for the
range.
13 Use the - and + keys to change

the upper limit of the range to the
desired setting. Press the YES
key to load the setting or the NO
key to go back to change the
setting.
14 Repeat Steps 10 – 13 to set up Up to 10 ranges can be set up.

or read the range limits for all
other ranges.
15 When all desired ranges have

been set up press the FINISH
key to save all the ranges.
Page 8
A

16 When the OptiSet Range Limits
Settings are complete and the
Range Select Menu is shown
press the NEXT or BACK keys to
choose Range 0 and press
SELECT to enter the range.
17 Press the YES key to confirm the

range or the NO key to go back
to choose a different range.
18 Use the NEXT and/or BACK Set or record all OptiSet Range 0
keys to scroll through all feature settings using page 2 of the
settings in the OptiSet Range 0 OptiSet Setup Sheet. For
Menu. Use the SELECT key to information on setting up OptiSet
choose the feature to change or Ranges see page 3 of this
read. Use the - and + keys to Service Procedure. Additional
change the feature to the desired information is available in
setting. Press the YES key to Section 3 of this manual.
save the feature setting or the
NO key to go back to change the
setting.
19 Repeat Steps 17 – 19 to set up

or read the range features for all
other ranges.
20 When all OptiSet features have

been set or read, press the EXIT
key to leave the OptiSet Menu.
Page 9
A
Page 10
A
OptiSet Setup Sheet – Page 1 of 2
OptiSet GLOBAL FEATURE SETTINGS

Function Default Actual or Recorded
Setting Setting
Temperature Units FAHRENHEIT
Number of Limited Setpoints 0
Limited Setpoint #1 -13°F
Fresh | Frozen Range 15°F
OptiSet RANGE SETTINGS

Range Low Limit High Limit
Range 0 -25°F
Range 1
Range 2
Range 3
Range 4
Range 5
Range 6
Range 7
Range 8
Range 9
Page 11
A
Page 12
A
OptiSet Setup Sheet – Page 2 of 2
OptiSet RANGE FEATURE SETTINGS

Function Default Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range Range
Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cycle Sentry ON
Continuous ON
Cycle Sentry Null Restart Temperature 5.0°F
Cycle Sentry Door Open Forces LOG ONLY
Cycle Sentry Run Fans in Null OFF
Continuous Door Open Forces LOG ONLY
Continuous Run Fans in Null OFF
Setup Notes:
Page 13
A
Page 14
A
Phase Detect Module Operation and Diagnostics
Where Used
All SR-2 and SR-2 Spectrum Multi-Temp units equipped with electric standby
Purpose
To understand phase detect module operation and diagnostic procedures
Description
The phase detect module is designed to monitor 3 phase voltages from 160 volts AC thru 510 volts AC.
Brown
THERMO IK NG
9131C98G06
Blue L1
L2 0202
L3
Black
Page 1
A
Operation
The brown, blue and black wires are used to sample the power at L1, L2 and L3 respectively. Operating power
from 12 to 24 VDC is supplied to the module via the #8 wire and CH wire.
When the voltage sensed rises above 180 volts AC and all three phases are present the module ER wire will
output 12-24 VDC after the conditions exist for 2 to 4 seconds. This signal informs the microprocessor that
electric standby operation is possible. If the voltage drops below 160 volts AC or a phase is lost, the output is
turned off after the condition exists for 8 to 10 seconds. The module continues to monitor the power and will
again output 12-24 VDC within 2 to 4 seconds after the voltage rises above 180 volts AC and all three phases are
present.
If phase rotation is L1, L2, L3 the 7EB wire will supply 12 to 24 VDC to energize the appropriate phase rotation
contactor. If phase rotation is L1, L3, L2 the 7EC wire will supply a chassis ground to energize the appropriate
phase rotation contactor. The 7EB and 7EC wires are interlocked to prevent both phase contactors from being
energized at once.
Connections
Connections to the module are shown in the tables below.
Power Connections
Input Description
# 8F Supplies nominal 12-24 volt DC power to the phase detect module.
CH Chassis ground
Inputs
Input Description
L1 This brown wire supplies standby power L1 to the phase detect module.
L2 This blue wire supplies standby power L2 to the phase detect module.
L3 This black wire supplies standby power L3 to the phase detect module.
Page 2
A
Outputs
Output Description
7EH With 12-24 VDC is supplied, then outputs 7EB and 7EC will be at 12-24 VDC.
7EB If phase rotation is L1, L2, L3 then this wire will provide 12-24 VDC to energize the appropriate phase
rotation contactor. The 7EC wire is interlocked to prevent both phase contactors from being
energized at once.
7EC If phase rotation is L1, L3, L2 then this wire will provide 12-24 VDC to energize the appropriate phase
rotation contactor. The 7EB wire is interlocked to prevent both phase contactors from being
energized at once.
ER This wire will output 12-24 VDC 2 to 4 seconds after the voltage rises above 180 volts AC and all
three phases are present. If the voltage drops below 160 volts AC or a phase is lost and the
condition remains for 8 to 10 seconds, the output is turned off. The module continues to monitor and
will again output 12-24 VDC 2 to 4 seconds after the power returns to normal (voltage rises above
180 volts AC and all three phases are present).
Connector Pinout
1 #8F Power to Module
2 CH Chassis ground
3 ER Power OK
4 7EH Switches the 7EC and 7EB from grounding to power logic
5 7EB Phase A-B-C
6 7EC Phase A-C-B
7 Unused
8 Unused
9 Unused
Page 3
A
Removal and Replacement

2. Disconnect the unit battery.
3. Disconnect the standby power.
4. Disconnect the three wires from the phase detect module at the motor contactor.
5. Unplug the phase detect module harness.
6. Remove the old phase detect module.
7. Install the new phase detect module.
8. Connect the new phase detect module wires to the upper contactor as follows:
9. Connect the brown wire to L1 on the contactor.
10. Connect the blue wire to L2 on the contactor.
11. Connect the black wire to L3 on the contactor.
12. Use crimp-on terminals as required.
13. Connect the plug on the short harness from the phase detect module.
14. Install the high voltage cover.
15. Secure wires and wire harnesses as required using cable ties.
16. Connect the unit battery.
17. Connect standby power.
18. Perform a Pretrip Test to verify proper operation.
Page 4
A
Diagnostics
1. Plug the standby power cord into
a known good power supply and
turn the unit on.
2. Using a Fluke Meter, test the L1, The voltage should be between
L2, and L3 circuits at the input to 200 - 500 VAC between circuits.
the terminals where the Brown, If not, repair as necessary to
Blue and Black wires are supply the needed voltage to the
connected. unit.
3. Check the #8F and CH circuits to If this power is not present, check
the phase detect module. 12-24 the #8 circuit from the On/Off
VDC must be present from #8F to switch.
CH.
4. If correct power is present in the If power is not present replace Removal and replacement of the
test above then the ER circuit on the phase detect module. phase detect module is detailed
the interface board should have on a previous page.
12-24 VDC present.
5. If LED 6 on the interface board is If power is not present check the

on then the 7EH circuit should Diesel/Electric Relay circuit on
have 12-24 VDC present. the interface board.
6. If the unit is calling for operation If neither contactor is energized Removal and replacement of the
(LED 6 is on) one of the phase check for 12-24 VDC. If voltage is phase detect module is detailed
select contactors should be not present replace the phase on a previous page.
energized. detect module.
Page 5
A
Page 6
CargoWatch Data Logger
Where Used
All SR-2 and SR-2 Spectrum Multi-Temp units equipped with optional CargoWatch sensors
Purpose
To understand, use and diagnose the CargoWatch Data Logger
Description
The CargoWatch Datalogger is contained within the HMI Control Panel. This datalogger conforms to European
standard EN12830. The data logger supports up to 6 optional temperature sensors and 4 digital inputs. These
optional sensors are not the same as the temperature sensors used to control the unit. N
ote that the CargoWatch
data logger does not record unit sensors. Unit sensors and other unit operating data are recorded by the
ServiceWatch data logger.
CargoWatch logs the following items:

x Up to 6 optional temperature sensors
x Up to 4 digital inputs (optional door switches)
x Setpoint
x Operating Modes –Tim ed and Event
x Defrost Entry and Exit
x Shutdown Alarms
x Real Time Clock Updates
Page 1
Temperature Sensors
The sensors used for the CargoWatch data logger are RTD thermistor type sensors that differ from the sensors
used for unit control. These sensors are different than the unit temperature sensors. The Service Part number
for optional CargoWatch sensors is 41-5436. CargoWatch sensors can be identified by:
x N
o shrin k tubing over sensor barrel
x Shorter sensor barrel than unit sensors
x N
o sen sor grades
Thermistor CargoWatch Sensor

The thermistor sensors change resistance as the temperature changes. Resistance values are as shown in the
table. They can be measured directly using a high quality ohmmeter. N
ote that th is applies only to CargoWatch
sensors.
CargoWatch Sensor Resistance vs Temperature
°F °C Ohms
-20°F -29°C 166,356
-10°F -23°C 115,757
0°F -18°C 86,501
10°F -12°C 61,737
20°F -7°C 47,070
30°F -1°C 34,374
32°F 0°C 32,650
40°F 4°C 26,688
50°F 10°C 19,904
60°F 16°C 15,002
70°F 21°C 11,944
80°F 27°C 9,166
90°F 32°C 7,402
100°F 38°C 5,775
Page 2
CargoWatch Time and Date

The time and date used by the CargoWatch data logger is held in the HMI Control Panel. To set or change the
date and time use the Set Time and Date feature at the end of the Maintenance Menu. The time and date can
also be set or changed by using Wintrac4.6.
The HMI Control Panel will update the SR-2 Controller and the ServiceWatch data logger with the correct time
and date each time the unit is turned on.
Downloads
To download the datalogger connect the download cable to the CargoWatch port on the unit. Downloads are
obtained using Wintrac4.6.
Printing Reports
Trip Reports and Delivery Reports can be directly printed. The printer must be connected to the printer port
connector located inside the unit control box. This port may be routed to the outside of the unit as required by the
individual user.
The CargoWatch data logger programmable features are set from the Sensor Configuration Sub-menu in the
Guarded Access menu. The sensor features allow the logging interval to be set and the sensors and digital
inputs to be enabled, named, and tailored to customer requirements. The flowchart on the next page illustrates
the features and menu flow. See Section 3 of this manual for complete information on CargoWatch
programmable features.
Programmable features may also be set up using Wintrac4.6.
Factory defaults have the Setpoint and CargoWatch Sensors 1 and 2 turned On. CargoWatch Sensors 3 through
6 and Digital Inputs 1 through 4 are turned Off.
Page 3
SR2 MENU OVERVIEW - GUARDED ACCESS - SENSOR CONFIG MENU

Default values are shown in parenthesis ( )
From Sensor (15 Min) (Log Sensor 1) (Log Sensor 2) (Log Sensor 3) (Log Sensor 4) (Log Sensor 5) (Log Sensor 6)
Config selection S Logging N Sensor N/B Sensor N/B Sensor N/B Sensor N/B Sensor N/B Sensor N/B
in Guarded Interval Config Config Config Config Config Config
Access Menu S S S S S
S
(Sensors 1 & 2 On, Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor (Sensors 1 & 2 On,
Sensors 3-6 Off) Logging Logging Logging Logging Logging Logging Sensors 3-6 Off)
N/B N/B N/B N/B N/B N/B
Ind Sensor Ind Sensor Ind Sensor Ind Sensor Ind Sensor Ind Sensor
(Log Sensor X) (Log Sensor X)
#1: Name #2: Name #3: Name #4: Name #5: Name #6: Name
Out-of-Range Out-of-Range Out-of-Range Out-of-Range Out-of-Range Out-of-Range
(On) (On)
Checking Checking Checking Checking Checking Checking
Page 4
(-6.0°) Low Low Low Low Low Low (-6.0°)
(+6.0°) High High High High High High (+6.0°)
(Off) Italian Option Italian Option Italian Option Italian Option Italian Option Italian Option (Off)
B B B B B B
Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor
(Off) (Off)
Averaging Averaging Averaging Averaging Averaging Averaging
N/B N/B N/B B

Digital In 1 Digital In 2 Digital In 3 Digital In 4
S S S S
(Digital 1 On, Door Open Door Open Door Open Door Open (Digital 1 On,
Digital 2-4 Off) Logging Logging Logging Logging Digital 2-4 Off)
B B B B
(Digital Input Digital Input Digital Input Digital Input Digital Input (Digital Input
#X Name) #1 #2 #3 #4 #X Name)
ServiceWatch Data Logger
Where Used
Purpose
To understand and use the ServiceWatch Data Logger
Description
The ServiceWatch Data Logger is contained within the SR-2 base controller.
ServiceWatch logs the following items:

x Thermo King Unit Serial N
umbe r
x Trailer u
Nmber
x SR-2 Serial u
Nmber
x SR-2 Software Revision
x Temperature Sensors
x Operating Modes
x Alarms Set and Cleared
x Defrost Entry and Exit
x Door Openings
x Real Time Clock Updates
ServiceWatch Time and Date

The time and date used by ServiceWatch are loaded from the HMI Control Panel each time the unit is turned on.
To set or change the date and time use the Set Time and Date feature at the end of the Maintenance Menu.
To change the time and date with Wintrac the download cable must be connected to the CargoWarch port to
change the time and date in the HMI Control Panel. The HMI Control Panel will then update the base controller
and the ServiceWatch data logger when the unit is turned off and back on. Time and date can not be changed by
connecting directly to the ServiceWatch datalogger with Wintrac.
Downloads
Downloads are obtained using Wintrac 4.6
Page 1

1 Turn the unit on.
2 Connect the download cable to

the ServiceWatch port on the
unit.
3 Start Wintrac 4.6 The Wintrac Display will appear.
4 Left click the Truck Icon in the of Wintrac will connect to the SR-2
the Wintrac menu bar. and display the Unit Serial
N
umb er, Trailer N
u mber, SR-2
Serial u
Nmbe r and SR-2
Software Revision.
5 Left click Download Data button The current data will be

. downloaded and saved.
6 Left click the Close button. The Download Display is closed.
Page 2
To View the Customer

Level Data
7 Left click the File Icon in the The Open Wintrac File Menu
upper left corner of the Wintrac appears.
menu bar.
8 Select the desired trailer number The file is opened. Customer

and data file and left click OK. Level data is shown according to
the list below.
Customer Level Data

Graphical Tabular
x Setpoint
x Return Control
x Discharge Control
x Ambient
x Coil
x Operating Mode
Page 3
To View the Technician

Level Data
7 From the Wintrac display press The Tool Menu appears in the
CTRL-SHIFT-T to enable the Wintrac menu bar.
Wintrac Tool Menu
8 Left click the Tool Menu and The Technician Level is enabled
select Enable Technician User and if a file is currently open the
Level. message shown below will
appear.
9 Left click OK.
10 Left click the File Icon in the The Open Wintrac File Menu
upper left corner of the Wintrac appears.
menu bar.
11 Select the desired trailer number The file is opened. Technician

and data file and left click OK. Level data is shown according to
the list on the next page.
Page 4
Technician Level Data

Graphical Tabular
x Setpoint
x Return Control
x Return Display
x Discharge Control
x Discharge Display
x Ambient
x Coil
x Spare 1
x Operating Mode
x Suction Pressure
x Discharge Pressure
x ETV Position
x Engine RPM
x Engine Temp
x ETV State
x Battery Volts
x Shunt Current
x Alternator Frequency
Page 5
Page 6
Section 6 – SR-2 SPECTRUM Service Procedure D01A
Temperature Sensor Test
Where Used
Purpose
To confirm the proper operation of the unit temperature sensors
Materials Required
x Fluke Digital Multimeter.
Operation
Both graded and ungraded sensors are used on SR-2 applications. Graded sensors are used to sense return air
and discharge air temperature. Ungraded sensors are used to sense coil and ambient air temperature. Both
graded and ungraded sensors are checked in the same manner.
Zone Return Air Sensors

These sensors monitor the temperature of the air returning to the evaporator coil. The sensors are located in the
return air flow. These sensors are graded sensors and must be replaced with graded sensors. The controller
must be calibrated to the respective grade of the installed sensor in order to operate properly. The o
Zne 1 Return
Air Sensor is connected to the base controller via RTP and RTNwires at co nnector 3
J. The Z
on e 2 Return Air
Sensor and Zone 3 Return Air Sensor are connected to the Expansion Module via the RTP and RTNwires. See
the Wiring Diagram for exact wire numbers. When replacing a sensor, be certain the sensors are connected
properly.
Page 1
P41SD01A 05 February 2007
Zone Discharge Air Sensors

These sensors monitor the temperature of the air leaving the evaporator coil. The sensors are located in the
evaporator discharge air path. These sensors are graded sensors and must be replaced with graded sensors.
The controller must be calibrated to the respective grade of the installed sensor in order to operate properly. The
Z
one 1 Discharge Air Sensor is connected to the base controller via RTP and RTNwi res at connector 3
J. The
Z
one 2 Discharge Air Sensor and Z
on e 3 Discharge Air Sensor are connected to the Expansion Module via the
DTP and DTNwi res. See the Wiring Diagram for exact wire numbers. When replacing a sensor, be certain the
sensors are connected properly.
Hard and Soft Failures

Sensor alarms can occur in the following ways.
A “Hard Failure” is defined by an out of range sensor reading, typically caused by an open or shorted sensor.
The sensor display will show dashes if a hard failure occurs. If this occurs only the alarm code for that sensor will
be set. Alarm code 13 will not be present. The controller may not be showing dashes for the sensor reading, but
the alarm will be active when the unit is inspected. If a sensor alarm code is set, a failure did occur at some point.
Checking a ServiceWatch data logger download at Technician Level may indicate when the hard failure occurred.
A “Soft Failure” is defined by erratic operation or sensor drift that exceeds acceptable tolerances, (sensor is out
of calibration). If this occurs the alarm code for the suspect sensor or sensors will be set along with Alarm Code
13. This indicates a potential problem that may not be immediately apparent, and that a hard failure as defined
above did not occur. Checking a ServiceWatch data logger download at Technician Level may indicate when
the soft failure occurred.
Page 2
Note: Polarity must be
considered when connecting
temperature sensors. If the
sensors are connected
backwards, the display will show
dashes (----). Consult the
schematic diagram or wiring
diagram for the correct
connections.
1 Disconnect the sensor to be

replaced from the sensor
harness.
2 If the sensor is a soft failure,

replace the sensor. Steps 3 thru
6 can be omitted. Go to Step 8.
3 If the sensor is a hard failure, turn This step can be omitted if the
the unit on. failure is a soft failure.
4 Using a high quality meter check The voltage from the This step can be omitted if the
the voltage at the sensor harness microprocessor must be from failure is a soft failure.
wires. 4.90 to 5.10 volts DC with the
sensor disconnected.
Page 3

5 If the voltage measured in the This step can be omitted if the
previous step is correct, go to failure is a soft failure.
Step 8.
6 If the voltage measured in Step 4 Test and repair the harness as This step can be omitted if the
above is incorrect, unplug the required. See Service Procedure failure is a soft failure.
sensor connector at the H04A for additional information.
microprocessor and check the
harness for shorts and open
wires.
7 If the harness passes inspection, If the microprocessor fails the test This step can be omitted if the
check the microprocessor as it must be replaced. failure is a soft failure.
shown in Service Procedure
A01A.
8 If the failure is a soft failure or the

voltage at the harness connector
is correct replace the sensor.
Page 4
Section 6 – SR-2 Service Procedure D03A
Pressure Transducer Test
Where Used
Purpose
To confirm the proper operation of the suction or discharge pressure transducers
Materials Required
x Fluke Digital Multi-meter.
Additional Information
others.
The maximum discharge pressure that can be displayed is 500 psig. If the sensed pressure is greater than 500
psig, the HMI Control Panel will display [- - - - ]instead of the discharge pressure.
The minimum discharge pressure that can be sensed is –

10 p sig. The control system cannot determine if the
minimum sensed pressure is the result of an electrical short or very low system pressure.
The maximum suction pressure that can be displayed is 200 psig. If the sensed pressure is greater than 200
psig, the HMI Control Panel will display [- - - - ]instea d of the suction pressure. When the unit is off and the
refrigerant pressures have equalized, the system pressure can exceed 200 psig when ambient temperatures are
above 90°F (35°C). If this occurs the HMI Control Pa nel will display [- - - - ]. This is normal operation and no
cause for concern.
The minimum suction pressure that be sensed is -12 psig.
If the suction pressure transducer opens the display will read -10 PSIG. An alarm may not be generated
immediately but the unit will be forced to low speed due to low suction pressure.
Page 1
The Discharge Pressure Transducer will have a “50 0” on the body of the part. The Suction Pressure Transducer
will have a 2
“ 00”on the body of the par t. They are not interchangeable.
1. Turn the unit on.
2. Access the Gauge submenu in The display should show the Confirm reading with refrigeration
the Main or Maintenance Menu pressure reading for the gauges as necessary.
and display the suction pressure transducer. If the transducer
or discharge pressure. reading is obviously incorrect or
the display shows
[- - - - ], proceed a s shown
below.
3. Turn the unit off and disconnect
the suction or discharge pressure
transducer at the transducer plug.
4. Turn the unit on.
5. Check the voltage at the The voltage between wires DPN

transducer harness connector. and DPP (Discharge Pressure) or
SPNand SPP (Suction Pressure)
must be from 4.90 to 5.10 volts
DC. Check the microprocessor
using Service Procedure A01A.
6. Check harness continuity of the If the voltage at Step 5 is present

DPI or SPI wires. and the DP or SP wire has
continuity, replace the transducer
in question.
Page 2

7. Transducer operation can be If the transducer in the gauge
verified by installing a known manifold reads properly the unit
good transducer in the center transducer is bad.
port of a gauge manifold.
Connect the transducer to the
unit wiring harness and check the
gauge reading.
8. Check the microprocessor as If the microprocessor fails the test

shown in Service Procedure it must be replaced.
A01A.
Page 3
Page 4
Section 6 – SR-2 and SR-2 M/T Service Procedure F01A
Checking and Replacing the Oil Level Switch
Where Used
Purpose
To test the oil level switch for proper operation
Table of Contents
Checking and Replacing the Oil Level Switch........................................................................................................... 1
Where Used ........................................................................................................................................................... 1
Purpose.................................................................................................................................................................. 1
Table of Contents................................................................................................................................................... 1
Materials Required ................................................................................................................................................. 1
Operation ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................................................................. 2
Replacing the Switch – Screw In Applications....................................................................................................... 2
Materials Required
Operation
The switch is open with the float up (indicating full oil level). The switch is closed with the float down (indicating
low oil level).
Page 1
P41SF01A 05 February 2007
2. Disconnect the Deutsch The oil level switch is located on

connector at the switch. the top of the oil pan.
3. Use an ohmmeter to check With the oil above the "add " This check can be performed
switch continuity. mark, the switch should be open. while changing oil.
If the engine is 6 or more quarts
low the switch should be closed.
4. Reconnect the Deutsch

connector.
Replacing the Switch – Screw In Applications

2. Disconnect the Deutsch connector at the The oil level switch is located on the top of
switch. the oil pan.
3. Unscrew and remove the old switch.
4. Apply Teflon tape to the threads on the new

switch.
5. Screw the new switch into the hole in the oil

pan. Tighten until snug. Do not over-tighten.
6. Reconnect the Deutsch switch connector.
Page 2
Checking the Oil Pressure Switch
Where Used
Purpose
To test the oil pressure switch for proper operation
Materials Required
Page 1
1. Connect a multi-meter set for DC
Volts between the 20B wire at the
oil pressure shutdown switch and
chassis ground.
2. Turn the unit on and observe the The voltage with the unit on and
meter reading. the engine not running should be
0. If there is voltage present the
switch is defective.
3. Start the engine and observe the Battery voltage should be present
meter reading. when the engine is running. If
the voltage is low or is 0, proceed
to Step 4.
4. With the unit running, disconnect If the battery voltage is present Check the 20B circuit as required
the 20B wire from the switch. on the wire, the switch is to determine the cause.
Measure the voltage from the defective and should be replaced.
20B wire to chassis ground.
If the voltage on the 20B wire is
low or 0, there is a problem in the
20B circuit.
Page 2
Section 6 – SR-2 and SR-2 M/T Service Procedure F07B
Magnetic Coolant Level Sensor Test
Where Used
All SR-2 and SR-2 Spectrum Multi-Temp units with magnetic coolant level sensors
Purpose
To confirm proper operation of the magnetic coolant level sensor
Materials Required
Operation
A magnetic reed switch is used to determine the coolant level. This two wire switch is supplied with 5
+ V DC from
the microprocessor on the CLP wire (J
7 Pin 15). The switch outputs +
5 V DC on the CLS wire (J7 Pin 16) when
coolant level is above the sensor and less than 0 VDC when the coolant level is below the sensor.
The switch is housed in an isolated chamber within the coolant tank. A magnetic float is located in the engine
coolant adjacent to the switch chamber. The switch will open or close as the magnetic float falls or rises with the
coolant level. The switch can be changed without removing coolant from the radiator. Exercise care when
removing and installing the reed switch as the switch is enclosed in a glass shell.
Page 1
P41SF07B 05 February 2007
Section 6 – SR-2 and SR-2 M/T Service Procedure F07B
1 Disconnect the switch and check +5 VDC sho uld be present
the voltage between the CLP wire between the CLP wire and
at the sensor harness connector chassis ground. If not, check the
and chassis ground for +5 VDC. harness and connectors as
required to determine the cause.
2 If +5 VDC is present at the Less than 0.5 VDC should be

sensor, check the voltage on the present when the coolant level is
CLS wire at the sensor harness below the switch and 5
+ V DC
connector. should be present when the
coolant level is above the switch.
If these voltages are not present
the sensor must be replaced.
3 The switch is housed in an Exercise care when removing

isolated chamber within the and installing the reed switch as
coolant tank. The switch can be the switch is enclosed in a glass
changed without removing shell. Carefully pry the switch
coolant from the radiator. from the chamber in the coolant
tank. To install the switch
carefully press it into the chamber
by hand.
Page 2
P41SF07B 05 February 2007
Coolant Temperature Sensor Test
Where Used
Purpose
To test the coolant temperature sensor for proper operation
Materials Required
Engine Temperature Sensor
Page 1
1. Note: Polarity must be
considered when connecting
temperature sensors. If the
sensors are connected
backwards, the display will show
dashes [- - - - ]. Consult the
schematic diagram or wiring
diagram for the correct
connections.
3. Disconnect the sensor at the plug

next to the sensor.
4. Turn the unit on. The Standard Display will appear.
5. Access the Gauge menu and The display for the Engine If all the temperature sensors
display Coolant Temperature. Coolant Temperature sensor show dashes [- - - - ]without
should show dashes [- - - - ]. being disconnected, the
microprocessor is defective.
6. Using a high quality meter check The voltage must be from 4.90 to
the voltage at the sensor plug on 5.10 volts DC.
the harness.
7. If the voltage at the harness

connector is correct, replace the
sensor.
Page 2

8. If the voltage measured in Step 6 If the base controller fails the test
above is incorrect, check the it must be replaced.
base controller as shown in
Service Procedure A01A.
9. If the base controller passes the Test and repair the harness as
test, the problem is in the wiring required.
harness.
Page 3
Page 4
RPM Sensor Test and Adjustment
Where Used
Purpose
To test and adjust the RP M sensor
Materials Required
Operation
The RPM sensor rarely fails but may require adjustment for proper operation.
Page 1
2. Remove the FS1 and FS2 wires

from the sensor.
3. Check the sensor resistance The sensor resistance should be

using a high quality multi-meter. 250 to 300 ohms with the wires
removed. If not, the sensor
should be replaced.
4. Loosen the lock nut, turn the

sensor in until it contacts the ring
gear on the flywheel, then back it
out ½
turn an d tighten the lock
nut.
5. Reattach the FS1 and FS2 wires Polarity is not important.

to the sensor.
6. Start the unit.
7. Access the Gauge menu and The display should show the
display Engine RPM. engine RPM.
8. If the RPM reading does not

appear in the display, remove the
FS1 and FS2 wires from the
sensor.
Page 2

9. Using Service Test Mode, place For information on Service Test
the unit in high speed cool H
[ SC]. Mode see Section 4.
10. Check the voltage across the The voltage in high speed should Set the meter to read AC volts.
sensor terminals with the FS1 read from 1.0 to 5.0 volts ac.
and FS2 wires removed.
11. If the required voltage is not

present, replace the RPM sensor.
If the required voltage is present,
check the harness wires and
repair as required.
12. Reattach the FS1 and FS2 wires Polarity is not important.
to the sensor.
Page 3
Page 4
Section 6 – SR-2 and SR-2 M/T Service Procedure H04A
Wiring Harness Continuity Test
Where Used
Purpose
To illustrate the correct procedures for checking harness continuity on equipment utilizing solid state devices
Materials Required
x Jump er Wires as Required
Important Notes
x Do not use battery and light test tools to check continuity.
x Do not check to see if a circuit is energized by tapping a circuit wire to ground and watching for a spark.
Page 1
P41SH04A 05 February 2007
1. Do not use battery and light test Using such devices may present
tools to check continuity. excessive voltage or current to
solid state devices. In many
cases the device will be damaged
or destroyed.
2. Use a high quality digital multi- Older analog (needle type meter
meter or an analog meter with movement) meters and some
high input impedance. inexpensive "mech anic tool box"
meters present a large load to the
circuit being tested. This can
significantly alter the meter
reading, especially when
measuring small voltages or
currents.
3. e
Nver tes t a circuit to see if it is This will damage solid state
energized by tapping the circuit components or blow a fuse.
wire to ground and watching for a
spark.
4. Locate the suspect circuit on the

appropriate wiring diagram.
Page 2

5. Isolate both ends of the circuit Harness connections are
using the following methods as identified in the Service
required. Procedures appropriate to the
x Disconnect the appropriate device in question. They may
connector at the micro- also be determined by consulting
processor. the wiring diagrams.
x Disconnect the device CAUTION: Failure to isolate

connector at the device. both ends may cause
misleading results.
x Disconnect the appropriate
connector at the interface
board.
x Remove the wire from the

device terminal.
6. Using jump ers as required, The meter must show a very low Be certain the ohmmeter battery
connect each end of the circuit to resistance (less than 1.0 ohm), is good and the meter zeros with
a high quality multimeter. indicating circuit continuity. If not, the leads held together to prevent
the circuit is open or has misleading results.
excessive resistance.
Troubleshoot the circuit to
determine the cause using the
wiring diagrams.
7. After determining that the circuit The meter should indicate an

passes a continuity test, remove open circuit. If not, the circuit is
one lead and connect it to shorted to ground. Trouble-shoot
chassis ground to check for a the circuit to determine the cause
short to ground. using the wiring diagrams.
Page 3
Page 4
Section 7 – SR-2 Multi-Temp Information
TABLE OF CONTENTS – SECTION 7
SR-2 Multi-Temp Software Features and Interchange ......................................................................................... 3

SR-2 Base Controller Software........................................................................................................................... 3
SR-2 HMI Control Panel Software....................................................................................................................... 4
SR-2 Diagnostic Tool Software........................................................................................................................... 5
SR-2 Hardware Features and Interchange ............................................................................................................ 7

SR-2 Base Controller and Interface Board Label Location ............................................................................. 7
SR-2 Base Controller and Interface Board Label Color ................................................................................... 7
SR-2 Base Controller and Interface Board Hardware Versions ...................................................................... 7
SR-2 Base Controller and Interface Board Identification ................................................................................ 8
SR-2/C Base Controller ....................................................................................................................................... 9
SR-2 Interface Board ........................................................................................................................................... 9
SR-2 HMI Control Panel Versions..................................................................................................................... 10
SR-2 HMI Control Panel Identification ............................................................................................................. 10
SR-2 HMI Control Panel..................................................................................................................................... 10
SR-2 Expansion Module .................................................................................................................................... 11
SR-2 Diagnostic Tool - Microprocessor/Interface Board/HMI Control Panel Tester................................... 11
Wintrac Requirements .......................................................................................................................................... 13
7-1
05 February 2007
7-2
05 February 2007
SR-2 MULTI-TEMP SOFTWARE FEATURES AND INTERCHANGE
Where Used: All SR-2 Controllers for Multi-Temp Applications

To identify the software revision, see Section 4 Checking Software Revision.
CAUTION: The software on a replacement controller should always be checked to be certain it is current
software.
SR-2 Base Controller Software

Software Revision Features Interchange with:
C000 Production release – C000 or later required for SR-2 None
Multi-Temp applications.
7-3
05 February 2007
SR-2 HMI Control Panel Software

6510 6510 or later required for Multi-Temp applications. None
(NAD and ESA) Supports the following languages:
English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, Dutch,
Portuguese, Greek, Turkish, Hebrew, Arabic.
6610 6610 or later required for Multi-Temp applications.

(Optional ESA) Supports the following languages: English, Russian,
Polish, Hungarian, Romanian, Bulgarian, Czech,
Danish, Swedish, Norwegian, Finnish.
6710 6710 or later required for Multi-Temp applications.

(Optional) Supports the following languages:
English, Japanese.
7-4
05 February 2007
SR-2 Diagnostic Tool Software

A new Diagnostic Tool is required to test SR-2 Multi-Temp components. An upgrade kit is available to
upgrade the original SR-2 Single Temp Diagnostic Tool to the current standards (See SR-2 Diagnostic
Tool Hardware later in this section). The necessary software for the new Diagnostic Tool is available on
Info Central.
3.0.0 Current revision – download available on Info Central None. This revision or
later software must be
used on the Diagnostic
Tool for SR-2 Multi-Temp
applications.
7-5
05 February 2007
7-6
05 February 2007
SR-2 HARDWARE FEATURES AND INTERCHANGE
Where Used: All SR-2 SPECTRUM Control Hardware for Multi-Temp Applications
SR-2 Base Controller and Interface Board Label Location

x Base Controller Label The Base Controller label is located on the front surface of the base controller
between the J1 and J2 connectors. It is necessary to remove the interface board from the base controller
to read this label.
x Interface Board Label The Interface Board label is located on the back surface (solder side) of the
interface board below the current shunts. It is necessary to remove the interface board from the base
controller to read this label.
x Base Controller/Interface Board Assembly Label The label for a factory Base Controller/Interface
Board Assembly is located on the front surface of the base controller J3 Sensor connector. It is visible
without removing the interface board from the base controller.
x The component serial number is part of each label. All 3 labels will have matching serial numbers on
factory assemblies.
SR-2 Base Controller and Interface Board Label Color

x Yellow Labels The labels on factory base controller/interface board assemblies that have been factory
loaded with Cxxx Multi-Temp base controller software will have yellow labels on the base controller,
interface board and assembly.
x White Labels The labels on factory base controller/interface board assemblies that have been factory
loaded with Bxxx Single-Temp base controller software will have white labels on the base controller,
interface board and assembly.
SR-2 Base Controller and Interface Board Hardware Versions

x Base Controllers Only SR-2/C Base Controllers (Service Part #45-2147) can be used for Multi-Temp
applications. The serial number will end in 0T3. They can be identified as shown on the next page.
x Interface Boards Only SR-2/C Interface Boards identified as Service Part #45-2148 can be used for
Multi-Temp applications. The serial number will end in 0T3. They can be identified as shown on the next
page.
7-7
05 February 2007
SR-2 Base Controller and Interface Board Identification

x Service Part Number SR-2 Base Controller types can be identified by the Service Part number as
shown in the tables on the following pages
x “0T3” Serial Number The serial numbers of SR-2/C Base Controllers (45-2147) and SR-2 Interface
Board Part Number 45-2148 end in “0T3” as shown below.
"0T3" Designator
Component Designator
ASS'Y P/N: XXXXXXXXXX S/N: CXXXXXXXXXX0T3 X XX

S.P. P/N: XX-XXXX
REV. XXXX BAR CODE LOCATED HERE
The component designator is the letter preceding the serial number as shown above. On factory
installed SR-2/C Multi-Temp units the serial number on all three labels will be the same except for the
component designator letter. The component designator letters are as follows:
C = Base Controller. This label is located on the front surface of the base controller between the J1
and J2 connectors. It is necessary to remove the interface board from the base controller to read this
label.
I = Interface Board. This label is located on the bottom of the interface board below the current
shunts. It is necessary to remove the interface board from the base controller to read this label.
A = Assembly consisting of Base Controller and Interface Board. This label is located on the
base controller J3 Sensor Connector.
7-8
05 February 2007
SR-2/C Base Controller

Only SR-2/C Base Controllers can be used for Multi-Temp applications. The serial number will end with
0T3. The serial number labels are located on the front surface of the J3 Sensor connector or the front of
the Base Controller between the J1 and J2 connectors.
Features Where Used Interchange With Service Parts
Number
SR-2/C Base Controller SR-2 Multi-Temp None 45-2147
Trailer Applications
SR-2 Interface Board

Only SR-2/C Interface Boards with serial numbers that end in “0T3” can be used for Multi-Temp
applications. The label is located on the bottom of the interface board below the current shunts. It is
necessary to remove the interface board from the base controller to read this label.
Number
Production units with damper SB Multi-Temp Trailer 45-2148
solenoids Applications
Production units with damper SL Multi-Temp Trailer N/A
motors Applications
7-9
05 February 2007
SR-2 HMI Control Panel Versions

x HMI Control Panels Only HMI-2 Control Panels (Service Part #41-6600) can be used for Multi-Temp
applications. The serial number will end in 0T2. They can be identified as shown below.
SR-2 HMI Control Panel Identification

x Service Part Number SR-2 HMI Control Panels can be identified by the Service Part number as shown
in the table below.
x “0T2” Serial Number The serial numbers of HMI-2 Control Panels end in “0T2” as shown below.
"0T2" Designator
ASS'Y P/N: XXXXXXXXXX S/N: HXXXXXXXXXX0T2 X XX

S.P. P/N: XX-XXXX
REV. XXXX BAR CODE LOCATED HERE
SR-2 HMI Control Panel

Only HMI-2 Control Panels can be used for Multi-Temp applications. The serial number will end with 0T2.
The label is located on the back of the HMI Control Panel.
Number
Production units SR-2 Trailer 41-6600
Applications
7-10
05 February 2007
SR-2 Expansion Module

Number
Production units SR-2 Trailer Multi-temp 41-6889
Applications
SR-2 Diagnostic Tool - Microprocessor/Interface Board/HMI Control Panel Tester

A new Diagnostic Tool and Diagnostic Tester Software 3.0.0 or greater is required to test SR-2 Multi-Temp
components. This tester will also work on Single Temp Applications. The new tester can be identified by the blue
plastic housing. An upgrade kit is available as shown below to upgrade the original Service Part 204-1102
Diagnostic Tool to the current standards. The new tester is required for the SR-2/C Controller/Interface Board,
but not the HMI Control Panel. The new tester will work on all previous components.
Number
New Diagnostic Tool to test the All SR-2 Trailer Single None 204-1196
microprocessor, interface board Temp and Multi-Temp (Complete Tool)
and HMI control panel. Applications
Upgrade kit to upgrade original All original SR-2 Trailer Upgrade to 204-1196 204-1197
Diagnostic Tool (Service Part # Single Temp Diagnostic (Upgrade Kit)
204-1102) to current standards. Tools (Service Part #
204-1102).
7-11
05 February 2007
7-12
05 February 2007
WINTRAC REQUIREMENTS
Wintrac 4.6 or later is required for use with SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp applications.
Number
Wintrac 4.6 Full Version SR-2 M/T Applications 204-1849
Wintrac 4.6 Upgrade Version SR-2 M/T Applications 204-1850
7-13
05 February 2007
7-14
05 February 2007
Section 8 – SR-2 SPECTRUM Refrigeration Operation
SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp ..................................................................................................................................3

Refrigeration Principles & Components ................................................................................................................3
Multi-Temperature System Features...................................................................................................................3
Definitions of SPECTRUM Unit Solenoids and Valves .....................................................................................3
Components Common to All Zones ............................................................................................................... 3
Components Common to Individual Zones................................................................................................... 4
Definitions of SPECTRUM Remote Evaporator Components ..........................................................................5
Components Common to Remote Evaporators ............................................................................................ 5
Multi-Temp Operation ..............................................................................................................................................6
Operation of SPECTRUM SR Unit Solenoids and Valves.....................................................................................7

Summary................................................................................................................................................................9
Transducers & Switches........................................................................................................................................10

Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer .................................................................................................10
Suction Pressure Transducer............................................................................................................................10
High Pressure Cutout Switch ............................................................................................................................10
Discharge Transducer Pressure Control .........................................................................................................10
Refrigeration Control .............................................................................................................................................10

High Speed Solenoid (All Zones Cool) .............................................................................................................10
Purge Valve & Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoids .........................................................................................11
High Speed Solenoid (Any Zone Heating)........................................................................................................11
Reduced Reverse Cycle Heat Control ..............................................................................................................12
Condenser Inlet Solenoid...................................................................................................................................12
Refrigeration Service Procedures ........................................................................................................................13

R01A Full System Evacuation, Charging and Checking Refrigerant Charge
R02A Low Side Pumpdown Test
R03A Hot Gas Solenoid Test
R04A Liquid Line Solenoid and Liquid Return Check Valve Test
R05A Suction Line Solenoid Test
R06A Suction Line Check Valves and Condenser Inlet Check Valve Tests
R07A Purge Valve Test
R08A Condenser Inlet Solenoid, Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid and Purge Check Valve Test
R09A Low Side Service Pumpdown
R10A Multi-Temp Refrigerant Recovery
R11A Low Side Evacuation
Refrigeration Diagrams
TCI 3 Zone with 2 Single TLE Evaporators
TCI 3 Zone with Parallel and Single TLE Evaporators
05 February 2007
Page 2
06 February 2007
SR-2 SPECTRUM MULTI-TEMP

REFRIGERATION PRINCIPLES & COMPONENTS
Multi-Temperature System Features

x Reverse Cycle Heat Reverse cycle means that the evaporator coil in the zone that is in heat or defrost
mode is used as the condenser coil. This occurs as long as at least one other zone is operating in cool mode.
x All Spectrum systems are capable maintaining any temperature in any zone and can also heat or cool in any
zone at any time. These systems include conventional host units as well as dual evaporator (DE) systems.
Definitions of SPECTRUM Unit Solenoids and Valves
Components Common to All Zones

These three components are located in the condenser section of the host unit and serve all zones. They are
controlled by zone requirements and are affected by the discharge pressure transducer. These three
components are controlled by electrical outputs that are part of the Base Controller/Interface Board assembly.
x Condenser Inlet Solenoid (CIS)

This valve controls the flow of refrigerant to the host unit’s condenser. This solenoid is typically energized
(closed) when any zone is operating in heat or defrost mode. The base controller will energize the condenser
inlet solenoid as required to increase capacity. This is determined by box temperature vs ambient
temperature. The condenser inlet solenoid will be de-energized under the following conditions:
1. If the refrigerant discharge pressure becomes excessive.
2. If the temperature control algorithms require low heating capacity.
This solenoid is a normally open valve. The Base Controller/Interface Board will supply 12 volts from a Smart
FET to energize this valve.
IMPORTANT: When operating in reduced reverse cycle heat or defrost the Condenser Inlet Solenoid
is not energized.
x Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid (RTPS)

This valve is energized (open) during heat or defrost when the refrigerant discharge pressure is low. This
insures adequate refrigerant is available to heat or defrost the zone. The Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid is
always energized at the same time as the Purge Valve (note that the Purge Valve and Receiver Tank
Pressure Solenoid are controlled by separate electronic outputs). This solenoid is a normally closed valve.
The Base Controller/ Interface Board will supply 12 volts from a Smart FET to energize the valve.
Page 3
06 February 2007
x Purge Valve (PV)

This valve is energized (open) during heat or defrost when the refrigerant discharge pressure is low. This
insures adequate refrigerant is available to heat or defrost the zone. The Purge Valve is always energized at
the same time as the Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid valve (note that the Purge Valve and Receiver Tank
Pressure Solenoid are controlled by separate electronic outputs). This solenoid is a normally closed valve.
The Base Controller/Interface Board will supply 12 volts from a Smart FET to energize the valve.
Components Common to Individual Zones

The following valves are included in each zone. They are located in the evaporator section of each zone and are
controlled by zone requirements. With the exception of the Zone 1 Liquid Line Solenoid, these three components
are controlled by outputs on the Expansion Module. The Zone 1 Liquid Line Solenoid is controlled by an output
on the Base Controller/Interface Board. This allows Zone 1 cool operation with a failed Expansion Module.
x Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS)

The Liquid Line Solenoid is energized (open) any time cooling, heating or defrosting is required in its zone.
The valve is de-energized when the zone is in null or off to stop refrigerant flow in that zone. These solenoids
are normally closed valves. The Liquid Line Solenoid for Zone 1 is controlled by relay K8 located on the Base
Controller /Interface Board. The Liquid Line Solenoids for Zones 2 and 3 are controlled by Smart FET
outputs on the Expansion Module. Relay K8 (Zone 1) or the Expansion Module (Zones 2 and 3) will supply 12
volts to energize the respective valve.
x Hot Gas Solenoid (HGS)

The Hot Gas Solenoid is energized (open) any time heating or defrosting is required in the zone. These
solenoids are normally closed valves and are controlled by Smart FET outputs located on the Expansion
Module. The Expansion Module will supply 12 volts to energize the respective valve.
x Suction Line Solenoid (SLS)

The Suction Line Solenoid is energized (closed) when its zone is operating in reverse cycle heat or defrost
(see “Reverse Cycle Heat” section above). These solenoids are normally open valves and are controlled by
Smart FET outputs located on the Expansion Module. The Expansion Module will supply 12 volts to energize
the respective valve.
Page 4
06 February 2007
Definitions of SPECTRUM Remote Evaporator Components

Components Common to Remote Evaporators
The remote evaporators include the Liquid Line Solenoid, Hot Gas Solenoid and Suction Line Solenoid for
each zone.
The remote evaporators also include 12VDC electrical fans with electronic speed control and drain hose
heaters.
With the exception of the Zone 1 Liquid Line Solenoids these components are controlled by Smart FET
outputs that are part of the Expansion Module.
Page 5
06 February 2007
MULTI-TEMP OPERATION
Warm
All Zones Cooling
Cold Cold Cool
When all zones are cooling, the host
unit condenser is used to eliminate Ambient
COOL COOL
the heat from all zones. This is
Conventional Cooling operation. Cool
One Zone Cooling

One Zone Heating or Defrosting
Cold Warm Cool
When at least one zone is cooling and
COOL HEAT
another zone is heating or defrosting, the
evaporator in the heating zone is used a Cool
condenser to remove the heat from the
zone that is cooling. The host unit
condenser is not used. This is Reverse
Cycle operation
All Zones Heating or Defrosting

Warm Warm Cool
When all zones are heating or
defrosting, the host unit condenser is HEAT HEAT
not used. This is Hot Gas Heat
operation. Cool
Page 6
06 February 2007
Section 8 – SR-2 SPECTRUM Refrigera
OPERATION OF SPECTRUM SR UNIT SOLENOIDS AND VALV

Item and ID Smart Solenoid Null Running Null Cool Heat Reverse Cycle R
FET Type and Heat and Rev
Defrost Defrost H
D
Condenser Inlet Yes NO Energized Energized
Solenoid (CIS) (closed) (closed)
(Note 1)
Receiver Tank Yes NC Energized Energized
Pressure Sol (open) (open)
(RTPS) (Note 1)
Purge Valve (PV) Yes NC Energized Energized
(Note 1) (open) (open)
Zone Liquid Line Yes NC Energized Energized Energized E

Solenoid (LLS) (open) (open) (open)
Note 1
Zone Hot Gas Yes NC Energized Energized E
Solenoid (HGS) (open) (open)
Zone Suction Yes NO Energized E

Line Solenoid (closed) (
(SLS)
Evaporator Fans Yes N/A Off On On On On
(Off for defrost) (Off for defrost)
~ See Notes on next page ~
Page 7
06 February 2007
Section 8 – SR-2 SPECTRUM Refrigera
NOTES:
NOTE 1
Reduced Reverse Cycle Heat is used to prevent excessive heating and to allow both the remote evaporator of the zone in heat
utilized by zones that are cooling.
If the setpoint in the heating zone is equal to or more than 20°F below the ambient temperature then the following valves a
x Purge Valve
x Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid
The zone is in Reduced Reverse Cycle Heat.
If the setpoint in the heating zone becomes less than 15°F below the ambient temperature then the following valves are en
x Purge Valve (dependent on discharge pressure)
x Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid (dependent on discharge pressure)
The zone is in Normal Reverse Cycle Heat.
NOTE 2
The fans in zones with fresh range setpoints will run in full speed if there are no more than 3 fans in a zone. If there are 4 or more
is reduced for power management.
The fans in zones with frozen range setpoints will run at a lower speed than fans in fresh zones with 4 or more fans.
If the Run Fans in Null feature is enabled and the unit is running then when a zone is in running null the zone fans will run for 3 min
minutes and then restart for 3 minutes. This maintains airflow in the zone and is normally used with fresh loads.
Page 8
06 February 2007
Summary
x When a zone is cooling the Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) is energized (open).
x When a zone is heating, defrosting or in minimal heat the Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) is energized (open) and
the Hot Gas Solenoid (HGS) is energized (open).
x When a zone is in reverse cycle heat the Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) is energized (open), the Hot Gas
Solenoid (HGS) is energized (open) and the Suction Line Solenoid (SLS) is energized (closed).
x When a zone is in Null or running null no zone valves are energized.
x When a zone is off no zone valves are energized.
Page 9
06 February 2007
TRANSDUCERS & SWITCHES REFRIGERATION CONTROL
Compressor Discharge Pressure High Speed Solenoid (All Zones Cool)

Transducer When all zones are in cool mode the microprocessor
This transducer supplies the discharge pressure at will enable the unit to run in high speed if required
the compressor to the microprocessor. This until the discharge pressure exceeds 425 PSIG. At
information is used by the software to determine that time the unit will be forced to low speed to
which solenoids should be energized or de- prevent a shut down on high discharge pressure.
energized. When the discharge pressure drops below 375
PSIG the microprocessor will enable the unit to go
Suction Pressure Transducer
back to high speed if required.
This transducer supplies the suction pressure to the
microprocessor. This information is used by the
software to determine if the engine is allowed to
High Speed Solenoid (All Zones Cool)
operate at high speed.
425 PSIG
High Pressure Cutout Switch Low Speed Cool

The high pressure cutout switch monitors the High Speed Cool
(Enabled)
discharge pressure at the compressor. The switch
375 PSIG
is closed with normal pressures and will open with
excessive pressures. The actual pressure is
High Speed Solenoid - All Zones Cool
determined by the refrigerant used in the unit. The
high pressure cutout is located on the compressor
discharge manifold.
Discharge Transducer Pressure Control

The microprocessor monitors the discharge
pressure of the compressor using the Discharge
Pressure Transducer. This information is used to
control unit operation as shown.
Page 10
06 February 2007
Purge Valve & Receiver Tank Pressure High Speed Solenoid (Any Zone Heating)
Solenoids When any zone is in heat mode the microprocessor
When any zone is in heat or defrost mode with the will enable the unit to run in high speed heat if
Condenser Inlet Solenoid energized then the required until the discharge pressure exceeds 410
microprocessor will energize the Purge Valve and PSIG. At that time the unit will be forced to low
Receiver Tank Solenoid until the discharge pressure speed heat to prevent a shut down on high
exceeds 300 psig. At that time the unit will de- discharge pressure. When the discharge pressure
energize the solenoids. This controls the amount of drops below 390 PSIG the controller will enable the
refrigerant available when the unit is heating or unit to go back to high speed heat if required.
defrosting. When the discharge pressure drops
below 225 psig the microprocessor will again
energize the Purge Valve & Receiver Tank Pressure High Speed Solenoid (Any Zone Heating)
Solenoid to add additional refrigerant to the system. 410 PSIG
Low Speed Heat

The Purge Valve and Receiver Tank Pressure
High Speed Heat
Solenoid will be energized for 5 seconds and then (Enabled)
390 PSIG
de-energized for 55 seconds if the discharge
pressure is between 225 and 300 psig. Note that
this only applies to heat or reverse cycle heat, not to High Speed Solenoid - Any Zone Heating
reduced reverse cycle heat or defrost.
Purge Valve & Receiver Tank Presssure Solenoid
300 PSIG
De-Energized
Energized
225 PSIG (5 seconds on

55 seconds off)
Purge Valve & Receiver Tank Solenoids
Page 11
06 February 2007
Reduced Reverse Cycle Heat Control Condenser Inlet Solenoid

Reduced Reverse Cycle Heat is used to prevent When any zone is in heat or defrost mode, the base
excessive heating and to allow both the remote controller will energize the condenser inlet solenoid
evaporator of the zone in heat and the unit only when required to increase capacity. This is
condenser to be utilized by zones that are cooling. determined by box temperature vs ambient
temperature.
If the setpoint in the heating zone is equal to or more
than 20°F below the ambient temperature then the When energized, the condenser inlet solenoid will
following valves in that zone are de-energized: stay energized until the discharge pressure exceeds
x Condenser Inlet Solenoid 400 psig. At that time the condenser inlet solenoid
x Purge Valve is de-energized to prevent a shut down on high
x Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid discharge pressure. When the discharge pressure
The zone is in Reduced Reverse Cycle Heat. drops below 250 psig the controller will again
energize the condenser inlet solenoid if required.
If the setpoint in the heating zone becomes less than
15°F below the ambient temperature then the
following valves in that zone are energized:
x Condenser Inlet Solenoid 400 PSIG
x Purge Valve (dependent on discharge

De-Energized
pressure) Energized
x Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid
250 PSIG
(dependent on discharge pressure)
The zone is in Normal Reverse Cycle Heat.
Reduced Reverse Cycle Heat Control
Decreasing Reduced Reverse Setpoint +

Ambient Cycle Heat 20°F
Temperature
Normal Reverse
Cycle Heat
Increasing
Setpoint + Ambient
15°F Setpoint Temperature
Temperature
Reduced Reverse Cycle Heat Control
Page 12
06 February 2007
REFRIGERATION SERVICE PROCEDURES

The remainder of this section consists of the following Refrigeration Service Procedures and Evaporator
Diagrams.
R01A Full System Evacuation, Charging and Checking Refrigerant Charge
R02A Low Side Pumpdown Test
R03A Hot Gas Solenoid Test
R04A Liquid Line Solenoid and Liquid Return Check Valve Test
R06A Suction Line Check Valves and Condenser Inlet Check Valve Tests
R07A Purge Valve Test
R08A Condenser Inlet Solenoid, Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid and Purge Check
Valve Test
R09A Low Side Service Pumpdown
R10A Multi-Temp Refrigerant Recovery
Page 13
06 February 2007
Page 14
06 February 2007
SR-2 SPECTRUM Refrigeration Service Procedure R01A
Title: FULL SYSTEM EVACUATION, CHARGING & CHECKING REFRIGERANT CHARGE
Where Used: All SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Applications
Purpose: To evacuate and charge an SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp refrigeration system.
Note: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the normal operating
positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration Service Procedure.
EVACUATING THE SYSTEM

STEP ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS
1 Be sure all refrigerant has been See Refrigeration Service
recovered from the unit. Procedure R10A for refrigerant
Connect vacuum pump and recovery details.
dual gauge manifold for 3 point
evacuation from suction service
valve, discharge service valve
and receiver tank outlet valve.
2 Verify proper operation of the
Evacuation Station as shown in
the Evacuation Station
Operation Manual (TK 40612).
3 Connect the Evacuation Station
for 3 point evacuation from the
suction service valve,
discharge service valve and
receiver tank outlet valve.
Page 1
SR-2 SPECTRUM R01A 02/05/07

4 Connect a battery charger to The battery charger must be The microprocessor’s Service
unit battery. capable of at least 15 amperes Test Mode is used to open unit
output. This will maintain the valves as required for
charge level of the battery evacuation. Failure to connect
during the time required to a battery charger may result in
evacuate and charge the unit. the battery voltage falling too
low to reliably operate the
microprocessor and valves.
5 Turn the unit on but do not The display will show EVACUATION TEST is not
allow the engine or motor to MAINTENANCE MENU and available if the unit is running.
start. Enter the Maintenance HOURMETERS.
Menu shown in Section 4 of the
Diagnostic Manual (TK 53080).
TIMESAVER: Evacuation Test
is not available if the unit is
running. If the unit is running,
enter the Maintenance Menu
and select INTERFACE
BOARD TEST. This will shut
the unit down. Press EXIT to
leave the Interface Board Test.
Proceed with the next step.
6 Use the NEXT key to chose The display will show EVACUATION TEST is not
EVACUATION TEST and press EVACUATION MODE available if the unit is running.
SELECT to load. BATTERY VOLTS and the
battery voltage. If the battery
voltage falls below 13.0 volts a
prompt to connect a battery
charger will appear on the
display.
Page 2

7 All normally closed valves will
be energized to allow the
refrigeration system to be
evacuated efficiently.
8 Start the evacuation pump and
mid-seat the suction service
and receiver tank outlet valves.
9 Install service valve stem caps
with seals and tighten. Valve
stems should remain capped
while evacuating unit.
10 Evacuate the unit to 500
microns.
11 Continue to evacuate for one
additional hour after reaching
500 microns. This insures
complete evacuation of the
remote evaporators and lines.
12 Close the Evacuation Station
valve nearest the vacuum
pump to isolate the pump from
the system. Turn the pump off.
13 Observe vacuum gauge. The system pressure should If the pressure does not hold
remain below 2000 microns for check for leaks (if a leak is
5 minutes. suspected) or continue
evacuation (if system is not
dry).
Page 3

14 Restart the pump, open the
Evacuation Station valve
nearest the pump and repeat
Steps 10, 12 and 13 as
required until system pressure
remains below 2000 microns
for 5 minutes.
15 When system pressure Do not exercise the service
remains below 2000 microns valves with the unit in a deep
for 5 minutes, restart the pump, vacuum unless the evacuation
open the Evacuation Station pump is operating.
valve nearest the pump and
back seat the suction service
valve while the evacuation
pump is still operating.
Replace the valve cap, re-close
the Evacuation Station valve
"D" (nearest the pump) and
stop the evacuation pump.
Page 4
CHARGING THE SYSTEM

1 Insure that all compartment Ceiling mounted bulkheads
bulkheads are down or open. should not be stored close to
the evaporator outlets as this
will restrict airflow.
2 Determine the correct charge This information is shown in the
for the unit as configured. Maintenance Manual for the
unit. Actual weight of charge
may vary somewhat due to
length of refrigerant lines.
3 The unit should still be in
Evacuation Mode. Add as
much of the charge as possible
as liquid through the discharge
service valve and receiver
outlet valve.
4 Back seat and crack the
discharge service valve.
5 Back seat the receiver outlet
service valve.
6 Crack the Suction Service
Valve.
7 Exit Evacuation Mode by
pressing the EXIT key.
8 Turn all zones on and set all
zone setpoints for the lowest
possible temperature to insure
that all zones run in Cool
Mode. Allow the unit to start.
Page 5

9 Cover the condenser as
required to maintain discharge
pressure from 325 PSIG to 400
PSIG and add the remaining
charge by weight as liquid
through the Suction Service
Valve.
10 If necessary, continue to add If the system is overcharged,
refrigerant until the ball in the remove refrigerant until the ball
receiver tank sight glass is in the receiver tank sight glass
floating but is no higher than ½ is floating but is no higher than
way up the glass. ½ way up the glass.
11 Continue to operate the unit
and monitor the sight glass
until all compartment
temperatures are at or below
0°F (-18°C).
12 If the receiver tank sight glass
level drops add additional
refrigerant as required to
maintain refrigerant in the
bottom ½ of the sight glass.
13 When refrigerant level is
correct back seat all service
valves, remove gauges and
securely replace valve stem
covers with seals and service
port caps before returning unit
to service.
Page 6
CHECKING THE REFRIGERANT CHARGE

1 Insure that all compartment Ceiling mounted bulkheads
bulkheads are open. should not be stored close to
the evaporator outlets as this
will restrict airflow.
2 Turn all zones on and set all
zone setpoints for the lowest
possible temperature to insure
that all zones run in Cool
Mode. Allow the unit to start.
3 Cover the condenser as
required to maintain the
discharge pressure from 325
psig to 400 psig.
4 If necessary, add refrigerant If the system is overcharged,
until the ball in the receiver remove refrigerant until the ball
tank sight glass is floating but in the receiver tank sight glass
is no higher than ½ way up the is floating but is no higher than
glass. ½ way up the glass.
5 Continue to operate the unit
and monitor the sight glass
until all compartment
temperatures are at or below
0°F (-18°C).
6 If the receiver tank sight glass
level drops add additional
refrigerant as required to
maintain refrigerant in the
bottom ½ of the sight glass.
Page 7

7 When refrigerant level is
correct back seat all service
valves, remove gauges and
securely replace valve stem
covers with seals and service
port caps before returning unit
to service.
NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the normal operating
Page 8
Title: LOW SIDE PUMPDOWN TEST
Where Used: All SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp applications
Purpose: To perform a low side pumpdown on an SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp refrigeration system to test
internal seals.
LOW SIDE PUMPDOWN

1 Attach gauge set.
2 Set all zone setpoints for the
lowest possible temperature to
insure that all zones run in Cool
Mode.
3 Start and run all zones in Cool Failure to operate unit to
Mode for 10 minutes. normal temperature and
Discharge pressure should be pressure may yield unreliable
greater than 325 psig with results.
R-502/R-404a.
4 Front seat the receiver tank Note: The unit will shut down
outlet valve and perform a low after 3 minutes of operation
side pumpdown to a 20 - 25 with suction pressure less than
inch vacuum. –10 psig.
5 Shut the unit down and If low side pressure does not
observe gauges. The low side hold check: Receiver Tank
should not rise above a 15 inch Outlet Valve, Hot Gas
vacuum in less than 2 minutes. Solenoids in all zones, Purge
Solenoid and the compressor
valve plates.
6 If low side pressure holds
proceed with desired test.
Page 1
Page 2
SR-2 SPECTRUM Refrigeration Service Procedure R03
A
Title: O
HT G
AS SOLENOID TEST
Purpose: To test the Hot Gas Solenoid on an SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp refrigeration system.

1 Attach gauge set.
Mode.
3 Start and run all zones in Cool
Mode for 10 minutes.
Discharge pressure should be
greater than 325 psig with
R-502/R-404a.
side pumpdown to a 20 - 25 with suction pressure less than
inch vacuum. –10 psig.
observe gauges. The low side hold check: Hot Gas Solenoids
should not rise above a 15 inch in all zones, Purge Solenoid
vacuum in less than 2 minutes. and the compressor valve
If low side pressure holds plates.
proceed with desired test.
6 Enter the Maintenance Menu The display will show
as shown in Section 4 of the MAINTENANCE MENU and
SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp HOURMETERS.
Page 1
A
ACTION RESULTS COMMENTS

7 Use the NEXT key to chose The display will show
INTERFACE BOARD TEST PREHEAT RELAY and gauge
and press SELECT to load. information.
8 Press the NEXT key to choose The display will show ZONE 1
ZONE 1 HOT GAS HOT GAS SOLENOID and
SOLENOID. gauge information.
9 Press the TEMP ON key. The The low side gauge should
display will show ZONE 1 HOT rise. If low side pressure does
GAS SOLENOID ON for about not rise check the Hot Gas
3 seconds. Solenoid for Zone 1.
It may be necessary to repeat
steps 3 and 4 to pump down
the low side before proceeding.
display will show ZONE 2 HOT rise. If low side pressure does
GAS SOLENOID ON for about not rise check the Hot Gas
3 seconds. Solenoid for Zone 2. If the low
side pressure rises proceed
with test.
12 If the unit is equipped with 3 The display will show ZONE 3 If a third zone or parallel
zones or parallel evaporators, HOT GAS SOLENOID and evaporators are not present
press the NEXT key to choose gauge information. proceed with step 14.
ZONE 3 HOT GAS
SOLENOID.
Page 2
A

13 Press the TEMP ON key. The The low side gauge should It may be necessary to repeat
display will show ZONE 3 HOT rise. If low side pressure does steps 3 and 4 to pump down
GAS SOLENOID ON for about not rise check the Hot Gas the low side before proceeding.
3 seconds. Solenoid for Zone 3. If the low
with test.
14 Exit the Interface Board Test by
15 If no further testing is required
remove gauges, backseat all
service valves and securely
replace valve stem covers with
seals and service port caps
before returning unit to service.
Page 3
A
Page 4
Title: LIQUID LINE SOLENOID and LIQUID RETURN CHECK VALVE TEST
Purpose: To test the Liquid Line Solenoid on an SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp refrigeration system.

1 Attach gauge set.
Mode.
Mode for 10 minutes.
Discharge pressure should be
greater than 325 psig with
R-502/R-404a.
side pumpdown to 20 - 25 inch with suction pressure less than
vacuum. –10 psig.
5 Shut the unit down and If the low side pressure does
observe gauges. The low side not hold check: Receiver Tank
If the low side pressure holds Solenoid and the compressor
proceed with desired test. valve plates.
Page 1

Open receiver tank outlet valve The low side should not rise. If Leaking Liquid Return Check
6 and observe gauges. If the low low side pressure does not Valves will cause cooling
side pressure holds proceed hold check: Liquid Line problems. Leaking Liquid Line
with test. Solenoids & Liquid Return Solenoids may allow cooling
Check Valves in all zones. during null operation.
ZONE 1 LIQUID LINE LIQUID LINE SOLENOID and
display will show ZONE 1 rise. If low side pressure does
LIQUID LINE SOLENOID ON not rise check the Liquid Line
for about 3 seconds. Solenoid for Zone 1.
ZONE 2 LIQUID LINE LIQUID LINE SOLENOID and
LIQUID LINE SOLENOID ON not rise check the Liquid Line
for about 3 seconds. Solenoid for Zone 2. If the low
with test.
Page 2

zones or parallel evaporators, LIQUID LINE SOLENOID and evaporators are not present
ZONE 3 LIQUID LINE
SOLENOID.
LIQUID SOLENOID ON for not rise check the Liquid Line
about 3 seconds. Solenoid for Zone 3. If the low
with test.
Page 3
Page 4
Title: SUCTION LINE CHECK VALVES & CONDENSER INLET CHECK VALVES TESTS
Purpose: To test the Suction Line Check Valves and Condenser Inlet Check Valves on an SR-2 SPECTRUM
Multi-Temp refrigeration system.

1 Attach gauge set.
Mode.
Mode for 10 minutes or until
stable - discharge pressure
should be greater than 325
psig with R-502/R-404a.
vacuum. –10 psig.
5 Shut the unit down and If the low side pressure does
observe gauges. The low side not hold check: Receiver Tank
If the low side pressure holds Solenoid and the compressor
6 Front seat the Bypass Service
Valve on the receiver tank.
Page 1

7 Bleed through the gauge
manifold to the low side and
establish a pressure of 5 - 20
psig. Close the hand valves on
the gauge set.
8 Observe the low pressure If the pressure drops within 2
gauge. minutes check the Suction Line
Check Valves for leaks under
low pressure.
9 If the low side pressure holds
for 2 minutes proceed with test.
10 Equalize the system through
the gauge manifold to the low
side. Close the hand valves on
the gauge set.
11 Observe the low pressure If pressure drops within 2
gauge. minutes check the Suction Line
Check Valves for leaks under
and high pressure.
Observe high pressure gauge. If pressure increases within 2

minutes the Condenser Inlet
Check Valve is leaking or the
Bypass Service Valve on
receiver tank is open or
leaking.
12 If the pressure holds for 2
minutes proceed with test.
Page 2

16 Press the TEMP ON key. The The high side gauge should
display will show ZONE 1 HOT fall. If high side pressure does
GAS SOLENOID ON for about not fall check the Suction Line
3 seconds. Check Valve for Zone 1. If the
high side pressure does fall
proceed with test.
17 Crack the Bypass Service This is necessary to provide
Valve on the receiver tank to adequate pressure for the next
charge the high side to no test.
more than the pressure shown
on the low side gauge. Do not
exceed the pressure shown on
the low side gauge. Front seat
the Bypass Service Valve.
proceed with test.
Page 3

20 If the unit is equipped with 3 If a third zone or parallel
zones or parallel evaporators, evaporators are not present
crack the Bypass Service Valve proceed with step 23.
on the receiver tank to charge
the high side to no more than
the pressure shown on the low
side gauge. Do not exceed the
pressure shown on the low
side gauge. Front seat the
valve.
proceed with test.
Page 4
Title: PURGE VALVE TEST
Purpose: To test the Purge Valve on an SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp refrigeration system.

1 Attach gauge set.
Mode.
vacuum. –10 psig.
If low side pressure holds Solenoid and the compressor
Page 1

8 Press the NEXT key to choose The display will show PURGE
PURGE VALVE. VALVE and gauge information.
display will show PURGE rise. If low side pressure does
VALVE ON for about 3 not rise check the Purge Valve.
seconds.
Page 2
Title: CONDENSER INLET SOLENOID, RECEIVER PRESSURE TANK SOLENOID &

PURGE CHECK VALVE TEST
Purpose: To test the Condenser Inlet Solenoid, Receiver Pressure Tank Solenoid and Purge Check Valve on an
SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp refrigeration system.
Important: This test will require the removal of some refrigerant using a recovery machine

1 Attach gauge set.
2 Attach a recovery machine to
the receiver outlet service valve
port using a manifold gauge set
to allow monitoring receiver
tank pressure.
Mode.
vacuum. –10 psig.
Page 1

If low side pressure holds Solenoid and the compressor
Test
7 Front seat the Bypass Service
Valve on receiver tank.
10 Press the NEXT key to choose The display will show
CONDENSER INLET CONDENSER INLET
SOLENOID. SOLENOID and gauge
information.
11 Press the LOCK ON key. The The Condenser Inlet Solenoid The Condenser Inlet Solenoid
display will show is energized (the valve is will remain energized (closed)
CONDENSER INLET SOL closed). for a maximum 15 minute
LOCKED ON. timeout – if the test time is
expected to exceed 15 minutes
this step must be repeated
about every ten minutes to
prevent timeout.
Page 2

12 Start the recovery machine to If high side pressure does not
remove refrigerant from the hold check the Condenser Inlet
condenser and receiver tank Solenoid.
and observe the high side
gauge. The pressure should
not change.
13 If the high side pressure holds
proceed with the test.

Receiver Tank Pressure
Solenoid Test
14 Backseat the Bypass Service If the high side pressure does
Valve on the Receiver Tank not hold check the Receiver
and observe the high side Tank Pressure Solenoid.
gauge. The pressure should
not change.
15 If the high side pressure holds
16 Use a jumper wire to jump the If the high side pressure does
RTPS wire at the Receiver not fall check the Receiver
Tank Pressure Solenoid to +12 Tank Pressure Solenoid.
Vdc for at least ½ second and
observe the high side gauge.
The pressure should fall.
Page 3

17 If the high side pressure falls
18 Press the UNLOCK key to de- Observe high side gauge. The
energize the Condenser Inlet pressure should fall. If the high
Solenoid side pressure does not fall
check the Condenser Inlet
Solenoid.
19 If the high side pressure falls
Purge Check Valve Test
20 The CONDENSER INLET The display will show
SOLENOID should still be CONDENSER INLET
shown in the display. SOLENOID and gauge
information.
21 Press the LOCK ON key. The The Condenser Inlet Solenoid The Condenser Inlet Solenoid
display will show is energized (the valve is will remain energized (closed)
CONDENSER INLET SOL closed). for a maximum 15 minute
LOCKED ON. timeout – if the test time is
expected to exceed 15 minutes
this step must be repeated
about every ten minutes to
prevent timeout.
22 Pressurize the low side of the If the receiver tank pressure
system using the refrigerant changes check the Purge
recovered earlier and observe Check Valve.
the Receiver Tank Pressure
Gauge. The pressure should
not change.
Page 4

Page 5
Page 6
Title: SERVICE PUMPDOWN
Purpose: To perform a service pumpdown on an SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp refrigeration system to allow
service of all low side components, compressor, discharge manifold, discharge vibrasorber, receiver tank
pressure solenoid, condenser inlet solenoid and purge check valve.
LOW SIDE PUMPDOWN

1 Attach gauge set.
Mode.
stable.
vacuum. –10 psig.
5 Front seat the receiver tank
bypass service valve.
Page 1

6 Shut the unit down and If low side pressure holds
observe gauges. The low side proceed with desired test. If
should not rise above a 15 inch low side pressure does not
vacuum in less than 2 minutes. hold check: Receiver Tank
Outlet Valve, Hot Gas
Solenoids in all zones, Purge
Solenoid and the compressor
valve plates.
10 Press the TEMP ON key. The The low side gauge should This increases the pressure in
display will show ZONE 1 HOT rise. If low side pressure does Zone 1 evaporator and checks
GAS SOLENOID ON for about not rise check the Hot Gas the opening of the Zone 1 Hot
3 seconds. Solenoid for Zone 1. Continue Gas Solenoid. If pressure does
to press the TEMP ON key until not rise check the Zone 1 Hot
the low side pressure is slightly Gas Solenoid.
above 0 psig.
Page 2

3 seconds. Solenoid for Zone 2. If the low Gas Solenoid. If pressure does
side pressure rises proceed not rise check the Zone 2 Hot
with test. Gas Solenoid.
zones or parallel evaporators, HOT GAS SOLENOID and evaporators are not present
ZONE 3 HOT GAS
SOLENOID.
3 seconds. Solenoid for Zone 3. If the low Gas Solenoid. If pressure does
side pressure rises proceed not rise check the Zone 3 Hot
with test. Gas Solenoid.
15 Before opening the system for
service repeat steps 8 through
14 to ensure that all pressures
are balanced.
16 If all zones are slightly greater If the low side pressure can not
than 0 psig, work can proceed be maintained below 15 psig,
on low side components, the refrigerant must be
compressor, discharge recovered as shown in
manifold, discharge Refrigeration Service
vibrasorber, receiver tank Procedure R10A before
pressure solenoid, condenser opening the system.
inlet solenoid and purge check
valve.
Page 3

17 When service is complete
perform a low side evacuation
per Refrigeration Service
Procedure R11A, backseat all
service valves, remove gauges
and securely replace valve
stem covers with seals and
service port caps before
returning unit to service.
Page 4
Title: MULTI-TEMPERATURE REFRIGERANT RECOVERY
Purpose: To recover the refrigerant charge from an SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp refrigeration system.
positions before performing another Refrigeration Service Procedure.
RECOVERING REFRIGERANT FROM A UNIT

WITH AN OPERATING COMPRESSOR
1 Connect recovery machine for
recovery from discharge
service valve and receiver tank
outlet valve.
2 If the compressor is operable,
perform a low side pumpdown
per Refrigeration Service
Procedure R02A.
3 Recover the liquid refrigerant
from the receiver tank.
4 Midseat the suction service
and receiver tank outlet valve.
5 Connect the unit battery and This will maintain the charge Service Test Mode is used to
install battery charger on level of the battery during the open valves as required for
battery. The battery charger time required to evacuate and evacuation. Failure to connect
must be capable of at least 15 charge the unit. a battery charger may result in
amperes output. the battery voltage falling too
low to operate reliably.
Page 1

7 TIMESAVER: Evacuation Test
display.
10 Continue to recover the
refrigerant as a vapor from all
three points.
Page 2
RECOVERING REFRIGERANT FROM A UNIT

WITH AN INOPERATIVE COMPRESSOR
1 Connect recovery machine for
recovery from suction service
valve and discharge service
valve.
2 Mid-seat the suction service
valve and discharge service
valve.
3 Connect the unit battery and This will maintain the charge Service Test Mode is used to
install battery charger on level of the battery during the open valves as required for
battery. The battery charger time required to evacuate and evacuation. Failure to connect
must be capable of at least 15 charge the unit. a battery charger may result in
amperes output. the battery voltage falling too
low to operate reliably.
5 TIMESAVER: Evacuation Test
Page 3

display.
8 Continue to recover the
refrigerant as a vapor from all
three points.
positions before performing another Refrigeration Service Procedure.
Page 4
Section 9 – SR-2 SPECTRUM Drawings
Table of Contents – Section 9
SPECTRUM SB SR2 Schematic Diagram (NAD Manuals Only)

1E34219 Rev B
SPECTRUM SB SR2 Wiring Diagram (NAD Manuals Only)

1E34218 Rev B
Changes and Comments
01 February 2007
01 February 2007
CHANGES AND COMMENTS
You are invited to comment on this manual so it can be updated and improved to better meet
your needs. Any corrections or comments are welcome. Please complete the following
information:
Manual Form Number _______________________________________________________
Section and Page # ________________________________________________________
Your Name _______________________________________________________________
Company Name ___________________________________________________________
Phone Number __________________________________________________________
Corrections and Comments __________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
Return to: THERMO KING CORPORATION

314 West 90th Street
Mail Stop 38
Minneapolis, MN 55420
Attn: Service Department
01 February 2007
01 February 2007

SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Microprocessor Control System (TK 53080-2-OD) PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Microprocessor Control System (TK 53080-2-OD) PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Microprocessor Control System (TK 53080-2-OD) PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

THERMO KING

SR-2 SPECTRUM Multi-Temp

Used on: SPECTRUM SB

Controller Software Revision C000

HMI Control Panel Software Revision 6510, 6610 or 6710

Copyright © 2007 Thermo King Corp. - Minneapolis, MN, USA

No warranties, express or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose or

Controller Software Revision C000

x Section 1 - Safety information

x Section 2 - Hardware Description

x Section 3 - Software Description

x Section 6 - Service Procedures

x Section 7 - Service Information

x Section 8 – Refrigeration Service Information, Service Procedures and

x Section 9 – Schematics and Wiring Diagrams

x Any time a graded sensor is replaced it must be calibrated as shown in Service

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 1

General Practices .....................................................................................................................................................3

10. Use caution when working with refrigerant in a

8. Use extreme caution when drilling holes in the

We strictly adhere to a policy that promotes the

Precautions must be taken to prevent electrostatic

1. When working on high voltage circuits, do not

Do not wear jewelry, watches or rings when working

Some SR-2 electronic components are connected

TABLE OF CONTENTS - SECTION 2

SPECTRUM Multi-Temp Block Diagram – 1 of 2 .................................................................................................. 5

Interface Board Connector Usage.................................................................................................................... 27

Magnetic Reed Switch ................................................................................................................................... 46

SPECTRUM MULTI-TEMP BLOCK DIAGRAM – 1 OF 2

CONTROL DEVICES SR2 SENSORS

CAN TO SR-2 MULTI-TEMP

SPECTRUM MULTI-TEMP BLOCK DIAGRAM – 2 OF 2

CAN TO SR-2 INTERFACE

If the unit is not a DE unit, Zone 2 (and Zone 3, if

IMPORTANT: When replacing a base controller,

Multi-Temp Base Controller Software = C0xx

The base controller label color will identify which

ASS'Y P/N: 1E19308G01

ASS'Y P/N: 1E19311G01

CONTROL COMPONENTS SB SERIES CONTROLS

For multi-temp applications an expansion module, THERMO KING

network (CAN) communication connection. The OFF

expansion module provides the inputs and outputs

System conditions are displayed and operator

SLX SERIES CONTROLS BASE CONTROLLER ON/OFF

SLX Series Units

Outputs are protected by either a fuse or smart FET

A polyswitch provides overcurrent protection for the

SR-2 HMI CONTROL PANEL

The real time clock is located in the HMI Control

HMI Control Panel

Clock Power unit is turned on. If the HMI Control Panel is

SR2 HMI Control Panel Connector Maps

HMI Control Panel J1 Connector – shown from pin side

SR-2 BASE CONTROLLER Base Controller Operation

Base Controller Hardware Versions

ASS'Y P/N: 1E19308G01

2 Real Time Clock